OptSim Models Reference Volume I Sample PDF

OptSim
Models Reference
Volume I Sample Mode
RSoft Design Group, Inc.
Physical Layer Division

400 Executive Boulevard, Suite 100
Ossining, NY 10562
Phone: 914-923-2164
Fax: 914-923-2169
E-mail: info@rsoftdesign.com
Web: www.rsoftdesign.com
OptSim
 1989 – 2010 RSoft Design Group. – All rights reserved.
www.rsoftdesign.com
Build OS0521010
This manual contains confidential and proprietary information regarding
products of RSoft Design Group. The manual is intended solely for use by
authorized OptSim users, who have in effect a License for the OptSim product
(under the License Agreement conditions) and the information contained
herein may not be used or disclosed to others except by written permission of
RSoft Design Group. No part of this document may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, mechanical or electronic, including
photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of RSoft Design Group.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does
not represent a commitment on the part of RSoft Design Group. The software
described in this document is furnished under a License Agreement and may
be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software copying is against the law except as specifically allowed in the
license agreement.
Trademarks
Artifex, OptSim, ModeSYS, NetworkDesigner are trademarks of RSoft Design
Group and its subsidiaries.
All other products and companies mentioned herein are trademarks of their
respective owners.
Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
1.1 How to Utilize the Components............................................................................................3
1.1.1 Connection ...........................................................................................................5
1.2 Multi Input-Output Components ..........................................................................................5
1.3 Logical Signal Levels ..........................................................................................................5
1.4 Center Frequency Requirements ..........................................................................................6
1.5 Time Domain Samples........................................................................................................7
1.6 Electric Clock Signal Information .........................................................................................8
2 Optical Sources ..................................................................................................... 9

2.1 Laser .............................................................................................................................11
2.1.1 CW Lorentzian Laser ............................................................................................12
2.1.2 Rate Equations Laser............................................................................................13
2.1.3 Custom MQW Laser..............................................................................................21
2.1.4 Custom MQW Laser File Grammar..........................................................................31
2.1.5 VCSEL ................................................................................................................35
2.2 Optical Pulse Generator ....................................................................................................47
2.2.1 Soliton ...............................................................................................................48
2.2.2 Raised Cosine......................................................................................................49
2.2.3 Supergaussian.....................................................................................................50
2.3 Optical White Noise Generator...........................................................................................52
3 Electrical Sources................................................................................................ 55
3.1 Electrical Waveform Generator ..........................................................................................57
3.1.1 Bias Signal Generator...........................................................................................57
3.1.2 Sinusoidal Wave Signal Generator .........................................................................58
3.1.3 Sawtooth Wave Signal Generator...........................................................................59
3.1.4 Square Wave Signal Generator ..............................................................................59
3.1.5 Clock Signal Generator .........................................................................................60
3.2 Ideal Clock Generator with Continuous Time Resolution........................................................62
3.3 Impulse Generator...........................................................................................................63
3.4 Clock Signal Voltage-Controlled Generator ..........................................................................64
3.5 Voltage Controlled Oscillator .............................................................................................66
3.6 Timing Pulse Generation on Zero Crossing ..........................................................................67
3.7 Electrical Noise Generator.................................................................................................68
3.7.1 Gaussian-distributed Noise Signal Generator ...........................................................68
3.7.2 Rayleigh-distributed Noise Signal Generator............................................................69
3.7.3 Uniform-distributed Noise Signal Generator ............................................................69
3.7.4 Video-Like distributed Noise Signal Generator .........................................................69
4 Logical Sources ................................................................................................... 71

4.1 Data Source....................................................................................................................72
4.1.1 Bit Sequence File Grammar...................................................................................74
4.2 Logical Clock Generator ....................................................................................................76
Contents
5 Record&Playback ................................................................................................ 77
5.1 Optical Playback ..............................................................................................................78
5.2 Optical Recorder ..............................................................................................................80
5.3 Electrical Playback ...........................................................................................................81
5.4 Electrical Recorder ...........................................................................................................82
5.5 Logical Playback ..............................................................................................................83
5.6 Logical Recorder ..............................................................................................................85
6 Optical Transmitters ........................................................................................... 87

6.1 NRZ Standard Transmitter ................................................................................................88
6.2 Four Channel NRZ Standard Transmitter.............................................................................89
6.3 2DPSK Transmitter ..........................................................................................................91
6.4 16-Channel 2DPSK Transmitter .........................................................................................92
6.5 References......................................................................................................................94
7 Fibers .......................................................................................................... 95
7.1 Optical Fiber Link.............................................................................................................96
7.1.1 Loss Section...................................................................................................... 100
7.1.2 Dispersion Section ............................................................................................. 102
7.1.3 Grammar for Fiber Files...................................................................................... 103
7.1.4 Statistical Dispersion Section .............................................................................. 106
7.1.5 Advanced Effects Section.................................................................................... 108
7.1.6 Raman Effect Section ......................................................................................... 110
7.1.7 SBS Section ...................................................................................................... 118
7.2 References.................................................................................................................... 124
8 Optical Modulators ............................................................................................ 125

8.1 Amplitude Dual-Arm Mach-Zehnder Modulator................................................................... 126
8.2 Amplitude Modulator ...................................................................................................... 130
8.2.1 Sin2 Amplitude Modulator ................................................................................... 131
8.2.2 Linear Amplitude Modulator ................................................................................ 134
8.3 Electro Absorption Modulator........................................................................................... 136
8.3.1 Linear .............................................................................................................. 137
8.3.2 Custom ............................................................................................................ 139
8.4 Optical Phase Modulator ................................................................................................. 141
8.5 Polarization Modulator .................................................................................................... 143
8.6 References.................................................................................................................... 145
9 Optical Amplifiers.............................................................................................. 147

9.1 Optical Amplifier ............................................................................................................ 148
9.1.1 Fixed Gain ........................................................................................................ 149
9.1.2 Saturable Gain .................................................................................................. 150
9.1.3 Fixed Output Power............................................................................................ 153
9.1.4 Physical Model................................................................................................... 154
9.1.5 How to Choose EDFA Simulation Models ............................................................... 155
9.1.6 Optical Amplifier Description Files ........................................................................ 156
9.1.7 How to Choose SPT Bandwidth for EDFA Noise Simulation ...................................... 157
9.1.8 EDFA Noise Figures ............................................................................................ 158
9.1.9 EDFA Physical Model: Parameter Conversion ......................................................... 158
9.2 Semiconductor Optical Amplifier ...................................................................................... 159
9.3 Reference ..................................................................................................................... 164
10 Optical Filters .......................................................................................... 165

10.1 Optical Filter ................................................................................................................. 166
10.1.1 Multiple-Stage Lorentzian ................................................................................... 166
10.1.2 Raised Cosine.................................................................................................... 168
10.1.3 Supergaussian................................................................................................... 169
10.1.4 Bessel .............................................................................................................. 170
ii • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

Contents
10.1.5 User-defined Optical Filter .................................................................................. 170

10.2 References.................................................................................................................... 179
11 Photodetectors .......................................................................................... 181

11.1 Photodiode.................................................................................................................... 182
11.1.1 PIN Photodiode.................................................................................................. 182
11.1.2 APD Photodiode................................................................................................. 183
11.2 References.................................................................................................................... 186
12 Receivers .......................................................................................... 187

12.1 Sensitivity Optical Receiver ............................................................................................. 188
12.1.1 Notes on BER semi-analytic techniques ................................................................ 193
12.2 Binary POLSK Receiver (pol2rx)....................................................................................... 196
12.3 Ideal Balanced 2DPSK Receiver ....................................................................................... 198
12.4 Single Channel Optical Receiver (RX_1ch)......................................................................... 199
12.5 N-Channels WDM Optical Receiver (RX_Nch)..................................................................... 200
12.6 2DPSK Receiver............................................................................................................. 201
12.7 16-Channel 2DPSK Receiver............................................................................................ 202
12.8 References.................................................................................................................... 203
13 Modulator Drivers .......................................................................................... 205

13.1 Driver .......................................................................................................................... 206
13.1.1 NRZ Rectangular ............................................................................................... 206
13.1.2 NRZ Raised Cosine............................................................................................. 206
13.1.3 RZ Rectangular.................................................................................................. 207
13.1.4 RZ Raised Cosine............................................................................................... 208
13.1.5 RZ Supergaussian.............................................................................................. 209
13.1.6 RZ Soliton......................................................................................................... 209
13.2 Binary POLSK Driver ...................................................................................................... 211
13.3 References.................................................................................................................... 212
14 RF Mo-Demodulators........................................................................................ 213
14.1 Analog Amplitude Modulator............................................................................................ 216
14.2 Coherent Amplitude Demodulator .................................................................................... 217
14.3 Frequency Modulator...................................................................................................... 218
14.4 Frequency Demodulator.................................................................................................. 219
14.5 Analog Phase Modulator ................................................................................................. 220
14.6 Phase Demodulator........................................................................................................ 221
14.7 Phase Detector .............................................................................................................. 221
14.8 Electrical Envelope......................................................................................................... 222
14.9 PSK Digital Modulator..................................................................................................... 223
14.10 PSK Modulator with Residual Carrier ........................................................................... 224
14.11 PSK Coherent Demodulator........................................................................................ 225
14.12 Offset-PSK Modulator Parallel Input ............................................................................ 226
14.13 Offset-PSK Demodulator Parallel Input ........................................................................ 227
14.14 Differential PSK Modulator ......................................................................................... 228
14.15 Differential PSK Demodulator ..................................................................................... 229
14.16 M-QAM Modulator ..................................................................................................... 230
14.17 M-QAM Demodulator................................................................................................. 231
14.18 Duobinary MSK Modulator.......................................................................................... 232
14.19 Duobinary MSK Demodulator ..................................................................................... 233
14.20 FSK Modulator with Continuous Phase ......................................................................... 234
14.21 FSK Demodulator with Continuous Phase..................................................................... 235
14.22 Binary Pulse Amplitude Demodulator........................................................................... 236
14.23 Differential MSK Demodulator .................................................................................... 237
RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • iii

Contents
14.24 Demod-Remod Coherent Tracking Receiver.................................................................. 238
15 Electrical Amplifiers ......................................................................................... 241

15.1 Electrical Gain ............................................................................................................... 242
15.2 Electrical Amplifier ......................................................................................................... 243
15.2.1 50 Ohm............................................................................................................ 243
15.2.2 User-Defined..................................................................................................... 245
15.3 References.................................................................................................................... 248
16 Electrical Filters .......................................................................................... 249

16.1 Electrical Filter .............................................................................................................. 250
16.1.1 Single-Pole Lowpass........................................................................................... 250
16.1.2 Two-Pole Lowpass ............................................................................................. 251
16.1.3 Butterworth ...................................................................................................... 255
16.1.4 Bessel .............................................................................................................. 259
16.1.5 Chebychev........................................................................................................ 263
16.1.6 Matched ........................................................................................................... 267
16.1.7 Raised Cosine Electrical Filter .............................................................................. 269
16.1.8 User-defined Electrical Filter................................................................................ 271
16.2 References.................................................................................................................... 275
17 Mux / Demux .......................................................................................... 277

17.1 Two Input Multiplexer .................................................................................................... 278
17.2 Clock Driven two Input Multiplexer................................................................................... 278
17.3 Two Output Demultiplexer .............................................................................................. 279
17.4 Clock Driven two Output Demultiplexer ............................................................................ 279
17.5 Multiplexer Between two Logical Signals ........................................................................... 280
17.6 Multiplexer Between two Logical Signals Controlled by a Clock ............................................ 281
18 Optical Network Components ........................................................................... 283

18.1 Ideal Optical Switch ....................................................................................................... 284
18.2 Realistic Optical Switch................................................................................................... 287
18.3 Optical Cross Connector ................................................................................................. 289
18.4 Optical Circulator ........................................................................................................... 292
18.5 Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (OADM)............................................................................... 292
18.6 Optical Demultiplexer ..................................................................................................... 294
18.7 Optical Multiplexer ......................................................................................................... 296
18.8 WC-XGM Wavelength Converter ...................................................................................... 298
18.9 WC-XPM Wavelength Converter ....................................................................................... 300
19 Optical Components ......................................................................................... 303

19.1 Optical Attenuator ......................................................................................................... 304
19.2 Optical Coupler.............................................................................................................. 305
19.3 Splice........................................................................................................................... 306
19.4 Fiber Grating................................................................................................................. 307
19.4.1 Ideal ................................................................................................................ 307
19.4.2 User-defined ..................................................................................................... 308
19.5 All-order PMD................................................................................................................ 309
19.6 Optical Frequency Shifter................................................................................................ 312
19.7 Optical Phase Conjugator................................................................................................ 313
19.8 Polarization Rotator ....................................................................................................... 314
19.9 Polarization Scrambler.................................................................................................... 315
19.10 Polarizer .................................................................................................................. 316
19.11 Deterministic Differential Group Delay......................................................................... 318
19.12 Ideal Dual-arm Mach-Zehnder Interferometer .............................................................. 320
19.13 References............................................................................................................... 322
iv • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

Contents
20 Links .......................................................................................... 323

20.1 Optical Link................................................................................................................... 324
20.2 Electrical Link................................................................................................................ 324
20.3 Logical Link................................................................................................................... 324
21 Split&Combine .......................................................................................... 325

21.1 Optical Combiner ........................................................................................................... 326
21.2 Optical Splitter .............................................................................................................. 327
21.3 Electrical Combiner ........................................................................................................ 327
21.4 Electrical Splitter ........................................................................................................... 328
21.5 Logical Splitter .............................................................................................................. 328
22 Measurement Components ............................................................................... 329

22.1 Optical Power Meter ....................................................................................................... 331
22.2 Optical Spectrum Analyzer .............................................................................................. 332
22.3 Optical Probe ................................................................................................................ 333
22.4 Electrical Scope ............................................................................................................. 334
22.5 Electrical Power Meter .................................................................................................... 336
22.6 Q Estimator .................................................................................................................. 337
22.7 BER Estimator ............................................................................................................... 341
22.7.1 BER evaluation technical details........................................................................... 345
22.8 Electrical Spectrum Analyzer ........................................................................................... 347
22.9 Scattering Diagram Generation........................................................................................ 348
22.10 Scattering Diagram Generation (2 inputs).................................................................... 349
22.11 Logical Signals Displayer ........................................................................................... 349
22.12 References............................................................................................................... 350
23 Electrical Components...................................................................................... 351

23.1 Electrical Multiplier......................................................................................................... 355
23.2 Electrical Subtractor....................................................................................................... 355
23.3 Electrical Constant Multiplier ........................................................................................... 355
23.4 Electrical Cosine ............................................................................................................ 356
23.5 Electrical Sine ............................................................................................................... 356
23.6 Electrical Tangent .......................................................................................................... 356
23.7 Electrical Time derivative ................................................................................................ 357
23.8 Electrical Exponential ..................................................................................................... 357
23.9 Electrical Integer Power.................................................................................................. 358
23.10 Electrical Signal Square ............................................................................................. 358
23.11 Electrical Real Power ................................................................................................. 358
23.12 Electrical EinB Power of EinA ...................................................................................... 359
23.13 Electrical Base-10 Logarithm...................................................................................... 359
23.14 Electrical Natural Logarithm ....................................................................................... 360
23.15 Electrical Delay Line.................................................................................................. 360
23.16 Phase Shifter ........................................................................................................... 361
23.17 Frequency Converter................................................................................................. 361
23.18 Electrical Rectifier ..................................................................................................... 362
23.19 Timing Interpolator................................................................................................... 362
23.20 Hilbert Transformer .................................................................................................. 363
23.21 Monostable Multivibrator Triggered by the Electrical Clock ............................................. 363
23.22 Monostable Multivibrator Triggered by a Generic Electrical Signal ................................... 364
23.23 Sampler .................................................................................................................. 364
23.24 Sample & Hold ......................................................................................................... 365
23.25 Frequency Divider..................................................................................................... 365
RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • v

Contents
23.26 Electrical N-th Power................................................................................................. 366

23.27 Electrical Saturation Block ......................................................................................... 367
23.28 Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizer ......................................................................... 369
23.29 Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizer ......................................................................... 371
23.30 In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (1 dimension) ............................................... 374
23.31 In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (2 Dimensions) ............................................. 376
23.32 N-th Order Power Loop for Carrier Synchronization ....................................................... 379
23.33 N-th Order Costas Loop ............................................................................................. 380
23.34 N-Phase Decision Feedback Loop ................................................................................ 382
23.35 Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (1 Dimension) ...................................................... 384
23.36 Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (2 Dimensions)..................................................... 386
23.37 First Order Baseband Phase-Locked Loop..................................................................... 388
23.38 Second Order Baseband Phase-Locked Loop ................................................................ 389
23.39 Base-band Phase Locked Loop.................................................................................... 390
23.40 Derivative-Product Clock Recovery Subsystem ............................................................. 392
23.41 Baseband Rectifier Clock Recovery Subsystem ............................................................. 392
23.42 I-F Rectifier Clock Recovery Subsystem....................................................................... 395
23.43 Zero-Crossing Clock Recovery Subsystem.................................................................... 396
23.44 Electrical Jitter ......................................................................................................... 396
23.45 A/D Conversion (Absolute Value + Sign) ..................................................................... 398
23.46 A/D Conversion (Two's Complement) .......................................................................... 399
23.47 D/A Conversion (Absolute Value + Sign) ..................................................................... 400
23.48 D/A Conversion (Two's Complement) .......................................................................... 400
23.49 PCM Decoding .......................................................................................................... 401
23.50 PCM Encoding .......................................................................................................... 402
24 Logical Components ......................................................................................... 403

24.1 AND, NOT, OR and Exclusive-OR ..................................................................................... 405
24.1.1 AND ................................................................................................................. 405
24.1.2 NOT ................................................................................................................. 405
24.1.3 OR ................................................................................................................... 405
24.1.4 Exclusive-OR..................................................................................................... 405
24.2 Logical Adder (Absolute Value + Sign).............................................................................. 406
24.3 Logical Adder (Two's Complement) .................................................................................. 407
24.4 Modulo 2 Adder ............................................................................................................. 407
24.5 Logical Delay Line .......................................................................................................... 408
24.6 Logical Flip-flop D Type .................................................................................................. 408
24.7 Logical Flip-flop T Type................................................................................................... 409
24.8 Parallel to Serial Conversion............................................................................................ 410
24.9 Parallel to Serial Conversion + Line Encoding .................................................................... 411
24.10 Serial to Parallel Conversion....................................................................................... 413
24.11 Serial to Parallel Conversion with Line Decoding ........................................................... 414
24.12 Change Sign (Absolute Value + Sign).......................................................................... 416
24.13 Change Sign (Two's Complement) .............................................................................. 416
24.14 Logical Copy (4 to -1) ............................................................................................... 417
24.15 Logical Copy ............................................................................................................ 419
24.16 Integer to Logical Signal Conversion (Absolute Value + Sign)......................................... 420
24.17 Integer to Logical Signal Conversion (Two's Complement) ............................................. 420
24.18 Integer to Logical Signal Conversion with Chosen Operating Levels (Two's Complement)... 421
24.19 Integer to Logical Signal Conversion with Chosen Operating Levels (Absolute Value + Sign)
422
24.20 Logical Signal Multiplier (Absolute Value + Sign) .......................................................... 423
vi • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

Contents
24.21 Logical Signal Multiplier (Two's Complement) ............................................................... 423

24.22 Logical Shifter .......................................................................................................... 424
24.23 Circular Shifter ......................................................................................................... 425
24.24 Logical Splitter (1-to-2)............................................................................................. 426
24.27 Logical Retiming with Delay Line................................................................................. 429
25 Older Version Components ............................................................................... 431

25.1 Clock Generator ............................................................................................................ 432
25.2 Electrical Impulse Generator ........................................................................................... 432
25.3 Electrical Waveform Generator - Symmetric Sawtooth........................................................ 433
25.4 Electrical Waveform Generator - Asymmetric Sawtooth ...................................................... 433
25.5 Electrical Square Wave Generator .................................................................................... 434
25.6 Electrical Gaussian Noise Generator ................................................................................. 434
25.7 Non Uniform Pseudorandom Source ................................................................................. 435
26 Compound Components ................................................................................... 436

26.1 Differential Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced ...................................................... 437
26.2 Return-To-Zero Differential Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced ............................... 439
26.3 Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter...................................................... 442
26.4 Return-To-Zero Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter ............................... 445
26.5 Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Receiver - Gaussian .......................................... 448
26.6 Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Receiver – Raised Cosine ................................... 450
27 Additional Components .................................................................................... 452

27.1 LINMMF Multimode Fiber Model ....................................................................................... 454
27.1.1 Linear Multimode Fiber ....................................................................................... 454
27.2 BeamPROP - OptSim interface......................................................................................... 457
27.3 Karhunen-Loeve BER Estimation...................................................................................... 459
27.3.1 Model of the Direct-Detection Optical Receiver ...................................................... 459
27.3.2 Model of Optical Binary Differential Receiver ......................................................... 460
27.3.3 Model of DQPSK Receiver ................................................................................... 462
27.3.4 Brief Description of the Semi-Analytical Technique................................................. 462
27.3.5 Karhunen-Loeve Technique (KLT) ........................................................................ 463
27.4 Optical Matched Filter..................................................................................................... 471
27.5 The Error Counter Block ................................................................................................. 472
27.6 The Q, BER Sync Block ................................................................................................... 473
27.7 SPICE interface for Rate equation laser ............................................................................ 474
27.7.1 Laser modeling.................................................................................................. 474
27.7.2 OptSim rate equation laser ................................................................................. 474
27.7.3 Laser rate equation electrical circuit ..................................................................... 476
27.7.4 Using the Laser SPICE Interface .......................................................................... 481
27.8 Extended library of predefined components....................................................................... 485
27.8.1 Predefined VCSEL Models: .................................................................................. 485
27.8.2 New Predefined Rate Equation Laser Models.......................................................... 487
27.8.3 Saturable Electrical Amplifier............................................................................... 488
27.8.4 Saturable PIN Photodiode ................................................................................... 488
27.8.5 Predefined Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers ............................................................ 489
27.8.6 Predefined Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers ......................................................... 489
27.9 Iteration Loop ............................................................................................................... 490
27.10 DQPSK Precoder ....................................................................................................... 491
27.11 Ideal Electronic Dispersion Compensator (EDC) ............................................................ 492
27.11.1 Ideal electronic dispersion compensator ............................................................ 492
27.12 Trans-Impedance Amplifier ........................................................................................ 493
27.12.1 Trans-Impedance Amplifier.............................................................................. 493
RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • vii

Contents
27.13 M-QAM Modulator ..................................................................................................... 494

27.13.1 M-QAM Modulator Inphase-InQuadrature .......................................................... 494
27.14 M-QAM Demodulator................................................................................................. 496
27.14.1 M-QAM Demodulator Inphase-inQuadrature....................................................... 496
27.15 Quadrature Mix ........................................................................................................ 498
27.15.1 Quadrature Mix Inphase-InQuadrature.............................................................. 498
27.16 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator .............................................. 500
27.16.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid including local oscillator ...................................... 500
27.17 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator with 4+4 Outputs..................... 503
27.17.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid including local oscillator with 4+4 outputs for balanced
photodiode configuration................................................................................................... 503
27.18 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid with Local Oscillator Input ............................................ 506
27.18.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid with local oscillator input..................................... 506
27.19 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid with Local Oscillator Input and 4+4 Outputs ................... 508
27.19.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid with local oscillator input and 4+4 outputs for balanced
photodiode configuration................................................................................................... 508
27.20 FFT OFDM................................................................................................................ 510
27.20.1 FFT OFDM ..................................................................................................... 510
27.21 IFFT OFDM............................................................................................................... 512
27.21.1 IFFT OFDM .................................................................................................... 512
27.22 Memoryless Blind Receiver for Coherent Polarization Multiplexed QPSK Modulation ........... 514
27.22.1 Memoryless blind receiver for coherent polarization multiplexed QPSK modulation . 514
27.23 PM-QPSK LMS Receiver Based on Training Sequence..................................................... 516
27.23.1 Receiver for Coherent Polarization Multiplexed QPSK Modulation Based on Training
Sequence and LMS Algorithm. ........................................................................................... 516
27.24 PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver Training Sequence and Tracking Based ......................... 518
27.24.1 Dynamic Receiver for Coherent Polarization Multiplexed QPSK Modulation Training
Sequence and Tracking Based using LMS Algorithm.............................................................. 518
27.25 MLSE Processor ........................................................................................................ 522
27.25.1 Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation Processor .......................................... 522
27.26 Unbalanced MZM ...................................................................................................... 524
27.26.1 Unbalanced Amplitude Mach-Zehnder Modulator ................................................ 524
27.27 Delay 2 Signals ........................................................................................................ 529
27.27.1 Delay 2 Signals .............................................................................................. 529
Index..................................................................................................................... 531
viii • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

1 Introduction
OptSim has a wide and growing library of components, which are included for
your convenience in the component palette, at the left of the design area.
Several useful description and details on components are reported into the
following sections:
section 1.1 describes how to insert a component and its parameters in a
design
section 1.2 describes how to manage connections for components having
multiple inputs and/or outputs
section 1.3 describes the meaning of the "level" of a logical signal
section 1.4 reports information on the central frequency of a subcarrier
encoded electrical signal
section 1.5 reports information related to the number of samples used to
represent a digital signal
section 1.6 reports information on a particular class of components that
are used to generate timing signals
With the LIB button you can access to the secondary library, which contains
less frequently used components, and all user-defined components. These
components allow you to extend OptSim simulation capability to:
complex modulation formats such as PSK, DPSK, FSK, QAM, as typically
used in CATV applications
carrier and clock recovery for these formats
complex digital and analog signal processing
generation of several signals formats, both deterministic (sinusoidal,
square and sawtooth wave)
systems simulation such as Voltage Controlled Oscillators, Phase Locked
Loops and many others
Introduction
Note
LIB components do not have any control on the parameter ranges. You
should use these components paying attention to the parameter ranges,
which are specified in the component Help pages. While incorrect parameter
values for components belonging to the main library are detected as soon as
the parameters are inserted into a dialog window, they may generate runtime
error when this happens for LIB components.
2 • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

How to Utilize the Components
1.1 How to Utilize the Components

To insert a main component in a design
1. Click on component button in the component palette, then drop it on the
design area.
2. Double click on the icon; a dialog window will appear showing all the
component parameters (Figure 1.1).
Figure 1.1 Example of parameters dialog window
3. Fill in all the values to complete the description of the component.

4. When all the parameters have been inserted, close the dialog window by
clicking on the OK button.
5. Properly draw the connections with other components on the project.
To insert a LIB component in a design

1. Click on the LIB button in the component palette, then drop it on the
design area.
Figure 1.2 The Library Block Selection dialog window
2. Double click on the icon; the following dialog window will appear showing
all the currently available LIB components divided into categories (Figure
1.2).
3. Click on the chosen Category and then on the chosen component in
Blocks; a new dialog window will appear (Figure 1.3) showing all the
component parameters.
RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • 3

Introduction
Figure 1.3 Example of LIB component parameters dialog window
4. Select the parameter to be modified by clicking on the corresponding

name in Parameters then insert the new value for each of the
parameters in the Value field.
5. If the component has any logical inputs or outputs, the logical signal level
is always specified as parameter. See section 1.3 for further information
on logical signal levels.
6. When all the parameters have been inserted, close the dialog window by
clicking on the OK button.
7. Draw the connections with other components on the project; if multiple
input and/or output components are used, see section 1.2.

Multi Input-Output Components
1.1.1 Connection
Different connection types are drawn in different colors depending on the kind
of components they are joined to:
red for optical connections i.e. ideal fiber (thin line) and realistic fiber
(thick line)
blue for electrical connections
black for logical connections
1.2 Multi Input-Output Components

Several components have multiple input or multiple output ports, each
labeled with a symbolic name, in a way similar to what it is done for
components belonging to the main library.
When you connect two components of this kind, the Signal Connection
Properties dialog window appears where you can choose which input and/or
output signal has to be assigned to the current link.
To assign a signal to a link simply click on its name in the list of the dialog
window. When you confirm the operation by clicking on the OK button, in the
design area the selected signal names appear between brackets in a string
near the link.
Note that:
only signals which were not previously assigned are shown in the dialog
by default the first item of the lists are selected when the dialog is
opened: clicking on the OK button without selecting any signal name, the
first item of the lists are assigned to the link
At any time you can change the signal assignment choosing the popup menu
command Signal connection on the link. The Signal Connection Properties
dialog window appears showing the signals that are not yet assigned.
1.3 Logical Signal Levels

Several components can deal with multilevel logical signals, i.e. with signals
carrying N bits in parallel. The number of bits N determines the "level" of a
logical signal, which must always be inserted, whenever required.
Logical connections can only be drawn between two component ports having
the same level, otherwise a warning message is issued.

Introduction
1.4 Center Frequency Requirements

In the OptSim simulation environment, electrical signals are represented as
base-band signals so that, in general, they can have spectral components
starting from the DC up to one half of the BWVBS (VBS simulation bandwidth)
parameter set in the Simulation Parameter dialog window (see the OptSim
User Manual).
In practice, several OptSim LIB components, such as all electrical mo-
demodulators for subcarrier encoded signals like PSK, QAM, etc, require that
subcarrier center frequency lies well inside the simulation bandwidth. In all
this cases, you should choose the simulation bandwidth so that:
Center_frequency < BWVBS / 4
Moreover, these electrical signals must be "narrow bandwidth". This means
that they must have relevant spectral components starting from a minimum
(greater than zero) frequency only.
For all this kind of signals, it is required to specify a central frequency whose
meaning is the center of the spectrum of the narrow-bandwidth signal. For
instance, if we consider a 100 Mb/s modulated electric subcarrier at 1 GHz,
its center frequency is 1 GHz. The situation is schematically represented in
the following picture. In this case, the Simulation Bandwidth should be at
least 4 GHz.
Electrical signal
representation
1 GHz 1/2 f
Simulation
Bandwidth
Figure 1.4 Electrical signal representation

Time Domain Samples
1.5 Time Domain Samples

The time-domain OptSim simulator simulates time-continue signals like
sequences of samples. Sampling time DELT is evaluated referring to the
BWVBS (VBS simulation bandwidth) parameter set in the Simulation Parameter
dialog window (see the OptSim User Manual). The relation is:
0 .8
DELT = [ps]
BWVBS
Usually, sampling related problems are completely transparent, because time
related parameters (such as the period of a square wave) are always
requested in terms of picoseconds, and not in terms of number of samples.
Unfortunately, some LIB components need to have information about timing
in terms of number of samples.
Please, use the previous formula to derive sampling time and the following
one to obtain timing information in terms of number of samples:
 Time[ps ] ⋅ BWVBS [THz ] 

Number _ of _ samples = Nearest_integer  
 0 .8 

Introduction
1.6 Electric Clock Signal Information

Clock signals are a special class of electric signals carrying information about
the time of occurrence of some particular event (e.g. the zero crossing of a
waveform). They are used in OptSim to synchronize some LIB components,
like for example digital demodulators and clock recovery. Typically, all clock
recovery components generate a timing signal of the clock type, which is then
feed to some digital demodulator.
The following conventions hold about the way in which the timing information
is contained in the clock signals. Let DELT be the time interval between two
simulation samples - see section 1.5 for further information on time samples
- and assume that the time of occurrence To of the event lies between two
sampling instants (k-1)*DELT and k*DELT, i.e. T0 = (k-b)*DELT, with 0 < b <
1. Then, at the sampling instant k*DELT (i.e. the sampling instant
immediately following the time of occurrence of the event) the clock signal
contains the value:
X = 1. + b
while it is set to a zero value for other sampling instants.
Usually, clock signals are generated exactly at k*DELT. In this case, the clock
signal is simply equal to 1 at the event instant and equal to zero elsewhere.
Anyway, the general convention previously outlined allows the representation
of events that happen between two sampling instants.
Note
Clock signals are standard electrical signals, and can thus be visualized by
any electrical measurement component.

Electric Clock Signal Information
2 Optical Sources
Lasers
Four Laser models are available:

CW Lorentzian Laser, implements a simplified continuous wave laser
Rate Equations Laser, implements a semiconductor laser based on the Rate Equations; two
sets of predefined models are available: Fabry-Perot and DFB
Custom MQW Laser: implements an SCH MQW semiconductor laser based on the Rate
Equations. Physical laser parameters used in the Rate Equations model are obtained by
fitting laser measured curves, such as PI and AM, supplied by the user.
VCSEL: implements a vertical cavity surface emitting laser model
Pulse Sources
Three Pulse Source models are available:

Soliton Pulse, implements an optical pulse train generator with soliton pulse shape
Raised Cosine Pulse, implements an optical pulse train generator with raised cosine pulse
shape
Supergaussian Pulse, implements an optical pulse train generator with supergaussian
shape

Optical Sources
Noise Sources
White Noise Generator, simulates an optical white noise generator.

Laser
2.1 Laser
This component simulates a laser. The output state of polarization is
aligned with the geometrical x-axis, so as to be compatible with the other
components such as the Polarization Rotator (section 19.8) and the
Polarization Modulator (section 8.5).
Three models have been implemented:
• a simple model considering only the phase noise (CW Lorentzian
Laser)
• a realistic model based on rate equation integration (Rate Equations
Laser)
• a realistic model based on rate equation integration for Separate
Confinement Heterostructure Multi Quantum Well lasers (SCH-MQW)
where physical parameters of the laser can be obtained with a fitting
procedure over experimentally measured curves.
SPT Behavior
Laser sources are considered as if they generated a single tone at the
nominal center emission frequency of the source. Therefore, in the optical
spectrum a single line is placed. Its level is equal to the defined laser output
power. Linewidth is neglected if the CW Lorentzian Laser is selected. For the
Rate Equations Laser and the Custom MQW laser, their output power could be
found only using time-domain simulation. Hence, for SPT simulations, the
user is explicitly requested to supply the output power. If you don’t know the
average output power of the laser we suggest you perform a VBS simulation
of the device only, measure the output power, and then employ the
measured value as SPT parameter for the laser.
Parameters
Name: the optional name that appears in the component label.
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the three laser models, CW
Lorentzian, Rate Equation, Custom MQW.
Laser center emission frequency [nm] or [THz]: the emission frequency
of the source. Note that for the Rate Equations and Custom MQW models this
parameter sets the laser emission frequency at threshold. The actual
emission frequency will then be a function of the injected current. Note that a
steady-state blue shift is expected, since thermal effects are neglected and
only adiabatic chirp is simulated. For the Rate Equations model, the shift
amount is indicated in the parameter dialog box. Allowed values: min flowSPT;
max fupSPT; default f0,VBS.

Optical Sources
Status [-]: turns on "1" or turns off "0" the optical source. Allowed values: 0
or 1; default 1.
2.1.1 CW Lorentzian Laser

This model implements a simplified continuous wave (CW) laser. Laser phase
noise is taken into account by generating a Lorentzian emission line shape
whose FWHM (Full Width Half Maximum) is specified by the parameters. Two
options are available for laser phase noise bandwidth: ideal (infinite
bandwidth) or realistic (bandwidth-limited).
Inputs Outputs
- Optical: the generated optical field
Parameters
CW power [dBm] or [mW]: the output power of the laser. Allowed values:
min: -; max: -; default: 0 dBm.
Linewidth Sets the laser linewidth.
FWHM [MHz]: the power spectrum width at half maximum. Allowed values:
min: 0; max: -; default: 10.
full width at -20 dB [MHz]: the power spectrum width at –20 dB from
maximum. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default: relative to FWHM at 10
MHz.
Laser Phase: sets the laser phase at the start of the simulation.
Random: the initial laser phase is randomly set. This option is useful
when several lasers are used in the same simulation, like in WDM
systems, in order to ensure a statistical randomization of the initial
phases of the laser sources.
Deterministic: the initial laser phase is set by the Initial Laser Phase
value.
Initial Laser Phase [rad]: sets the laser phase at the start of the
simulation. Allowed values: min: 0; max: 2π; default: 0 (if the Deterministic
option is selected).
Laser Noise Bandwidth: sets the laser noise bandwidth.
Ideal: infinite bandwidth phase noise.
Realistic: bandwidth-limited phase noise. Phase noise is filtered using a
two poles filter, therefore Ralaxation Oscillation Peak Frequency and
Ralaxation Oscillation Peak Overshoot options are requested.
Ralaxation Oscillation Peak Frequency [GHz]: sets the resonant
frequency of laser phase noise. Allowed values: min: >0; max: -; default: 5
(if the Realistic option is selected).

Laser
Ralaxation Oscillation Peak Overshoot [dB]: sets the overshoot of the

laser phase noise. Allowed values: min: >0; max: -; default: 7 (if the
Realistic option is selected).
2.1.2 Rate Equations Laser

This model implements a semiconductor laser by means of a set of two
coupled rate equations, one for carriers and on for photons, according to the
model proposed in [1]. A third equation computes the evolution of the phase
of the optical field. Langevin noise terms are present to fully account for the
noisy nature of laser operation.
This model is adequate for the simulation of a broad range of effects in
semiconductor lasers, including the existence of a threshold current, turn-on
delay, laser chirp, relaxation oscillations, the laser non-zero linewidth and RIN
[1]. In the following, parameter symbols and notation will conform as much
as possible to the ones used in [1]. Occasionally, units of measure may vary
with respect to [1]. In particular, we adopt the MKSA system rather than the
CGS system used in [1]. The dialog automatically computes and displays
numerous macroscopic quantities of system relevance, as a function of the
supplied parameters. This way, a desired macroscopic behavior can be
obtained by varying the physical input parameters and observing the effect
on the system-relevant quantities.
P/I curve non-linearity

The P/I curve (the ratio of output power to injection current) generated by
the rate equation model used in OptSim is very close to linear. A certain
amount of non-linearity is nonetheless present, especially if the bias current
is low, even if clipping is not induced. Part of this non-linearity is due to the
gain saturation parameter GP, and part is due to other non-linear terms in the
rate equations. All these non-linear effects decrease when the bias current is
increased. An almost perfectly, locally linear laser can be obtained for high
bias currents.
This can be unrealistic and to allow for a better modeling of non-linear effects
in actual lasers, the model implemented in OptSim has the additional feature
of a set of non-linearity coefficients cj's that effect the P/I curve. These
coefficients permit to simulate and study those non-linearity effects that are
of specific relevance in the field of both analog and mixed analog/digital
CATV, as well as antenna remoting.
The way the P/I curve is modified is as follows. Through the rate equations
the value of the instantaneous output power, Pout(t), is calculated. This value
is then processed as follows:
c2 2 c 3 c
Pout , NL (t ) = Pout (t ) + Pout (t ) + 3 Pout (t ) + c4 Pout4 (t ) + 5 Pout5 (t ) (1)
2 6 24 120

Optical Sources
where Pout,NL(t) becomes the actual power output by the model and the cj's
are user-supplied parameters.
The coefficients cj's in (1) may be used to determine the amount of CSO and
CTB that can be expected from the laser in multi-subcarrier transmission. In
the following we refer to CTB and CSO induced by the cj's alone but note that
a certain amount of non-linearity stemming from the standard rate equation
model will already be present and is not accounted for by the cj's. You may
want to first assess through simulation the amount of non-linearity generated
by the rate equations alone and then, if necessary, add further non-linearity
through the cj's.
To quantitatively show how the cj's effect the P/I curve, we first re-write
expression (1) substituting c1Iin(t) = c1[I(t) - Ith(t)] for Pout(t), where c1 is the
slope of the P/I curve as it results from the rate equations alone , I(t) is the
injection current, Ith is the threshold current and Iin(t) is the amount of
injection current above threshold:
c2 2 2 c3 3 3 c4 4 4 c5 5 5
Pout , NL (I in ) = c1 I in + c1 I in + c1 I in + c1 I in + c1 I in (2)
2 6 24 120
When using subcarrier modulation, the laser is generally biased at a certain
Ibias. We will call the corresponding amount of bias current above threshold as
Iin,bias = Ibias(t) - Ith(t). Note that c1 is available as a read-only parameter in
the laser dialog window, under the name “P-I Slope [mW/mA]” (see
Advanced Laser Parameters, below).
In [2], page 488, formulae (5) and (6) express CSO and CTB for multi-
subcarrier laser modulation. We report them here for convenience:
  2 L'2  2 
 
  L' ' L0 m  
CSO idB = 10 log10   (3)
 Ci 2 
 
 
  4 L'3  2 
 
  L' ' ' L20 m 2  
CTBidB = 10 log10   (4)
 Ci 3 
 
 
In these expressions, Ci2 and Ci3 represent the second and third-order inter-
modulation products, respectively, present at a certain frequency. They are
functions of the frequency values of the comb of subcarriers input to the

Laser
lasers and of the probed frequency. Please refer to theory for their
expressions.
The definitions of the other terms appearing above, and their expressions
after (2), are as follows:
c2 2 2 c c c
L0 = Pout , NL (I in ,bias ) = c1 I in ,bias + c1 I in ,bias + 3 c13 I in3 ,bias + 4 c14 I in4 ,bias + 5 c15 I in5 ,bias (5)
2 6 24 120
∂Pout , NL (I in ) c3 3 2 c c
L' = = c1 + c2 c12 I in ,bias + c1 I in ,bias + 4 c14 I in3 ,bias + 5 c15 I in4 ,bias (6)
∂I in I in = Iin ,bias
2 6 24
∂ 2 Pout , NL (I in ) c4 4 2 c
L' ' = = c2 c12 + c3c13 I in ,bias + c1 I in ,bias + 5 c15 I in3 ,bias (7)
∂ 2 I in 2 6
I in = I in ,bias
∂ 3 Pout , NL (I in ) c5 5 2
L' ' ' = = c3c13 + c4 c14 I in ,bias + c1 I in ,bias (8)
∂ 3 I in 2
I in = Iin ,bias
Finally, m is the modulation index. Assuming that all subcarriers have indeed
the same m, its definition is:
I peak −to− peak

m= (9)
I in ,bias
where Ipeak-to-peak is the peak-to-peak modulation current of each subcarrier.
From the expressions above it is readily seen that if c2 only is non-zero, then
only CSO is excited, because L’’’ = 0. If just c3 ≠ 0, both CSO and CTB are
excited, because both L’’ and L’’’ turn out to be non-zero. Therefore, if one
wants to selectively induce CSO, then c2 ≠ 0 and its actual value can be
found by inverting (3). If one wants to selectively induce CTB, then c3 ≠ 0
and c2 must be chosen in such a way as to make L’’ = 0. From (7):
c2 = −c3c1 I in ,bias (10)
The actual amount of CTB can be imposed inverting (4).

If one wants to induce a precise amount of both CSO and CTB, then the set of
six equations formed by (3), (4) and (5)-(8) must be solved to find the
required values c2, c3. The equations are six because the additional unknowns
L0, L’, L’’ and L’’’, besides c2, c3, are determined in the process.
The higher order non-linear coefficients c4 and c5 induce both CSO and CTB,
together with higher order non-linearities. Their analytical characterization
can be derived along the same lines as above.

Optical Sources
Limitations
The main limitations of this model lie in the assumption of a uniform
longitudinal distribution of both carriers and field and in the modeling of gain
as a linear function of the carrier density. No modeling specific to MQW (Multi
Quantum Well) structures has been added. Yet, this model is a good
compromise between complexity and realism and can be effectively used in
most practical cases. The model is also based on a single-longitudinal mode
assumption. The simulation of lasers that may have multiple longitudinal
modes is therefore inaccurate. Fabry-Perot lasers can be simulated with this
model only for those structures or operating regimes where a single
longitudinal mode is clearly dominant.
Current parasitic and current leakages are not directly accounted for. Modern
lasers suffer relatively little from these impairments. In general, the typical
residual effects of electrical parasitic can be easily modeled in OptSim placing
a single or double-pole electrical filter on the laser injection current. Current
leakage may be responsible for some non-linearity in the P/I curve. It can be
fairly accurately accounted for by means of the non-linearity coefficients cj's.
This is more practical and efficient than implementing a leakage model that
needs microscopic parameters of the internal structure, that are generally
difficult to characterize and widely variable.
A further limitation is that thermal effects are not taken into account.
However, the typical time-scale of complex Optical System simulations is tens
to hundreds of ns. Over this time-scale, thermal effects would not have time
to develop, even if implemented in the code.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the injection current [A] Optical: the generated optical field
Electrical: the instantaneous output
power [mW]
Electrical: the instantaneous field
frequency [GHz]
Parameters of Laser Behavior Section

In this section you can choose a predefined laser model clicking on the model
name in the Available lasers list. The list shows all the laser model files
(with extension obp) currently stored in the library directories or in the
current project directory. With New you can define a new laser model
through the OptSim Best Fit Laser Toolkit; with Edit/View you can modify an
already defined laser model, always through the OptSim Best Fit Laser
Toolkit.
Parameter values of this section and of the Physical section depend on the
laser model selected. You cannot modify a value when a predefined laser

Laser
model is selected, if you do this, the selection goes automatically to This

laser only where all the values can be modified.
Parameter values of this section are calculated as a function of the
parameters supplied in this section and in the Physical section. Many of these
quantities can be calculated only at a steady state operating point. Therefore
you are requested to input a value in the Test Current Value field. Please
note that to reflect any changes in the laser input parameters, you have to
click on the Update button.
Laser emission frequency [nm] or [THz]: the referring emission
frequency of the source. This value is used for the calculation of the most of
the system-relevant quantities.
Insert Test Current Value [mA]: the input value of injection current that
sets the operating point for the calculation of the most of the system-relevant
quantities. It must be greater than the Threshold Current, otherwise
meaningless data will be displayed when you click on the Update button.
Allowed values: min Threshold Current; max -.
Threshold Current [mA]: the calculated laser threshold current.
Linear Output Power [mW]: it is the output power into a fiber pigtail at the
Test Current Value. It is assumed that the power produced by the laser is
equally split between the two output facets. Therefore half of the power is
lost and the remainder is coupled to a fiber with the supplied Fiber Coupling
Efficiency. It takes into account neither the effect of the Non-Linearity
Coefficients [cj's], nor the effect of the internal laser non-linearity in the P-I
curve. This is the reason why it is called “linear” output power
P-I Slope [mW/mA]: the slope of the Power/Current curve as measured at
the output of a fiber pigtail, under the same assumptions as defined above for
the Linear Output Power. It takes into account neither the effect of the
Non-Linearity Coefficients [cj's], nor the effect of the internal laser non-
linearity in the P-I curve.
Turn-On Delay [ns]: the time needed for the carrier density to reach the
threshold density, using the injection current specified in Test Current
Value. Note that the turn-on delay only says how long it takes for the laser
to reach threshold gain conditions, but not how long it takes for the laser to
reach steady state. After turn-on, a series of oscillations ensues, that may
last for several ns.
Relaxation Oscillation Peak Frequency [GHz]: the frequency of the peak
in the small signal output power vs. modulation current response of the laser.
It also approximately corresponds to the frequency of the output power
oscillation after the injection of a step-current going from zero to the Test
Current Value. For more details see [1].
Relaxation Oscillation Peak Overshoot [dB]: the overshoot in the
frequency of the small signal output power vs. modulation current response
of the laser, at the relaxation oscillation frequency. For more details see [1].

Optical Sources
Quasi-Static Frequency Chirp Above Threshold [GHz/mA]: it defines

how much the laser frequency varies as a function of a change in modulation
current after fast transients have subsided. Note that before steady state is
reached, the laser frequency may undergo much wider fluctuations, in
response to an injected current change. See FM modulation response in [1].
Note that thermal effects are not taken into account. This chirp is defined
quasi-static because it neglects the typical thermal red shift generally
occurring with microsecond time-constants and longer.
Linewidth [MHz]: steady-state laser linewidth at the selected Test Current
Value.
Average Start Frequency [GHz]: start frequency of the frequency range over which
Relative the RIN will be averaged on. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Intensity
Stop Frequency [GHz]: stop frequency of the frequency range over which
Noise (RIN)
the RIN will be averaged on. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Average RIN [dB/Hz]: the Relative Intensity Noise at steady state,
averaged over the frequency range supplied through the parameters Start
Frequency and Stop Frequency. For more information on RIN please see
[1].
Parameters of Physical Section

Waveguide Volume V [m3]: the volume of the optical waveguide in the
laser cavity. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -.
Photon Lifetime in the Cavity τph [s]: the mean time spent by a photon in
the cavity before being scattered or ejected through a facet. Allowed values:
min: 0 s; max: -.
Output Facet Photon Output Rate 1/τout [s-1]: the rate of emission of
photons through the facet that is coupled to the laser pigtail. The total
number of photons per second exiting the laser through the output facet is
P/τout, where P is the total number of photons in the cavity. For a Fabry-Perot
laser:
1 vg 1
= ln  (11)
τ out L r
where vg is the lasing mode group velocity, L is the cavity length and r is the
field facet reflectivity (note: the facet power reflection coefficient would be
|r|2). For a DFB laser the calculations to derive τout are more complex due to
the action of the grating. Please see [3] for reference. Allowed values: min:
0; max: -.
Carrier Density at Transparency n0 [m-3]: the carrier density at which a
perfect balance between stimulated emission and stimulated absorption
occurs. Allowed values: min: 0; max -.

Laser
Gain Constant a [m2]: the linear slope of the optical gain g versus the
carrier density n. The expression of the optical gain, without gain saturation,
is: g = a(n-n0). Allowed values: min: 0; max: -.
Optical Gain vs. Photon Number Slope GP [s-1]: accounts for non-linear
gain saturation. The expression of the complete optical gain, expressed as a
rate of difference between stimulated emission and stimulated absorption, is:
G = Γv g a(n − n0 ) − GP P (12)
where Γ is the Field Confinement Factor, vg is the field group velocity, a is

the Gain Constant, n0 is the Carrier Density at Transparency and P is the
total number of photons in the cavity. GP accounts for such phenomena as
spatial and spectral hole burning. Allowed values: min: - ; max: -.
Auger Carrier Recombination Factor C [m6s-1]: contributes to the
determination of the excited carrier lifetime τe whose expression is:
τ e = (Anr + Bn + Cn 2 ) [s ]
−1
(13)
It accounts for Auger recombination phenomena. The coefficients Anr and B

are parameters explained below. Allowed values: min: 0; max -.
Spontaneous Carrier Recombination Factor B [m3s-1]: accounts for the
radiative carrier recombination process. It contributes to the determination of
the excited carrier lifetime τe (13). Allowed values: min: 0; max: -.
Nonradiative Carrier Recombination Factor Anr [s-1]: accounts for the
nonradiative carrier recombination processes. It contributes to the
determination of the excited carrier lifetime τe (13). Allowed values: min: 0;
max: -.
Spontaneous Emission Factor β sp: the fraction of all photons generated
through spontaneous emissions that couple into the lasing mode. This
parameter mainly affects the laser near threshold, whereas it has almost no
effect well above threshold. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -.
Linewidth Enhancement Factor β c: formally defined as the ratio of the
derivative of the real part of the complex susceptibility of the active layer vs.
carrier density divided by the derivative of the imaginary part of the complex
susceptibility of the active layer vs. carrier density. In fact, it is a
phenomenological parameter that permits to fit both laser chirp and laser
linewidth values. Note though that the laser chirp depends linearly on βc
whereas the laser linewidth is proportional to (1+βc2). See [1] for more
details. Allowed values: min -; max -.
Field Confinement Factor Γ: the fraction of the field energy in the cavity
that is contained within the active layer. Allowed values: min 0; max 1.
Group Index µg: the field group refractive index in the cavity. By definition,
the group index is:

Optical Sources
µg = cv
g
where c is the speed of light in vacuum and vg is the field group velocity in
the cavity. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Non-Linearity Order 2 [W-1], Order 3 [W-2], Order 4 [W-3], Order 5 [W-4]: the c2, c3,
Coefficients c4, c5, coefficients of the series expansion of the non-linear mapping law (1)
between the output power as generated by the rate equations and the actual
output power of the laser simulation model. It can be used to impose a
controlled amount of non-linearity on the laser P/I curve.
Warning
Make sure that the dimensions of the cj’s are according to the specification
above. The specification assumes that Pout,NL in equation (1) above has the
dimension of [W].
Fiber Coupling Efficiency (range 0 to 1) [-]: the fraction of the optical

power emitted by the laser that actually coupled into the fiber. Allowed
values: min 0; max 1.
Parameters of Advanced Section

Intermodul. Modulation Index [-]: modulation index m in formula (9). Allowed values:
Noise min 0; max -; default 0.04.
Second Order Products [-]: number of second intermodulation products Ci2
in formula (3). Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1.
Third Order Products [-]: number of third intermodulation products Ci3 in
formula (4). Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1.
CSO [dB]: Composite second order, formula (3). The ratio of the peak
carrier to the peak power in the composite second-order intermodulation
tone.
CTB [dB]: Composite triple beat, formula (4). The ratio of the peak carrier to
the peak power in the composite third-order intermodulation tone.
Parameters of Spectral Estimation Section

During SPT Simulation the Rate Equations are not solved and the laser is
treated as a light source emitting at its nominal Laser Center Emission
Frequency (see above), with a certain Average Output Power which must be
supplied by the user (see directly below).
Average output power for Spectral Propagation [dBm] or [mW]:
accounts for the mean laser output power in SPT simulation. Allowed values:
min 0 mW; max -.

Laser
2.1.3 Custom MQW Laser

At run time, this model implements an SCH MQW semiconductor laser by
means of a set of three coupled rate equations, two for the carriers and one
for the photons. The effect of the density of carriers has been separated into
two parts: the contribution of the carriers inside the gain region, i.e. in the
wells Nw, and the contribution of the carrier inside the separate confinement
region SCH, Nb. A fourth equation computes the evolution of the phase of the
optical field. Langevin noise terms are present to fully account for the noisy
nature of laser operation.
This model is adequate for the simulation of a broad range of effects in
semiconductor lasers, including the existence of a threshold current, turn-on
delay, laser chirp, relaxation oscillations, the laser non-zero linewidth, RIN
[6] and certain dynamic features typical of MQW lasers that are due to well
capture-time effects.
While such models have proved very successful at modeling the generic
behavior of a MQW laser, a critical problem is often encountered when using
them to simulate a specific device. These models need a wealth of
“microscopic” physical and structural parameters that are extremely difficult if
not impossible to measure accurately. The Custom MQW Laser tries to
solve this problem by requiring as input certain typical standard
measurements that are commonly done in laboratories, like PI and AM
curves. From such data the Custom MQW Laser derives the internal
“microscopic” parameters through a bestfit procedure. The final result is a
run-time model that closely follows the behavior of the measured device.
In the following, parameter symbols and notation will conform as much as
possible to the ones used in [6]. Occasionally units of measure may vary with
respect to [6]. In particular, we adopt the MKSA system rather than the CGS
system used in [6].
The rate equations are the following:
dN b I N b N b N w
= − − +
dt q τ cap τ n τ esc
dN w N b N w N w N − Nt
= − − − g op w S
dt τ cap τ esc τ n 1+ ε pS
dS N − Nt S N
= g op w S− +β w
dt 1+ ε pS τp τn
dφ α
= g op ( N w − N wr ) + g ob ( N b − N br )
dt 2

Optical Sources
S (t )ηhv
p(t ) =
τp
where:
Γg 0
g op =
Vw
Γε
εp =
Vw
gb
g ob = (1 − Γ)
Vb
The meaning of the rate equation parameters is the following:
1. g0 [m3/s] is the differential gain in the active region, i.e. in the well (gain
slope)
2. Γ [-] is the optical confinement factor
3. Vw [m3] is the volume of the active region
4. ε [m3] is the gain saturation parameter
5. Vb [m3] is the volume of the SCH region
Γg 0
6. g op = [s-1] is the “normalized gain slope”
Vw
Γε
7. εp = [-] is the “normalized gain saturation factor”
Vw
8. S [-] is the number of photons in the cavity
9. τesc [s-1] is the thermionic emission lifetime
10. τcap [s-1] is the carrier capture time
11. Nt [-] is the carrier number at transparency
12. τp [s] is the photon lifetime
13. β [-] is the spontaneous emission factor
14. I(t) [A] is the injected laser current
15. q [C] is the electron charge
16. α [-] is the linewidth enhancement factor

Laser
gb
17. g ob = (1 − Γ) [s-1] is the composed parameter where
Vs
gb = (2πν0/µeff)∗dnb/dNb with nb the SCH refractive index; ν0 the laser
emission frequency; µeff the effective group index of the lasing mode
18. φ(t) [-] is the phase of the laser field
19. τn [s-1] is the carrier lifetime. In order to take into account thermal effects
we use the following expression: τn = τn0 e-KtI where τn0 [s-1] is the carrier
lifetime at the reference temperature; Kt is a thermal constant
20. η [-] is the composed parameter Kcη0 where η0 is the quantum differential
efficiency and Kc takes into account other loss factors between the laser
output and measurement instrument input
21. h [Js] is Planck’s constant
22. τn0 [s] is the bimolecular recombination lifetime at a reference
temperature
23. Kt [A-1] is the thermal constant, this parameter includes thermal effects
on the AM response model, since some lasers exhibit a strong nonlinear
dependence on temperature [6].
The parameters β, gop, Nt, τn0, τcap, τesc, τp, εp, η, α, gob, Kt are obtained by
fitting the data from a measurement data file that contains the measured
curves from a realistic laser component. This file must be written following
the grammar rules described in section 2.1.4.
The curves stored in the file may be:
small-signal amplitude modulation (AM) curves
power vs current (P-I) curve
small-signal frequency modulation (FM) curves
Relative Intensity Noise (RIN) curves
Fiber Transfer Function (FIB) curves (AM Curves with Dispersive Fiber)
Laser Linewidth (LINE) curve
Not all the curves listed above must necessarily be present in the data file.
AM and P-I curves are mandatory while the other are recommended (but not
mandatory). Please note that to fit the values of gob, α and β parameters the
following rules must be observed.
if you do not supply FM Curves or FIB curves you must supply explicitly in
the data file the value of the gob parameter
if you do not supply FM or FIB or LINE curves you must supply explicitly
the value of the α parameter

Optical Sources
if you do not supply FM or FIB or RIN or LINE curves you must supply
explicitly the value of the β parameter
See section 2.1.4 for the grammar rules of the data file.
When a parameter is explicitly written in the data file the corresponding
fitting procedure will not be performed. The explicit value will be used in the
time domain integration of the laser rate equations.
In order to save time, if in a project there are many Custom MQW Laser
components with the same measurement data file, the fitting procedure is
executed only once.
Since fitting results are only weakly dependent on laser emission frequency, if
in a project there are two or more lasers with the same measurement data
file but with different emission frequencies, then the fitting procedure is
redone only if the frequency difference between one laser and another is
greater than 3 THz.
Fitting is done on the following curves.
AM Curves
The AM curves are the small signal Amplitude Modulation response of the
laser [1,2] obtained at different bias currents. Such currents must be
distributed uniformly in the range Ith-Imax. We suggest 4 curves at least. For
example, if the threshold current Ith is 16 mA and the maximum current Imax
is 90 mA you can take the 4 curves at 20, 40, 60 and 80 mA.
The data to be fitted are frequencies in GHz and the corresponding AM
response in dB (20·log10(|HAM|)). There is no need for phase information. We
suggest also you take about 60-250 points for each curve.
AM curves are fitted on the following analytical model, which is found by
linearizing the rate equations at a given operating bias current. The curves
are normalized to the first sample found in the file (for each curve).
1
H IM (ω , I b )
( jωτ RC + 1)
H AM = (1)
H IM (0, I b )
where
β
Qn +
ηhv0 τn
H IM (ω , I b ) =
qτ cτ p  1 1 β  1 
( jω + + )Q p (Qn + ) + R(ω ) jω − Q p + 
 τc τn τn  τ p 

Laser
 1 1  1 1  1 
R(ω ) =  jω + +  ⋅  jω + + + Qn  − 
 τc τn   τe τn  τ cτ e 
g op S 0
Qn =
1 + ε p S0
g op ( N ω 0 − N t )
Qp =
(1 + ε p S 0 ) 2
S0 is the number of photons in stationary conditions:
− b − b 2 − 4 ac
S0 =
2a
with
1  τ c τ c   τ c  
a=− 1 + + ε + 1 + τ n g 0 
τ p  τ e τ n   τ n  
 
b=
Ib
(τ n g op + β spε p ) − 1 + τ c + τ c  N t g op + 1  + 1 + τ c  β sp N t g op
q  τ e τ n  τ p   τn 
Ib
c = β sp
q
while Νω0 is
Ib  τ c 
+ 1 +  N t Q n
q  τ n 
Nω0 =
 τc τc  1  τc 
1 + +  + 1 + Q n
 τe τn τn  τn 
P-I Curve
The P-I curve is the power vs. current characteristic of the laser. The fitting is
based on the model
S 0ηhv
P0 =
τp

Optical Sources
The power values must be in mW and the current value in mA. Note that the
attenuation present between the laser chip and the measurement equipment
is accounted for through the parameter η that need not be supplied by the
user. The measurement can be taken on either temperature-stabilized or
uncooled lasers. The static increase in temperature caused by the higher bias
current is taken into account in the bestfit procedure. At run-time, however,
thermal effects are not included in the simulation and the model is in fact
“adiabatic”.
RIN Curves
The RIN curves are the Relative Intensity Noise spectra of the laser [6].
These curves are not mandatory but they help estimating the spontaneous
emission factor β correctly. See the beginning of this section for more details.
Bestfit is done against an approximated RIN expression that takes into
account the diffusion coefficient Dss only. This approximation is reasonable
because the other noise diffusion coefficients do not appreciably contribute to
the RIN.
2
 1 1  1 1  1 
 jω + +  jω + + + Qn  − 
2 Dss   τ c τ n  τe τn  τ cτ e 
RIN (ω ) = 2
S 0  1 1 β  1 
( jω + + )Q p (Qn + ) + R(ω ) jω − Q p + 
 τc τn τn  τ p 
βN w0 S0
Dss =
τn
The data to be fitted are frequencies in GHz and the corresponding RIN
curves in 1/Hz in dB (10·log10(RIN)).
FM Curves
The FM curves are the small-signal Frequency Modulation response of the
laser. [8]. We encourage you to supply this data even if you only had a few
measured points per curve. In fact, even just one point per curve supplies
important information.
The FM curves should not be measured in the low frequency range (<100
MHz) where dynamic thermal effects are important. These effects cause a
typical dip in the laser FM response. Since dynamic thermal phenomena are
not taken into account in the fitting procedure they could cause convergence
problem. FM curves are fitted on the following analytical model.

Laser
δv(ω ) αg opτ p
H FM (ω ) ≡ = R(ω ) H IM (ω , I b ) +
δi(ω ) 4πηhv
τc
τ p g ob τe
+ R(ω ) H IM (ω , I b ) +
2πηhv  τ 
1 + c + jωτ c 
 τn 
τc
g ob q
+ (2)
2π  τ c 
1 + + jωτ c 
 τn 
where HIM(ω,Ib) and R(ω) are defined in the “AM Curves” section.
The data to be fitted are frequencies in GHz and the corresponding HFM
response in dB (20·log10(|HFM|)) where HFM is in GHz/mA.
Fiber Transfer Function curves (FIB)

The FIB curves are the small-signal AM response of the laser through a
dispersive fiber span [9]. The fiber length and dispersion coefficient must be
known.
The analytical model is the following.
2S0 α
H IMfiber = cos(ω 2 F ) −  g op A +
jω 2
 
 
A 1  1  sin(ω 2 F )
+ g ob  +   (3)
τ e qH IM (ω )  jω + + 
1 1
 τ c τ n 

L λ2 D
F= (4)
4πc
where L is the fiber length, λ the wavelength, c the light speed and D fiber
dispersion.

Optical Sources
1
jω − Q p +
τp
A=
β
Qn +
τn
The data to be fitted are the frequencies in GHz and the corresponding HIMfiber
responses in dB (20·log10(|HIMfiber|)). The measurements must not include the
notches of the function, you must collect the data up to the first notch
(excluded).
Laser Linewidth
Fitting is also done on laser linewidth [6]. One or more linewidth values,
taken at different bias currents, can be supplied. The analytical model that is
bestfit to the given data is the following.
1
∆ν = S φ (ω )
2π
where Sφ(ω) is frequency noise spectral density obtained from
Sφ (ω ) = Sφ 1 + Sφ 2 + Sφ 3 + Sφ 4 (5)
where
2
 QpQ  X 2
Sφ 1 = 2 DNwNw 1 −  (6)
 kB  k 2
Qp X 2  QpQ 
Sφ 2 = −4 DNwS 1 −  (7)
k 2 B  kB 
Q p2 X 2
Sφ 3 = 2 DSS (8)
k 2B2
Sφ 4 = 2 Dφφ (9)
with
1 1 1
k = jω − + + + Qn (10)
 1 1 τe τn
 jω + + τ eτ c
 τc τn 

Laser
QQ p 1
B = jω − Q p + + (11)
k τp
 
 
α g ob 
X =  g op +  (12)
2  1 1 
 τ e  jω + +  
  τc τn  
β
Q = Qn + (13)
τn
with DSS, DNwNw, DNwS, Dφφ diffusion coefficients related to the noise terms.
DSS = RspS0
Dφφ = Rsp/4S0
DSφ = DNwφ = 0
DNwNw = RspS0 + Nw0/τn
DSNw = -RspS0
with
Rsp = βNw0/τn
Linewidths must be supplied in MHz, at a given bias current specified in mA.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters of Basic Attributes Section

Filename: name of the data file where the measured curves are stored. You
can choose the file from the file system by clicking on the Browse button.
You can also edit the file by clicking on the Edit button: it opens up an editor
window that loads the data file. The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for
Windows NT. The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters and must
be written following the rules of section 2.1.4.
Note
The file must be saved in the same directory where the project is saved.

Optical Sources

During SPT Simulation you must supply some parameters that the Spectral
Propagation Technique cannot derive itself because it does not do time-
domain integration for the rate equations.
min 0; max -.

Laser
2.1.4 Custom MQW Laser File Grammar

General Rules
Files are formatted by line
No blank lines are allowed
The first line is mandatory and it identifies the file type
The field separator is the blank or tab character
Only exponential notation is allowed for numbers (for example 10.0 or
0.1 or -12.388888E+002)
Grammar
Notation used is EBNF (Extended Backus Naur Form)
[ item ] stands for optional item occurring only once
{ item } stands for optional item occurring any number of times
( item_a | item_b) stands for items that can occur as alternative
Bold stands for language keywords
Italic stands for rules (non-terminal symbols)

Plain stands for identifiers and names
OptSimOli grammar_version
File_Header
StartMeasures
{ Measure_Header { x y } }
File_Header ::=
{beta beta}
{gob gob}
{alpha disp}
Measure_Header ::=
MeasureType (AM | PI | FM | RIN | FIB | LINE)
PointsNum num
I current
{Lenght length
Disp disp}
Description
grammar_version ::= 1
File Header The File_Header rule contains those parameters, either gob, α or β, that must
be explicitly supplied by the user when the user does not provide those
measurement curves that are needed to obtain them through the fitting
procedure (see below for an explanation of when this happens).

Optical Sources
beta ::= real [-]

Spontaneous emission factor β, this field is mandatory if the file does not
contain at least an FM or FIB or a RIN or a LINE measure.
gob ::= real [(1/s)⋅103]
Composed parameter gob, this field is mandatory if the file does not contain at
least one FM or FIB measure.
alpha ::= real [-]
Linewidth enhancement factor α, this field is mandatory if the file does not
contain at least one FM or FIB or LINE measure.
Kt ::= real [A-1]
Thermal constant, if set to zero no thermal effects are simulated.
Measure The Measure_Header contains information for each single measurement
Header curve
MeasureType indicates the type of the measured curve:
AM stands for amplitude modulation curve
PI stands for power vs current curve
FM stands for frequency modulation curve
RIN stands for Relative Intensity Noise curve
FIB stands for Fiber Transfer Function curve
LINE stands for Laser Linewidth curve
num ::= integer
Number of points contained in the curve.
current ::= real [mA]
Current at which the AM, FM, RIN, FIB, LINE curves have been measured.
This field is not present for the PI curve.
length ::= real [km]
Fiber length. This field is present only for the FIB curves.
disp ::= real [ps/(nm⋅km)]
Dispersion of the fiber. This field is present only for the FIB curves.
x ::= real
Value of the abscissa of the curve.
y ::= real
Value of the curve corresponding to the abscissa.

Laser
In the following table the quantities used for each measure are listed:
Measure Keyword X value [Unit] Y value [Unit] Mandatory
AM curves AM Frequency [GHz] 20·log10(HAM) [dB] Yes
PI curve PI current [mA] Power [mW] Yes
RIN curves RIN Frequency [GHz] 10·log10(RIN) [dB{1/Hz}] NO
FM curves FM Frequency [GHz] 20·log10(HFM) [dB] NO
FIB curves FIB Frequency [GHz] 20·log10(HImfiber) [dB] NO
LINE curve LINE Current [mA] Linewidth [MHz] NO
Example
OptSimOli 1
gob 45125.7
StartMeasures
MeasureType AM
PointsNum 201
I 20
0.1980 0
0.2970 -0.0605
...
MeasureType AM
PointsNum 201
I 40
0.1980 0
0.2970 -0.0039
...
MeasureType PI
PointsNum 101
0 0
0.8000 0.0415
8000 0.0992
...
Custom MQW Laser File Output

This file is automatically generated by OptSim and named project_name.olo.
It contains the following information:
The frequency at which the fitting is made.
The fitted parameters
Some information about the main characteristics of the laser evaluated at
two laser threshold current (see section 2.1.2, section Laser Behavior):
− Threshold current
− Turn-On Delay
− Relaxation Oscillation Peak Frequency
− Relaxation Oscillation Peak Overshoot

Optical Sources
− Quasi-static frequecy chirp above threshold

− Linewhith
0 (section separator)
OptSimOlo 3
Custom MQW freq 193.414 [Thz]
Laser File gop 1.488960e+04 [1/s]
Output .OLO taup 6.844812e+00 [ps]
EXAMPLE ep 1.294509e-08 [-]
eta 1.377102e-01 [-]
taun0 3.129136e-01 [ns]
beta 3.330577e-04 [-]
Nt 1.033303e+06 [-]
tauc 4.118277e+00 [ps]
taue 1.000869e+01 [ps]
Kt 3.793742e+00 [1/A]
gob 3.543304e+02 [1/s]
alpha 1.977501e+00 [-]
taurc 2.506044e+01 [ps]
Laser behaviour for 2*threshold current:
Threshold current 0.008145 [A]
Turn-On Delay 0.051752 [ns]
Relaxation Oscillation Peak Frequency 4.233936 [GHz]
Relaxation Oscillation Peak Overshoot 8.872010 [GHz]
Quasi-static frequecy chirp above threshold 0.014840 [GHz/mA]
Linewhidth 12.920693 [MHz]
0

Laser
2.1.5 VCSEL
This block models a vertical-cavity surface-emitting laser (VCSEL) directly
modulated with an electrical signal. It uses the electrical current injected into
the laser’s optical cavity to solve the laser rate equations for the optical
output. Important VCSEL behaviors such as spatial hole burning, lateral
carrier diffusion, thermally dependent gain, and thermal carrier leakage are
all accounted for.
The driving source consists of the electrical signal input into the model. The
VCSEL cavity is modeled via a simplified current-voltage (IV) relationship and
spatially independent VCSEL rate equations.
Driving Source
The VCSEL is driven by the electrical signal at its input.
The input signal is assumed to come from an ideal current source. In other
words, the laser is assumed to be undergoing direct-drive modulation.
VCSEL Cavity
Both electrical and optical effects are modeled within the VCSEL cavity.
Electrical
The electrical model of the VCSEL cavity is that of a simplified diode IV
relationship, consisting of a series resistance Rd (Rd) and turn-on voltage Von
(Von). During solution of the cavity current I, the model ensures that
negative currents are effectively limited to zero.
Rate Equations
At the core of the VCSEL block are spatially independent semiconductor laser
rate equations, which determine the optical output in response to the cavity
current I [10]. Relative intensity noise is modeled via a constant value RIN
(RIN), and the optical emission frequency is set by λ (wavelength). The
model rate equations are based on the following single-mode spatially
dependent equations [10]:
r r r
∂N (r , t ) ηi I (r , t ) N (r , t ) I (N , T )
2
r r Leff 2 r
= − − G (r , t )S (t )ψ (r ) + ∇ N (r , t ) − l (1)
∂t q τn τn q
∂ S (t ) S (t ) β 1 v 1 v v
=− + ⋅ ⋅ ∫ N (r , t )dv + ⋅ ∫ G (r , t ) S (t )ψ (r )dv (2)
∂t τ p τn V V V
V
In (1), I is the spatially dependent injection current, N is the carrier density

scaled by the effective active-layer volume V, S and ψ are the total photon
number and normalized transverse mode profile, T is the device temperature,

Optical Sources
G is the gain, Il is the thermal leakage current, ηI (effint) is the current-

injection efficiency, τn (tn) is the carrier lifetime, Leff is the effective carrier
diffusion length, and q is the electron charge. In (2), β (b) is the
spontaneous-emission coupling coefficient, and τp (tp) is the photon lifetime.
Following the approach taken in [10], we can eliminate the explicit spatial
dependence from (1) and (2) by assuming a cylindrical geometry, neglecting
azimuthal variations, and adopting a two-term Bessel-series expansion for
the carrier profile:
N 0 − N1 J 0 (σ1r / R ) (3)
where σ1 is the first nonzero root of J1(x), and R is the active-layer effective
radius. If we further assume a uniform current distribution and linear gain,
we can eliminate the explicit spatial dependence from (1) and (2), thereby
obtaining the following spatially independent VCSEL rate equations:
dN0 ηi I N 0 G (T ) ⋅ [γ 00 ( N 0 − Nt (T )) − γ 01 N1 ] I (N ,T )
= − − ⋅S − l 0 (4)
dt q τn 1+ εS q
dN1 N G (T ) ⋅ [φ100 ( N 0 − Nt (T )) − φ101 N1 ]

= − 1 ⋅ (1 + hdiff ) + ⋅S (5)
dt τn 1+ εS
dS S β N 0 G (T ) ⋅ [γ 00 ( N 0 − N t (T )) − γ 01 N1 ]
=− + + ⋅S (6)
dt τp τn 1+ εS
Pout = k f S (7)
In (4)-(7), the spatial dependence of the gain is now accounted for via the
overlap coefficients γ00 (gam00), γ01 (gam01), φ100 (phi100), and φ101
(phi101), while diffusive effects are taken care of via hdiff (hdiff), which is
2
equal to (σ1Leff / R ) . The thermal dependence of the gain is taken into
account via the thermally dependent gain constant G(T) and transparency
number Nt(T), while gain saturation is modeled via ε (e), the gain saturation
factor. Furthermore, the leakage Il is now a function of N0 (the average
carrier number), as opposed to N. Finally, the photon number S is converted
to an output power via the output-power coupling coefficient kf (kf).
Mode-Carrier Overlap
If the transverse mode profile ψI is normalized such that
∞
2
⋅ ∫ ψ (r )r ⋅ dr = 1 (8)
R2 0
then the mode overlap coefficients can be calculated as [1]:

Laser
R
2
2 ∫ 0 i
γ 0i = ⋅ J (σ r / R ) ⋅ ψ (r )r ⋅ dr (9)
R 0
R
2
φ10i = ⋅ ∫ J 0 (σ i r / R ) ⋅ J 0 (σ1r / R) ⋅ ψ (r )r ⋅ dr (10)
R 2 J 02 (σ1 ) 0
where I = 0 or 1, and σ0 = 0. By setting the parameter overlap_calculation

to off, the user is free to calculate specific values for the overlap coefficients
depending on their particular choice of mode profile.
In many situations, one can model the mode profile of a single mode device
as a Gaussian with characteristic radius Rm. In this case, it can be shown
that the overlap coefficients reduce to functions of ρ (overlap), where ρ =
Rm/R [11]. By setting overlap_calculation to on, the overlap coefficients are
calculated as functions of ρ, overriding the specified values.
Thermally Dependent Gain

In order to account for a VCSEL gain’s unique thermal dependence, the gain
is modeled as a linear function of carrier number N, with thermally dependent
gain constant and transparency number. The gain constant G(T) and
transparency number Nt(T) are described via the following empirical
relationships [10]:
a g 0 + ag1T + ag 2T 2
G (T ) = Go ⋅ (11)
bg 0 + bg1T + bg 2T 2
Nt (T ) = Ntr ⋅ (cn 0 + cn1T + cn 2T 2 ) (12)
where Go (Go) is a gain constant, Ntr (Ntr) is a transparency number, and ag0-
ag2 (ag0-ag2), bg0-bg2 (bg0-bg2), and cn0-cn2 (cn0-cn2) are fitting
parameters. Generally, the gain constant will be peaked about some optimal
temperature value, as a result of the temperature-dependent mismatch
between lasing wavelength and gain peak. An example of the gain constant
based on the model’s default values is illustrated in Fig. 4. The transparency
number generally increases with temperature.

Optical Sources
Figure 2.1 Sample thermally dependent gain constant based on default model
values
Thermal Carrier Leakage

Thermally dependent carrier leakage is modeled using the following empirical
relationship [10], based on the analysis of [12]:
 − a + a N + a2 N 0T − a3 / N 0 
Il ( N 0 , T ) = I lo ⋅ exp  0 1 0  (13)
 T 
where Ilo (Ilo) is the leakage current factor, and a0-a3 (a0-a3) are fitting
parameters. This expression accounts for the interdependence of the carrier
number and temperature in determining the total leakage current. An
example of (13) for various temperatures is illustrated in Fig. 5.
Figure 2.2 Sample thermal leakage current based on default model values

Laser
Temperature Rate Equation

To complete the model, a rate equation for the device temperature as a
function of dissipated heat is included. Heat generation is assumed to arise
from any power not dissipated as part of the optical output. The resulting
equation is [10],[13]:
dT
T = To + ( ItotV − Pout ) ⋅ Rth − τ th ⋅ (14)
dt
where To (To) is the ambient temperature, Itot is the total current flowing
through the VCSEL, Rth (Rth) is the device thermal impedance, and τth (tth) is
the thermal time constant.
Polarization
The laser emits an output field polarized along the X axis, with no
corresponding Y-polarized component. The polarization of the field can be
changed using the polarization rotator component.

Optical Sources
Properties
Inputs Outputs
Parameters of Laser Behavior Section
In this section you can choose a predefined laser model clicking on the model
name in the Available lasers list. The list shows all the laser model files
(with extension obp) currently stored in the library directories or in the
current project directory. With New you can define a new laser model having
the actual parameters of the laser.
The parameter values of all the sections (Laser Behaviour, Physical,
Empirical, Advanced, Spectral Estimation) depend on the laser model
selected. If you modify a value when a predefined laser model is selected, the
selection goes automatically to This laser only, then all the values can be
modified and saved as a new library model.
The Parameter values of the Behaviour section are calculated as a function of
the parameters supplied in all the other sections. Many of these quantities
can be calculated only at a steady state operating point. Therefore you are
requested to input values in the Test Current Value field and in the Test

Laser
Temperature Value field. Please note that to reflect any changes in the
laser input parameters, you have to click on the Update button.
Center emission frequency [nm] or [THz]: the referring emission
frequency of the source. This value is used for the calculation of the most of
the system-relevant quantities in the behaviour section.
Insert Test Current Value [mA]: the input value of injection current that
sets the operating point for the calculation of the most of the system-relevant
quantities. It must be greater than the Threshold Current, otherwise
meaningless data will be displayed when you click on the Update button.
Allowed values: min Threshold Current; max -.
Threshold Current [mA]: the calculated laser threshold current.
Linear Output Power [mW]: it is the output power into a fiber pigtail at the
Test Current Value. It is assumed that the power produced by the laser is
equally split between the two output facets.
P-I Slope [mW/mA]: the slope of the Power/Current curve as measured at
the output of a fiber pigtail, under the same assumptions as defined above for
the Linear Output Power.
Turn-On Delay [ns]: the time needed for the carrier density to reach the
threshold density, using the injection current specified in Test Current
Value. Note that the turn-on delay only says how long it takes for the laser
to reach threshold gain conditions, but not how long it takes for the laser to
reach steady state. After turn-on, a series of oscillations ensues, that may
last for several ns.

Optical Sources
Parameters of Physical Section
Current injection efficiency effint [-]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -;

default 1.0.
Output power coupling coefficient kf [W]: Allowed values: min: 0; max:
-; default 1.5e-8.
Spontaneous emission coupling coefficient b [-]: Allowed values: min:
0; max: -; default 0.001.
Photon lifetime tp [s]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 2.5e-12.
Carrier lifetime tn [s]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 2.5e-9.
Gain coefficient G0 [s-1]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 30000.
Carrier transparency number Ntr [-]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -;
default 10000000.
Gain saturation factor e [-]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 5e-7.
Leakage current factor II0 [A]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default
9.61.
Diffusion parameter hdiff [-]: Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 15.
Relative intensity noise [dB/Hz]: Allowed values: min: -; max: -; default
-150.

Laser
Parameters of Empirical Section
Gain coefficient empirical parameter ag0 [-]: Allowed values: min -;

max -; default –0.4.
Gain coefficient empirical parameter ag1 [K-1]: Allowed values: min -;
max -; default 0.00147.
Gain coefficient empirical parameter ag2 [K-2]: Allowed values: min -;
max -; default 7.65e-7.
Gain coefficient empirical parameter bg0 [-]: Allowed values: min -;
Gain coefficient empirical parameter bg1 [K-1]: Allowed values: min -;
max -; default –0.00974.
Gain coefficient empirical parameter bg2 [K-2]: Allowed values: min -;
Transparency number empirical parameter cn0 [-]: Allowed values: min
-; max -; default -1.
Transparency number empirical parameter cn1 [K-1]: Allowed values:
min -; max -; default 0.008.
Transparency number empirical parameter cn2 [K-2]: Allowed values:
min -; max -; default 6e-6.

Optical Sources
Leakage current empirical parameter a0 [K]: Allowed values: min -;

Leakage current empirical parameter a2 [-]: Allowed values: min -; max
-; default 8e-8.
max -; default 9.01e9.
Overlap calculation: Sets whether the overlap has to be calculated from the
overlap parameter or assigned equal to the overlap coefficients; Allowed
values: No; Yes; default No.
Overlap parameter: Allowed values: min 0.01; max 10; default 1.
Overlap coefficient for N0 and S rate equations, gam00 [-]: Allowed
values: min -; max -; default 1.
Overlap coefficient for N0 and S rate equations, gam01 [-]: Allowed
values: min -; max -; default 0.37978.

Laser
Overlap coefficient for N1 rate equation phi100 [dB]: Allowed values:

Overlap coefficient for N1 rate equation phi101 [dB]: Allowed values:
Ambient temperature, T0 [C]: Allowed values: min -; max -; default 25.
VCSEL thermal impedance Rth [K/W]: Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 900.
Thermal time constant tth [s]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1e-
6.
Cavity resistance Rd [Ohm]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 105.
Turn-on voltage Von [V]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1.75.
During SPT Simulation the Rate Equations are not solved and the laser is
treated as a light source emitting at its nominal Laser Center Emission
Frequency (see above), with a certain Average Output Power, which must be
supplied by the user (see directly below).
min 0 mW; max -.

2.2 Optical Pulse Generator
This component simulates an optical pulse train generator. Several different
pulse shapes are available, such as raised cosine, supergaussian, solitonic.
SPT Behavior
Pulse generators are considered as they generate a single tone at the nominal
center emission frequency of the source. Therefore, in the optical spectrum a
single row is placed. Its level is equal to the average output power. The
spectrum of the different pulse shapes is not taken into account. The
generated spectrum is always a single-row one, independent of the choice on
the pulse-shape. This approximation is justified by the SPT simulation
technique, which considers channels in terms of average power and spectral
position only.
Parameters
Laser Emission Frequency [nm] or [THz]: the emission frequency of the
laser that is modulated to generate the chosen pulse train. Allowed values:
min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
Source Linewidth [MHz]: the spectrum width at half maximum, of the laser
if it was operated in CW. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default: 0.
Signal Shape: opens the related dialog windows for the three models,
Raised Cosine, SuperGaussian, Soliton.
Laser Phase: sets the laser phase at the start of the simulation.
Random: the initial laser phase is randomly set. This option is useful
when several lasers are used in the same model, like in WDM systems, in
order to ensure a statistical distribution for initial phases of laser sources.
Deterministic: the initial laser phase is set by the Initial Laser Phase
value.
Initial Laser Phase [rad]: set the laser phase at the start of the simulation.
Allowed values: min: 0; max: 2π; default: 0 (if the Deterministic option is
selected).
or 1; default 1.
Optical Sources
2.2.1 Soliton
This model implements a soliton source, i.e. a source whose pulses have the
following shape:
T   jCT 2 
U (T ) = A sech  exp 2 
 (1)
 T0   2T0 
where C is the chirp parameter of the pulse and T0 is related to the TFWHM
(Full Width Half Maximum time) of the pulse by:
TFWHM
T0 =
(
2 ln 1 + 2 ) (2)
The pulse has a peak power set to A2.

A supplemental delay parameter is allowed to choose with enabled optical
output: no optical power is present at the output before the delay time.
Inputs Outputs
- Optical
Parameters
Time between two pulses [ps]: the pulse rate. Allowed values: min 0;
max Tsim (Total Simulated Time Span simulation parameter); default Rb-1.
Delay of the pulse train [ps]: a delay relative to the beginning of the
simulation. During this delay pulses are not outputted. Allowed values: min 0;
max Tsim; default 0.
TFWHM [ps]: it is the Full Width Half Maximum time. It is the time between
two points at a half of the peak power. Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim;
default 30.
T0 [ps]: it is the parameter used in the analytical expression. Allowed values:
min 0; max Tsim; default 17.019.
Peak Power [mW]: the peak power of the source. Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default 10.
Average Power [mW]: it is the average power of the pulse train. Allowed
values: min 0; max -; default 1.70.
Chirp Factor: Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Note that the pulse generators have been implemented using the chirp factor
C that relates the phase to a function of time. This is the definition used in
[5], and it is different from the chirp parameters α defined for the
modulators. The α parameter refers to the definition of phase that depends
on the power, as it is defined in [4]. Note that the meaning of the two
definitions is completely different, therefore, the impact on system
performance is also different. For a first order Gaussian pulse only α = -C.
Comparing the implemented formulas with the ones presented in [5], you
may note a difference in the sign of C. The reason is that in [5] the
eigenfunction for the analytic signal representation is e-jωT. Therefore, the
instant frequency is
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =− ,
2π ∂T

Optical Pulse Generator
while in OptSim the eigenfunction is e+jωT and the instant frequency is:
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T
2.2.2 Raised Cosine

This model implements a raised cosine pulse train source. The raised cosine
pulse can shape either the optical amplitude or the optical power. The
generated pulses have the following shape:
U (T ) = Af (T )e jΦ (T ) (1)
when a raised cosine pulse in amplitude is chosen and
U (T ) = A f (T )e jΦ (T ) (2)
when a raised cosine pulse in power is chosen.

A2 is the peak power and f(T) is the standard raised cosine function:
 T (1 + α )
 0 , T > L
2
 
1  T − T   T (1 − α ) T (1 + α )
f (T ) =  1 − sin  π L
  , L
 ≤T ≤ L (3)
2   αTL   2 2
 T (1 − α )
 1 , T < L
2
where
TS
TL = (4)
(1 + α )
α is the roll-off parameter and TS the duration of a bit.
A supplemental delay parameter allows to choose when enable an optical
Inputs Outputs
- Optical
Parameters
Resulting Raised Cosine Shape is in: sets what to shapes, the Amplitude
or the Power of the signal.
max -; default 10.

Optical Sources
Roll-off: Roll-off parameter of the pulses, see (4). Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 0.5.
Chirp Factor [rad/mW]: Chirp factor that relates pulse phase [rad] and
power [mW] with the following law. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
2
 T 
 T− S 
C 2 
φ (T ) =  (5)
2  TL 
 
 
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =− ,
2π ∂T
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T
2.2.3 Supergaussian
This model implements a supergaussian source, i.e. a source whose pulses
have the following shape:
 1 m jC  T  2 m 
U (T ) = A exp −    (1)
 2  T0  

where C is the chirp parameter of the pulse, m is the order and T0 is related
to the TFWHM (Full Width Half Maximum time) of the pulse by:
TFWHM
T0 = (2)
22 m ln 2
The pulse has a peak power set to A2.
A supplemental delay parameter is allowed to choose with enabled optical
Inputs Outputs
- Optical
Parameters

Optical Pulse Generator
TFWHM [ps]: it is the Full Width Half Maximum time. It is the time between
two points at a half of the peak power. Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim;
default 30.
T0 [ps]: it is the parameter used in the analytical expression. Allowed values:
min 0; max Tsim; default 18.01.
max -; default 10.
values: min 0; max -; default 1. 59.
Supergaussian Order: order of the supergaussian function. Allowed values:
min 1; max -; default 1.
Chirp factor: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =− ,
2π ∂T
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T

Optical Sources
2.3 Optical White Noise Generator

This module implements an optical white noise generator, i.e. a source that
generates a spectrally flat (over all the simulation bandwidth) Gaussian
random process. It can be useful in several situations, like in the debug
phase of a simulation or to characterize the transfer function of the user-
defined filters and the generic optical devices.
SPT Behavior
The optical white noise generator generates an optical noise with well-defined
flat spectral characteristics. During the SPT simulation, it generates a flat
optical spectrum whose level corresponds to the noise level defined.
Inputs Outputs
- Optical
Parameters
One-Sided Noise Spectral Density [dB{mW/THz}]: the power spectral
density of the generated noise; the notation "one-sided" means that like all
the OptSim optical signal, also the optical noise is considered as an analytic
signal spectrally distributed around the simulation central frequency, and the
"mirrored" negative frequency are not considered. Allowed values: min -;
max -; default 0.
Note
The notation dB{mW/THz} means that the power spectral density N0,lin
expressed in mW/THz must be converted to the requested unit to N0,dB , that
is the number to introduce in the dialog, in the following way:
N 0,dB = 10 ⋅ log(N 0,lin )

N 0 , dB 10
N 0,lin = 10
or 1; default 1.
Power Spectral
Density
[mW/THz]
Bw (simulation bandwidth)
N0,lin
f0-Bw/2 f0 f0+Bw/2 f [THz]
Figure 2.1 Power spectral density of the Optical White Noise Generator
References
[1] Govind P. Agrawal and Niloy K. Dutta, Semiconductor lasers. New York :
Van Nostrand Reinhold, copyr. 1993.

Optical White Noise Generator
[2] Jan Lipson et al., High fidelity lightwave transmission of multiple AM-VSB
NTSC signals, IEEE Trans. on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 38,
no. 5, May 1990.
[3] Max Ming-Kang Liu, Principles and Applications of Optical
Communications. Irwin Book Team, London, 1996.
[4] F.Koyama and K. Iga, Frequency chirping in external modulators, J.
Lightwave Technol., vol.6, no.1, pp.87-33, Feb.1988.
[5] Govind P. Agrawal, Nonlinear Fiber Optics, 2nd edition, Academic Press,
San Diego, 1995
[6] M. M. Freire, H. J. A. da Silva, Estimation of multiple-quantum well laser
parameters for simulation of dispersion suppoted transmission systems at
20 Gbit/s, IEE Pcoceedings of Optoelectronics, Vol. 146, No. 3, pp. 93-98,
1999.
[7] M.M. Freire, L.N. Vicente, H.J.A. da Silva, Nonlinear Least Square
Estimation of MQW Laser Parameters from IM Response Measurements
[8] R. F. S. Ribeiro, J. R. F. da Rocha, H. J. A. da Silva, FM Response of
Quantum-Well Lasers Taking into Account Carrier Transport Effects, IEEE
Photonics Tecnology Letters, vol. 7, no. 8, pp. 857-859, 1995.
[9] R.C. Srinivasan, J.C. Cartlege, On Using Fiber Transfer Function to
Characterize Laser Chirp and Fiber Dispersion, IEEE Photonics Tecnology
Letters, vol. 7, no. 11, pp. 1327-1329, 1995.
[10] P. V. Mena, J. J. Morikuni, S.-M. Kang, A. V. Harton, and K. W.
Wyatt, “A comprehensive circuit-level model of vertical-cavity surface-
emitting lasers,” Journal of Lightwave Technology, 17, 2612 (1999).
[11] P. V. Mena, J. J. Morikuni, and K. W. Wyatt, “Compact
representations of mode overlap for circuit-level VCSEL models,”
IEEE/LEOS Annual Meeting Conference Proceedings, 234 (2000).
[12] J. W. Scott, R. S. Geels, S. W. Corzine, and L. A. Coldren,
“Modeling temperature effects and spatial hole burning to optimize
vertical-cavity surface-emitting laser performance,” IEEE Journal of
Quantum Electronics, 29, 1295 (1993).
[13] N. Bewtra, D. A. Suda, G. L. Tan, F. Chatenoud, and J. M. Xu,
“Modeling of quantum-well lasers with electro-opto-thermal interaction,”
IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics, 1, 331 (1995).
[14] M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of Optics, 7th. Ed. (Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge, 1999).

3 Electrical Sources
Electrical Waveform Generators

Five main Electrical Waveform Generators are available:
Bias, implements a constant level generator
Sinusoidal, implements a sinusoidal signal generator
Sawtooth, implements a sawtooth shape signal generator
Square, implements a square wave signal generator
Clock, implements an ideal clock generator
Clock (CCLOK), simulates an ideal clock with continuous time resolution.
Impulse Generator (GENDEL), simulates a single impulse or an impulses’

train generator.
Clock Signal Voltage-Controlled Generator (TIMGEN), simulates a timing
signal generator. It is typically used to generate all the timing signals used in
Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizers (ELGSY1-ELGSY2) and in the In-Phase
Mid-Phase Symbol Synchronizers (IMPSY1-IMPSY2).
Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO), simulates a voltage-controlled oscillator.

Electrical Sources
Timing Pulse Generator On Zero Crossing (ZCGEN), simulates a timing pulse

generator triggered on the zero crossing of an electrical reference signal.
Electrical Noise Generators

Four Electrical Noise Generators are available:
Gaussian, implements a baseband Gaussian-distributed random signal
generator
Rayleigh, implements a baseband Rayleigh-distributed random signal
generator
Uniform, implements a baseband uniform-distributed random signal
generator
Video Source, implements a video like baseband signal generator, based
on a uniformly distributed random process

Electrical Waveform Generator
3.1 Electrical Waveform Generator

This component simulates an electrical waveform generator. Five waveform
shapes are available: bias, sinusoidal, square, sawtooth and clock.
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the five waveform shapes, Bias,
Sinusoidal, Sawtooth, Square and Clock.
3.1.1 Bias Signal Generator

This component simulates a generator of constant level signal. The value of
the output electric signal is always equal to the parameter Level.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Eout(t)
Level
Figure 3.1 Bias signal generator: the generated signal
Parameters
Level [AU]: it is the constant level value of the signal to be generated.
Allowed values: min -; max -; default 1.

Electrical Sources
3.1.2 Sinusoidal Wave Signal Generator

This component simulates a sinusoidal waveform generator.
Eout (t ) = A ⋅ cos (2 π f t + ϕ )
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Eout(t)
T=1/f
A cos (ϕ)
A
Figure 3.2 Sinusoidal wave signal generator: generated signal with

parameters
Parameters
Frequency [GHz]: it is the sinusoid frequency f. Allowed values: min 0; max
BWVBS /2; default 10.
Amplitude [AU]: it is the sinusoid peak amplitude A. Allowed values: min -;
max -; default 1.
Phase [rad]: it is the sinusoid starting phase ϕ, expressed in radians.
Allowed values: min 0; max 2π; default 0.

3.1.3 Sawtooth Wave Signal Generator

This component simulates a sawtooth waveform generator. The sawtooth
signal is specified giving the bit rate, and the slope of the ramp.
The bit-time in OptSim, i.e. the time-duration of the bit, must be an integer
number of time-samples NS (Samples per bit value). The sample-period
depends on the VBS bandwidth, therefore introducing separately the VBS
bandwidth and the bit-rate in Nominal, in general, the requested bit-rate
cannot be simulated because the bit-time is not an exact multiple of the
sample-period. The bit-rate is therefore rounded (the value is displayed by
the Simulated parameter) to the closest value whose bit-time is an exact
multiple of the sample-period.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Eout(t)
A=T∗Slope
t
Edge
T=1/BitRate
Figure 3.3 Sawtooth signal generator: generated signal with parameters
Parameters
Bit Rate Nominal [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the sawtooth signal. Allowed values:
min 0; max BWVBS/2; default 10.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it is the actual simulated bit-rate with the current VBS
bandwidth set in the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
Samples per bit: it is the number of time-sample per bit referred at the
actual Simulated bit-rate.
Period Edge with respect to Simulation Start Time [bit fraction]: it is
the shift of the bit edge respect to the simulation starting time. This shift is
given as a fraction of the bit duration, Edge/T in Figure 3.3. Allowed values:
min 0; max 1; default 0.
Slope [AU/ns]: it is the ramp slope of the sawtooth signal. In Figure 3.3 is
shown the relationship between maximum signal amplitude and slope.
3.1.4 Square Wave Signal Generator

This component simulates a square wave generator. The square wave is
specified giving the bit rate, the duty cycle and the two signal levels.

Electrical Sources

Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Eout(t)
Level 1st part
T=1/BitRate
t
nd
Edge T1st Level 2 part
Figure 3.4 Square wave signal generator: generated signal with parameters
Parameters
Bit Rate Nominal [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the generated square wave signal.
Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/2; default 10.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it is the actual simulated reference bit-rate with the
current VBS bandwidth set in the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
the shift of the bit edge respect to the simulation starting time. This shift is
given as a fraction of the bit duration, Edge/T in Figure 3.4. Allowed values:
Duty Cycle [%]: it is the duty cycle of the square wave. Duty cycle is
defined as the ratio, expressed in percentage, between the duration of the
first part of the bit and the total bit duration: T1st/T in Figure 3.4. Allowed
values: min 0; max 100; default 50.
Level for the 1st part of the period: it is the signal level for the first part
of the bit duration. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Level for the 2nd part of the period: it is the signal level for the second
part of the bit duration. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 1.
3.1.5 Clock Signal Generator

This component simulates an ideal clock generator, providing pulses at given
bit rate. Pulse level is fixed to 1.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical

Eout(t)
T=1/BitRate
1
Edge
Figure 3.5 Clock signal generator: generated signal with parameters
Parameters
Bit Rate Nominal [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the generated clock signal. Allowed
values: min 0; max BWVBS/2; default 10.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it is the actual simulated reference bit-rate with the
the shift of the pulse respect to the simulation starting time. The shift is given
as a fraction of the bit duration, Edge/T in Figure 3.5. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 0.

Electrical Sources
3.2 Ideal Clock Generator with Continuous

Time Resolution
Component name: CCLOCK
Category: Signal Generators
This component simulates an ideal clock generator, providing a clock pulse at
the clock rate Rb, starting at the instant (INT(TSYNC)+1)*DELT (see section
1.5 for further information on DELT). The value of E_cclock when the clock is
set is:
E_cclock = 1 + (SYNC-INT(TSYNC))/DELT
Inputs Outputs
- E_cclock: the output electrical clock

(see section 1.6)
Parameters
Rb [THz]: it is the clock rate.
TSYNC [ps]: the instant within the symbol interval at which the clock pulse
must be generated, if it is not a multiple of DELT the pulse will be generated
the following sample with the value indicated above. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1/Rb; default -.

Impulse Generator
3.3 Impulse Generator

Component name: GENDEL
This component generates a single impulse or a delta train according to the
value of the parameter TSI. When TSI = 0 a single impulse of amplitude AMP
is generated at time TDEL. When TSI > 0 an impulse of amplitude AMP is
generated at time:
TDEL + k*TSI (with k=0,1,2,...)
Inputs Outputs
- E_gendel: the output electrical

signal
Parameters
TSI [ps]: the interval between two impulses. Allowed values: min 0 (single
impulse); max -; default -.
AMP: the amplitude of the generated signal.
TDEL [ps]: the starting instant [ps] of the delta train; or the instant of the
single impulse generation (when TSI = 0). The time is given in number of
samples (see section 1.5 for further information). Allowed values: min 0; max
-; default -.

Electrical Sources
3.4 Clock Signal Voltage-Controlled

Generator
Component name: TIMGEN
This component simulates a clock signal voltage-controlled generator. The
component diagram of the subsystem is the following:
ZTE
DELAY Delay = TCSI
XC XVCO ZTT ZTL

VCO ZCGEN DELAY Delay = TS-TCSI
ZTD
DELAY Delay = TS/2
Figure 3.6 Diagram of the clock signal voltage-controlled generator
The rest period of the VCO is equal to TS; the VCO is controlled by the input
base-band signal XC and the sensitivity of the VCO is defined by the
parameter A.
The signal produced by the VCO is used to generate the timing signal ZTT
when it crosses the zero axis with positive slope; on average, one timing
pulse is produced every NS samples.
In addition to the natural timing pulse ZTT, three other timing pulses are
generated; one of them, ZTD, is delayed by TS/2, the other two placed
symmetrically with respect of ZTD at a distance equal to ±(TS/2 - TCSI). The
time location is the following.
ZTT ZTE ZTD ZTL
TCSI time
TS/2
TS-TCSI
Figure 3.7 Timing of the output signals

Clock Signal Voltage-Controlled Generator
Inputs Outputs
XC: control electrical signal XVCO: VCO electrical output signal

ZTT: electrical clock transition (see
section 1.6)
ZTE: early gate electrical clock
ZTL: late gate electrical clock
ZTD: mid-symbol electrical clock
Parameters
TS [ps]: the average period TS between the pulses.
TCSI [ps]: it is the time offset. Allowed values: min 0; max TS/2; default 0.
A [-]: it is the VCO sensitivity.
Note
This component is used, in particular, to generate all the timing signals used
in the Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizers ELGSY1 (section 23.28) and
ELGSY2 (section 23.29), and in the In-phase Mid-phase Symbol
Synchronizers IMPSY1 (section 23.30) and IMPSY2 (section 23.31).

Electrical Sources
3.5 Voltage Controlled Oscillator

Component name: VCO
This component simulates a voltage-controlled oscillator.
Inputs Outputs
X: input electric signal Y: output electric signal
Parameters
F0 [THz]: the center frequency of the oscillator.
K1: it is the output amplitude factor; the amplitude of the output signal is
K1⋅ 2 .
K2: it is the VCO sensitivity; the phase of the output signal is PHASO +
∫
K2⋅ X .
PHASO [rad]: the initial phase of the VCO.

Timing Pulse Generation on Zero Crossing
3.6 Timing Pulse Generation on Zero

Crossing
Component name: ZCGEN
This component generates a timing pulse when the input electric signal
crosses the zero axis with predefined slope; the timing pulse may be delayed,
with respect to the effective zero crossing, by a predefined offset.
Inputs Outputs
Ein: input base-band signal Eclk: the output electrical clock (see
section 1.6)
Parameters
LSLOPE: the approaching slope of the input signal. If it is set to +1, the
timing pulse is generated when the input signal crosses the zero axis with
positive slope; if it is set to -1, the timing pulse is generated when the input
signal crosses the zero axis with negative slope. Allowed values: min -1; max
+1; default -; zero is excluded.
OFFSET: delay between the effective zero crossing and the generated output
timing pulse. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.

Electrical Sources
3.7 Electrical Noise Generator

This component simulates an electrical noise generator. Four different noise
statistics are available: Gaussian, Rayleigh, uniform and video source.
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the four models, Gaussian,
Rayleigh, Uniform and Video Source.
3.7.1 Gaussian-distributed Noise Signal Generator

This component simulates a Gaussian-distributed white noise signal
generator. It generates a baseband random signal having sample values with
Gaussian distribution. The probability density function for the signal values
has the following expression:
 ( x − Mean )2 
f ( x ) = exp−  (1)
 2σ 2 
where Mean is the mean value and σ is the standard deviation of the
Gaussian distribution.
Signal spectrum is flat over the whole simulated bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Parameters
Mean [AU]: it is the mean value of the Gaussian distribution shown in
equation (1). Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Standard Deviation [AU]: it is the standard deviation σ of the Gaussian
distribution shown in equation (1). Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 1.
One-Sided Spectral Density N0 [dB{AU2/GHz}]: it is the one-sided
spectral density of the generated Gaussian distributed noise signal. Allowed
values: min -; max -; default Value related to σ = 1 with the actual VBS
bandwidth, see equations below.
The One-Sided Spectral Density N0 is related to the Standard Deviation
by:
 1.6σ 2 
N 0 = 10 ⋅ log10   .
 BWVBS 

Electrical Noise Generator
Consequently the opposite relationship is:

N0
BWVBS
σ = 10 10 ⋅ .
1 .6
3.7.2 Rayleigh-distributed Noise Signal Generator

This component simulates a Rayleigh-distributed white noise signal generator.
It generates a baseband random signal having sample values with Rayleigh
distribution. The probability density function for the signal values has the
following expression:
x  x2 
f ( x ) = 2 exp− 2  for x > 0 (1)
S  2S 
where S is the parameter of the distribution. Notice that the mean value
is S π 2 while the standard deviation is S 2 −π 2 .
Signal spectrum is flat over the whole simulated bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Parameters
S Parameter: it is the S parameter of the Rayleigh distribution shown in
equation (1). Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 1.
3.7.3 Uniform-distributed Noise Signal Generator

This component simulates a uniform-distributed white noise signal generator.
It generates a baseband random signal having sample values with uniform
distribution.
The distribution is uniform in the range [Mean-Range/2 - Mean+Range/2].
Signal spectrum is flat over the simulated bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Parameters
Mean [AU]: it is the mean value of the uniform distribution. Allowed values:
min -; max -; default 0.
Range [AU]: it is the interval around the mean value where values are
uniformly distributed. Allowed values: min 0+; max -; default 1.
3.7.4 Video-Like distributed Noise Signal Generator

This component simulates a video like source producing a uniformly
distributed random signal with a limited bandwidth.
The output signal is uniformly distributed over the interval (-Maximum
Absolute Value, +Maximum Absolute Value).
Inputs Outputs

Electrical Sources
- Electrical
Parameters
Maximum Absolute Value [AU]: it is the maximum absolute value of the
generated signal. It fixes the interval of values where the output signal is
uniformly distributed. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1.
-3dB Bandwidth [GHz]: it is the frequency where signal spectrum is -3 dB
below its DC value. Allowed values: min 0; max 0.25*BWVBS; default 10.

4 Logical Sources
Data Source (PRBS generator), simulates a pseudo-random or a deterministic

logical signal generator of arbitrary level (number of bits per symbol).
Logical Clock, simulates a logical clock generator giving an alternated
sequence of 0 and 1.
Logical Sources
4.1 Data Source

This component simulates a pseudo-random or a deterministic logical signal
generator. Baud rate, sequence length and logical signal level (number of bits
per symbol) can be customized. When the logical signal level is greater than
1, the generated serial sequence is loaded into the output logical signal after
a serial-to-parallel conversion.
Beside the logical signal, this component generates an electrical signal
synchronized to the baud rate. The bit-time in OptSim, i.e. the time-duration
of the bit, must be an integer number of time-samples NS (Samples per bit
value). The sample-period depends on the VBS bandwidth, therefore
introducing separately the VBS bandwidth and the reference bit-rate, in
general, the requested bit-rate cannot be simulated because the bit-time is
not an exact multiple of the sample-period. The bit-rate is therefore rounded
(the value is displayed by the Corresponding Simulated Bit-Rate
parameter) to the closest value whose bit-time is an exact multiple of the
sample-period.
The period length of the corresponding pseudo-random sequence is 2D-1 bits,
where D is the degree set by the Degree parameter. You can also specify an
automatic evaluation of the polynomial degree by means of:
log10 ( N b + 1)
D= (1)
log10 2
where Nb is:
N b = int (Tsim ⋅ Rb )
Tsim is the total simulated time span (it is a global simulation parameter) and
Rb is the actual bit-rate (the value displayed by the Corresponding
Simulated Bit-Rate parameter)
Inputs Outputs
- Logical
- Electrical

Bit rate [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the generated logical signal. Allowed
values: min -; max -; default Rb.
Baud rate [Gbaud/s]: it is the baud rate of the generated logical signal,
considering the selected Number of bits per symbol. The baud rate is given
by the bit rate divided by the number of bits per symbol. Allowed values:
min -; max -; default Rb.
Corresponding Simulated Bit-Rate [Gbit/s]: it shows the actual
simulated bit-rate with the current VBS bandwidth set in the Simulation
Parameters dialog window.
Samples per bit: it shows the number of sample per bit at the
Corresponding Simulated Bit-Rate.
Number of bits per symbol [-]: it is the number of bit for each symbol. It
corresponds to the level of the output logical signal. Allowed values: min 1;
max -; default 1.

Data Source
Sequence: sets the kind of bit sequence generation, Pseudo_random or

Deterministic.
Deterministic Sequence Filename: specifies the name of the data file
where the bit sequence is stored. You can choose the file from the file system
clicking on the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking on the Edit
button: it opens an editor window loading the data file. The editor is VI for
Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The filename extension must be DAT in
capital letters, see section 4.1.1 for the grammar rules of this file.
Pseudo-Random Sequence degree: sets the degree of the generating
polynomial. With Automatic the degree is evaluated with formula (1). With
Manual you can change the degree in the Degree field.
Degree [-]: it is the degree of the generating polynomial, it fixes the period
length of the sequence. Allowed values: min 5; max 28; default 7.
Generating Polynomial: it sets how the generating polynomial to be used is
selected from the available set.
Random, the generating polynomial is randomly selected. This option is
useful when several data sources are used in the same project, like in
WDM systems, in order to ensure statistical independence of the used
pseudo-random sequences.
Deterministic, the generating polynomial is selected giving the
Polynomial Number.
Polynomial Number [-]: when the deterministic option is selected, it is the
number of the generating polynomial to be used. Each number refers to a
generating polynomial: each polynomial gives different pseudo-random
sequence. Allowed values: min 1; max see the following table; default 1 (if
the Deterministic option is selected).
Pseudo-Random Sequence Degree Maximum Polynomial Number
5-6 6
7 18
8 16
9 48
Pseudo-Random Sequence Degree Maximum Polynomial Number
10 60
11, 13-27 176
12 144
28 108

Bit edge: it sets how is selected the bit edge (Edge/T, see Figure 4.1) with
respect to the simulation start time.
Random: the bit edge is randomly shifted with respect to simulation
start time. This option is useful when several data sources are used in the
same project, like in WDM systems, in order to ensure statistical
independence of the used pseudo-random sequences.
Deterministic: the bit edge is shifted of a bit time fraction, with respect
to simulation start time, given by the Bit Edge with respect to
simulation start time parameter.

Logical Sources
Bit Edge with respect to simulation start time [bit fraction] [-]: when
the deterministic option is selected, it is the shift of the bit edge with respect
to the simulation start time. This shift is expressed as a fraction of the bit
time (Edge/T, see Figure 4.1). Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0 (if the
Deterministic option is selected).
T=1/BitRate
Edge
Figure 4.1 Data source: generated logical signal with parameters
Starting Point: it sets how is selected the first bit of the simulation, between
the pseudo-random sequence bits.
Random: the first bit of the simulation is randomly selected. This option
is useful when several data sources are used in the same project, like in
WDM systems, in order to ensure statistical independence of the used
pseudo-random sequences.
Deterministic: the first bit of the simulation is selected inside the chosen
pseudo-random sequence giving the Starting point in the sequence
parameter.
Starting point in the sequence [-]: when the deterministic option is
selected, it sets the first bit of the simulation as the n-th bit of the chosen
pseudo-random sequence. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0 (if the
Deterministic option is selected).
Synchronization signal Type: it sets the type of electric synchronization
signal. This signal is synchronized at the baud rate.
Pulse: Pulse signal. Pulses amplitude is fixed to 1.
Square: 50% duty cycle square wave, the amplitudes of the two output
levels are +1 and -1.
Sine: Sine wave with peak amplitude fixed to 1.
4.1.1 Bit Sequence File Grammar

The syntax used for the bit sequence files must satisfy the following rules:
Files must be written in plain ASCII text.
Comment lines (no limit on number) are allowed only between the
starting line and the '##' line.
The bit sequence has a column for each bit per symbol.
Comment_Lines
No Limit on Numbers...
##
number_of_levels (=number_of_columns)
0 1 1 ...
1 0 1 ...
0 0 0 ...
...
Here is an example of bit sequence file for a data source of 4 bit per symbol.
Bit sequence for b34 Data Source
Bit per Symbol = 4

Data Source
*** Channel 3 ***

##
4
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0
...
Note
If the file does not contain enough bits to fill the whole simulation time
window Ts, the bit sequence will be repeated as many times as necessary.
If the file contains N levels, you can specify in the parameters dialog window
a number of levels M ≤ N. The first M levels in the file will be taken into
account.

Logical Sources
4.2 Logical Clock Generator

This component simulates a logical clock generator, it generates an
alternated sequence of 0 and 1.
bandwidth and the reference bit-rate, in general, the requested bit-rate
Inputs Outputs
- Logical
Parameters
Bit Rate Nominal [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the generated clock logical signal.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it is the actual simulated bit-rate with the current VBS
bandwidth set in the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
Samples per bit: it is the number of samples per bit at the actual
Simulated bit-rate.

5 Record&Playback
Optical
Optical Playback, allows to upload an optical signal from an ASCII data file
containing the time domain samples. The file can be generated by a previous
OptSim simulation or using other software tools.
Optical Recorder, allows to export time domain samples of the optical signal
in an ASCII data file to be used further in a OptSim simulation or for post-
processing analysis to be made with other software tools.
Electrical
Electrical Playback, allows to upload an electrical signal from an ASCII data
file containing the time domain samples. The file can be generated by a
previous OptSim simulation or using other software tools.
Electrical Recorder, allows to export time domain samples of the electrical
signal in an ASCII data file to be used further in a OptSim simulation or for
post-processing analysis to be made with other software tools.
Logical
Logical Playback, allows to upload a logical signal from an ASCII data file
containing the time domain samples. The file can be generated by a previous
OptSim simulation or using other software tools.
Logical Recorder, allows to export time domain samples of the logical signal
in an ASCII data file to be used further in a OptSim simulation or for post-
processing analysis to be made with other software tools.
Record&Playback
5.1 Optical Playback

This component simulates an optical signal playback. It uploads time domain
samples stored in an ASCII file, that could be generated during a previous
simulation using the component Optical Recorder (section 5.2), or using
other software tools. It behaves as a source that generates an optical signal.
Refer to the OptSim User Manual for the grammar rules of this file.
MATLAB® routines for exchanging data are available in the OptSim installation
directory, refer to the OptSim User Manual.
Current version of this component has the following limitations:
the simulation must have the same Optical Field Representation
simulation parameters (single or double polarization) of the optical signal
stored in the file (see grammar rules in the OptSim User Manual). If the
file has been created in a previous OptSim simulation, using the Optical
Recorder block, it is mandatory to set the same Optical Field
Representation used before;
the ASCII data file must have at least 1000 samples;
each Optical Playback in a project must refer to a different ASCII data
file;
the ASCII data file must be stored in the same directory of the project;
the ASCII data file name must have the extension .DAT (capital letters).
To guarantee good accuracy of simulated data in the requested Total
Simulated Time Span (Tsim), OptSim adds guard-bands before and after this
time window and run a slightly longer simulation. In addition, delays
management needed by the Time Domain Split Step algorithm used for fiber
simulation, can require actual simulation time window requested at the
system input to be enlarged with respect to the requested one (Tsim).
The ASCII data file to be read by an Optical Playback must have enough
samples to cover the required time window at the system input.
In any case, if the ASCII data file is too short for the simulation that reads it,
OptSim will abort the simulation and show an error message indicating:
the needed number of samples allowing the requested Tsim;
the Tsim that you can simulate using the present ASCII data file (only if
Tsim>0).
Sampling time used to generated data stored in the ASCII file may be
different from the one used in the OptSim simulation that load it. Sub-
sampling and over-sampling are admitted and managed automatically by
OptSim: data interpolation will be performed when needed. Aliasing problems
may arise under this conditions: OptSim does not apply any restrictions to
these cases.
Also the center frequency, at which the optical signals have to refer (see
section 1.4), may be different in the ASCII data file and in the OptSim
project. The only constraint is that the center frequency of the OptSim
simulation have to be inside the following interval:
 Bw Bw 
 F0 − 4 , F0 + 4  ,
 

Optical Playback
where F0 is the center frequency at which refer the optical signals stored in
the ASCII data file and Bw is the time domain bandwidth of the OptSim
simulation.
SPT Behavior
During the SPT simulation, the spectral information about the signal stored in
the ASCII file is evaluated from time samples: the Optical Playback is
considered like an optical source.
Inputs Outputs
- Optical
Parameters
File Name: it is the name of the ASCII data file where time samples of the
optical signal is stored in. It is possible to choose from the file system just
clicking on the Browse button (remember that the ASCII data file have to be
stored in the same directory of the project). It is also possible to edit the file
clicking on the Edit button: a window will be spawn with the data file loaded
in an editor. Default editors is VI for Unix and Notepad for Windows NT.

Record&Playback
5.2 Optical Recorder

This component simulates an optical signal recorder. It writes on a file the
time domain samples of its optical input signal. Saved data can be reused in
a successive OptSim simulation using the Optical Playback (section 5.1) or
for post-processing analysis made with other software tools. Refer to the
OptSim User Manual for the grammar rules of this file.
MATLAB® routines for exchanging data are also available in the OptSim
installation directory. See the OptSim User Manual.
the recorded ASCII data file will be stored in the same directory of the
simulated OptSim project;
the recorded ASCII data file name must have the extension DAT (capital
letters): OptSim automatically add it when not specified;
in parametric runs, an underscore character and the run number are
appended to the file name (e.g. opt_rec.DAT becomes opt_rec_1.DAT,
opt_rec_2.DAT, etc.)
The recorded signal can also be sub-sampled; in this case the user have to be
aware that the sub-sampled signal could be affected by aliasing problems.
SPT Behavior
The Optical Recorder store the optical signal during the time domain
simulation. Since the SPT simulations propagates only a spectral
representation of the optical signal, the Optical Recorder does not work in the
SPT simulations. SPT simulations can be done anyway when an Optical
Recorder is present.
Inputs Outputs
Optical -
Parameters
File Name: it is the name of the ASCII data file where the optical signal will
be stored in. In parametric runs, an underscore character and the run
number are appended to the file name (e.g. opt_rec.DAT becomes
opt_rec_1.DAT, opt_rec_2.DAT, etc.).
Recording time-span: it selects the recording signal time window. With the
Whole option the whole Tsim will be considered. With the Limited option only
the time span set with the following parameters will be considered.
Start Time [ns]: it is the starting time of the signal recording. The available
time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span (Tsim).
Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
End Time [ns]: it is the ending time of the signal recording. The available
Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim; default Tsim.
Sampling Factor: it is the ratio between the simulation time domain
sampling rate and the sub-sampling rate; basically if this factor is equal to n,
one sample out of n is recorded. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.

Electrical Playback
5.3 Electrical Playback

This component simulates an electrical signal playback. It uploads time
domain samples stored in an ASCII file, that could be generated during a
previous simulation using the component Electrical Recorder (section 5.4), or
using other software tools. It behaves as a source that generates the
electrical signal. Refer to the OptSim User Manual for the grammar rules of
this file.
the ASCII data file must have at least 1000 samples;
each Electrical Playback in a project must refer to a different ASCII data
file;
the ASCII data file must be stored in the same directory of the project;
the ASCII data file name must have the extension .DAT (capital letters).
time window and run a slightly longer simulation. In addition delays
management, needed by the Time Domain Split Step algorithm used for fiber
The ASCII data file to be read by an Electrical Playback must have enough
the needed number of samples allowing the requested Tsim;
Tsim>0).
Sampling time used to generated data stored in the ASCII file may be
different from the one used in the OptSim simulation that load it. Sub-
sampling and over-sampling are admitted and managed automatically by
OptSim: data interpolation will be performed when needed. Aliasing problems
may arise under this conditions: OptSim does not apply any restrictions to
these cases.
Inputs Outputs
- Electrical
Parameters
File Name: it is the name of the ASCII data file where time samples of the
electrical signal is stored in. It is possible to choose from the file system just
clicking on the Browse button (remember that the ASCII data file have to be
stored in the same directory of the project). It also possible to edit the file
clicking on the Edit button: a window will be spawn with the data file loaded
in an editor. Default editors is VI for Unix and Notepad for Windows NT.

Record&Playback
5.4 Electrical Recorder

This component simulates an electrical signal recorder. It writes on a file the
time domain samples of the electrical input signal. Saved data can be reused
in a successive OptSim simulation using the Electrical Playback (section 5.3)
or for post-processing analysis made with other software tools. Refer to the
OptSim User Manual for the grammar rules of this file.
the recorded ASCII data file will be stored in the same directory of the
simulated OptSim project;
the recorded ASCII file name must have the extension DAT (capital
letters): OptSim automatically add it when not specified;
appended to the file name (e.g. elt_rec.DAT becomes elt_rec_1.DAT,
elt_rec_2.DAT, etc.)
The recorded signal can also be sub-sampled; in this case the user have to be
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
File Name: it is the name of the ASCII data file where the electrical signal
will be stored in. In parametric runs, an underscore character and the run
number are appended to the file name (e.g. elt_rec.DAT becomes
elt_rec_1.DAT, elt_rec_2.DAT, etc.).
Start Time [ns]: it is the starting time of the signal recording. The available
Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
End Time [ns]: it is the ending time of the signal recording. The available
one sample out of n is recorded. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.

Logical Playback
5.5 Logical Playback

This component simulates a logical signal playback. It uploads time domain
samples stored in an ASCII file, that could be generated during a previous
simulation using the component Logical Recorder (section 5.4), or using other
software tools. It behaves as a source that generates the logical signal. Refer
to the OptSim User Manual for the grammar rules of this file.
the ASCII data file must have at least 1000 samples
each Logical Playback in a project must refer to a different ASCII data file
the ASCII data file must be stored in the same directory as the project
the ASCII data file name must have the extension .DAT (capital letters)
time window and runs a slightly longer simulation. In addition, delay
management needed by the Time Domain Split Step algorithm used for fiber
The ASCII data file to be read by a Logical Playback must have enough
the needed number of samples allowing the requested Tsim
Tsim>0)
Sampling time used to generate data stored in the ASCII file may be different
from the one used in the OptSim simulation that loads it. Sub-sampling and
over-sampling are admitted and managed automatically by OptSim: data
interpolation will be performed when needed. Aliasing problems may arise
under these conditions: OptSim does not apply any restrictions to these
cases.
In the parameters dialog window you must specify the Nominal bit rate of
the logical signal. It should be the same bit rate used to create the ASCII file.
If you change the bit rate you may have unpredictable results in simulation.
depends on the VBS bandwidth. Therefore introducing separately the VBS
bandwidth and the bit-rate in Nominal, the requested bit-rate cannot be
simulated in general, because the bit-time is not an exact multiple of the
Inputs Outputs
- Logical
Parameters
Bit Rate Bit rate (Nominal) [Gbit/s]: the bit-rate of the logical signal. Allowed
l 0 /2 d f l 0

Record&Playback
values: min 0; max BWVBS/2; default 10.

Baud rate [Gbaud/s]: the baud rate of the logical signal, considering the
selected Number of bits per symbol. The baud rate is given by the bit rate
divided by the number of bits per symbol.
Corresponding Simulated Bit-Rate [Gbit/s]: the actual simulated bit-rate
with the current VBS bandwidth set in the Simulation Parameters dialog
window.
Samples per bit: the number of time-sample per bit at the Corresponding
Simulated Bit-Rate.
Number of bits per symbol [-]:the number of bit for each symbol. It
corresponds to the level of the output logical signal. Allowed values: min 1;
max -; default 1.
File Name: the name of the ASCII data file where time samples of the logical
signal is stored in. It is possible to choose from the file system just clicking on
the Browse button (remember that the ASCII data file has to be stored in
the same directory as the project). It is also possible to edit the file clicking
on the Edit button: a window will be spawn with the data file loaded in an
editor. Default editors are VI for UNIX and Notepad for Windows.

Logical Recorder
5.6 Logical Recorder

This component simulates a logical signal recorder. It writes to a file the time
domain samples of the logical input signal. Saved data can be reused in a
successive OptSim simulation using the Logical Playback (section 5.3) or for
post-processing analysis made with other software tools. Refer to the OptSim
User Manual for the grammar rules of this file.
the recorded ASCII data file will be stored in the same directory as the
simulated OptSim project
the recorded ASCII file name must have the extension DAT (capital
letters): OptSim automatically adds it when not specified
appended to the file name (e.g. log_rec.DAT becomes log_rec_1.DAT,
log_rec_2.DAT, etc.)
The recorded signal can also be sub-sampled; in this case you have to be
Inputs Outputs
Logical -
Parameters
File Name: the name of the ASCII data file where the logical signal will be
stored in. In parametric runs, an underscore character and the run number
are appended to the file name (e.g. log_rec.DAT becomes log_rec_1.DAT,
log_rec_2.DAT, etc.).
Start Time [ns]: the starting time of the signal recording. The available time
window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span (Tsim). Allowed
values: min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
End Time [ns]: the ending time of the signal recording. The available time
window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span (Tsim). Allowed
values: min 0; max Tsim; default Tsim.
Logical Level: the number of bits per symbol of the input signal. Allowed
values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Sampling Factor: the ratio between the simulation time domain sampling
rate and the sub-sampling rate; basically if this factor is equal to n, one
sample out of n is recorded. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.

6 Optical Transmitters
NRZ Standard Transmitter (compound component NRZ_TX_1ch), implements

a single channel NRZ transmitter based on CW laser and external Mach-
Zehnder modulator.
Four Channels NRZ Standard Transmitter (compound component
WDM_TX_4ch), implements a WDM 4-channels NRZ transmitter based on CW
lasers and external Mach-Zehnder modulators.
Single Channel 2DPSK Transmitter (compound component 2dpsk_tx): it
implements a single channel 2DPSK transmitter based on a CW laser and
optical phase modulator.
16-Channel 2DPSK Transmitter (compound component
WDM_16ch_tx_2dpsk): it implements a 16-channel 2DPSK with a cascade of
16 single 2DPSK CC transmitters.
Optical Transmitters
6.1 NRZ Standard Transmitter

This compound component implements a single channel NRZ transmitter
based on a CW laser externally modulated with a Mach-Zehnder modulator.
Figure 6.1 NRZ_TX_1ch compound component network
SPT Behavior
The purpose of SPT simulations is not to analyze the modulation of the
channels, but simply to study the system in terms of average power per
channel and noise level. The only actions of intensity modulation transmitter
that have to be taken into account for SPT purposes are the optical spectral
modifications introduced on the channel levels and on the noise level. An
exactly squared NRZ modulation presents an average power reduction equal
to 3 dB, plus the modulator excess loss: this is the assumption we made for
this component.
Inputs Outputs
- TX_output: optical
Parameters
Bit_rate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate at which the data source operates. Allowed
values: min -; max -; defaut 10.
Laser_frequency [THz]: the CW laser emission frequency. Allowed values:
min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
Laser_linewidth [MHz]: the spectrum width at half maximum. Allowed
values: min 0; max -; default: 10.
Laser_power [dBm]: the output power of the laser. Allowed values: min -;
max -; default: 0.
Modulator_chirp_factor: the chirp factor α as it is defined in [1]. Note that
a non-ideal extinction ratio induces an implicit chirping that is not taken into
account by the chirp factor. See section 8.2 for further explanation on the
modulator parameters. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Modulator_excess_loss [dB]: the value of a constant extra loss introduced
by the modulator, independently by the electrical signal. See section 8.2 for
further explanation on the modulator parameters. Allowed values: min 0.
max -; default 3.
Modulator_extinction_ratio [dB]: the ratio between the output optical
power corresponding to the maximum transmission value and the one
corresponding to the minimum transmission value. See section 8.2 for further
explanation on the modulator parameters.
PRBS_sequence_degree: It is the degree of the PRBS generating
polynomial. The period length of the corresponding pseudo-random sequence
is 2X-1 bits, where X is the degree. Allowed values: min 5; max 28; default 7.

Four Channel NRZ Standard Transmitter
6.2 Four Channel NRZ Standard

Transmitter
This compound component implements a four channel NRZ WDM transmitter.
Every channel is composed by a CW laser externally modulated with a Mach-
Zehnder modulator. It is based on the single channel transmitter compound
component NRZ_TX_1ch.opm. Lower is the channel number the lowest is the
frequency.
Figure 6.2 WDM_TX_4ch compound component network
SPT Behavior
modifications introduced on the channel levels and on the noise level. An
exactly squared NRZ modulation presents an average power reduction equal
to 3 dB, plus the modulator excess loss: this is the assumption we made for
this component.
Inputs Outputs
- optical_output: optical
Parameters
Bit_rate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate at which the data sources operate. Allowed
values: min -; max -; defaut 10.
Center_frequency [THz]: the center frequency of the WDM aggregate.
Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
Channel_Spacing [THz]: the frequency offset between each channel.
Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.1.
Laser_linewidth [MHz]: the spectrum width at half maximum of each laser.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default: 10.
Laser_power_dBm [dBm]: the output power of the lasers. Allowed values:
min -; max -; default: 0.
Modulator_chirp_factor: the chirp factor α as it is defined in [1]. Note that
a non-ideal extinction ratio induces an implicit chirping that is not taken into
account by the chirping factor. See section 8.2 for further explanation on the
modulator parameters. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Modulator_excess_loss [dB]: The value of a constant extra loss
introduced by the modulators, independent by the electrical signal. See

section 8.2 for further explanation on the modulator parameters. Allowed

values: min 0. max -; default 3.
Modulator_extinction_ratio [dB]: The ratio between the output optical
power corresponding to the maximum transmission value and the one
corresponding to the minimum transmission value. See section 8.2 for further
explanation on the modulator parameters.
PRBS_sequence_degree: It is the degree of the PRBS generating
polynomial. The period length of the corresponding pseudo-random sequence
is 2X-1 bits, where X is the degree. Allowed values: min 5; max 28; default 7.

2DPSK Transmitter
6.3 2DPSK Transmitter

This compound component implements a single channel 2DPSK transmitter
based on a CW laser and optical phase modulator.
Figure 6.3 2dpsk_tx compound component network
SPT Behavior
modifications introduced on the channel levels and on the noise level.
The 2DPSK transmitter does not introduce any contribution in term of power
budget so a single tone at the nominal center frequency of the source is
considered.
Inputs Outputs
- dpsk_t_amp_pi_output: optical
Parameters
Bitrate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate at which the data source operates. Allowed
values: min -; max -; defaut Rb.
Fc [THz]: the CW laser emission frequency. Allowed values: min flowSPT;
max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
PRBS [degree]: the degree of the PRBS generating polynomial for the data
source. Allowed values: min 5; max 28; default 12.
Power [dBm]: the output power of the laser. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default: -12.
Swing [V]: it is the value of the output signal for the driver when a logical
one is transmitted. Allowed values: min -; max -; default +5.
Transmitter_BW [GHz]: it is the –3 dB cutoff frequency for the electrical
filter. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb.
Vpi [V]: the input voltage swing for the optical phase modulator that
generates a π (180°) phase shift on the optical signal. Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default 5.

6.4 16-Channel 2DPSK Transmitter

This compound component implements a 16 channel 2DPSK transmitter.
Each channel is composed by a CW laser and an optical phase modulator. It
is based on the single channel transmitter compound component
2dpsk_tx.opm. Lower is the channel number the lowest is the frequency.
Figure 6.4 WDM_16ch_tx_2dpsk compound component network
SPT Behavior
modifications introduced on the channel levels and on the noise level.
The 2DPSK transmitter does not introduce any contribution in term of power
budget so for each channel a single tone at the nominal center frequency of
the source is considered.
Inputs Outputs
- opt_out: optical
Parameters
Bitrate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate at which the data sources operates. Allowed
Ch_power [dBm]: the output power of the lasers. Allowed values: min -;
max -; default: -10.
Channel_spacing [THz]: the frequency offset between each channel.

16-Channel 2DPSK Transmitter
PRBS [degree]: the degree of the PRBS generating polynomial for the data
sources. Allowed values: min 5; max 28; default 12.
Transmitter_BW [GHz]: it is the –3 dB cutoff frequency for the electrical
filters. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb.

6.5 References
[1] F. Koyama and K. Iga, Frequency chirping in external modulators, J.
Lightwave Technol., vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 87-33, Feb. 1988.

7 Fibers
The Optical fiber link simulates the propagation of the optical signal through a
fiber span. The implemented fiber-model fully takes into account the linear
and non-linear phenomena influencing propagation, as well as polarization
related effects. In particular, PMD and birefringence are simulated
considering their interaction with the non-linearities. PMD and birefringence
are simulated by taking into account of the statistical variation of the
principal axes of the fiber. Non-linear Kerr effect is simulated considering its
instantaneous (SPM, XPM, FWM, PG) and delayed (Raman cross-talk and
amplification) effects on the Optical signal. The frequency variation of the
dispersion is modeled using a 5th order polynomial expansion, and the
statistical variation of the dispersion may also be specified. Fiber loss may
also be defined as a function of frequency (or wavelength) using a second-
order polynomial. In addition to specifying polynomial coefficients, both fiber
dispersion and loss may be defined through an ASCII file (measured values
versus frequency or wavelength). Points of loss ASCII file may also be
interpolated through a spline. The Raman profile may also be specified
through an ASCII file. Raman amplification is simulated together with the
generated in-line ASE noise. Single- and double-scattered ASE noise
components are simulated. The Raman pumps can be specified as either co-
or counter-propagating with respect to the signal propagation. The level of
simulation accuracy obtained can be adjusted by turning on and off
individually many of the above mentioned effects (see “Advanced Control
Parameters” section).
Fibers
7.1 Optical Fiber Link

This component models the propagation of the optical signal along an optical
fiber span. It is one of the fundamental and most complex components of the
OptSim library. The non-linear Schrödinger equation governing the
propagation of the optical field is integrated using “Time Domain Split-Step
(TDSS)” [1], an improved version of the well-known “Split-Step Numerical
Method” [2]. Stochastic variations of all fiber characteristics and polarization
related phenomena are taken into account [3].
You can create your own fiber or use one of the pre-defined types available.
Most of these are extracted from commercial components data sheets.
SPT Behavior
During SPT simulation fiber links model the propagation of the optical
spectrum taking into account attenuation only. If Raman amplification and
Raman Cross-Talk are turned on, both the spectral-dependent gain and
cross-talk effects are taken into account as well as introduction of the ASE. At
the end of simulation Raman gain and noise spectra plots are available (if
they are enabled).
Note
Choosing the popup menu command View Chart on the fiber link appears
the Raman gain plot only. To display the noise spectra plot you have to start
the OptSim Data Display clicking the button in the OptSim tool bar and
selecting it from the chart tree hierarchy (Chart tab).
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Note
During the analysis of the parameters of a password protected custom fiber,
you may not access the values of the parameters marked as hidden. The
parameters marked as visible are accessible as read-only parameters, but
may not be edited. Whenever a parameter is marked as hidden, its value is
replaced by asterisks.
Basic Attributes Parameters

Type: Lists the fiber types that can be used in a project being designed.
There are several pre-defined, realistic fiber types available, plus the ideal
fiber that simulate an ideal optical link.
The ideal optical link can be used to connect optical components without
taking into account any propagation effect of the fiber, that is, it is a link that
does not modify the optical signal.
The pre-defined fiber list includes conventional fiber types (Standard SM, DS
Normal, DS Anomalous and DCF) and most common commercial types
(Corning LEAF, Corning SMF28, Corning SMF28e, Lucent TrueWave,
Lucent AllWave, Alcatel SMF, Alcatel Teralight, Furukawa SMF332, Pirelli
Widelight, Pirelli Freelight, Pirelli Deeplight, Sumitomo Z fiber, Sumitomo
Z-PLUS fiber).
For each of them the parameters describing the fiber have already been
specified to accurately model the typical behavior of these fibers.
The following table summarizes the values of most important parameters
extracted from the data sheet of each commercial product. For all parameters

Optical Fiber Link
which are missing in data sheets specification, the default OptSim values
have been used.
Fiber Type Attenuation Chromatic Dispersion MFD Polarization
α0 D D' slope Aeff PMD

[dB/km] [ps/nm/km] [ps/nm2/km] [µm2] [ps/√km]
PirelliWIDELIGHT_1550 0.24 -6.85 0.157 51 ≤ 0.1
PirelliWIDELIGHT_1625 0.25 -0.1 0.107 51 ≤ 0.1
PirelliFREELIGHT_1550 0.23 4.3 0.114 72 ≤ 0.1
PirelliFREELIGHT_1625 0.25 11.2 0.11 72 ≤ 0.1
PirelliDEEPLIGHT_1550 0.23@1560nm -2.2 @1560nm 0.12 70 ≤ 0.1
CorningSMF28_1310 0.34 0 @1313nm 0.086 66.5 ≤ 0.1
CorningSMF28_1550 0.19 16 0.086 85 ≤ 0.1
CorningSMF28e_1310 0.34 0 @1313nm 0.086 66.5 ≤ 0.1
CorningSMF28e_1550 0.19 16 85 ≤ 0.1
CorningLEAF 0.2 @1550nm 4 @1550nm 0.1 @1550nm 72 ≤ 0.1
CorningLEAF_submarine 0.2 @1550nm 0 @1580nm 0.11 @1580nm 71 ≤ 0.1
FurukawaSMF332_1310 0.32 0 0.092 68 ≤ 0.5
FurukawaSMF332_1550 0.18 18 0.092 86.5 ≤ 0.5
AlcatelSMF_1310 0.3 0 0.086 63.6 ≤ 0.1
AlcatelSMF_1550 0.2 16 81.67 ≤ 0.1
AlcatelTERALIGHT_1550 0.205 8 0.058 65 ≤ 0.1
AlcatelTERALIGHT_1620 0.22 10.9 @1600nm 0.058 65 ≤ 0.1
LucentTRUEWAVE_1600 0.2 4.5 0.045 55 ≤ 0.1
LucentTRUEWAVE_1550 0.2 7 0.045 59 ≤ 0.1
LucentALLWAVE_1310 0.3 0 @1312nm 0.088 66 ≤ 0.1
LucentALLWAVE_1550 0.2 0 @1312nm 0.088 80 ≤ 0.1
SumitomoZ_1550 0.17 18.5 0.056 80
SumitomoZPLUSa_1550 0.168 20.5 0.059 110
Note
For some commercial fibers more than one OptSim type can be present in the
list. Each fiber type is defined to represent the same behavior in a different
frequency range.
Moreover, from those data sheets where the measured attenuation curve
versus wavelength is reported, proper values of the attenuation coefficients
have been computed respect to a particular reference wavelength.
As far as Raman profile is concerned some of the OptSim fiber types use
measured data provided by file (see section 7.1.3).
For the Lucent fiber it is possible require a specific maximum individual fiber
loss value during the purchase. Then the attenuation value reported in
OptSim is only a reference and you can change it in order to simulate his own
fiber type.
You can also define your own fiber types by modifying these parameters by
clicking on the Edit/View button. This action opens a secondary dialog
window composed of five sub-sections that allow definition of the parameters
that characterize fiber phenomena. Remember that you cannot modify
directly the predefined realistic fiber, i.e., to create a custom fiber, you have
to select one of the pre-defined realistic fiber-types, and modify it by clicking
on the edit/view button. When you modifies a parameter, OptSim always
creates a copy of the fiber (a custom fiber) and applies your changes. See the
OptSim User Manual for more information on custom fibers.
The Remove button removes a custom fiber from the list. The button is
disabled when you select a predefined fiber (ideal or realistic types).
Length [km]: This parameter specifies the length of the fiber span. Allowed

Fibers
Length Statistical Variation [%]: This parameter specifies the statistical

variation var expressed as a percentage of the length of the fiber span. If a
non-zero value is specified in this field, the actual length of the span is
randomly chosen in the range L·(1 ± var/100) where L is the length specified
in the Length field. Allowed values: min 0; max 100; default 0
These last two parameters may be specified independently by the fiber type
used. This means that the same type of fiber - either predefined or custom -
can be employed several times in the same project with different lengths and
different statistical variations.
Advanced Control Parameters

Advanced control permits turning on and off several different fiber
phenomena. In this manner, you may analyze the impact of only a few
effects at a time or investigate the interactions between certain specific
phenomena.
Fiber Non-Linearity. This switch turns on/off the fiber non-linearity, i.e. the
Kerr effect. The Kerr effect is the dependence of the refractive index on the
intensity of the electric field due to propagating optical power [4]. When the
switch is set to on, the Kerr effect is taken into account using a complete
numerical split-step method. When the switch is set to off, the non-linear
coefficient is set to zero, and a simplified numerical method is applied,
discarding the non-linear effects. Note that if the non-linear coefficient is set
to zero, instead of setting the switch to off, the complete numerical split-step
method is nonetheless implemented. Therefore, we encourage you to switch
off the non-linearity whenever a linear regime simulation of fiber propagation
is required.
Raman Cross-Talk. This switch turns on/off the delayed response of the
Kerr effect, i.e., the phenomenon inducing Raman cross-talk. This switch may
be enabled only if the Kerr effect is already enabled. Again, note that if the
Raman coefficient fR is set to zero, without setting this switch to off, the
Raman cross-talk will be computed anyway. Therefore, we encourage you to
switch off the Raman effect whenever a simulation of the delayed response of
the Kerr effect is not required. This effect is also taken into account during
SPT simulations.
Fiber SBS. This switch turns on/off the simulation of steady-sate stimulated
Brillouin scattering effects.
Fiber PMD. This switch turns on/off the simulation of fiber PMD. When it is
set to off, the Differential Group Delay (DGD) inducing fiber PMD is turned
off. Otherwise the phenomenon is simulated. The switch may be used only if
a dual polarization simulation has been chosen in the Simulation Parameters
dialog window.
Fiber Birefringence. This switch turns on/off the fiber birefringence. The
switch may be used only if a dual polarization simulation has been chosen in
the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
Recovering original polarization frame. This switch turns on/off the
polarization rotation induced by the birefringence. If the switch is turned on
the optical field polarization, at the end of the fiber span, is rotated to recover
the whole rotation induced by the birefringence during propagation.
Therefore, if this feature is used when the other polarization-related
phenomena (non-linearity and PMD) are turned off, the polarization of the
output optical field is exactly the same as the input optical field. The switch
can be used only if a dual polarization simulation has been chosen in the
Simulation Parameters dialog window. Purpose of this switch is to allow the

Optical Fiber Link
analysis of the effects on the polarization induced by PMD and non-linearity

only.
Raman Amplifier Parameters

Raman Amplifier. This switch turns on/off the fiber Raman amplifier. To
obtain Raman amplification a pump is needed. The pump characteristics must
be specified in the related fiber dialog window. Raman amplification is
simulated separately from the fiber non-linearity, since it is introduced in the
frequency domain through a specific gain shape and is applied at each step of
the split-step method. Therefore, Raman amplification may be simulated even
if the other non-linearities are turned off, as in VBS or SPT simulations.
Raman Gain and Noise Spectra Plots. This switch turns on/off chart
generation related to Raman amplification (both on SPT and VBS
simulations). These charts can be visualized using the popup menu command
View Chart on the fiber. The two charts represent the on-off gain and noise
figure versus the frequency over the simulation bandwidth. After an SPT
simulation the popup menu command View Chart on the fiber link displays
only the Raman gain plot. To display the noise spectra plot you have to start
the OptSim Data Display clicking the button in the OptSim tool bar and
selecting it from the chart tree hierarchy (Chart tab).
Note
The on-off gain is defined as the ratio of the power level of the signal at the
end of the fiber span with the pump turned on and the power level with the
pump turned off. The noise-figure definition implemented in OptSim is the
one proposed by Hansen in [5]:
 1  2 G ASE ( f )  
NF ( f ) = 10 log10  1 + 
 Gon − off ( f )  hf  
where Gon-off(f) is the on-off gain at the frequency f, and GASE(f) is the power
spectral density of the ASE noise at the frequency f, at the output of the fiber
span.
Signal and Pumps Powers evolution along fiber Plots. This switch turns
on/off chart generation related to Signals and Pumps Powers evolution along
fiber with Raman amplification, during VBS simulations only. The charts
represent forward signal power evolution, co-propagating and counter-
propagating pumps powers evolution along fiber.
Import from RAMAN Amplifier Design Toolkit, imports the file with
extension ora, coming from the Multi-pump RA Design Toolkit. In this way all
the Raman multi-pump parameters are automatically fitted to obtain the
required Raman flat gain in the SPT bandwidth set in the toolkit.
Pumps Power Filename: name of the data file containing the pump powers
vs. frequency (or wavelength). You may choose the file you wish to use by
clicking on the Browse button. You may also edit the file by clicking on the
Edit button: this opens an editor window and loads the data file. The editor is
VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows. The file syntax must follow the format
specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed in [THz], the
wavelength in [nm] and the power in [dBm] or [mW]. The filename extension
must be DAT in capital letters.
No Raman Noise: This choice automatically disable ASE noise generation
due to Raman Amplification
Operating Temperature[K]: It is the absolute temperature of the fiber.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 300.

Fibers
Single This section specifies the single pump condition for Raman amplification. Two
Pumping options are available. Co-propagating assumes the pump is a CW signal
propagating in the same direction as the signal. Counter-propagating
assumes the pump is a CW signal propagating in the opposite direction as the
signal. Note that the pump propagates only through the fiber span where it is
defined, and does not influence other attached fiber spans.
Pump Power [dBm] or [mW]: the pump power injected into the fiber at
the beginning (for co-propagating pumps) or at the end (for counter-
propagating pumps) of the fiber span. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default
100
Pump Frequency/Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the frequency/wavelength
of the CW Raman amplification pump. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default
1000 (nm).
Pump Attenuation [dB/Km]: the fiber loss at the pump frequency, it
specifies the pump attenuation as it propagates through the fiber span.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1.2.
Multi Pumping This section specifies the multi-pumping condition for Raman amplification.
Pump powers and attenuation must be specified from corresponding files.
Pumps Power Filename: name of the data file containing the pump powers
vs. frequency (or wavelength). You may choose the file you wish to use by
VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows. The file syntax must follow the format
specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed in [THz], the
wavelength in [nm] and the power in [dBm] or [mW]. The filename extension
Pumps Attenuation Filename: name of the data file containing the pumps
loss profile vs. frequency (or wavelength). You may choose the file you wish
to use by clicking on the Browse button. You may also edit the file by
clicking on the Edit button: this opens an editor window and loads the data
file. The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows. The file syntax must
follow the loss format specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be
expressed in [THz], the wavelength in [nm] and the loss in [dB/km]. The
filename extension must be DAT in capital letters.
Files format: specifies pump powers measure unit (Power in dBm or
Power in mW), and whether the powers and loss are expressed either as a
function of Frequency or Wavelength.
7.1.1 Loss Section

This section is used to define the loss characteristics of the fiber. First and
second order coefficients of the loss polynomial may be specified. The
function αdB(f) is defined as follows:
α dB ( f ) = α 0 dB + α1dB ( f − f 0,loss ) + α 2 dB ( f − f 0,loss )2 (1)
Where f0,loss is the reference frequency. You may specify the coefficient values
or supply a description file. In the latter case the file must contain the profile
of loss as a function of frequency or wavelength. This feature may be used,
for example, to introduce data from measured results.
OptSim uses the least square method to interpolate the points stored in the
loss ASCII file and to extract the coefficient values to use in (1).

Optical Fiber Link
Alternatively the loss curve can be processed by splines interpolation thus

following properly the fiber loss profile trend, in particular when the typical
water absorption peak is included in the supplied curve.
The OptSim library provides some measured loss profiles described by the
following files:
Loss_CorningSMF28.DAT
Loss_CorningSMF28e.DAT
Loss_FurukawaSM332.DAT
Note
These files are stored in the ProductInstDir\lib\OpLib\Fiber\ directory.
Parameters
From file: specifies that the loss is described through an ASCII data file.
Filename: name of the data file containing the loss profile vs. frequency (or
wavelength). You may choose the file you wish to use by clicking on the
Browse button. You may also edit the file by clicking on the Edit button: this
opens an editor window and loads the data file. The editor is VI for Unix or
Notepad for Windows NT. The file syntax must follow the format specified in
section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed in [THz], the wavelength in
[nm] and the loss in [dB/km]. The filename extension must be DAT in capital
letters. OptSim actually derives the above three alpha coefficients through a
least square algorithm and uses the coefficients in the simulation.
Note
The data file must be saved in the same directory where the fiber model is
saved. For a custom fiber saved in the current design, the proper directory is
the one where the design (opf or opm file) is saved. You may avoid this
restriction by using the procedure described for password protection of
custom fibers at the end of section 7.1.3
File format: specifies that the loss is expressed either as a function of

Frequency or Wavelength.
Used Loss Profile: choosing the File Interpolation (spline) option OptSim
interpolates with splines the points of the loss file; choosing the File derived
coefficients option OptSim interpolates the points of the loss file with the
least square method in order to extract the coefficient values to use in (1).
Reference Frequency/Wavelength for Loss [THz] or [nm]: is the
reference frequency f0,loss for the loss polynomial expansion. Allowed values:
min 0; max -.
α0dB [dB/km]: fiber attenuation at the reference frequency. Allowed values:
min 0 dB/km; max -.
α1dB [dB/km/THz]: the first order expansion coefficient of the fiber
attenuation. Allowed values: min -; max -.
α2dB [dB/km/THz2]: the second order expansion coefficient of the fiber
attenuation. Allowed values: min -; max -.
Update: updates the values of the loss coefficients for the loss polynomial
expansion. It is active only if loss is introduced from file. As described above,
OptSim derives values for the three coefficients through a least square
algorithm.

Fibers
7.1.2 Dispersion Section

This section defines the dispersion characteristics of the fiber. Second, third,
fourth and fifth order dispersion coefficients are taken into account. You may
directly specify the coefficient values or supply a description file. In the latter
case the file must contain the profile of dispersion β2 as a function of
frequency or D as a function of wavelength. This feature is used to introduce
data from a measured set of results.
In addition, a random variation of the second order dispersion is taken into
account using two different statistical distributions and a defined correlation
length. The statistical variation of fiber dispersion is emulated by a cascade of
short fiber spans the characteristics of which are defined at the beginning of a
simulation. These characteristics do not vary during the simulation. A
different random evolution of dispersion maybe obtained by re-simulating the
project with a different random seed.
Parameters
From file: specifies that the dispersion is described through a data file.
Filename: name of the data file that describes the dispersion β2 vs.
frequency or D vs. wavelength. You may choose the file you wish to use by
VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The file syntax must follow the
format specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed in [THz],
the wavelength in [nm], the dispersion coefficients β2 in [ps2/km] and D in
[ps/nm/km]. The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters.
Note
The data file must be saved in the same directory where the fiber model is
saved. For a custom fiber saved in the current design, the proper directory is
the one where the design (opf or opm file) is saved. You may avoid this
restriction by using the procedure described for password protection of
custom fibers at the end of section 7.1.3
File format: specifies that the loss is expressed either as β2 vs. Frequency
or as D vs. Wavelength.
Reference Frequency/Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the reference
frequency for the following dispersion parameters. Allowed values: min 0;
max -.
β2 [ps2/km] or D [ps/nm/km]: the dispersion value of the fiber at the
reference frequency/wavelength. β2 is related to D: D = − 2πc λ2 β 2 , where λr is
r
the reference wavelength and c is the speed of light. Allowed values: min -;
max -.
β3 [ps3/km] or D' [ps/nm2/km]: the third order fiber dispersion, which is
the variation of the dispersion with respect to the reference
frequency/wavelength. The value may be specified using the third order
derivative of the propagation constant β(ω) with respect to the angular
frequency β3 = ∂3β/∂ω3, or the derivative of the D coefficient with respect to
the wavelength ∂D/∂λ. Allowed values: min -; max -.
β4 [ps4/km]: the fourth order dispersion, that is the fourth order derivative
of the propagation constant β(ω) with respect to the angular frequency β4
= ∂4β/∂ω4. Allowed values: min -; max -.

Optical Fiber Link
β5 [ps5/km]: the fifth order dispersion, that is the fifth order derivative of
the propagation constant β(ω) with respect to the angular frequency β5
= ∂5β/∂ω5. Allowed values: min -; max -.
Update: updates the values of the dispersion coefficients for the dispersion
polynomial. As described above, OptSim derives values for these four
coefficients through a least square algorithm.
Note
β2, β3, β4, and β5 are the dispersion coefficients of the series expansion of the
propagation constant β(ω) versus the angular frequency (ω is the angular
frequency, f is the frequency and they are related through ω = 2πf) around
the reference angular frequency ωr, given by the following expression:
β (ω ) = β 0 + β1 (ω − ω r ) +
β2
(ω − ω r )2 + β 3 (ω − ω r )3 +
2 6
β4 β5
+ (ω − ω r )4 + (ω − ω r )5 + 0(ω − ω r )6
24 120
Therefore, the second order dispersion at ω is given by the following
expression
β 2 (ω ) = β 2 + β 3 (ω − ω r ) +
β4
(ω − ω r )2 + β 5 (ω − ω r )3
2 6
where ωr=2πfr, and fr is the reference frequency. The parameters of the
dispersion expression are not constrained. Any value is allowed. It is
important to remember that a higher dispersion value implies longer
simulation times.
7.1.3 Grammar for Fiber Files

All files used for the specification of fiber loss or dispersion versus frequency
or wavelength must have the extension .DAT (i.e. in capital letters).
The syntax used for these files must satisfy the following rules:
A mandatory first line contains the keyword that identifies the file type.
This keyword is OptSimFdisp for dispersion files, OptSimFloss for loss
files and OptSimFRaman for Raman profile files (or nothing for kscale
files).
All comment lines must begin with a '#' character.
Comment lines are allowed only between the starting line and the '##'
line.
Before data may be introduced, a line must be inserted that begins with
two '#' characters. After this line data may be introduced.
Each data line must two-column entries, each column must contain the
following:

Fibers
File First Column Second Column

Loss frequencies/wavelength [THz] or [nm] loss [dB/km]
dispersion, β2 [ps2/km]
Dispersion frequencies/wavelength [THz] or [nm]
or D [ps/nm/km]
frequencies/wavelength [THz] or [nm]
Raman Raman profile
relative to reference
Gain (gR) [m/W·10-13]
frequency/wavelength
frequencies/wavelength [THz] or [nm]
Raman Raman profile
relative to reference
Gain (CR) [1/Km/W]
frequency/wavelength
Raman
scaling frequencies/wavelength [THz] or [nm] kscale [-]
factor
First column – the abscissa column - (either frequency or wavelength) must
be in ascending order. It is not required that the frequencies/wavelengths be
equally spaced. Two or more abscissa may not contain the same value. Loss
and Raman profile can be expressed as a function of frequency or
wavelength; dispersion in terms of β2 must be expressed as a function of
frequency, while dispersion in terms of D must be expressed as a function of
wavelength. The following examples illustrate the grammar:
Example 1
OptSimFloss 1
#
# Fiber loss file
# General comment
#
# - Abscissas in frequency [THz]
##
192.449997 0.102332
192.450546 0.103574
192.451096 0.114564
192.45166 0.117434
192.452209 0.134456
192.452759 0.146576
192.453308 0.152977
192.453873 0.175161
192.454422 0.181952
192.454971 0.192345
192.455521 0.210035
...
Example 2
OptSimFdisp 1
#
# Fiber dispersion file
# General comment
#
# - Abscissas in frequency [THz]
# - Dispersion in beta [ps2/Km]
##
192.449997 -19.2736
192.450546 -19.3978
192.451096 -19.4726
192.45166 -19.5287
192.452209 -19.6972
192.452759 -19.8082
192.453308 -19.9625
192.453873 -20.2162
192.454422 -20.3908
...
Example 3

Optical Fiber Link
OptSimFRaman 1
#
# Fiber Raman gain file
# General comment
#
# - Abscissas in relative frequency [THz]
##
10 0.769
10.5 0.822
11 0.873
11.5 0.921
12 0.959
12.5 0.981
12.75 0.985
13 0.981
13.25 0.975
13.5 0.963
14 0.91
14.5 0.973
14.75 0.882
Example 4
OptSimFRaman 1
#
# Fiber Raman profile (CR ) file
# General comment
#
# - Raman gain profile in [1/Km/W]
# - Abscissas in relative frequency [THz] respect to the reference freq
##
10 0.014
10.5 0.015
11 0.016
11.5 0.017
12 0.0174
12.5 0.0178
12.75 0.0179
13 0.0178
13.25 0.0177
13.5 0.0175
14 0.0165
14.5 0.0177
14.75 0.016
Example 5
#
# Fiber Raman scaling factor (kscale) file
# General comment
#
# - Abscissas in absolute frequency [THz]
##
214 0.947
214.3 0.964
227.3 1
250 1.01
To create a password-protected custom fiber that uses loss, dispersion or
Raman profiles described by an ASCII file, please use the following
procedure.
To create a password protected custom fiber

1. Select loss, dispersion or Raman profile from file.
2. Click the Update button: loss, dispersion or Raman Profile coefficients
are evaluated through a least square fitting to he file data.
3. Uncheck the Fromfile option.
4. Close the dialog window. OptSim will ask you to create a new custom
fiber. Click on New Type button.

Fibers
5. Select the parameters you wish to protect following the procedures

described in the custom fiber section of the User Manual.
By employing this procedure, the data files will not be visible or editable by
other users.
Note
It is not possible to protect Raman gain user-defined files, which are visible to
all users, but you can protect all other Raman parameters.
Grammar for Raman Pumps File

All files used for the specification of fiber loss or dispersion versus frequency
or wavelength must have the extension .DAT (i.e. in capital letters).
The syntax used for these files must satisfy the following rules:
A mandatory first line contains the keyword that identifies the file type
and version. This keyword is OptSimFPumps for Raman pumps files.
All comment lines must begin with a '#' character.
Comment lines are allowed only between the starting line and the '##'
line.
Two separated data sections must contain co-propagating and counter-
propagating pumps. The co-propagating pumps section must begin with
the keyword Coprop and the number of co-propagating pumps, the
counter-propagating pumps section must begin with the keyword
Counterprop. and the number of counter-propagating pumps. Almost
one of the two sections is mandatory.
Each data section must contain two-column entries, the first column
contains the frequencies or wavelengths of pumps, the second column
contains the corresponding value of power in mW or dBm.
Note
All the pump frequencies must be set outside the SPT bandwidth.
Example 1
OptSimFPumps 1
# Abscissas in frequency [THz]
# Pumps power in [mW]
##
Coprop 1
210 500
Counterprop 3
206 300
204 150
212 620
7.1.4 Statistical Dispersion Section

This section defines the statistical dispersion characteristics of the fiber. A
random variation of the second order dispersion is taken into account using
two different statistical distributions and a defined correlation length.
Parameters
Dispersion Statistical Distribution: choice of the statistical variation of the
dispersion along the fiber length. One of two distributions may be chosen for
the dispersion variation: Uniform and the Gaussian, up to 3σ distribution.

Optical Fiber Link
Dispersion Standard Deviation σD [ps/nm/km] σβ2 [ps2/km]: the

standard deviation of the random process for β2 or D. Allowed values: min 0;
max -.
Zero-Dispersion Frequency/Wavelength Standard Deviation [THz] or
[nm]: It is a read-only field that shows the statistical variation of the zero-
dispersion wavelength/frequency induced by the statistical fluctuations of the
dispersion.
Dispersion Correlation Length [km]: the characteristic correlation length
of the random process. Allowed values: min > 0; max -.

Fibers
7.1.5 Advanced Effects Section

If the dual-polarization optical field representation has been chosen (in the
Simulation Parameters dialog window) the polarization-related effects such as
birefringence and PMD are taken into account. This section introduces the
birefringence and PMD statistical parameters and defines the non-linear
coefficient (Kerr effect).
Parameters
Reference Frequency/Wavelength for Non-Linearity [THz] or [nm]:
the reference frequency fr for the following fiber non-linearity parameters.
Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Fiber Non-Linearity Coefficient [1/W/km]: the fiber non-linearity
coefficient as defined in [1]. Its value depends on the non-linear refractive
index n2 of the medium and on the effective area Aeff of the fiber:
2πn2 f r
γ= (1)
cAeff
where fr is the reference frequency and c is the speed of light. Allowed
values: min 0; max -.
Note
To take into account the non-linearity effect reduction in single polarization
condition due to the birefringence interaction it is necessary to multiple the
coefficient value by 8/9.
Non-Linear Refractive Index [m2/W]: the non-linear refractive index n2 of

the medium is a measure of the change in the refractive n index with respect
to the intensity of the electric field, due to a propagating optical signal.
2
n = n L + n2 E
nL is the linear refractive index , that is the part of the refractive index
independent of the propagating optical power. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Core Effective Area [µ µm2]: the effective area Aeff depends on the mode
distribution profile F(x,y) [1], which in turn depends on the optical frequency
and on the fiber parameters such as core radius and core-cladding index
difference. It is given by:
2
∞∞ 
 ∫ ∫ F ( x, y ) 2 dxdy 
 
Aeff =  −∞∞−∞∞  (2)
∫ ∫ F (x, y ) dxdy
4
− ∞− ∞
Together with the non-linear refractive index n2, it represents another way to
express fiber non-linearity. Allowed values: min >0; max -.
Fiber Average Beat Length [m]: The beat length LB, as defined in [1], is
the distance after which the polarization of an optical signal propagating in a
fiber span recovers the initial state:
2 2π
LB = = (3)
∆β 0 β x − β y

Optical Fiber Link
where ∆β0=βx-βy is the difference between the propagating constants of the

two principal axes of the fiber[12]. This parameter is expressed in terms of
an average value because both the value of the birefringence and the
orientation of the principal axes change along a section of fiber. In OptSim
the birefringence is taken into account as a stochastic process along the
propagation direction, both in terms of its value and the orientation of its
principal axes. The birefringence is implemented as a Gaussian stochastic
process with mean equal to ∆β0 and standard deviation σβ0 obtained from the
Beat Length Standard Deviation value (see below). Allowed values: min 0;
max -.
Birefringence Correlation Length [km]: it indicates the distance over wich
the State of Polarization of a signal loses memory of the input State of
Polarization due to PMD and birefringence [13]. Allowed values: min 0;
max -.
Beat Length Standard Deviation [m]: the standard deviation σLB of the
Beat Length random process. It is related to the birefringence standard
deviation σβ0 in equation below.. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
2π
σβ = σL
0
L2B B
Fiber PMD [ps/km1/2]: the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) effect
coefficient δPMD. This coefficient is the parameter that is usually specified in
data-sheets to quantify the amount of PMD introduced by the fiber.. It is used
to implement the Differential Group Delay (DGD) statistical model as
presented in [5],[12]. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Note
The PMD effect is simulated through the wave-plate model [12] where the
relationship between the wave-plate length LR , the beat-length LB, and the
correlation length Lc is given by the following expression [13]:
LR
LC = −
 L 
ln cos π R 
 LB 
The resulting DGD at the and of the fiber span is a random variable with a
Maxwellian distribution and the Probability Density Function takes the
following form [12]:
2 ∆τ 2  ∆τ 2 
P(∆τ , z ) = exp − 2  0 < ∆τ < +∞
π q3  2q 
π
where q2 = δ PMD
2
Lspan . The average DGD is ∆τ = δ PMD Lspan , and its
8
3π − 8
variance is σ= δ PMD Lspan = 0.422 ∆τ . The effect of PMD on the
8
optical signal may strongly vary, and may also change the correlation length
and beat length parameter.

Fibers
7.1.6 Raman Effect Section

This section introduces the parameters employed to model the effects
induced by Stimulated Raman Scattering (SRS) [1]. SRS is a delayed non-
linear response of the fiber medium – but the impact of SRS on optical
systems may be subdivided into two different regimes. The first is Raman
cross-talk that may induce severe impairments in WDM systems employing
a wide (>10 nm) spectral bandwidth. The second is Raman amplification
that uses SRS to amplify signals, by employing a high-power pump (co- or
counter-propagating with respect to the signal propagation direction)
launched at a frequency about 13 THz above the signal spectral region.
In OptSim, these two phenomena are simulated using different approaches.
Since the underlying phenomenon is common to both approaches, the
parameters used in both cases are the same, for dual or single polarization
simulations.
Simulation of Raman Cross-Talk

SRS-induced cross-talk is simulated using the model described in [6], that is
the following non-linear operator of the generalized non-linear Schrödinger
equation:
∂A( z, t )
∂z
{ t
= − jγ (1 − f R )A(z, t ) A(z, t ) + f R A( z, t )∫ hR (t − τ ) A(z,τ ) dτ
2
−∞
2
}
where the impulse response hR(t) assumes the following form [7], obtained
from the inverse Fourier transform of the Raman gain spectral-shape:
τ 12 + τ 22  τ  τ 
hR (τ ) = exp −  sin  
τ 1τ 2
2
 τ 2   τ1 
When a dual-polarization model is considered, the different effect of the
delayed non-linear response on the parallel and orthogonal polarization
components of the optical field [8] is not taken into account. From a physical
point of view it is assumed that the third-order susceptibility constants
χ(3)xxxx, χ(3)xyyx, χ(3)xyxy, χ(3)xxyy are all characterized by the same time
constants of the impulse response.
Simulation of Raman Amplification (RA)

RA is simulated in a manner different from Raman cross-talk. The RA transfer
function is evaluated a priori on the basis of a description of pump spectra co-
and counter-propagating with respect to the signal propagation direction.
When the RA transfer function is evaluated, it is applied in the frequency
domain as a gain-shape at each step of the split-step method. RA is
simulated in VBS as well as in SPT simulations.
In order to evaluate the gain profile and the added ASE noise (including its
spectral shape) we subdivide the spectrum in two different intervals. One is
the OptSim simulation bandwidth that for the RA purpose we consider to be
the signal bandwidth, whereas the other one is the pump bandwidth. A
pictorial explanation of this bandwidth subdivision is represented in the
following figure.

Optical Fiber Link
Signal bandwidth Pump bandwidth
Channels Pumps
Noise
fs,min fp,min fp,max f
Ps+ ( z , f ) + Ps− ( z , f ) Pp+ ( z , f ) + Pp− ( z , f )

Figure 7.1 Power spectral density in the fiber at section z
In the signal bandwidth we consider the propagation of the power spectrum

of the power spectral density of the optical signal considering the effect of
Raman pumping, Raman ASE noise temperature dependent generation,
Rayleigh back-scattering and concentrated reflectivity at the ends of the fiber
span. Hence, the set of differential equation to be solved for the signal
bandwidth portion of the considered spectrum is [4]:
∂Ps+ (z, f )
= −α( f )Ps+ (z, f ) + rα( f )Ps− (z, f ) +
∂z
f p,max
1 υ
+ ∫ k A f
[ ]
gR (υ − f ) Pp+ (z,υ) + Pp− (z,υ) dυ Ps+ (z, f ) +
f p,min pol eff ref
f p,max
1 υ
+ hf ∫ k A f
1
 h(υ− f ) 
− 
[ ]
gR (υ − f ) Pp+ (z,υ) + Pp− (z,υ) dυ
f p,min pol eff ref
1− e  KT 
∂Ps− (z, f )
= +α( f )Ps− (z, f ) − rα( f )Ps+ (z, f ) +
∂z
f p,max
1 υ
− ∫ k A f
[ ]
gR (υ − f ) Pp+ (z,υ) + Pp− (z,υ) dυ Ps− (z, f ) +
f p,min pol eff ref
f p,max
1 υ
− hf ∫ k A f
1
 h(υ− f ) 
− 
[ ]
gR (υ − f ) Pp+ (z,υ) + Pp− (z,υ) dυ
f p,min pol eff ref
1− e  KT 
where Ps+(z,f)
and Ps-(z,f)
are the forward and backward propagating power
at the frequency f and at the distance z, α(f) is the fiber attenuation at the
frequency f, gR(∆f) is the Raman gain [m/W] at the frequency fref considering
the pump to be at the frequency ν, r is the Rayleigh back-scattering capture
factor [5], kpol is a constant that takes into account the polarization op the
pumps with respect to the signal [14], if the pump is completely depolarized
kpol =2 and this is the hypothesis used in OptSim, Aeff is the effective area of
the fiber, h is Planck's constant, K is the Boltzmann’s constant and T is the
operating temperature.
In the pump bandwidth, we considered all the phenomena taken into account
in the signal bandwidth plus the depletion terms, therefore the equations to
be considered are:

Fibers
∂Pp+ ( z , f )
= −α ( f )Pp+ ( z , f ) + rα ( f )Pp− ( z , f ) +
∂z
f p , max
υ
+ ∫
1
k pol Aeff f ref
[ ]
g R (υ − f ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +
f
f p , max
υ
+ hf ∫
1
k pol Aeff f ref
[
g R (υ − f ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ + ]
f
f p , min
− ∫
1 f f
υ k pol Aeff f ref
[ ]
g R ( f − υ ) Ps+ ( z ,υ ) + Ps− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +
f s , min
− ∫
1 f f
υ k pol Aeff f ref
[ ]
g R ( f − υ ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +
f p , min
f p , min
f1 f hυ
−2 ∫ gR ( f −υ ) h ( f −υ )
dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +
υ k pol Aeff f ref −
f s , min
1− e KT
f
f1 f hυ
−2 ∫ gR ( f −υ) h ( f −υ )
dυ Pp+ ( z , f )
υ k A
pol eff f ref
−
f p , min
1− e KT
∂Pp− ( z , f )
= +α ( f )Pp− ( z , f ) − rα ( f )Pp+ ( z , f ) +
∂z
f p , max
υ
− ∫
1
k pol Aeff f ref
[ ]
g R (υ − f ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp− ( z , f ) +
f
f p , max
υ
− hf ∫
1
k pol Aeff f ref
[
g R (υ − f ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ + ]
f
f p ,min
+ ∫
1 f f
υ k pol Aeff f ref
[ ]
g R ( f − υ ) Ps+ ( z ,υ ) + Ps− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +
f s , min
+ ∫ υ k
1
A
f
f
f
[
g R ( f − υ ) Pp+ ( z ,υ ) + Pp− ( z ,υ ) dυ Pp+ ( z , f ) +]
f p ,min pol eff ref
f p , min
f1 f hυ
+2 ∫ gR ( f −υ ) h ( f −υ )
dυ Pp− ( z , f ) +
f s , min
1− e KT
f
f1 f hυ
+2 ∫ gR ( f −υ ) h ( f −υ )
dυ Pp− ( z , f )
f p , min
1− e KT

Optical Fiber Link
where Pp+(z,f) and Pp-(z,f) are the forward and backward propagating pump
power at the frequency f and at the distance z.
If a Lorentzian profile has been chosen for the Raman profile, gR(∆f) is given
by the following expression:
g R (∆ω ) = γ ⋅ f R ⋅ Aeff ⋅ Im{H R (−∆ω )}

with
∆ω = 2π ( f p − f )
and
τ 12 + τ 22 1
H R (∆ω ) = F {hR (t )} = 2 2 2 2
τ1 τ 2  1  1
 + j∆ω  +  
τ2   τ1 
otherwise, user-defined or Standard Raman profile [9] are used.
Considering the power spectral density of the optical field at the input of the
fiber and the power spectral density of the pumps – the counter-propagating
pumps launched at the end of the fiber span and the co-propagating pumps
inserted at the beginning of the fiber span – the two sets of differential
equations are solved together using the shooting numerical method [15].
At the end of this preliminary computing phase, the gain profile with respect
to the frequency is available for each section z of the fiber together with the
power spectral density of the ASE noise due to the Raman spontaneous
emission and infinite Rayleigh reflections.
Following this procedure, phenomena taken into account are:
pump-to-signal bi-directional Raman gain
pump-to-pump bi-directional Raman gain (Raman cross-talk in the pump
bandwidth)
pump depletion
bi-directional Amplified Spontaneous Emission Noise in the signal
bandwidth
bi-directional Amplified Spontaneous Emission Noise in the pump
bandwidth
infinite additive noise components due to the interaction of Raman
Spontaneous emission with Rayleigh back-scattering
Note that the signal-to-signal Raman gain (Raman cross-talk in the signal
bandwidth) is not considered in this pre-computing phase because it is fully
taken into account in the time domain simulation.
The effect of Raman gain (a frequency-dependent gain-shape) on the signal
is integrated in the non-linear operator of the split-step method, explicitly
taking into account the effect of increasing signal power during propagation.
In distinction, the ASE noise is added only at the end of the fiber span and is
given by the shape of the power spectrum. No interaction between ASE noise
and the signal is taken into account during the propagation in the amplifying
fiber span.

Fibers
F ib e r S p a n
S p lit- Ram an
L 1/2 N L L 1/2 S te p Pum p
M e th o d
S ASE (f)
SSM RA SSM RA SSM RA
Raman gain It is possible to set a different gain profile for each Raman pump. Raman
coefficient Gain of a pumped optical fiber (Np pumps) can be simply expressed by using
dependency the following formula:
on pump
frequency  1
Np L

Gon −off ( f ) = 10 log10 (e)∑  C R ( f p ,i − f , f p ,i )∫ Pp ,i ( z ) d z 
i =1  k pol 
dB
0
Where:
g R (∆f , f p )  1 
C R (∆f , f p ) =
Aeff ( f p )  W⋅ km  .
 
From the theory [17], it is known that:
fp
g R (∆f , f p ) = g R (∆f , f ref ) .
f ref
Hence,
g R (∆f , f ref ) fp
C R (∆f , f p ) = ⋅ =
Aeff ( f p ) f ref
g R (∆f , f ref ) Aeff ( f ref ) f p
⋅ ⋅ =
Aeff ( f ref ) Aeff ( f p ) f ref
 1 
C R (∆f , f ref ) ⋅ k scale ( f p ) 
 W⋅ km 
So this means that the Raman efficiency changes with frequency with a
scaling factor kscale(fp), which takes into account the linear frequency scaling
contribution fp/fref and also the frequency dependence of the effective area Aeff
(fref)/Aeff (fp).

Optical Fiber Link
To model the dependency of CR(∆f,fp) on fp, you can select the User Defined
option for the fiber Raman gain profile in the Raman Effects section of the
fiber link.
The CR profile can be then specified through a two-column file containing the
value of CR versus ∆f measured using a pump at the fref frequency:
......
∆fi-1 CR(∆fi-1, fref)
∆fi CR(∆fi, fref)
∆fi+1 CR(∆fi+1, fref)
......
The file syntax must follow the format specified in section 7.1.3.
To specify the kscale dependency on the frequency you can select the Custom
Scaling of Raman Profile button and insert a two-column file containing the
values of kscale versus fref
......
fref, j-1 kscale (fref, j-1)
fref, j kscale (fref, j)

fref, j+1 kscale (fref, j+1)
......
The file syntax must follow the format specified in section 7.1.3.
Figure 7.2 Standard Curve for the Raman Profile for silica fibers [9].

Fibers
Parameters
Raman Profile SRS is characterized by a profile of the gain vs the frequency difference
between the signal [9] and the pump. This profile depends on the fiber
material. Three profiles are available in the model. Standard is the silica
fiber profile measured at reference wavelength of 1000 nm (see [1] p. 318).
Lorentzian is the profile approximated using the fitto a Lorentzian curve [9],
characterized by three parameters. User Defined is a profile described
through a data file.
The OptSim library includes some files that provide measured Raman profiles
reported in [16].
Reference Frequency/Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: it is the reference
frequency fR for the Raman gain profile. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 1000 (nm).
In order to use correctly these data it is necessary to set properly the
Reference Wavelength/Frequency parameter, reported in the file header.
The following table reports the file name and the measured conditions.
File name Reference Wavelength (nm)
Raman_LucentTRUEWAVE.DAT 1455
Raman_LucentALLWAVE.DAT 1455
Raman_CorningLEAF.DAT 1455
Raman_CorningNZDSF.DAT 1455
Raman_CorningDSF.DAT 1455
Raman_NDSF.DAT 1455
Raman_STD.DAT 1000
Note
These files are stored in the ProductInstDir\lib\OpLib\Fiber\ directory.
Raman Profile Filename: name of the data file for the Raman profile vs.
frequency or vs. wavelength. You may choose this file from the file system by
Edit button. This opens an editor window and loads the data file. The editor is
VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The file syntax must follow the
format specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed in [THz],
the wavelength in [nm] and the gain in [m/W·10-13] for gR or [1/Km/W] for
CR. Note that the abscissa represents the difference between the pump
frequency fpump and the signal frequency f. The filename extension must be
DAT in capital letters.
Note
The file must be saved in the same directory where the fiber is saved. For a
custom fiber saved in the current design the directory is where the design
(opf or opm file) is saved. Moreover you can use the procedure described for
the password protected custom fiber at the end of section 7.1.3 to avoid this
restriction.
gr and Cr, toggle options to select the kind of variable specified in the Raman
profile file gR(f) or CR(f).
Custom scaling of Raman profile, specifies the frequency dependence of
the fiber effective area. In particular, for each pump the used Raman
coefficient is evaluated by the following formula:

Optical Fiber Link
 1 
C R (∆f , f p ,i ) = C R (∆f , f ref ) ⋅ k scale ( f p ,i ) 
 W⋅ km 
Where kscale is obtained from a data file specified through the following field.
When this option is not selected the scaling factor takes into account only of
the linear scaling.
Custom Scaling Filename: name of the data file for the scaling factor
profile vs. frequency or vs. wavelength. You may choose this file from the file
system by clicking on the Browse button. You may also edit the file by
clicking on the Edit button. This opens an editor window and loads the data
file. The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The file syntax must
follow the format specified in section 7.1.3. The frequency must be expressed
in [THz], the wavelength in [nm]. The filename extension must be DAT in
capital letters.
Files format: specifies if the Raman profile and the scaling factor profile are
expressed as a function of Frequency or Wavelength.
Raman Fiber Raman constant [-]: the characteristic constant fR [1] that controls
constants the amount of delayed non-linearity (Raman effect) with respect to the
instantaneous one. Given the non-linear coefficient γ, (1-fR)γ is the coefficient
of the instantaneous non-linear response of the medium, while fRγ is the
coefficient of the delayed (Raman effect) non-linear response of the medium.
If a Standard or User Defined Raman profile is chosen, fR is derived from a
Lorentzian fitting to this profile, and is displayed as a read-only parameter.
Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default: 0.18.
First Raman Time Constant [fs]: the first Raman time constant (τ1) that
controls the sinusoidal part of the impulse response of the Kerr effect. If a
Standard or User Defined Raman profile is chosen, τ1 is derived from a
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default: 12.2.
Second Raman Time Constant [fs]: the second Raman time constant (τ2)
that controls the exponential part of the impulse response of the Kerr effect.
If a Standard or User Defined Raman profile is chosen, τ2 is derived from a
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default: 32.
Update: updates the above Raman constants By computing the values from
the Lorentzian fitting to the data contained in the gain profile file. It is active
only if gain is introduced from a file (Standard or User Defined profile).
Rayleigh Scattering: enables Rayleigh Scattering in order to evaluate the
amount of ASE noise introduced by the Raman amplification [4]. The Rayleigh
scattering is applied to noise only, hence its effect on the propagating signal
is not taken into account. Two options are available: Ideal and Realistic.
Capture Factor [dB]: the fraction of scattered photons that are back
scattered. It may be specified only if Realistic Rayleigh scattering is chosen.
Allowed values: min -; max 0; default –30.
Reflectivity: enables fiber reflectivity at the input and output of the fiber.
The Ideal case indicates perfect transmission through fiber input and output
interfaces, the Realistic case takes into account input and output fiber
reflectivity.
Input Reflectivity [dB]: the fraction of reflected photons at the input of the
fiber. It may be specified only if Realistic reflectivity is chosen. Allowed
values: min -; max 0; default –40.

Fibers
Output Reflectivity [dB]: the fraction of reflected photons at the output of

the fiber. It may be specified only if Realistic reflectivity is chosen. Allowed
values: min -; max 0; default –40.
7.1.7 SBS Section

This section introduces the parameters employed to model the steady state
effects induced by Stimulated Brillouin Scattering (SBS).
The Steady-State SBS Model

Hypotheses
• Ip(z) is a CW signal
• Ip(z) is the only signal propagating in the fiber
Pump Equation
∂I p  f p 
= −α ⋅ I p −  ∫ C B (ξ )I s ( f p − ξ )dξ  ⋅ I p (1)
∂z  0 
Stokes Wave Equations (frequency continuous from

∆f = fp – fs = 0 up to ∆f = fp)
∂I s
= +α ⋅ I s − C B (∆f ) ⋅ I s I p − h ⋅ f s ⋅ C B (∆f ) ⋅ I p (2)
∂z
where
I p ( f p , z) = I p ( z) ⋅ δ ( f − f p ) (3)
is the SBS pump (i.e., the signal propagating in the fiber in the forward
direction)
• I s ( fs , z) is the Stokes wave power induced by the SBS and

propagating in the backward direction. It is spectral distributed signal with
fs varying in [0; fp]; i.e., ∆f = fp – fs varying in [0; fp].
• h is the Plank’s constant.
• α is the loss coefficient
• CB(∆f) is the Brillouin gain coefficient defined as

Optical Fiber Link
1 g B (∆f )  1 
C B (∆f ) = ⋅  m ⋅ W  (4)
k pol Aeff
where
2
 ∆f B 
 
 2  m
g B (∆f ) = g B ,max ⋅ 2  W  (5)
 ∆f B 
 + (∆f − f B )
2

 2 
and
∆f B m
g B ,max = g B ,0 ⋅  W  (6)
∆f B + ∆f p
where
2 ⋅ π ⋅ n 7 ⋅ p122 ⋅ f p2 m
g B,0 = W (7 )
c 3 ⋅ ρ 0 ⋅ V A ⋅ ∆f B  
where
• p12 is the longitudinal elasto-optic coefficient (typical value: p12 = 0.286);
• ρ0 is the material density (typical value: ρ0 = 2200 kg/m3);
• ∆fB is the Brillouin linewidth (typical value: ∆fB = 10 MHz);
and ∆fB is the Brillouin gain linewidth and fB of peak of the Brillouin
gain is:
2 ⋅ n ⋅VA ⋅ f P
fB = [Hz] (8)
c
where
• n is the refractive index of the core of the fiber (typical value: n = 1.45);
• VA is the speed of the acoustic wave in the fiber (typical value: VA = 5960
m/s) ;
• fP is the pump frequency;
• c is the velocity of the light in the vacuum.
A typical value for the peak of the SBS gain at λp= c/fp= 1550 nm is: fB ≈ 11
GHz.
• Ip(0) is the amount of power injected in the fiber minus the portion
“reflected” by the SBS, and Is(0) is the amount of power “reflected” by the
SBS. Therefore, the boundary conditions for the problem are:

Fibers
 I p (0) = I p 0
 (9)
 I s (L ) = 0
where Ip0 is the signal at the input of the fiber
Measurement Units
• Ip, Is: [W/Hz]
• Frequencies: [Hz]
• h = 6.626068 × 10-34 [J·s]
• α : [1/m]
1 gB  1 
• CB = ⋅  m ⋅ W 
k pol Aeff
A typical value for gB is 4 × 10-10 [m/W]
• kpol in [1;2] : [pure number]. kpol accounts for the random relative
polarization between pump and Stokes wave, in conventional fibers kpol =
1.5.
• Aeff (fiber effective area): [m2]
Constant and Squared Brillouin Gain Function

We assume that the SBS gain is constant and equal to the maximum within a
range around the peak of the gain and it is null elsewhere, i.e.,
 g B , max m
 C B , max = W ,
 k pol Aeff  
  Beq , SBS Beq , SBS 
( )
C B ∆f =  if ∆f ∈  f B − ; fB + 
(10)
  2 2 
 m
0  W  , elsewhere
  
where

Optical Fiber Link
2 +∞
 ∆f  1
Beq ,SBS = B  ⋅ ∫ 2
dξ =
 2  0  ∆f B 
 + (ξ − f B )
2

 2 
∆f B π  f 
= ⋅  + arctan 2 B  [Hz] (11)
2 2  ∆f B 
With this hypothesis, differential equations become
 f p − fB +
Beq , SBS

∂I p  2

= −α ⋅ I p − C B ,max ∫ I s (ξ )dξ ⋅Ip (12)
∂z  Beq , SBS 
f p − fB −
 2 
+ α ⋅ I s − C B ,max ⋅ I s I p − h ⋅ f s ⋅ C B ,max ⋅ I p ,

∂I s 
=  if f s ∈  f p − f B − eq ,SBS ; f p − f B + eq ,SBS 
B B
∂z  2 2 

 0, elsewhere
(13)
We can assume that
 I s 0 (0),

  B B 
I s ( f s , z ) = if f s ∈  f p − f B − eq , SBS ; f p − f B + eq , SBS 
  2 2 
 0, elsewhere
(14)
Therefore, the couple of differential equations to be solved is

Fibers
 ∂I p
 = −α ⋅ I p − C B ,max I s 0 Beq ,SBS ⋅ I p
 ∂z ∂I s 0
 = +α ⋅ I s 0 − C B ,max ⋅ I s 0 I p
 ∂z
 − h ⋅ f s ⋅ C B ,max ⋅ I p

(15)
Cosidering the overall amount of Brillouin power
I S = I s 0 Beq ,SBS [W] (16)

Equation (15) becomes
 ∂I p
 ∂z = −α ⋅ I p − CB , max I s ⋅ I p
 ∂I
 s = +α ⋅ I s − C B , max ⋅ I s I p − h ⋅ f s ⋅ Beq , SBS ⋅ CB , max ⋅ I p
 ∂z
(17)
and the overall amount of power reflected by the SBS is
PSBS = I s (0) (18)

The boundary conditions for the differential equations system (17) are
 I p (0) = I p 0
 (19)
 I s (L ) = 0
In order to solve the differential equations system (17) it could be convenient
to operate the following variable exchange
 ln{I p ( z )}+ α ⋅ z − ln{I p 0 }

I
 pL ( z ) =
 C B ,max
 (20)
 I ( z ) = ln{I s ( z )} − α ⋅ z .
 sL C B ,max

Yielding

Optical Fiber Link
 ∂I pL
 = − exp{C B , max ⋅ I sL + α ⋅ z}
 ∂ z

 ∂I
 sL
[
= − I p 0 ⋅ exp C B , max ⋅ I pL − α ⋅ z ⋅]
 ∂z
 {1 + h ⋅ f ⋅ B
 s eq , SBS ⋅ exp[− C B , max ⋅ I sL − α ⋅ z ]}
(21)
The boundary conditions for the differential equations system (21) are
 I pL (0) = 0
 (22)
 I sL (L ) = −∞
The CW Signal Assumption
The steady-state model for the SBS assumes each channel is a CW signal and
does not include the effect of simultaneous presence of more than one
channel at different frequencies. Therefore, studying the effects of SBS using
the steady state model, the users obtain only the effects of power reflection
due to SBS. All the dynamic effects are neglected, i.e., all the effects
influencing the shape of the pulses and all the possible interactions between
the SBS and the other propagation phenomena such as dispersion and
nonlinearities. The interaction between SBS and SRS is also neglected. This
may yield underestimate of SBS effect in case of using the unusual Raman
amplification with forward pumping.
Parameters
Brillouin Gain [m/W]: peak value of Brillouin gain. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 3e-11.
Brillouin Gain Linewidth [MHz]: Brillouin gain linewidth. Allowed values:
Brillouin Gain Reference Frequency [THz]: reference frequency for
Brillouin gain. Allowed values: min 0; max 1000; default 193.
Frequency Brillouin Gain Peak [GHz]: frequency of the peak of the
Brillouin gain. Allowed values: min 0; max 1000; default 11.
Signal Linewidth [MHz]: linewidth of the signal. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1e6; default 100.
Signal and Stokes Wave Relative Polarization: relative polarization of
signal and Stokes waves. Allowed values: min 1; max 2; default 1.5.
SBS Spectrum Plot: switch to enable or disable plotting of the SBS
spectrum. Two options are available: On and Off. Default is Off.

Fibers
7.2 References
[1] G. P. Agrawal, Nonlinear Fiber Optics, Academic Press Inc., Boston, 1995.
[2] OptSim Technical Staff, “TDSS: Time Domain Split-Step Fiber Simulation
Approach,” White paper of erstwhile Artis Software Corporation, Turin
(now RSoft Design Group, New York), 1999.
[3] A. Carena, V. Curri, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini and S. Benedetto, “A time-
domain optical transmission system simulation package accounting for
nonlinear and polarization related effects in fiber,” IEEE Journal on
Selected Areas in Communications, Vol. 15, NO. 4, May 1997.
[4] Y. R. Shen, Principles Of Nonlinear Optics, Wiley-Interscience, New York,
1984.
[5] Hansen et al., “Rayleigh scattering limitations in distributed Raman pre-
amplifiers,” IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 10, NO. 1, January
1998.
[6] G. J. Foschini and C. D. Poole, “Statistical theory of polarization dispersion
in single mode fibers,” IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 9,
NO. 11, November 1991.
[7] K. J. Blow, D. Wood, “Theoretical description of transient Stimulated
Raman Scattering in optical fibers,” IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics,
Vol. 25, NO. 12, December 1989
[8] E.A.Golovchenko, N. Pilipetkii, “Unified analysis of four-photon mixing,
modulational instability, and stimulated Raman scattering under various
polarization conditions in fibers,” OSA Journal of Optical Society of
America B, Vol. 11, NO. 1, January 1994.
[9] Stolen et al., “Raman response of silica-core fibers,” OSA Journal of
Optical Society of America B, Vol. 6, No. 6, June 1989.
[10] E. Desurvire et al., “Theory and implementation of a Raman active fiber
delay line,” IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology, vol. LT-4, No. 4,
April 1986
[11] S. C. Rashleigh, “Origins and control of polarization effect in single-mode
fibers,” IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology., Vol. LT-1, pp. 312–
331, 1983.
[12] F. Curti et al., “Statistical treatment of the evolution of the principal
states of polarization in single-mode fibers,” IEEE/OSA Journal of
Lightwave Technology., Vol. 8, N0. 8, pp. 1162–1165, August 1990
[13] F. Corsi et al., “Polarization Mode Dispersion Characterization of Single-
Mode Optical Fiber Using Backscattering Technique,” IEEE/OSA Journal
of Lightwave Technology., vol. 16, N0. 10, pp. 1832–1843, October
1998.
[14] Hansen et al.: et al., “ Capacity Upgrades Of Transmission Systems By
Raman Amplification,” IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 9, NO. 2,
February 1997
[15] "Numerical Recipes" Cambridge University Press, (see also www.nr.com
site)
[16] C. fludger, A. Maroney, N. Jolley, R. Mears, An analysis of the
improvements in OSNR from distribuited Raman amplifiers using modern
transmission fibres, OFC 2000, Paper FF2
[17] Miller, Optical Fiber Telecommunications, Academic Press, 1979

8 Optical Modulators
Mach Zehnder Dual Arm, simulates a Dual Arm Mach-Zehnder amplitude

modulator. The transfer function is typical for Mach-Zehnder external
modulators based on the electro-optic effects LiNbO3 devices.
Two Mach-Zehnder Single Arm models are available:
amplitude modulator with sin2 electrical shaped input-output power-
voltage characteristic
amplitude modulator with linear electro-optic characteristic (output power
vs. applied voltage)
Two Electro-Absorption Modulator models are available:
EAM with linear law of optical loss and chirping factor versus applied
voltage
EAM with user-defined law; you can define any shape for the loss and
chirping factor versus applied voltage
Phase modulator, simulates a modulator where the optical signal phase is
changed as a function of the electrical driving voltage.
Polarization modulator, simulates a modulator where the State Of Polarization
(SOP) of the optical signal is changed as a function of the electrical driving
voltages.
Optical Modulators
8.1 Amplitude Dual-Arm Mach-Zehnder

Modulator
This component simulates a Dual-Arm Mach-Zehnder Amplitude Modulator as
a transfer function, typical for a Mach-Zehnder external modulator based on
the electro-optic effect in the LiNbO3 devices.
If the flag Electrical Filtering with sin(πf/Bw)/(πf) Law is on, the model
also takes into account the frequency characteristics of these devices, by
applying a filtering section to both the electric inputs VA and VB. Both the
applied filters are represented by the following transfer function:
 πf 
sin  
H(f ) =  B0  (1)
πf
B0
where:
B0 ≅ 2.25 ⋅ BW (2)
You can also choose the level of extinction ratio (corresponding to the ratio
between the maximum and minimum values of the input-output P-V
transmission characteristic) and the chirp factor (see definition in [1]).
The input optical signal is multiplied by factor dependent on:
the input voltages VA and VB applied to the two modulator arms
the excess loss ELdB introduced by the modulator
the extinction ratio ERLIN
the chirp factor α
The output field is:
−
ELdB
 1 
E out = 10 20
cos φ D − j sin φ D e jφ S e jϑ E in (3)
 ERLIN 
where:
π  Vin − Von 
φD =   (4)
2  Vπ 
π VS
φS = ⋅ (5)
2 Vπ
1
ϑ = α ln Pout (6)
2
dϑ
α = 2 Pout dt (7)
dPout
dt

Amplitude Dual-Arm Mach-Zehnder Modulator
2
Pout = E out (8)
E out
ERLIN = max
(9)
E out
min
and
V A − VB V A + VB
Vin = , Vs = (10)
2 2
and α is the chirp factor as is defined in [1]. The ERLIN parameter accounts for
the extinction ratio that is defined as below, in the parameter description
section. When the semi-difference between input voltages Vin is equal to Von,
the power of the optical signal is attenuated by the excess loss only, so the
modulator is in the maximum transmission state. To switch to the minimum
transmission state a Vπ voltage must be added or subtracted to Von. A
pictorial explanation of the trans-characteristic is shown in the graph below.
Pout Vπ
Pmax
Pmin
Von Vin
Figure 8.1 The amplitude modulator trans-characteristic
SPT Behavior
channels, but to study the systems in terms of average power per channel
and noise level. Therefore, the only actions of amplitude modulators that has
to be taken into account for SPT purposes are the optical spectral
modifications introduced at the channel levels and at the noise level.
In general, an amplitude modulator does not introduce any noise and reduces
the average power of the channel. If the modulation is an exactly squared
NRZ modulation, the average power reduction is well known and it is equal to
3 dB, in addition to the excess loss. Otherwise it has to be evaluated. This
average power reduction is the only parameter used in the SPT simulations
and it is requested in the related section of the parameter dialog window.
If you don’t know which is the value of this parameter, we suggest to perform
a VBS simulation of the subsystem containing the source and the modulator
to measure the optical power before and after the modulator. The average
power reduction is the difference (in dB) between the evaluated powers. Note
that the measured average power reduction contains also the excess loss.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the first electrical signal Optical: the modulated optical signal
VA used to modulate the Ein optical Eout at the output of the device

Optical Modulators
signal
Electrical: the second electrical
signal VB used to modulate the Ein
optical signal
Optical: the optical signal Ein
injected in the device to be
modulated

Excess Loss [dB]: the value of a constant extra loss introduced by the
modulator, which is independent of the electrical input signal. Allowed values:
Offset voltage corresponding to the zero phase retardation in the
absence of any (on both arms) electric field Von [V]: the value of the
electrical input corresponding to the maximum transmission state. Ideally,
this value is 0 V, but often modulators are slightly unbalanced in the absence
of any applied electric field, thus a biasing voltage must be applied to
compensate the offset. This parameter is shown in Figure 8.1. Allowed
Extinction Ratio: flag specifying if a Realistic extinction ratio is simulated
or not; in the Ideal case, an infinitive extinction ratio will be used.
Extinction Ratio [dB]: the ratio between the output optical power
corresponding to the maximum transmission value and the one corresponding
to the minimum transmission value; it must be specified only if Realistic has
been chosen. The parameter is given by the following formula. Allowed
(2
ERdB = 10 log ERLIN ) (11)
Chirp Factor α [-]: the chirp factor as it is defined in [1]. Note that a non-
ideal extinction ratio (ERdB less than infinite) induces an implicit chirping that
is not taken into account by the chirp factor α. Moreover, also if an
unbalanced Vin voltage, meaning that VA is not equal to -VB, is applied an
extra chirping takes place. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =− ,
2π ∂T
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T

Amplitude Dual-Arm Mach-Zehnder Modulator
Vπ [V]: the voltage swing needed to switch between the minimum and
maximum transmission states. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 5.
Electrical Filtering with sin(πf/Bw)/(πf) Law: specifies whether or not the
electrical input is filtered by the frequency transfer function (1).
-3dB Bandwidth [GHz]: the -3 dB cutoff frequency of the lowpass filter; it's
available only if the Electrical Filtering with sin(πf/Bw)/(πf) Law is set.
Allowed values: min 0, max 2.25(BWSPT/2), default Rb (reference bit-rate).
First filter notch [GHz]: the resulting first notch in the transfer function.
The transfer function of the filter model (1) is typical for several optical
devices where an optical beam and a traveling wave electrical signal interact
over a given non-negligible length. The filtering function is consequently
determined by the amount of time required by the electrical signal to
propagate along the device. If you need to simulate different filtering
functions than the previous one, simply disable the Electrical Filtering with
sin(πf/Bw)/(πf) Law option, and choose a proper external filter to be
inserted between the electrical signal generator and the electrical input of the
modulator.

During SPT Simulation you can define some parameters to estimate the
effects that the Spectral Propagation Technique does not take into account.
Average power reduction due to modulation [dB] or [linear]: accounts
in SPT simulations for the mean power reduction introduced in the process of
the external modulation. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 3 (dB).

Optical Modulators
8.2 Amplitude Modulator

This component simulates a single input modulator. Two different models are
available: linear and sin2 shaped input-output characteristics. The second
transfer function is typical for the Mach-Zehnder external modulators based
on electro-optic effect in the LiNbO3 devices. For both models the chirping
factor is included incorporating the α parameter as it is defined in [1].
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =−
2π ∂T
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T
SPT Behavior
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the two models, Sin2 and
Linear.
Excess loss [dB]: the value of a constant extra loss introduced by the

Amplitude Modulator
8.2.1 Sin2 Amplitude Modulator

This model implements a single arm Mach-Zehnder Amplitude Modulator with
sin2 electrical shaped Input-Output P-V characteristic. This transfer function is
typical for a Mach-Zehnder external modulator based on the electro-optic
effects in the LiNbO3 devices.
This model also incorporates the spectral characteristics of the device adding
a filter-section at the electrical input. The applied filter has the following
transfer function:
 πf 
sin  
H(f ) =  B0  (1)
πf
B0
where:
B0 ≅ 2.25 ⋅ BW (2)
You can also choose the level of extinction ratio (corresponding to the ratio
between the maximum and minimum values of the input-output transmission
characteristic) and the chirp factor (see definition in [1]).
The input optical signal is multiplied by a factor dependent on:
the input voltage Vin applied to the modulator arm
the excess loss ELdB introduced by the modulator
the extinction ratio ERLIN
the chirp factor α
The output field is:
− dB  
EL
r 1 r
E out = 10 20 cos φ D − j sin φ D  ⋅ e jϑ Ein (3)
 ERLIN 
where:
π  Vin − Von 
φD =   (4)
2  Vπ 
1
ϑ = α ln Pout (5)
2
dϑ
α = 2 Pout dt (6)
dPout
dt
r 2
Pout = E out (7)

Optical Modulators
r
Eout
ERLIN = r max
(8)
E out
min
and α is the chirp factor as it is defined in [1]. The ERLIN parameter accounts
for the extinction ratio that is defined as below, in the parameter description
section. When the input voltage is equal to Von, the power of the optical signal
is attenuated by the excess loss only, so the modulator attains the state of
maximum transmission. To switch over to the state of minimum transmission
a Vπ voltage must be applied in addition to the Von one. A pictorial explanation
of the trans-characteristic is shown in Figure 8.1.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the electrical signal Vin Optical: the modulated optical signal
used to modulate the Ein optical Eout at the output of the device
signal
Optical: the optical signal injected
in the device to be modulated

Maximum Transmissivity Offset Voltage Von [V]: the value of the
electrical input corresponding to the maximum transmission state. Ideally this
value is 0 V, but often the modulators are slightly unbalanced in the absence
of any applied electric field, so a biasing voltage must be applied to
compensate this offset. This parameter is shown in Figure 8.1. Allowed
values: min -; max -; default 2.5 V.
Extinction Ratio: flag specifying if a Realistic extinction ratio is simulated
or not; in the Ideal case, an infinitive extinction ratio will be used.
Extinction Ratio [dB]: the ratio between the output optical power
corresponding to the maximum transmission value and the one corresponding
to the minimum transmission value; it must be specified only if Realistic has
been chosen. The parameter is given by the following formula. Allowed
2
(
ERdB = 10 log ERLIN ) (9)
Chirp Factor α [-]: the chirp factor as it is defined in [1]. Note that a non-
ideal extinction ratio (ERdB less than infinite) induces an implicit chirping that
is not taken into account by the chirp factor α. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 0.
Vπ [V]: the voltage swing needed to switch over between the minimum and
electrical input is filtered by the frequency transfer function (1).

Amplitude Modulator
modulator.


Optical Modulators
8.2.2 Linear Amplitude Modulator

This model implements an amplitude modulator with linear electro-optic
characteristics (in terms of output power vs. applied voltage) and signal
chirping. The optical signal is multiplied by an amplitude factor depending on
the input voltage Vin and on the excess loss ELdB introduced by the modulator.
The signal chirping is specified through the α parameter as it is defined in [1].
The output optical signal is therefore driven in the following way by the
electric signal Vin:
EL
r − dB r
E out = 10 20 f (Vin ) ⋅ e jϑ Ein (1)
where:
1
ϑ = α ln Pout (2)
2
r 2
Pout = E out (3)
dϑ
α = 2 Pout dt (4)
dPout
dt

 0 , Vin < 0
 M % 100
f (Vin ) =  Vin , 0 < Vin < (5)
 100 M%
 1 100
, Vin >
 M%
Consequently the transmission is turned off for Vin ≤ 0 while it is at maximum
for Vin ≥ (100 / M%). For example, if M% = 50%, the transfer function in
terms of the output power vs. applied voltage is linear in the range between 0
and 2 V, and is hard-limited outside this range, as shown below.
Pout
Pout,max
1.0 V 2.0 V Vin
Figure 8.2 The linear amplitude modulator trans-characteristic
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the electrical signal Vin Optical: the modulated optical signal
used to modulate the Ein optical Eout at the output of the device

Amplitude Modulator
signal Eout at the output of the device


% Transmission per Applied Volt [%]: the percentage of input power
transmitted when 1 V is applied at the input; it is consequently related to the
transfer function slope in the linear range. Allowed values: min 0; max 100;
default 20.
Chirp factor α [-]: the chirp factor as it is defined in [1]. Allowed values:
min -; max -; default 0.


Optical Modulators
8.3 Electro Absorption Modulator

This module simulates an Electro-Absorption Modulator.
1 ∂Φ (T )
f =−
2π ∂T
1 ∂Φ(T )
f =+ .
2π ∂T
SPT Behavior

Electro Absorption Modulator
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the electrical signal used Optical: the modulated optical signal
to modulate the optical signal
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the two models, Linear and
Custom.
8.3.1 Linear
This model implements a linear law for the loss introduced by the modulator
and the chirp factor α versus the applied voltage. To model this component
behavior, the minimum and maximum applied voltages and the
corresponding values of loss and chirp factor are required.
For as concerning loss is assumed to be a linear relation of the linear loss (not
dB) of the optical power with respect to the voltage of the applied electric
signal.
If we express the optical field at the output of the device as:
E out (t ) = Eout (t ) exp{ jφ (t )} (1)
the chirp factor α is defined in the following way:
dφ
α = 2 I dt (2)
dI
dt
where
I = Eout (t )
2
(3)
You must provide loss and chirp factor values corresponding to minimum and
maximum applied voltages. If a voltage smaller than the minimum value
indicated is applied to the device, the loss and chirp factor values
corresponding to the minimum voltage are employed for optical field
modulation. If a voltage greater than the maximum value indicated is applied
to the device, the loss and chirp factor values corresponding to the maximum
voltage are employed for optical field modulation. Remember to properly set
the voltage range of the electrical driver to obtain the expected signal
modulation, chirping and extinction ratio.
Electro-optic frequency response can be considered as it is ideal or a filtering
characteristic can be inserted using a simple model or a user-defined one.

Loss and Applied Voltage (Min) [V]: the minimum value that the electrical input can

Optical Modulators
Chirping vs. assume. It must be smaller than the maximum value. Allowed values: min: -
Applied ; max: -; default: -5.
Voltage
Applied Voltage (Max) [V]: the maximum value that the electrical input
can assume. It must be greater than the minimum value. Allowed values:
min: -; max: -; default: 0.
Loss (Min) [dB]: the optical loss corresponding to the minimum applied
voltage. Allowed values: min: 0, max: -, default: 30.
Loss (Max) [dB]: the optical loss corresponding to the maximum applied
voltage. Allowed values: min: 0, max: -, default: 0.
Chirping factor (Min) [-]: the chirping factor corresponding to the
minimum applied voltage. Allowed values: min: -, max: -, default: 0.
Chirping factor (Max) [-]: the chirping factor corresponding to the
maximum applied voltage. Allowed values: min: -, max: -, default: 0.
Note
If the chirping factor corresponding to the minimum voltage is set to the
same value of the chirping factor corresponding to the maximum voltage, the
parameter is supposed to be constant versus applied voltage.
Frequency You can define the frequency response of the electro-optic effect of the
Response device, i.e. the spectral characteristic usually measured as S21(f) using the
opto-electronic network analyzer. Choices are the following.
Ideal: the frequency response is assumed flat and non-lossy.
Simple: the frequency response of the device is modeled as a low-pass
single pole filter.
Custom: the frequency response is defined through a data file.
-3 dB Bandwidth [GHz]: the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. This field is
enabled only if Simple model is selected. Allowed values: min 0; max
BWSPT/2; default 2Rb (reference bit rate).
Filename: name of the data file where the frequency response is stored. This
field is enabled only if Custom model is selected. You can choose the file
from the file system clicking on the Browse button. You can also edit the file
clicking on the Edit button: it opens an editor window loading the data file.
The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT.
The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters and must contain two
columns of ASCII values. The first column represents the frequency values
for which the electrical response is defined. These values, expressed in GHz,
must be positive and in ascending order. The second column represents the
transfer function values, expressed in dB, corresponding to the first column
frequency values. For further details about the file format, please refer to
section 16.1.8


Electro Absorption Modulator
8.3.2 Custom
You can define the law of optical loss and chirp factor as a function of the
input voltage, through an ASCII data file.

Loss and Filename: name of the data file where the law of optical loss and chirp factor
Chirping vs. as a function of the input voltage is stored. You can choose the file from the
Applied file system clicking on the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking
Voltage on the Edit button: it opens an editor window loading the data file. The
editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT.
Note
The file must be saved in the same directory where the model is saved.
The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters and must contain three
columns of ASCII values. The first column represents the applied voltage
values, which must be in ascending order. If the values are not in ascending
order, the correct behavior of the model is not guaranteed. The second
column represents loss values (expressed in dB) corresponding to the voltage
values of the first column. The loss values must be greater or equal to zero.
The third column represents chirping factors as described in [1]. If you don’t
want chirping factor varying with the applied voltage you must write the
same value in all the rows of this column.
If a voltage less than the minimum value (of the first column values) is
applied to the device, the loss and chirp values corresponding to the
minimum voltage are used for optical field modulation. If a voltage greater
than the maximum value (of the first column values) is applied to the device,
the loss and chirp value corresponding to the maximum voltage are
employed for optical field modulation.
Frequency You can define the frequency response of the electro-optic effect of the
Response device, i.e. the spectral characteristic usually measured as S21(f) using the
opto-electronic network analyzer. Choices are the following.
Ideal: the frequency response is assumed flat and non-lossy.
Simple: the frequency response of the device is modeled as a low-pass
single pole filter.
Custom: the frequency response is defined through a data file.
-3 dB Bandwidth [GHz]: the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. This field is
enabled only if Simple model is selected. Allowed values: min 0; max
BWSPT/2; default 2Rb (reference bit rate).
Filename: name of the data file where the frequency response is stored. This
field is enabled only if Custom model is selected. You can choose the file
The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT.
The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters and must contain two
columns of ASCII values. The first column represents the frequency values
for which the electrical response is defined. These values, expressed in GHz,
must be positive and in ascending order. The second column represents the
transfer function values, expressed in dB, corresponding to the first column
frequency values. For further details about the file format, please refer to
section 16.1.8.

Optical Modulators


Optical Phase Modulator
8.4 Optical Phase Modulator

This component simulates a phase modulator, i.e. a component that changes
the phase of the input optical signal as a function of the electrical driving
voltage. The transfer function in terms of phase shift vs. applied voltage is
supposed to be linear. This is a good approximation for realistic phase
modulators based on the electro-optic effect in LiNbO3 devices.
ELdB
−
E out = 10 20
e jφ E in (1)
where:
 V − V0 
φ = π  in  (2)
 Vπ 
SPT Behavior
and noise level. The optical phase modulator does not change the average
power of the input optical source, except for the attenuation introduced by
the excess loss. Hence, the optical phase modulator, during SPT simulations,
simply introduces the excess loss attenuation.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the electrical signal used Optical: the modulated optical signal
to modulate the optical signal
Parameters
Excess loss ELdB [dB]: the value of a constant extra loss introduced by the
Zero Phase Voltage V0 [V]: the input voltage that sets the modulator to
the zero phase shift point. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Voltage Vπ [V]: the input voltage swing that generates a π (180°) phase
shift on the optical signal. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 5.
electrical input is filtered by the following frequency transfer function.
 πf 
sin  
H(f ) =  B0  (3)
πf
B0
where:
B0 ≅ 2.25 ⋅ BW (4)

Optical Modulators
modulator.

Polarization Modulator
8.5 Polarization Modulator

Component name: polmod
Category: Polsk
This component simulates a polarization modulator, i.e. a component that
changes the State of Polarization (SOP) of the input optical signal as a
function of the electrical driving voltages (two signals in this implementation).
A schematic block diagram is shown here (PBS stands for "Polarization Beam
Splitter").
VS3 VS1
^x
Ein Eout
PBS
^y
Amplitude Phase
Section Section
Figure 8.3 The polarization modulation diagram
The first electrical signal VS3 is used to split the power of the input optical
signal between horizontal and vertical polarization. If no voltage is applied
and if the device is symmetric, i.e. when Vbal,S3 = 0, the power is equally split
on the two polarization axis, thus obtaining a 45° linear polarization at the
output.
Using the second signal VS1, the relative phase of the two linear polarization
is changed, so that elliptical states of polarization can be obtained.
The component can be used only when the Dual Polarization option is
chosen in the Simulation Parameter dialog window otherwise an error
message is given.
For a brief description of the POLSK modulation features, see section 13.2
and section 12.2 for binary POLSK driver and receiver description. See also
the “POLSK Project Bibliography” at the end of this chapter.
Note
This component works as previously outlined only if the input polarization is
aligned on the x axis. For example, it works properly whenever it is placed
after a laser or an optical pulse generator.
SPT Behavior
Since SPT simulations are based on the power spectrum of the optical signal,
the information about polarization can not be managed with the SPT
simulation technique. Thus SPT simulation does not work with projects
containing this component.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical VS1 Optical: the modulated optical signal

Electrical VS3

Optical Modulators
Parameters
modulator, which is independent of the electrical input signals. Allowed
Voltage of Zero Degree Rotation on S3 Axis (Vbal,S3) [V]: the balance
voltage of the power splitter section. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Voltage of Zero Degree Rotation on S1 Axis (Vbal,S1) [V]: the balance
voltage of the phase modulation section. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 0.
360° Rotation Voltage, both Axes (V2π) [V]: the input voltage swing that
generates a 2π (360°) rotation of the State of Polarization of the input optical
signal around the S3 or S1 axis in Stokes space. Allowed values: min 0; max -
; default 5.
electrical input is filtered by the following frequency transfer function.
 πf 
sin  
H(f ) =  B0  (3)
πf
B0
where:
B0 ≅ 2.25 ⋅ BW (4)
modulator.

References
8.6 References
San Diego, 1995
POLSK Project Bibliography

S.Benedetto and P.Poggiolini, Theory of polarization shift keying modulation,
IEEE Trans. on Comm., vol. 40, pp. 708-721, Apr. 1992.
S. Benedetto and P. Poggiolini, Multilevel polarization shift keying: optimum
receiver structure and performance evaluation, IEEE Trans. on Comm.,
vol. 42, pp. 1174-1186, Feb./Mar./Apr. 1994.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Performance of coherent optical
polarization shift keying modulation in the presence of phase noise, IEEE
Trans. on Comm., vol. 43, no. 2/3/4, pp. 1603-1612, Feb./Mar./Apr. 1995.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Direct detection of optical digital
transmission based on polarization shift keying modulation, IEEE J. of Select.
Areas in Comm., special issue on “High speed point-to-point optical
communications systems”, vol. 13, no. 3, Apr.1995. This paper has received
a nomination for the “Leonard G. Abraham Prize”, 1995 edition, that is
awarded to the best paper published in the IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in
Communications in that year.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Polarisation recovery in optical
polarisation shift keying systems, IEEE Trans. on Comm., vol. 45, n. 9.,
pp. 1269-1279; Oct. 97.
P. Poggiolini, S. Benedetto, Theory of polarization spreading techniques: part
I, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 5, pp. 2105-2118, May
1994. This paper has received a nomination for the “S. O. Rice Prize Paper
Award”, 1994 edition, that is awarded to the best paper published in the IEEE
Transactions on Communications in that year.
S. Benedetto, P. Poggiolini Theory of polarization spreading techniques: part
II, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 6, pp. 2291-2304, June
1994.
S. Benedetto, G. Olmo, P. Poggiolini, Trellis coded polarization shift keying
modulation for coherent optical communications, IEEE Transactions on
Communications, vol. 43, n. 2/3/4, pp. 1591-1602, Feb. /Mar./Apr. 1995.

9 Optical Amplifiers
Four Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) models are available:

a fixed gain amplifier
a saturable gain amplifier; its gain is estimated through a simplified
formula which takes into account saturation
a fixed output power amplifier; its gain is estimated to have a given total
output power
a physical model amplifier; its gain and noise figure are estimated taking
into account several physical parameters. The used model is based on the
well-known Giles-Desurvire rate-equation approach.
Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (SOA).
Optical Amplifiers
9.1 Optical Amplifier

This component simulates an Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA). Several
different models are available, ranging from simple ones, such as spectrally
flat, fixed gain amplifier to the detailed physical model, fully resolved in the
frequency/wavelength domain.
Gain saturation (when taken into account) and the operating point of the
EDFA is evaluated using an estimate of the input average power spectrum.
Consequently, all models assume that gain saturation can be evaluated using
a steady state approximation based on time-averaged values, neglecting the
temporal properties of the amplifier. This assumption is valid whenever the
signal at the input of the EDFA has a bandwidth of an order of magnitude
greater than 5 kHz, which is the typical low-pass frequency of standard EDFA
and is thus valid for virtually any optical communication system. A full
description of the implemented models can be found in [1] and in [2].
The amplifier models can be divided in two categories: “simplified” and
“physical' models. There are three “simplified” models that are described
through their gains and the commonly used noise figure parameters (section
9.1.8). Both the gain and the noise figure can be wavelength dependent. In
this case, the gain and/or noise figure should be described through a file
using the format described in detail in section 9.1.6. Two of the “simplified”
models can take into account gain saturation, too, as described in section
9.1.3. A first model automatically evaluates the gain so to satisfy the
constraint on a given total output power, while another model takes into
account EDFA gain saturation using a more sophisticated formula (section
9.1.2).
The “physical” model is significantly more complex then the previous one. It
requires specifying many physical parameters, among which the EDFA doped
fiber emission, absorption and attenuation spectra and the pumping laser
characteristics. The required simulation time is clearly higher than for the
“simplified” models.
Great care should be taken while choosing an amplifier model, to avoid
unexpectedly long simulation time or unexpected results. See section 9.1.5
for further information on this issue.
SPT Behavior
EDFA devices can be modeled as linear components defined through their
transfer functions as long as the gain transient effects are neglected, so that
a steady-state gain and noise figure can be defined. Thus they can be easily
simulated in SPT simulation that is based on the transfer function model of
each optical component. In formulae, given the SPT input power spectrum
Pin(f), the output spectrum is evaluated as:
Pout ( f ) = G ( f ) ⋅ Pin ( f ) + PASE ( f )

where G(f) is the wavelength-dependent amplifier gain and PASE(f) is the ASE
noise power spectrum at the output. G(f) and PASE(f) are evaluated according
to the different models, as shown in the following.

Type: opens the related dialog windows for the models, Fixed Gain,
Saturable Gain, Fixed Output Power and Physical Model.

Optical Amplifier

Force time domain gain computation: allows to force the time-domain
gain computation during the VBS simulation instead of the spectral domain
estimation. This option is taken into account for the Fixed Output Power,
Saturable Gain and Physical amplifier models.
Setting No (default value) the amplifier operating point and the gain are
estimated during the preliminary SPT phase (pre-run) of the simulation (see
the Simulation chapter in the OptSim User Manual). This estimation is based
on the input average power spectrum.
Setting Yes the amplifier operating point and the gain are computed during
the time-domain simulation phase (run) of the VBS. The gain is then obtained
taking into account the amplifier input power instead of its approximation.
This option can be chosen in some particular system configurations, i.e. when
the SPT simulation is considered not enough accurate to estimate the signal
spectrum and this affects the amplifier gain estimation.
Note
Setting Yes this option can slow-down the simulation.
9.1.1 Fixed Gain

The fixed gain model is the simplest available but can be useful in several
different situations. For example:
while working on a simulation where the attention is not focused on
amplification problems, but to fiber transmission properties. In this cases,
a very simple model for the EDFA is sometimes preferred in order to
easily fix power levels and gains along the link
while setting up a long simulation for the first time, for a first check of the
system parameters
Saturation effects are not taken into account in this model, so that the gain
and the noise figure are selected as constant scalar numbers (flat case) or as
a function of wavelength (through an external file).
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Gain Shape: specifies if the gain is described as a scalar number (Flat) or
through a data file as a function of wavelength (From file).
Gain [dB]: the amplifier gain in dB; it is enable if the Flat option is selected.
Gain Shape File Name: name of the data file where the gain (dB) vs.
wavelength (nm) function is stored. You can choose the file from the file
system clicking on the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking on
the Edit button: it opens an editor window loading the data file. The editor is
VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The filename extension must be DAT
in capital letters. See section 9.1.6 for further details on the file format.
No Noise: when selected, noise should is not added to the signal (ideal
case). This feature can help to investigate on effects usually “buried” in the
ASE noise.
Noise figure: specifies if the noise figure is described as a scalar number
(Flat) or through a data file as a function of wavelength (From file).

Optical Amplifiers
F [dB] or [lin]: specifies the noise figure, see section 9.1.8 for details on the
EDFA noise figure. This field is enable only if the Flat option is selected.
Allowed values: min 0 (dB); max -; default 4.5 (dB).
Noise figure File Name: name of the data file where the noise figure (dB)
vs. wavelength (nm) function is stored. You can choose the file from the file
9.1.2 Saturable Gain

The saturable gain model takes into account the gain saturation of the
amplifier using the implicit formula, (from [2]):
Pin
(1−G ) log 2
P3dB
G = G0 e (1)
where:
G0 is the small signal gain
P3dB is the output saturation power, i.e. the output power where the gain
is reduced to G0/2 i.e. to one half of the small signal gain (under the
approximation G0>>1)
Pin is the total input power
This model is obtained under following assumptions:
high small signal gain, i.e. G0>>1
output power not much greater than P3dB
uniform pumping of the amplifier
negligible self-saturation due to the internally generated ASE noise
An example of the input-output transfer functions is given in EDFA example,
together with several comments on the model properties.
The same formula can be rewritten, introducing the total input and output
powers and the explicit dependence from wavelength as:
Pin − Pout
log 2
G (λ ) = G0 (λ )e P3dB
(2)
This is the approximated formula used for the wavelength dependent case.
Basically, the actual gain G(λ) is estimated as the small signal gain G0(λ)
multiplied by the scalar value:
Pin − Pout
log 2
P3dB
K =e (3)
Note that this term contains the output power which in turns depend on the
gain G(λ), so that the equation could only be solved iteratively. Consequently,
saturation affects the absolute value of the gain but not its spectral shape.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical

Optical Amplifier
Parameters
Output Saturation Power [dBm] or [mW]: the output saturation power
P3dB. Allowed values: min -; max -; default -7 (dBm).
Small Signal Gain [dB]: the amplifier gain in dB; it is enable if the Flat
option is selected. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 25.
No Noise: selects if no noise should be added to the signal (ideal case). This
feature can help to investigate on effects usually “buried” in the ASE noise.
Examples
An example of the input output-transfer functions for a flat case saturating
amplifier with G0=30 dB and P3dB =10 dBm is given in the following pictures.
The last one shows the input-output power transfer function.
The curves can be divided into three regions:
1. for an input power smaller that approx. -20 dBm, the amplifier performs
linearly and has an amplification equal to the small signal amplification
G0=30 dB;
2. for an input power higher than approx. +20 dBm, the amplifier is
completely saturated and the amplification is close to 0 dB;
3. in the intermediate region, i.e. for power close to P3dB =10 dBm, the
amplifier is on the onset of saturation; the amplification gain decreases
from G0 to 0 dB when increasing input power.

Optical Amplifiers
Figure 9.1 Gain as a function of output power for G0=30 dB and

P3dB=10 dBm. Note the 3 dB reduction in the gain for Pout= P3dB
Figure 9.2 Gain as a function of input power for G0=30 dB and P3dB =10 dBm.

Optical Amplifier
Figure 9.3 Output power as a function of input power for G0=30 dB and P3dB
=10 dBm.
9.1.3 Fixed Output Power

The fixed output power model sets the amplifier gain so to have a total
output power equal to a given fixed value, unless the resulting gain is greater
than the specified small signal gain, which turns out to have also the meaning
of maximum achievable gain for this model. This simplified model follows one
of the models proposed in [2]. The evaluation of the output power takes into
accounts the internally generated ASE noise contribution. In the wavelength
dependent model, the gain is reduced by a scalar value to satisfy the fixed
output power constraint.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Output Power [dBm] or [mW]: sets the value of the total power (signal +
noise) at the output of the amplifier. Allowed values: min - (dBm); max -;
default 7 (dBm).
Maximum Small-Signal Gain [dB]: it is the maximum gain the amplifier
can give to the signal to ensure the requested output power. It is enable only
if the Flat option is selected. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 35.
No Noise: selects if no noise should be added to the signal (ideal case). This
feature can help to investigate on effects usually “buried” in the ASE noise.

Optical Amplifiers

9.1.4 Physical Model

The physical model implements a detailed model for the EDFA saturation and
wavelength dependence of the gain. The model used in OptSim is based on
the solution of the EDFA rate equations specified in [1] under the so-called
“effective overlap approximation”. In fact, this model assumes that, for each
wavelength, the emission and absorption coefficients (usually expressed in
[dB/m]) can be obtained by multiplying the emission and absorption cross
sections (usually expressed in [m2]) by a coefficient which depends on fiber
dopant density and effective area, but does not depends on wavelength nor
incident optical power.
The rate equations are solved considering a spectrally resolved, steady state
model in a pre-runtime phase. The solution of the rate equation gives a gain
and noise figure shape which are then implemented in the time domain as
filters, using accurate numerical algorithms.
This model requires specifying several parameters, which can be divided in
two categories:
1. Parameters related to the “physical” properties of the erbium-doped fiber,
such as the wavelength dependent emission and absorption gain and the
intrinsic fiber loss. These parameters are inserted through a data file; see
section 9.1.9 for a detailed description on how to obtain the parameters
starting from the emission and absorption cross-sections or see the
description file format rules (section 9.1.6). The default amplifier models
come with a sample description file called DOPEDFIB.DAT, which will be
copied in the working directory if one of the default types is selected.
2. Parameters related to implementation of the amplifier, such as its length,
input and output coupler attenuation, pump wavelength, direction and
power and so on.
This module generates output graphs for the EDFA gain and noise figure as a
function of wavelength, estimated over the SPT bandwidth (BWSPT).
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Amplifier Type: several default models are available. They are all based on
the sample description file DOPEDFIB.DAT that will be copied in the working
directory if one of these default types is selected. The defaults are:
Booster 12 dBm, booster amplifier having a maximum output power of
the order of 12 dBm when the input power is in the -6 dBm to 0 dBm
range

Optical Amplifier
Line amplifier 10 dB gain, in-line amplifier having a gain close to 10 dB

when the input power is of the order of -7 dBm, noise figure 4.4 dBm
Line amplifier 20 dB gain, in-line amplifier having a gain close to 20 dB
when the output power in the -17 dBm range, noise figure 4.4 dBm
Receiver Pre-Amplifier F=4.3 dB, receiver preamplifier having a noise
figure of 4.3 dB and an amplification close the 24 dBm for low input
power, of the order of -40 dBm to -22 dBm
Custom, your own parameters
Doped Fiber Length [m]: the length of the erbium-doped fiber.
Input Insertion Loss [dB]: the input port insertion loss, usually due to the
input isolators and couplers, when present. Allowed values: min 0; max -.
Output Insertion Loss [dB]: the output port insertion loss, usually due to
the input-output isolators and couplers, when present. Allowed values: min 0;
max -.
Co-Propagating Pump: specifies if a co-propagating pump is present.
Power [mW] or [dBm]: the power of the co-propagating pump. Allowed
values: min 0 (mW); max -.
Frequency/Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the frequency or wavelength of
the co-propagating pump. Allowed values: min 0.; max -.
Note
The frequency of the co-propagating pump must be inside the bandwidth
defined in the doped fiber data file.
Counter-Propagating Pump: a button that allows specifying if a Counter-

propagating pump is present.
Power [mW] or [dBm]: the power of the counter-propagating pump.
Allowed values: min - dBm or 0. mW; max -.
Frequency/Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the frequency or wavelength of
the counter-propagating pump. Allowed values: min 0.; max -.
Note
The frequency of the counter-propagating pump must be inside the
bandwidth defined in the doped fiber data file.
Doped Fiber Data: name of the data description file. You can choose the file
The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The filename extension
Gain and Noise Spectra Plots: enables the plotting on screen of the gain
and noise figure of the amplifier. In very long simulation making use of tens
or hundreds of amplifiers, we suggest to disable this option, to avoid the
accumulation of a exceedingly large number of data files.
9.1.5 How to Choose EDFA Simulation Models

As it has been described in the introduction (section 9.1), several different
EDFA models are available. The different options to be chosen can be
summarized as follows:
1. “simplified” or “physical” model
2. saturating or non-saturating model

Optical Amplifiers
3. flat or wavelength dependent gain (and/or noise figure)

The different models should be chosen by considering that:
increasing the complexity of the model increases the required simulation
time. EDFA models can be ordered with respect to increasing
computational complexity as follows:
1. simplified models with flat gain and noise figure
2. simplified models with non-flat (i.e. wavelength dependent) gain or
noise figure
3. physical model
models considering saturation, if not properly chosen in terms of input
parameters, can give rise to unexpected levels for the output power; it
should be remembered that high output power, if the amplifier is followed
by a fiber, can give rise to very long simulation time
the “physical” model requires the knowledge of a great numbers of EDFA
parameters
You should choose the amplifier model having in mind all these aspects. For
example, it could be advisable to use simplified models for a first run of the
simulation, and then use more complex models for the refinements of the
results.
The most commonly used model is probably the fixed output power models,
since several commercial EDFA datasheets usually do not give detailed
information on saturation properties of the devices, but simply their
maximum output power.
9.1.6 Optical Amplifier Description Files

All the supplied files for the description of the amplifier must have a filename
ending with the extension DAT (in capital letters).
The syntax to be used for these files follows the rules:
The first part of the file may contain comment lines. A line that has two
'#' characters in the first two columns is mandatory and it ends the
comment section.
All comment lines must have a '#' character in the first column.
Comment lines are allowed only after the first line and above the '##'
line.
For the simplified EDFA models, the data must be written in lines each
containing the wavelength in [nm] as the first field and the required
values (gain or noise figure) in dB. Here is an example.
Data for amplifier AX3231
Gain in dB as a function of wavelength
##
1540. 6.
1540.19995 6.15836143
1540.3999 6.3135252
1540.59985 6.46548986
1540.7998 6.61425591
1540.99976 6.75982428
1541.19971 6.90219402
1541.39966 7.04136467
1541.59961 7.17733765
1541.79956 7.310112
1541.99951 7.43968773

Optical Amplifier
1542.19946 7.56606483
1542.39941 7.68924379
1542.59937 7.80922413
....
For the physical EDFA model, in the overlap integral approximation, the
data must be written as follows:
− a first line must contain the value of the saturation parameter in
[m-1s-1] followed by a line containing the character '#', see section
9.1.9
− the following lines should contain, for each line, the wavelength in
[nm] followed by the emission coefficient in [dB/m], the absorption
coefficient in [dB/m] and the intrinsic loss in [dB/m] at the specified
wavelength
Note
The bandwidth defined in the file must be greater than the SPT bandwidth.
Here is an example.
#
# EXAMPLE DATA FOR OptSim EDFA MODEL
#
# The first parameter is the saturation power,
# followed by the conventional
# separation sign # and then by the four columns:
# wavelength [nm] emission [dB/m] absorption [dB/m] loss [dB/m]
#
##
8.67e15 saturation parameter [m^-1 s^-1]
#
1450. 0.0189598892 0.104602687 0.0250000004
1450.34485 0.0364919864 0.199739471 0.0250000004
1450.6897 0.0526750833 0.285307109 0.0250000004
1451.03455 0.0677747428 0.366118371 0.0250000004
1451.37927 0.0818995684 0.438738942 0.0250000004
1451.72412 0.0946921483 0.507609963 0.0250000004
1452.06897 0.107067831 0.569540262 0.0250000004
1452.41382 0.11978811 0.629318237 0.0250000004
1452.75854 0.130077243 0.68602562 0.0250000004
1453.10339 0.141509846 0.740024388 0.0250000004
1453.44824 0.152790979 0.79181397 0.0250000004
...
...
9.1.7 How to Choose SPT Bandwidth for EDFA Noise

Simulation
The spectral region where EDFA noise is generated coincides with the SPT
bandwidth (BWSPT) even when a VBS is running since the saturation
properties of the amplifier are estimated on the SPT bandwidth and not on
the VBS bandwidth. Basically, an averaged power spectrum on SPT
bandwidth is propagated in parallel with the time-domain samples, and each
amplifier is “resolved” over this enlarged bandwidth.
This is useful to cope with the fact that, while the useful signal range is
usually limited to a few nanometers, a typical EDFA has a gain bandwidth of
the order of 40-50 nm (approx. from 1520 to 1570 nm) an ASE noise is
emitted over this entire bandwidth.
As a rule of thumb, if accurate saturation analysis is required, the SPT
bandwidth should be approximately equal to the spectral region where the
amplifier is expected to have a gain larger than one. This is particularly
important when using the physical model. In this case, even if the signals are
usually placed around 1550 nm, the amplifier has a high gain (and noise

Optical Amplifiers
figure) in the region around 1530 nm. Consequently, a bandwidth in the

range 1520-1570 nm should typically be set as SPT bandwidth for this case.
9.1.8 EDFA Noise Figures

All “simplified” EDFA models require specifying the amplifier noise figure. This
parameter is specified so that the output ASE power in a bandwidth ∆ν and on
two polarizations can be expressed as (see [1], page 279):
PASE = F (G − 1)hv∆v / 2
where F is the noise figure parameter, G the amplifier gain, h the Planck's
constant and ν the optical frequency.
This definition for the output ASE noise evaluation makes sense only when
G>1, otherwise PASE would be negative. You should thus avoid using the
simplified models and specifying a gain smaller than one. Anyway, no error
message is given in this “unphysical” situation, and simply the output ASE
power is set to zero.
9.1.9 EDFA Physical Model: Parameter Conversion

The generation of the EDFA description file in this model starting from a given
set of experimental measurements on an amplifier may require some
conversion. Here is a brief overview on how to obtain the saturation
parameter and the gain coefficients. For further details, you should refer to
one of the several papers on the subject, like for example [1].
The saturation parameter χ is defined as:
nt
χ = πbeff2 (1)
τ
where beff is the effective radius of the doped region (and consequently πbeff2
is the effective transversal area of the fiber doped region), nt is the average
ion density in [m-3] and τ is the so-called “metastable lifetime”.
The gain g(λ) and absorption α(λ) coefficients can be obtained from the
emission σem(λ) and absorption σabs(λ) cross-sections as:
g (λ ) = σ em (λ )Γ(λ )nt (2)
and:
α (λ ) = σ abs (λ )Γ(λ )nt (3)
where Γ(λ) is the overlap integral between the optical mode inside the fiber
and the erbium doping profile, while nt is the average ion density in [m-3].
The emission and absorption coefficients in [m-1] should then be converted in
[dB m-1] according to:
α dB = 10 log10 (eα ) (4)

Semiconductor Optical Amplifier
9.2 Semiconductor Optical Amplifier

This component simulates a semiconductor optical amplifier (SOA). It is
modeled as a traveling wave amplifier with a wavelength flat gain, taking into
account carrier time-dynamics and saturation.
SPT Behavior
SOAs are highly non-linear devices. Their simulation as linear components
defining through an input-output transfer function may not be reliable. The
simulation of SOAs is anyway allowed in SPT, but a warning message saying
that results may be unreliable is shown. In SPT, the steady state gain (which
will be defined in the following pages) is used to propagate power spectrum
through the devices by simply assuming that: Pout ( f ) = Gsteady − state ⋅ Pin ( f ) .
In general, we advise to use VBS whenever SOA are involved.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Model description
The implemented model was initially proposed by Saleh [4], and it is based
on the analysis of a wave equation for the optical field propagation and on a
rate equation for the carrier density evolution. It does not consider device
parameter frequency dependence.
To better understand the above analysis, we resume in the following table the
entire set of symbols and parameters used.
Symbol Meaning
E Electrical field
I SOA bias current (assumed to be time independent)
C Light speed
ε0 Vacuum permittivity
N Active material refractive index
χ Dielectric susceptibility
N Carrier density
α Linewidth enhancement factor
g(z,t) Gain
Γ Confinement factor
A Material gain constant
Symbol Meaning
αP Material loss
N0 Optical transparency carrier density
L Active region length
q Electron charge
V Active region volume
A Active region transverse area

Optical Amplifiers
τs Spontaneous carrier lifetime

PS Saturation power
We do not consider polarization dependence on any device parameters.
Anyway, we do consider the optical field polarization in the gain saturation
process. Consequently, our model predicts several polarization-related
effects, such as the dependence of SOA four-wave-mixing effects on the
pumps relative polarization states.
The SOA active region is considered monomodal with transverse field
distribution U(x,y). The longitudinal electric field propagation (along z) is
governed by the following standard wave equation:
∂ 2 E (z, t ) n 2 ∂ 2 E (z, t ) 1 ∂2P

− = (1)
∂z 2 c 2 ∂t 2 ε 0 c 2 ∂t 2
where P=χ E is the induced polarization taking into account the active
properties of the material. The susceptibility χ is given by:
nc
χ (N ) = − (α − j )g (N ) (2)
ω
where g(N) is the carrier density dependent gain. In a small signal analysis,
g(N) is linearly dependent on carriers through the following law:
g ( N ) = Γ[a( N − N 0 )] − α P (3)
Introducing the slowly varying envelope approximation (SVEA) and

considering the above assumption, the wave equation is written as:
∂E 1 + jα
= g ( z , t )E ( z , t ) (4)
∂z 2
Integrating along z, we obtain:
1 + jα L 
E (L, t ) = E (0, t )exp  ∫ g ( z , t )dz  (5)
 2 0 
On the other hand the rate equation governing the carrier density is given by:
dN I N g (n )
E (t , z )
2
= − − (6)
dt qV τ s hω
This equation describes the carrier density inside the active region and its
time evolution due to the field variation. Please note that the bias current I is
assumed to be time-independent, i.e., just a DC component.
Assuming the gain to be linearly dependent on the carriers, this equation is
modified taking into account Eq.(3) as:
dg ( z , t ) 1 ∂
= −[g ( z , t ) − g 0 ] − E (z, t )
2
τs (7)
dt Ps ∂z
where we have introduced the following parameters:
Ahω
Ps = (saturation power) (8)
Γ aτ s

Iτ s
N0 = (transparency carrier density) (9)
qV
[
g 0 = Γa N 0 − N 0 ] (10)
Integrating along z we obtain:
 d  E (L, t ) 2 E (0, t ) 2 
1 + τ s dt [G (t ) − G0 ] = −  P −
Ps 
 (11)
 s
where:
L
G0 = g 0 L and G (t ) = ∫ g ( z , t )dz
0

Optical Amplifiers
Numerical solution
The present SOA model, proposed by Saleh [4], is thus characterized by the
following two coupled equations:
1 + jα 
E (L, t ) = E (0, t )exp  G (t ) (12)
 2 
 d  E (L, t ) 2 E (0, t ) 2 
1 + τ s dt [G (t ) − G0 ] = −  P −
PS 
 (13)
 S
An implicit solution for the evolution of the optical field is thus given by:
1 + jα 
E (L, t ) = E (0, t ) ⋅ exp  G0 
 2 
(14)
 1 + jα  E (L, t ) 2 E (0, t ) 2   1 − t 
⋅ exp −  −  * e τs 
 2  PS PS   τ s 

 
(the symbol * means convolution). This equation can be solved using the
component diagram shown in the following figure.
E(0,t)  1 + jα  E(L,t)
exp G0 
 2 
exp(⋅ )
2 Filter
⋅ 1 + jα
H (ϖ ) = −
PS 2 (1 + jωτ s )
2
⋅
PS
Figure 9.4 The model transfer function
Output depends on input and output signals and an iterative method is

employed to numerically solve this equation. In a time-domain simulation, it
is possible solve this equation considering the output at time ti depending on
input at time ti and output at time ti-1. Error due to this approximation can be
negligible if the simulation sampling time ti - ti-1 is small enough compared to
the smaller system time constants. The achievable accuracy increases when
increasing the simulation bandwidth trading off with computational time. This
approach in a time-domain simulation tool was first presented in [5].
Parameters
Bias Current I [mA]: the input bias current. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 100.

Amplifier Length L [µ µm]: the physical longitudinal length of the active

layer. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 300.
Active Layer Width w [µ µm]: the physical width of the active layer. Allowed
Active Layer thickness d [µ µm]: physical thickness of the active layer.
Allowed values: min 0 µm; max -; default 0.15 µm.
Confinement Factor Γ [-]: the effective confinement factor of the active
layer. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0.35.
Spontaneous carrier lifetime τs [ns]: Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 0.3.
Transparency carrier density N0 [cm-3]: the carrier density at the optical
transparency. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1018.
Material gain constant a [cm2]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 3
10-16.
Linewidth Enhancement Factor α [cm-1]: Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 3.
Material Loss [cm-1]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 10.5.
Input insertion loss [dB]: the optical loss at the device input. Allowed
Output insertion loss [dB]: the optical loss at the device output. Allowed
Saturation Power [mW]: (read only field) the evaluated saturation power
as in Eq.(8).

Optical Amplifiers
9.3 Reference
[1] C. R. Giles and E. Desurvire, Modeling erbium-doped fiber amplifiers, J.
Lightwave Technol., vol. 9, no. 2, pp. 271-283, Feb. 1991.
[2] C. R. Giles and E. Desurvire, Propagation of signal and noise in
concatenated Erbium-doped fiber optical amplifiers, J. Lightwave
Technol., vol. 9, no. 2, pp. 271-283, Feb. 1991.
[3] W. Zeiler, F. Di Pasquale, P. Bayvel, J. Midwinter, Modeling of four wave
mixing and gain peaking in amplified WDM optical communication
systems and networks, J. Lightwave Technol., vol. 14, no. 9, pp. 1933-
1942, Sept. 1996.
[4] A. A. M. Saleh, Nonlinear models of travelling-wave optical amplifiers,
Electronics Letters, vol. 24, n. 14, pp. 835-837, Jul. 1988.
[5] S. Benedetto, I. Maio, P. Poggiolini and P. Zanini, Simulation of
multicarrier traveling-wave semiconductor laser amplifiers, IEEE-
Photonics Technology Letters, vol. 3, n. 8., pp.712-714, Aug. 1991.

10 Optical Filters
Five Optical Filter models are available:

a Multi-Stage Lorentzian filter
a Raised Cosine filter
a Supergaussian filter
a Bessel filter
an User-defined filter where the filter modulus and group delay (or
phase) as a function of frequency are given through an ASCII data file,
thus allowing to simulate virtually any type of filter
Optical Filters
10.1 Optical Filter

This component simulates an optical filter. Five different filter models are
available: multiple-stage Lorentzian, raised cosine, Supergaussian, Bessel
and user-defined.
For each filter the corresponding notch filter that synthesizes [1-|H(f)|] is
available.
SPT Behavior
Optical filters are linear components defined through their transfer functions,
thus they can be fully simulated in SPT simulations that is based on the
transfer function model of each optical component. Therefore, the optical
spectrum is filtered using the predefined or user-defined transfer function.
Since SPT simulations are based on the propagation of power spectra, only
the modulus of the transfer functions is relevant. In formulae, given the SPT
input power spectrum Pin(f), the output spectrum is evaluated as:
2
Pout ( f ) = H ( f ) ⋅ Pin ( f )
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the models, Multi-Stage
Lorentzian, User-Defined, Supergaussian, Bessel and Raised-Cosine.
Filter Synthesis: selects the filter type bandpass or notch [1-|H(f)|].
10.1.1 Multiple-Stage Lorentzian

This model implements a multiple-stage Lorentzian filter, i.e. a filter having
the following transfer function:
N
 
 
2  1 
H( f ) =  2 
(1)
  2( f − f 0 )  
 1 +  ∆f  
  s  
where f0 is the filter central frequency, N is the number of stages and ∆fs is
automatically evaluated so to have a global 3-dB two-sided bandwidth equal
to the value f3dB specified in the parameter dialog window.
For example, if N=1 then ∆fs = f3dB, while in general the relation between the
two parameters is given by:
f 3dB = ∆f s 21 N
−1 (2)
The multiple stage Lorentzian filter, after a proper fitting of its three free
parameters f0 , f3dB and N to actual measurements, can be successfully used
to simulate many types of single input – single output optical filters.
Moreover, a bank of parallel multiple stage Lorentzian filters with different f0
but identical f3dB and N, allows to simulate realistic WDM receiver.
For more details, see the related examples.
Inputs Outputs

Optical Filter
Optical Optical
Parameters
Number of Stages N [-]: the stages N of the transfer function (1). Allowed
Center Frequency [THz] or [nm]: the center frequency f0 of the transfer
function (1). Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
-3dB Two-Sided Bandwidth [GHz] or [nm]: the range between the two
BWVBS
cut-off frequencies. Allowed values: min 0 (GHz); max 21 N − 1 ;
2
 BWVBS 
default min  60,  (GHz).
 2 
Note
If the specified 3-dB filter bandwidth is too large compared to the simulation
bandwidth, an error message is given. In this case, you can either reduce the
filter bandwidth or increase the global bandwidth.
Example
The single stage Lorentzian filter has a rather smooth roll-off, since it is a
single pole bandpass filter. In order to obtain a filter with sharper roll-off, you
can increase the number of stages N while keeping the same f3dB bandwidth.
As an example, we report in the following pictures the transfer function for
Lorentzian filters having the same bandwidth f3dB and N set to 1,5 and 10.
Figure 10.1 Lorentzian filter transfer function for f3dB=1 and N set to 1,5,10

Optical Filters
Figure 10.2 Zoom of the central part of the picture above
10.1.2 Raised Cosine

This model implements a raised cosine transfer function filter i.e. a filter
having the following transfer function:
 Bw
 1 , f − f 0 < (1 − R0 )
2
 α
1   π  B   Bw B
H( f ) =  α 1 − sin   f − f 0 − w   , (1 − R0 ) < f − f 0 < (1 + R0 ) w
2   Ro Bw  2   2 2
 B
 0 , f − f 0 > (1 + R0 ) w
 2
(1)
where f0 is the filter center frequency, Bw is the FWHM (Full Width Half
Maximum) bandwidth and Ro is so-called roll-off parameter (see figure
below). The parameter α is the exponent at which the standard raised cosine
function is raised. For further details on raised cosine filters, see reference
[1].
The filter is numerically implemented using the “Overlap-and-Add” algorithm
(see reference [3]). This is the same algorithm used for the linear operator of
the fiber component. This algorithm allows a very accurate implementation of
any complex transfer functions.
The optical raised cosine filter is useful in many simulations where the exact
shape of the filters are not know in details, and one wants to describe filters
simply with their central frequency and passband.

Optical Filter
(1+R0)Bw /2
H(f) , α = 1
(1-R0)Bw /2
1
Bw
0.5
0
f
f0
Figure 10.3 Raised Cosine transfer function
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Raised-Cosine exponent [-]: the exponent α in (1). Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 1.
Raised-Cosine Roll-off [-]: the filter roll-off Ro in (1). Allowed values: min
0; max 1; default 0.5.
Center Frequency [THz] or [nm]: the filter center frequency f0 in (1).
Bandwidth [GHz] or [nm]: the absolute bandwidth Bw of the filter. Allowed
values: min 0 (GHz); max -; default 60 (GHz).
Amplitude and group delay plots: enables the plotting on screen of the
transfer function and group delay obtained with the above parameters,
together with the transfer function and group delay currently implemented by
the component after the filter synthesis.
10.1.3 Supergaussian
This model implements a Supergaussian filter, i.e. a filter having the following
transfer function:
 ( f − f 0 )2 N 
H ( f ) = exp − 
 (1)
 2∆f 2 N 
where f0 is the filter central frequency and N is the filter order. ∆f is
automatically evaluated to have a global 3-dB two-sided bandwidth equal to
the value f3dB specified in the parameter dialog window. The relation between
the two parameters is given by:
f 3dB
∆f = (2)
2 ln (2)
2N

Optical Filters
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Supergaussian Order []: order N of the supergaussian filter transfer
function. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Center Frequency [THz] or [nm]: the center frequency f0 of the transfer
function (1). Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
cut-off frequencies. Allowed values: min 0 (GHz); max BWVBS; default
 BWVBS 
min  60, .
 2 
10.1.4 Bessel
This model implements a Bessel filter. The characteristics of this standard
family of filters can be found in any book on analog filters, such as [4].
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Number of poles: the number of Bessel filter poles Allowed values: min 1;
max 8; default 1.
Center Frequency [THz] or [nm]: the center frequency f0 of the filter
transfer function. Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
cut-off frequencies. Allowed values: min 0 (GHz); max BWVBS; default
 BWVBS 
min  60, .
 2 
10.1.5 User-defined Optical Filter

This model implements a generic user-defined optical filter. The filter transfer
function (amplitude and group delay or phase vs. frequency or wavelength)
must be specified through a standard ASCII data file, following the format
specified in “User-Defined Filter File Format” in this section.
The component can thus be used to simulate a wide range of passive optical
components, such as:
arbitrary optical receiving filters
dispersion compensation devices

Optical Filter
gratings
in general, any transfer function of experimentally measured linear device
The numerical algorithm used to implement these components is very
accurate and advanced; see “User-defined Filter Synthesis” in this section for
further details.
The component is very flexible, and the parameters can be inserted in
different formats, namely:
abscissa in [THz] (frequency) or [nm] (wavelength)
absolute frequency (wavelength) or relative to a specified reference
frequency, see the Simulation Parameters description in the OptSim User
Manual
amplitude on a linear scale or in dB
transfer function as a function of group delay or phase
Moreover, the transfer function may be shifted and/or scaled on the
frequency axis, so that you can define a filter shape and then use it in
different situations (see “Frequency Translation” in this section for further
details).
The component may generate an output chart where the following graphs are
shown:
transfer function as specified in the user description file (modulus and
phase or group delay)
currently synthesized transfer function(modulus and group delay)
This component is implemented using the same algorithm (Overlap and add
[3]) used for the linear operator of the fiber component. This algorithm allows
a very accurate implementation of any complex transfer functions. Anyway,
in some peculiar situations, the digital filter synthesis may not be possible.
These situations are usually due to:
1. Some of the input parameters do not match among themselves; for
example, the filter is specified on a frequency range, which is completely
outside the simulation bandwidth.
2. The filter is specified on a frequency range much smaller than the
simulation bandwidth.
3. The filter transfer function comes from an experimental measure where
the measurement uncertainty is high, and thus the measured transfer
function has a lot of noise superimposed to the actual transfer function.
4. The filter has a exceedingly long time-domain impulse response; for
example a bandpass filter whose bandwidth is several orders of
magnitude smaller than the simulation bandwidth.
In all these cases, the simulation is stopped and an error message is given.
Refer to “If Something goes Wrong...” in this section for further details.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Filter Data Filename: name of the data file where the transfer function vs.
frequency is stored. You can choose the file from the file system clicking on
the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking on the Edit button: it

Optical Filters
opens an editor window loading the data file. The editor is VI for Unix or
Notepad for Windows NT. See “User-Defined Filter File Format” in this section
for further details.
File Format Wavelength or Frequency: specifies if the abscissa values of the transfer
function in the description file are expressed in wavelength or frequency.
Ampl. Square and Phase, Ampl. Square and Group Delay or Ampl.
Square only: specifies if the transfer function in the description file is
expressed as a function of amplitude and phase, amplitude and group delay
or amplitude only (the amplitude should always be expressed as the square
of the modulus of the transfer function).
Amplitude Square: specifies whether the transfer function amplitude in the
description file is expressed in dB or in a linear scale.
Absolute abscissa or Relative to Reference Frequency: specifies if the
abscissa values of the transfer function in the description file are expressed in
absolute values or with an offset respect to the reference frequency specified
in the fields below (the allowed values for these field are: min >0; max -;
default f0,SPT).
Smoothing: enables to smoothen the data points supplied in the user data
file. See “Transfer Function Smoothing” in this section for further details.
Smoothing factor [-]: the smoothing integer factor to be applied when
synthesizing the filter. This field is enabled only if Smoothing is set. See
“Transfer Function Smoothing” in this section for further details. Allowed
Offset [THz] or [nm]: specifies a shift between the current simulated
transfer function and the transfer function stored on the filter description file.
It should be set to 0 (the default) when offset is not required. See “Frequency
Translation” in this section for further details. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 0.
Scaling [-]: the real number that specifies the expansion/stretch factor in
the frequency scale of the transfer function stored in the data file. This
parameter should be set to 1 (the default) when scaling is not required. See
“Frequency Translation” in this section for further details. Allowed values: min
>0; max -; default 1.
Actual Filter Amplitude and Group Delay Plots: enables the plotting on
screen of the supplied transfer function and group delay data, together with
the transfer function and group delay currently implemented by the
component. Please note that when this filter is placed in an N-time “iterated”
area and this option is set, N identical charts are generated. In this and other
similar situation, it is advisable to set this option off.
User-Defined Filter File Format

All the supplied files for the description of the filter must have a filename
ending with the extension .DAT (in capital letters).
The syntax to be used for these files must match the following rules:
comment section.

Optical Filter
line.
The data must be written in lines, separated by blank, each containing:
− the frequency in [THz] (or wavelength in [nm]) as the first field
− the modulus of the transfer function (linear scale or dB)
− when required, the phase in radians or the group delay in ps
Abscissas (either frequency or wavelength) should be given in ascending
order while abscissas are not required to be strictly equispaced. Two or more
points with the same frequency (or wavelength) are not allowed: if this
situation happens only the first line containing the repeated value is
considered and a warning message is shown. The maximum number of
allowed points is 4095; if the file contains more than 4095 points, only the
first 4095 points are considered and a warning message is shown.
Here is an example of input file:
#
# Filter description file
#
# General comments for the filter:
#
# - Absolute Abscissae in [THz]
# - Amplitude on a linear scale
# - Phase in radians
#
##
192.449997 0.00819663145 6.05006695
192.450546 0.0082128942 6.03798819
192.451096 0.00822920538 6.02592087
192.45166 0.00824601948 6.01353168
192.452209 0.00826242939 6.00148916
192.452759 0.00827888772 5.98945856
192.453308 0.00829539541 5.97744036
192.453873 0.00831241254 5.96510124
192.454422 0.00832901988 5.95310688
...
Please note that, accordingly with the OptSim units for optical signals, the
units to be used in the description file are:
frequency in [THz]
wavelength in [nm]
phases in [radians]
group delay in [ps].
Frequency Translation
The transfer function specified on the filter description file can be shifted
and/or compressed/expanded with respect the frequency (or wavelength)
axis by the use of the two parameters Offset and Scaling. This feature may
prove very useful to define a given filter on a description file, and then
reusing it in different position on the frequency axis.
As an example of how offset and scaling works, the Figure 10.4 shows a
typical sin(x)/x filter centered at 1550 nm, while the following transfer
functions are obtained as follows:
by setting the Offset parameter to -3 nm, the resulting transfer function
is shifted as shown in Figure 10.5
by setting the Scaling parameter to 2, the resulting transfer function is
stretched as shown in Figure 10.6

Optical Filters
by combining the previous Offset and Scaling parameters, the resulting

transfer function is shifted and stretched as shown in Figure 10.7
Figure 10.4 sin(x)/x filter centered at 1550 nm
Figure 10.5 The filter specified in Figure 10.4, after setting Offset parameter
to -3 nm

Optical Filter
Figure 10.6 The filter specified in Figure 10.4, after setting Scaling parameter
to 2
Figure 10.7 The filter specified in Figure 10.4, after setting Scaling parameter
to 2 and the Offset parameter to -3 nm
An incorrect use of this two parameters may give errors, for example when
the resulting transfer function is defined on a range which does not overlap at
all with the current VBS and/or SPT simulation bandwidths. See “If
Something goes Wrong...” in this section for further details.
Transfer Function Smoothing

The transfer function resulting from an experimental measurement of a real
optical device is always affected by noise. While in most situations this is not
a problem, some particular very noisy transfer functions may be troublesome

Optical Filters
since noise appears as a ripple in the frequency domain. The corresponding

time-domain impulse response may then have extremely long tails and thus
be difficult, if not impossible, to be synthesized (see “User-defined Filter
Synthesis” and “If Something goes Wrong...” in this section).
In such situations, the Smoothing parameter may prove useful. When the
feature is set with a Smoothing factor Nfact, the currently simulated transfer
function is obtained by averaging Nfact adjacent points of input data file.
For example, we show in Figure 10.8 an ideal bandpass filter (red line) and a
very noisy version of the same filter (blue line). After smoothing with Nfact=4,
the obtained transfer function is shown in Figure 10.9.
Figure 10.8 An ideal bandpass filter (red line) and a very noisy version of the
same filter (blue line)
Figure 10.9 The filter shown in Figure 10.8, after smoothing with Nfact=4

Optical Filter
User-defined Filter Synthesis

The synthesis of the user-defined optical filter is based on the Overlap and
Add algorithm [3], the same used to simulate the linear operator (dispersion
effects) of the optical fiber module.
To obtain a transfer function suitable for this algorithm, the user-defined
transfer function is processed in an initialization phase in the following order:
1. If the user-defined filter data points (after offset and scaling, see
“Frequency Translation” in this section) are given on a frequency range
smaller than the VBS simulation bandwidth, a set of points are added at
the border. These points are chosen so to have continuos (and smooth)
modulus and group delay, and by forcing the modulus to go to zero at the
extremes of the VBS simulation bandwidth.
2. If selected, smoothing is applied (see “Transfer Function Smoothing” in
this section).
3. The user-defined filter data points are interpolated (using cubic spline
algorithms [2]) so to obtain a continuos transfer functions Hfinal(f).
The standard Overlap and Add algorithm is then applied on Hfinal(f).
If Something goes Wrong...

The algorithms developed to implement this component are very accurate
and the user-defined filter frequency response is synthesized as explained in
“User-defined Filter Synthesis” in this section. There are anyway situations in
which the filter cannot be synthesized, since it would require an exceedingly
large memory allocation to implement the Overlap and Add algorithm [3].
When these situations arise, an error message is displayed and the simulation
is stopped.
Here is a list of possible problems, together with hints on how to try to solve
them.
The format used for the filter description file does not match with the
flags specified in the filter dialog window. As an example, the filter file is
specified as a function of frequency, while the Wavelength option has
been selected in the parameter dialog window. Check the parameter
matching.
The filter is specified on a frequency range that does not overlap with VBS
simulation bandwidth. The filter can not be synthesized in this case, and
you should either change the time domain simulation frequency, or give
the filter file on the correct frequency range.
The filter is specified on a frequency range much smaller than the VBS
simulation bandwidth, so just a few points fall inside the bandwidth. The
algorithm should usually work in this situation, except on some very
peculiar transfer function. You should then try to give the transfer
function on a frequency range as close as possible to the simulation
bandwidth.
The filter transfer function comes from an experimental measure where
You may try to use the Smoothing features in this situation.
The filter has a exceedingly long time-domain impulse response, so that
the internal memory requirement to implement the Overlap and Add
algorithm is too large. This situation typically arises when simulating a
bandpass filter whose bandpass is several orders of magnitude smaller

Optical Filters
than the simulation bandwidth. In these cases, you should consider, if

possible, to reduce the simulation bandwidth.
Some final remarks on user-defined optical filters

The user-defined optical filter algorithm has been carefully tested and works
properly on virtually any “physically realizable” filters. On the other hand,
filters that correspond to totally “ideal” transfer may generate extreme
situations where the algorithm fails. A perfectly rectangular filter with square
edges in the amplitude response is example of ideal and clearly non-physical
filter. In this situation, the algorithm still try to synthesize the filter, but may
fail (when the resulting impulse response is exceedingly long) or may
implement a transfer function which is not completely matched to the ideal
one.
You should also remember that the input data file specifies the transfer
function over a discrete set of frequencies, and a cubic spline algorithm is
used to interpolate among adjacent points. Even if cubic spline is a very good
interpolation algorithm for many practical situations, it may give unexpected
results when the input data file discrete frequency set is too sparse. In these
situations, the transfer function variation from one points to the next is very
large (this condition is automatically checked and warning are issued) and the
spline interpolation may differ from the actual filter transfer function.
As a general rule of thumb:
Two adjacent data points should not have amplitude difference much
greater than 1-2 dB
Two adjacent data points should not have phase difference much greater
than small fractions of 1 radian

References
10.2 References
[1] Leon W. Couch II, Digital and analog communication system, Third
Edition, 497-508, 1989.
[2] C. De Boor, A practical guide to Splines, Springer-Verlag, 1978
[3] M. C. Jeruchim, P. Balaban e K. S. Shanmugan, Simulation of
Communication Systems, Plenum Publishing Corporation, New York,
1992.
[4] A. B. Williams and F. J. Taylor, Electronic Filter Design Handbook,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1988.

11 Photodetectors
Two Photodiode models are available:

PIN photodiode
APD photodiode
Photodetectors
11.1 Photodiode
This component simulates a photodiode. Two different models are
implemented: PIN and APD. The quantum noise generated by photodetection
and avalanche multiplication, the limited bandwidth of the device and the
presence of a dark current are taken into account.
SPT Behavior
This component converts the optical signal into an electrical signal. SPT
simulations manage optical signals only thus this component is not included
in SPT simulation.
Parameters
Photodiode Type: opens the related dialog windows for the models, APD
and PIN.
11.1.1 PIN Photodiode

This model implements a PIN photodiode. The output current generated by
the photodetection process depends on the input optical power and on the
dark current. Shot noise also is considered. The output current, in unit [A], is
given by:
I Tot = RPs + I d + I n (1)
where
q
R =η (2)
hv
is the responsivity [A/W] (at the reference frequency ν), η is the quantum
efficiency, In is the shot noise current and Id is the mean value of the dark
current.
Shot noise is approximated as a white process with Gaussian distribution. Its
unilateral Power Spectral Density is flat and is given by Gn(f)=2q(Is+Id),
where Is=RPs. If the Quantum Noise is disabled, no noise is added and
ITot=RPs+Id.
Note that the noise process In is a non-stationary one because its statistical
characterization depends on the value of the instantaneous input power Ps.
Therefore, in principle, the conventional definition of noise Power Spectral
Density, which requires stationarity, could not be applied. However, it can be
shown that in this case, in the model outlined above, a white noise process
whose Power Spectral Density varies in time is valid. To do so, one resorts to
Campbell's theorem for Poisson-distributed non-stationary random processes.
This matter is dealt with in detail in [1].
The photodiode finite bandwidth is modeled using a single-pole transfer
function, of -3 dB bandwidth BW. Filtering can be turned off, in this case the
device has ideally infinite bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical

Photodiode
Parameters
frequency for the quantum efficiency and the responsivity parameters.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default f0,SPT.
Quantum Efficiency η: specifies how many electron-hole pairs are
generated per each incident photon, on average. Allowed values: min 0; max
1; default 0.7.
Responsivity (at reference frequency) R [A/W]: the slope of the current
vs. input optical power. The responsivity is related to quantum efficiency by
(2). Therefore, setting one also sets the other. Allowed values: min 0. A/W;
max 1.25 A/W; default 0.875 A/W.
Single-Pole Electrical Filtering: enables the single-pole filtering. If
disabled, the device bandwidth is unlimited.
-3dB Bandwidth BW [GHz]: the frequency of the single-pole of the
photodiode transfer function. It is enabled only if the previous option is
enabled. Allowed values: min 0; BWSPT/2, default 2Rb (reference bit rate).
Quantum Noise: enables the generation of noise. If disabled, the device is
completely noiseless.
Dark Current Id [nA]: the average value of the current generated by the
reverse bias voltage applied to the photodiode. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 0.1.
Ideal: sets the values of parameters as an ideal photodiode, that is
responsivity (at reference frequency) R = 1 A/W and Dark Current Id =0 nA,
and disables electrical filtering and noise generation.
11.1.2 APD Photodiode

The output current generated by the photodetection process in the APD
model depends on the input optical power, on the dark current and on the
avalanche multiplication process. Shot noise is also considered and the
presence of an avalanche gain causes the generation of extra noise due to
the avalanche carrier multiplication process. The resulting noise process is
assumed to be white Gaussian.
The output current, in units [A], is given by:
I Tot = GRPs + GI d + I n (1)
Where
q
R =η (2)
hv
is the responsivity [A/W] (at the reference frequency ν), η is the quantum
efficiency, G is the avalanche gain, Id is the mean value of the dark current
before avalanche multiplication and In is the overall noise current.
Noise is approximated as a white process with Gaussian distribution. Its
unilateral Power Spectral Density is flat and is given by
Gn ( f ) = 2q (I s + I d )G 2 F (3)
where Is=RPs and F is the APD noise figure. Note that if F=1 then there is no
degradation due to the avalanche gain, since both the output signal power

Photodetectors
and noise power would increase by G2, leaving the S/N ratio unaltered with
respect to the case of no gain.
If the Photodetection noise is disabled, noise is not simulated and
ITot = GRPs + GI d
Note that the noise process In is non-stationary because its statistical nature
depends on the value of the instantaneous input power Ps. Therefore, in
principle, the conventional definition of noise Power Spectral Density, as a
stationary process, could not be applied. However, it can be shown that in
this case the model outlined above, a white noise process whose Power
Spectral Density varies in time, is valid. To do so, one needs to resort to
Campbell's theorem for Poisson-distributed non-stationary random processes
[1].
The photodiode finite bandwidth is modeled using a single-pole transfer
function, of -3 dB bandwidth BW. Filtering can be turned off In this case the
device has ideally infinite bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Parameters
frequency for the quantum efficiency and the responsivity parameters.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default f0,SPT.
Quantum Efficiency η: specifies how many primary (not considering the
avalanche gain) electron-hole pairs are generated per each incident photon,
on average. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0.7.
Responsivity (at simulation center frequency) R [A/W]: the slope of
the current vs. input optical power. The responsivity is related to quantum
efficiency by (2) therefore setting one also the other is set. Allowed values:
min 0; max 1.25; default 0.875.
Single-Pole Electrical Filtering: enables the single-pole filtering. If
disabled, the device bandwidth is unlimited.
-3dB Bandwidth BW [GHz]: the frequency of the single-pole of the
photodiode transfer function; it is enabled only if the previous option is
enabled. Allowed values: min 0; BWSPT/2, default 2Rb (reference bit rate).
Photodetection noise (including Avalanche Gain Noise): enables the
generation of noise. If disabled, the device is completely noiseless.
Total Dark Current (including Avalanche Gain) GId [nA]: the average
value of the current generated by the reverse bias voltage applied to the
photodiode, subjected to avalanche multiplication. Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default 2.5.
Avalanche Gain G [-]: the linear avalanche multiplication gain. Allowed
Noise Figure FdB [dB]: determines the amount of noise enhancement due to
the avalanche multiplication process. It is related to the Excess Noise
Factor x by FdB=x10log(G).Therefore, setting one also sets the other .
Excess Noise Factor x [-]: it is an alternative way of expressing noise
enhancement due to the avalanche multiplication process. It is related to the

Photodiode
Noise Figure FdB by x=FdB/10log(G). Allowed values: min 0; max -; default

set to x=FdB/10log(G).

Photodetectors
11.2 References
[1] L. G. Kazovsky, S. Benedetto, A. Willner, Optical Fiber Communication
Systems. Boston : Artech House, copyr. 1996.

12 Receivers
Sensitivity Optical Receiver: simulates a complete optical receiver (inclusive

of the photodetector, amplifier and post-detection filter) and it is based on
the receiver sensitivity specification. It may also perform BER semi-analytical
evaluation.
Polsk Receiver (LIB component pol2rx): simulates a receiver for binary
POLSK modulation, i.e., a system based on the modulation of State of
Polarization (SOP) of the optical signal.
Ideal Balanced 2DPSK Receiver (DPSK_REC).
Single Channel Optical Receiver : (Compound Component RX_1ch): simulates

a simple, noiseless optical receiver based on the cascade of an optical filter, a
photodiode and an electrical filter
N-Channels WDM Optical Receiver (compound component RX_Nch, with N=4,
8 or 16): simulate a simple, noiseless optical receiver for WDM systems,
based on a bank of N parallel branches, each including the cascade of an
optical filter, a photodiode and an electrical filter.
Single Channel 2DPSK Receiver (compound component 2dpsk_rx): it
implements a single channel 2DPSK receiver based on a raised cosine filter
and an ideal 2DPSK receiver.
16-Channel 2DPSK Receiver (compound component WDM_16ch_rx_2dpsk): it
implements a 16-channel 2DPSK receiver with a cascade of 16 single 2DPSK
CC receivers.
Receivers
12.1 Sensitivity Optical Receiver

This component simulates an optical receiver, including the photodetector.
The purpose of the component is to provide an easy tool to estimate the
receiver sensitivity, considering certain parameters from datasheets or by
carrying out sensitivity measurements.
By “sensitivity” it is meant the value of the average optical signal power at
receiver input needed to achieve a certain BER (Bit Error Rate) performance.
Moreover, this component includes an efficient semi-analytical technique that
estimates the receiver BER versus the received optical power, as it is usually
done in laboratory by placing a variable optical attenuator in front of the
photodiode and by measuring the resulting BER. Please see the rest of the
documentation for more information on this feature.
This component simulates an optical receiver by supplying a sensitivity value
and the test conditions under which such sensitivity is measured.
The test conditions assume direct detection in the absence of optical ASE
noise. A typical system set-up for such measurement would be a back-to-
back transmission test with no fiber and just an optical attenuator inserted
between transmitter and receiver, as shown in the next figure.
Variable Optical
Attenuator BER
TX RX
Tester
Pin BER
BER
Reference
BER
Receiver Pin
Sensitivity
Figure 12.1 Test conditions
Sensitivity depends on the transmitted pulse shape, the noise power and the
post-detection filter. A set of “typical” options is shown in the parameter
dialog window for both of these aspects. The pulses can be selected to be
NRZ rectangular, RZ rectangular and RZ Gaussian. The post-detection filter
can be either matched to the input pulse (for the definition of a “matched
filter” see [1] p.79, or [2] p.236; a matched filter is optimum with respect to
the receiver additive electrical noise if such noise is Gaussian and its power
spectral density is white), Bessel type up to order 8 or a two real poles type.
Two output electrical signals are available: filtered according to the chosen
filter, or unfiltered. The unfiltered output is useful when one need to simulate
a receiver with a post-detection filter whose type is not the same as the one
at which the sensitivity was measured.
These options encompass the typical test conditions that are specified in the
receiver datasheets. Therefore, at least to a good approximation, you should

Sensitivity Optical Receiver
be able to read all the necessary parameters of a typical receiver datasheet.

Alternatively, you can measure such parameters directly in a laboratory.
The theory that stands behind such receiver characterization and
identification procedure is based on the Gaussian approximation (based on
the variance of noise) for optical receivers that are also the basis of the
receiver Q-factor theory.
Following the notation of [3], Chapter 3, and using also some results found in
[4], the Q-factor at the output of an optical receiver, in the presence of
electrical receiver noise and photodetection shot noise (possibly enhanced by
avalanche gain in an APD), satisfies the following expression:
Q2 w Q σ
PR = hνG x 20 + hν th (1)
2η r0 Gη qr0
where:
r0 is derived from r(t), sampled at the time-instant t0 that maximizes it: r0
= r(t0) = maxt{r(t)}. In turn, r(t) = p(t)*hL(t), where hL(t) is the
electrical impulse response of the receiver output to the photodiode
photocurrent, and p(t) is the normalized optical power pulse shape. The
p(t ) = P(t ) (2 PR ) , where P(t) is
‘*’ means “convolution”. By definition:
the unnormalized pulse shape in [W] and PR is the average optical power
at the receiver input in [W].
w0 is derived from w(t), sampled at the time-instant t0 that maximizes
r(t). By definition: w(t ) = p(t ) * hL2 (t )
η is the photodiode quantum efficiency (without avalanche gain).
G is the photodiode avalanche gain.
x is photodiode excess noise factor. Note that an equivalent notation is
also in widespread use: Gx = F where F is the avalanche photodetector
noise figure.
σth is the standard deviation of the receiver noise (photodetection shot
noise and avalanche excess noise are not included) due to the electronics,
at the receiver output. It is very common to characterize the receiver
noise by means of an equivalent current noise source added to the
detector photocurrent. If such source has a bilateral Power Spectral
∞
σ th = ∫ Gth ( f ) H L ( f ) df
2
Density (PSD) Gth(f), then where HL(f) is the
−∞
Fourier Transform of hL(t).
The above expression for the Q-factor is exact, under the above assumptions,
and correctly takes into account the contribution of shot noise and avalanche
excess noise. It also accounts exactly for the non-stationary nature of shot
noise, through Campbell's theorem [3], p.123.
The actual error probability is related to the Q-factor through the approximate
relationship:
1  Q 
BER ≈ erfc  (2)
2  2
This expression is accurate when:
1. No pattern noise is considered.

Receivers
2. Receiver sensitivity is not very close to the quantum limit where a true
Poisson-quantum detection statistic is valid [9 photons/bit].
3. Receiver electrical noise is Gaussian.
4. Intersymbol interference is negligible.
Typically, even the best receivers with APDs are at least 10-15 dB away from
the quantum limit, so that the expression above can be considered to be very
accurate. In any case, it must be kept in mind that this component is based
on the Q-factor theory, and that the reference BER that you are asked to
specify is simply used to derive a value for the Q-factor, via the expression
above.
Receiver sensibility is measured with respect to a particular BER (say 10-9)
which is achieved by reduced (attenuated) received power at the input of the
receiver.
Based on the receiver parameters, the component computes the PSD of the
input equivalent current noise source necessary to match the specified
(possibly fictitious) BER, or a corresponding Q-factor. At runtime, a white
noise source, followed by a noise shaping linear filter, generates the required
noise PSD. Another white noise source generates shot noise according to the
instantaneous value of the input optical signal.
Note
The maximum Q value evaluated is 30 dB. When greater values are obtained
they are truncated to 30 dB and a warning message is given. The minimum
BER value estimated is 10-40. When smaller values are obtained they are
truncated to 10-40 and a warning message is given.
Shot noise can be turned off. If so, in previous equation of PR the first term
on the right-hand side is neglected and at runtime shot noise is not
generated.
SPT Behavior
SPT simulations manage optical signals only; thus only the optical input and
the optical output of this component are taken into account in simulation
based on the SPT. In particular, the optical input spectrum is filtered using
the appropriate filter transfer function chosen (see the Receiver Filters
section).
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical (filtered signal according to

the optical filter selection made in
the Receiver Filters section)
Electrical (filtered signal)
Electrical (unfiltered signal)

This section contains the most commonly used parameters.
Bit Rate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate specified for the receiver sensitivity. Allowed
values: min >0; max BWVBS/10.4; default 10.
Optical test pulse shape: the test pulse shape, you can choose among
three options: NRZ rectangular, RZ rectangular and RZ Gaussian.

Choosing RZ Gaussian you cannot select Matched as Test post-detection

filter, because a filter matched to Gaussian pulse shape is not available.
Duty Cycle [-]: sets the pulse duty cycle; it is enabled only if RZ
rectangular is chosen. Allowed values: min >0; max 1; default 0.5.
Normalized FWHM [fraction of bit duration] [-]: sets the FWHM (full
width half maximum) as fraction of bit duration; it is enabled only if RZ
Gaussian is chosen. Allowed values: min >0; max 1; default 0.5.
Sensitivity under test condition [dBm]: sets the minimum average
received optical power that guarantees the chosen error probability. Allowed
values: min -; max -; default: 25 dB above the quantum limit of 10 photons
per bit.
Note
A warning is issued if the sensitivity is close to the quantum limit. If a
sensitivity lower than the quantum limit is nevertheless chosen, and the shot
noise is not turned off (see the Advanced section), then the current sensitivity
of the receiver will be set by the shot noise and will result a larger optical
power value (than the supplied value) to reach the target BER.
Sensitivity reference error probability [-]: it is the target error

probability that establish the receiver sensitivity. Allowed values: min 10-15;
max 10-1; default 10-9.
Overall Receiver Responsivity [A/W] or [V/W]: it is the responsivity as
measured between the optical input at receiver and the receiver electrical
output. The unit of measure to be employed depends on how the receiver
output is measured (current or voltage). Allowed values: min -; max -;
default: 1. The value 0 causes the issuing of a warning message.
Parameters of Receiver Filters Section

This section contains the basic parameters related to the optical and electrical
filtering sections:
Optical filtering: sets the optical filter for the input signal before detection.
Two optical filters are allowed: Lorentzian (single stage), Raised Cosine.
Center Frequency [THz] or [nm]: the center frequency f0 of the optical
filter transfer function. Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default f0,SPT.
-3dB Two-Sided Bandwidth [GHz] or [nm]: the absolute bandwidth Bw of
the filter. Allowed values: min 0 (GHz); max -; default 60 (GHz).
Raised-Cosine Roll-off [-]: sets the filter roll-off Ro, if Raised Cosine is
selected. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0.5.
Test post-detection electrical filter: sets the electrical filter model, you
can choose among three options: Matched, Bessel and Two Real Poles.
Bessel filter order [-]: sets the Bessel filter order; it is enabled only if
Bessel is chosen. Allowed values: min 1; max 8; default: 4.
Normalized –3dB frequency [fraction of bit rate] [-]: sets the
normalized –3dB frequency, as fraction of bit rate; it is enabled only if Bessel
is chosen. Allowed values: min >0.5; max -; default: 0.75.
First Pole Frequency [fraction of bit rate] [-]: sets the first pole
frequency of the filter, as fraction of bit rate; it is enabled only if Two Real
Poles is chosen. Allowed values: min >0.5; max -; default: 0.75.

Receivers
Second Pole Frequency [fraction of bit rate] [-]: sets the second pole
frequency of the filter, as fraction of bit rate; it is enabled only if Two Real
Poles is chosen. Allowed values: min >0.5; max -; default: 2.

This section contains basics parameters related to the photodiode.
Reference Frequency/Wavelength for responsivity [THz] or [nm]: the
reference frequency for the quantum efficiency and the responsivity
parameters. Allowed values: min >0; max -; default f0,SPT. If the value set is
outside of the third window ([1500,1600] nm) a warning message is issued.
Quantum efficiency (not including Avalanche Gain) η: specifies how
many electron-hole pairs are generated per incident photon, on average. It is
also known as Internal Quantum Efficiency. Allowed values: min >0; max 1;
default 0.75.
Responsivity (not including Avalanche Gain) R [A/W]: the slope of the
current vs. input optical power. The responsivity is related to quantum
efficiency by:
q
R =η
hν
therefore setting one also the other is set. Min and max values are checked
by first computing the corresponding quantum efficiency and then checking
the value against the Quantum efficiency parameter limits. By default it
corresponds to quantum efficiency equal to 0.75.
Photodiode Type: selects the type of photodiode: PIN or APD.
Photodiode avalanche gain [linear]: sets the photodiode avalanche
multiplication gain; it is enabled only if APD is chosen. Allowed values: min
>1; max -; default: 25.
Quantum Photodetection noise: enables or disables the generation of
quantum noise in the photodiode.
Noise Figure FdB [dB]: sets the amount of noise enhancement due to the
avalanche multiplication process; it is enabled only if APD is chosen and the
noise generation is enabled. It is related to the Excess Noise Factor x by
FdB=x10log(G) therefore setting one also the other is set. Allowed values: min
0; max -; default: 10.
Excess Noise Factor x [-]: it is the alternative way of expressing noise
enhancement due to the avalanche multiplication process. It is related to the
Noise Figure FdB by x=FdB/10log(G) therefore setting one also the other is
set. Min and max values are checked by first computing the corresponding
noise figure and then checking the value against the Noise figure parameter
limits. By default it corresponds to a noise figure equal to 10.
Parameters of Semi-Analytic BER Section

This section is devoted to BER evaluation using semi-analytic techniques. Two
different evaluation techniques are selectable, if Semi-Analytic BER
evaluation is set to Yes: Electrical Noise Limited or ASE Noise Limited
(see section 12.1.1 for more information about these two different
techniques).
Electrical Noise Limited: enables or disables the Electrical Noise Limited
Semi-Analytic BER evaluation technique.

Evaluate BER vs. Received Optical Power [-]: enables or disables the
generation of the BER vs. received optical power chart. This option is enabled
only if Electrical Noise Limited is enabled.
Evaluate Required Optical Power at Sensitivity [-]: enables or disables
the evaluation of the required optical power to obtain the reference sensitivity
BER. This option is enabled only if Electrical Noise Limited is enabled.
ASE Noise Limited: enables or disables the ASE Noise Limited Semi-Analytic
BER evaluation technique.
Modulation Type: sets the modulation used IM-DD or POLSK. This option is
enabled only if ASE Noise Limited is enabled.
Include Receiver Noise: includes the receiver noise in BER evaluation. This
option is enabled only if ASE Noise Limited is enabled.
Evaluate Ber vs. Decision Threshold: enables or disables the generation
of the chart of BER vs. Decision Threshold. This option is enabled only if ASE
Noise Limited is enabled.
Measured time-span: it selects the time window where the measurement
will be performed. With the Whole option the whole Tsim will be considered.
With the Limited option only the time span set with the following parameters
will be considered.
Measure Start Time [ns]: the starting time of the measurement window.
Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim (duration of the time-span); default 0.
Measure End Time [ns]: the ending time of the measurement window.
Note
A warning is issued if the ASE Noise Limited evaluation technique is
enabled, and no optical filter has been selected.
The ASE Noise Limited evaluation technique requires an optical noiseless

VBS simulation (see section 12.1.1 for more information on this feature and
the OptSim User manual). A runtime warning is issued if the ASE Noise
Limited evaluation technique is enabled, and a VBS simulation with optical
noise is launched.
12.1.1 Notes on BER semi-analytic techniques

Whenever the Semi-analytic BER evaluation parameter is enabled, the
component performs a BER evaluation based on semi-analytic techniques.
Two different techniques, based on different assumptions, are available:
Electrical Noise Limited and ASE Noise Limited semi-analytic BER
evaluation.
Electrical Noise Limited semi-analytic BER

evaluation
Electrical noise limited semi-analytic evaluation allows to accurately evaluate
BER under the following assumptions:
the prevalent noise source is concentrated at the receiver (other noise
sources are negligible)
the probability density function (PDF) of the noise at the receiver is
analytically known (for example, it is Gaussian)
In this case, and assuming a Gaussian distribution for the noise, the BER may
be evaluated as:

Receivers
1 N
1 N
1  Vi − Vth 
P ( e) =
N
∑ P(e | V ) = N ∑ 2 erfc
i
2 

i =1 i =1
 2σ 
where:
Vi are the received signal samples at the sampling instant
Vth is the decision threshold
σ2 is the variance of the noise at the sampling instant
For a more general introduction to BER estimation through semi-analytic
techniques in communication systems, see for example [5].
Whenever the above assumption are met, semi-analytic techniques give a
much more precise estimate of the system BER than standard Monte Carlo
simulation of the Q-factor, particularly when system is strongly effected by
inter-symbol interference. This is due to the fact that noise is not actually
generated in the time domain, but it is analytically taken into account through
its PDF at the receiver.
This component implements this technique by:
estimating the noise variance by taking into account all the parameters of
the Basic Attributes and Advanced sections
finding the optimum sampling instant
finding the optimum decision threshold
The generated outputs are:
the evaluated BER at the received input optical power, and the
equivalent Q, obtained inverting the formula:
1  Q 
BER = erfc 
2  2
a plot of the BER versus the received power; the component evaluates
the BER as though an attenuator is placed in front of the photodiode and
its attenuation value is varied as shown in the following graph
Variable Optical
Attenuator BER
TX RX
Tester
Pin BER
Figure 12.2 Schematic for the RX-Sensitivity component for the semi-
analytical BER evaluation
the power required to obtain the reference BER
ASE Noise Limited semi-analytic BER evaluation

ASE Noise Limited semi-analytic evaluation allows to accurately evaluate
BER under the following assumptions:
the received noiseless optical signal e(t) at the input of the receiver is
known
the system is limited by ASE noise, which will be represented as an
equivalent white Gaussian process n(t) with known spectral density at the
receiver input

A schematic diagram of the receiver is shown in Figure 12.3: the input signal
e(t)+n(t) is sent to the cascade of an optical filter with impulse response
ho(t), a photodiode and an electrical filter he(t).
RECEIVER
e(t) ho(t) he(t)
n(t)
Figure 12.3 Schematic for the RX-Sensitivity component for the ASE noise
limited semi-analytical BER evaluation
The sensitivity receiver implements this technique [6] by:

estimating the noiseless optical signal at the input of the receiver,
launching a VBS optical noiseless simulation
estimating the noise spectral density at the receiver input. The noise is
analytically propagated, independently from the signal
The generated outputs are:
the optimum sampling instant
the optimum decision threshold
the evaluated BER at the received input optical power, and the equivalent
Q, obtained inverting the formula:
1  Q 
BER = erfc 
2  2
a plot of the BER versus decision threshold

Receivers
12.2 Binary POLSK Receiver (pol2rx)

Polarization modulation (or POLSK) is an innovative optical modulation format
based on the modulation of the State of Polarization of the optical signal. This
kind of modulation has been studied in detail by the Optical Communication
Group in Polytechnic University of Turin and has been awarded the
prestigious Italgas Prize for Scientific research (see the WEB page
www.italgas.it for more information).
Component name: pol2rx
Category: Polsk
This component simulates a receiver for a binary POLSK system. Parameters
are read from a file. The output signal is obtained as scalar product between
the Stokes parameters of the received optical signal and an internally
calculated reference vector.
POLSK modulation offers several potential advantages with respect to
standard intensity modulation (IM-DD) as shown in details in the papers
reported in “POLSK Project Bibliography” at the end of the chapter.
SPT Behavior
This component converts the optical signal into an electrical signal. SPT
simulations manage optical signals only, thus this component is not taken
into account in SPT simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Parameters
File of Parameters: selects the parameters description file: Standard 2.5
Gbit/s, Standard 5 Gbit/s, Standard 10 Gbit/s and Custom (your own
parameters file).
File name contains all parameters used to demodulate the signal.
Custom File: name of the data file where the component parameters are
stored. You can choose the file from the file system clicking on the Browse
button. You can also edit the file clicking on the Edit button: it opens an
editor window loading the data file. The editor is VI for Unix or Notepad for
Windows NT.
The parameters contained in the component description file are:
Bit Rate [Gbit/s]: POLSK signal bit rate
Photodiode Bandwidth: it is the 3 dB cut-off bandwidth of the
photodiode internally used to detect the optical signal
T&H Bandwidth: it is the 3 dB cut-off bandwidth of the Track & Hold
circuit. For more information, please see Ref. 5 of the POLSK Project
Bibliography at the end of this Chapter
Sampling Flag: allows to choose between a random sampling for the
T&H circuit (Sampling Flag = 0) or a deterministic sampling (Sampling
Flag = 1). Here “deterministic” means that the sampling instant has a
fixed offset with respect to the data clock, while “random” means that the
sampling instant offset is randomly chosen.

Binary POLSK Receiver (pol2rx)
Subsampling Factor: it is the sub-sampling rate (relative to the bit

rate) of the Track & Hold circuit used to recover the reference vector. For
more information, please see Ref. 5 of the POLSK Project Bibliography at
the end of this Chapter.
Shift Register Length: it is the number of samples of the received
signal used to estimate the reference vector. For more information,
please see Ref. 5 of the POLSK Project Bibliography at the end of this
Chapter.
Note
If the bandwidth of Track & Hold circuit is set to zero, no T&H filter is used.
Here is how the file describing the behavior of this component must look like:
# BITRATE [GHz]
5.
# PHOTODIODE BANDWIDTH [GHz] (>0.)
10.
# TRACK & HOLD CIRCUIT BANDWIDTH [GHz] (>=0.) (IF =0. NO FILTERING)
4.
# SAMPLING FLAG: 0=RANDOM 1=DETERMINISTIC
0
# SAMPLING DELAY 0. <= RDELAY < 1.
0.
# SUBSAMPLING FACTOR USED TO RECOVER REFERENCE VECTOR (>=1)
2
# SHIFT REGISTER LENGHT (>=1)
20

Receivers
12.3 Ideal Balanced 2DPSK Receiver

Component name: DPSK_REC
Category: Miscellanea
This block implements an ideal balanced 2DPSK receiver. The component
block scheme is represented in the following figure.
Figure 12.4 2DPSK receiver block scheme
The 2DPSK is composed of the tunable Mach-Zehnder interferometer OptSim

component having 2 optical output ports. In the interferometer, optical paths
differ by a delay τ that must be set equal to the bit time duration. Each
optical output is detected by an ideal PIN photodetector, and the output
electrical signal is the difference between the detected currents.
For further information about the tunable Mach-Zehnder interferometer,
please see 19.12.
Through the parameter BitRate, OptSim computes automatically the optical
relative group delay τ to set in the lower branch.
Note
The actual value of the optical delay used in the simulation is an integer
multiple of the simulation time sampling step, so the delay effectively used τ'
is related with the simulation bandwidth through the relationship:
 τ ⋅ BWVBS  0.8
τ ′ = Nearest _ Integer  
 0.8  BWVBS
where BWVBS is the VBS simulation bandwidth and τ is the insert delay value.
The required delay τ can be forced to be equal to the actual used value τ' by
clicking the Force Bit Rate button in the Time Domain section of the
Simulation Parameters dialog window. This uses as reference bit-rate the
bandwidth BW (equal to 1/τ) of the Mach-Zehnder.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Parameters
Tuning_Frequency [THz]: the frequency of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT;default 194;
BitRate [Tbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the optical channel to detect. Allowed
values: min -; max -; default 0.04

Single Channel Optical Receiver (RX_1ch)
12.4 Single Channel Optical Receiver

(RX_1ch)
This compound component implements a simplified, noiseless single channel
receiver. It is composed by an optical raised cosine filter, an ideal PIN
photodiode and an electrical 5 poles Bessel filter, as shown in the following
graph.
Figure 12.5 The model schematic
This component is useful when one wants to simulate a simple receiver whose
only relevant characteristics are the optical and electrical filter bandwidths,
while the details of the receiver in terms of noise level are irrelevant.
SPT Behavior
This compound component converts the optical signal into an electrical signal.
SPT simulations manage optical signals only, thus this component is not
taken into account in SPT simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Parameters
Electrical_filter_3dB_bandwidth [GHz]: the 3-dB bandwidth of the 5
poles electrical Bessel filter. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 8.
Optical_filter_bandwidth [GHz]: the bandwidth of the raised cosine
optical filter. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 40.
Optical_filter_center_freqency [GHz]: the center frequency of band-pass
in the optical filter. Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 40.
Optical_filter_roloff [-]: the roll-off of the raised cosine optical filter.
Allowed values: min 0. max 1. default 0.2.

Receivers
12.5 N-Channels WDM Optical Receiver

(RX_Nch)
This set of Compound Components implements a N-channel WDM receiver.
Each of the N parallel branches of the receiver is composed by an optical
raised cosine filter, an ideal PIN photodiode and an electrical 5 poles Bessel
filter. Channel are numbered starting from the lower frequency channel, and
are supposed to be equi-spaced in frequency.
Figure 12.6 The model schematic for the N=4 channel receiver
This component is useful when one wants to simulate a simple WDM receiver
whose only relevant characteristics are the optical and electrical filter
bandwidths, while the details of the receiver in terms of noise level are
irrelevant.
SPT Behavior
This compound component converts the optical signal into an electric signal.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Please note that the number of electrical outputs depends on the chosen
Compound Component, thus assuming the values 4, 8 or 16.
Parameters
Center_freqency [THz]: the center frequency of the WDM frequency comb.
It is the middle frequency between channel 1 and channel N. Allowed values:
min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 193.1.
Channel_spacing [THz]: the spacing between WDM channels. Allowed
values: min 0.; max BWSPT; default 0.1.
Electrical_filter_3dB_bandwidth [GHz]: the 3dB bandwidth of the 5 poles
electrical Bessel filter. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 8.
Optical_filter_bandwidth [GHz]: the bandwidth of the raised cosine
optical filter. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 40.
Optical_filter_roloff [-]: the roll-off of the raised cosine optical filter.
Allowed values: min 0.; max 1.; default 0.2.

2DPSK Receiver
12.6 2DPSK Receiver

This compound component implements a single channel 2DPSK receiver
based on a raised cosine filter and an ideal 2DPSK receiver (see section
12.3).
Figure 12.7 2dpsk_rx compound component network
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
opt_in: optical opt_filtered: optical

ele_out: electrical
Parameters
Bitrate [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the optical channel to detect for the
DPSK_REC component. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.04.
Channel_frequency [THz]: the frequency of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT;default 194.
Filter_bw [GHz]: the absolute bandwidth Bw of the raised cosine optical
filter. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb.
Roll_off [-]:the raised cosine optical filter roll-off Ro. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 0.5.

Receivers
12.7 16-Channel 2DPSK Receiver

This compound component implements a 16 channel 2DPSK receiver. Each
channel is composed by a raised cosine filter and an ideal 2DPSK receiver
(see section 12.3). It is based on the single channel transmitter compound
component 2dpsk_rx.opm. Lower is the channel number the lowest is the
frequency.
Figure 12.8 WDM_16ch_rx_2dpsk compound component network
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
opt_in: optical ch_n: electrical
Parameters
Bitrate [Gbit/s]: the bit rate at which the data sources operates. Allowed
Channel_spacing [THz]: the frequency offset between each channel.
Filter_bw [GHz]: the absolute bandwidth Bw of the raised cosine optical
filters. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb.
Roll_off [-]:the roll-off Ro for the raised cosine optical filters. Allowed
values: min 0; max 1; default 0.5.

References
12.8 References
[1] S. Benedetto, E. Biglieri, V. Castellani, Digital Transmission Theory,
Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1987.
[2] J. G. Proakis, M. Salehi, Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice-
Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1993.
[3] L. G. Kazovsky, S. Benedetto, A. Willner, Optical Fiber Communication
Systems, Artech House, Boston, 1996.
[4] P. J. Winzer, A. Kalmar, Sensitivity Enhancement of Optical Receivers by
Impulsive Coding, IEEE-OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology, vol.17,
no.2, pp.171-177, February 1999.
[5] M. C. Jeruchim, Techniques for Estimating the Bit Error Rate in the
Simulation of Digital Communication Systems, IEEE Journal of Selected
Areas in Communications, Vol. SAC-2, no.1, January 1984.
[6] G. Bosco and R. Gaudino, Towards new semi-analytical techniques for
BER estimation in optical system simulation, National Fiber Optics
Engineers Conference NFOEC 2000, Denver (CO), Tuesday Sess. E1, USA,
Aug.~2000.
POLSK Project Bibliography

1. S.Benedetto and P.Poggiolini, Theory of polarization shift keying
modulation, IEEE Trans. on Comm., vol. 40, pp. 708-721, Apr. 1992.
2. S. Benedetto and P. Poggiolini, Multilevel polarization shift keying:
optimum receiver structure and performance evaluation, IEEE Trans. on
Comm., vol. 42, pp. 1174-1186, Feb./Mar./Apr. 1994.
3. S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Performance of coherent optical
Trans. on Comm., vol. 43, no. 2/3/4, pp. 1603-1612, Feb./Mar./Apr.
1995.
4. S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Direct detection of optical digital
transmission based on polarization shift keying modulation, IEEE J. of
Select. Areas in Comm., special issue on “High speed point-to-point
optical communications systems”, vol. 13, no. 3, Apr.1995. This paper
has received a nomination for the “Leonard G. Abraham Prize”, 1995
edition, that is awarded to the best paper published in the IEEE Journal
on Selected Areas in Communications in that year.
5. S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Polarisation recovery in optical
pp. 1269-1279; Oct. 97.
6. P. Poggiolini, S. Benedetto, Theory of polarization spreading techniques:
part I, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 5, pp. 2105-
2118, May 1994. This paper has received a nomination for the “S. O. Rice
Prize Paper Award”, 1994 edition, that is awarded to the best paper
published in the IEEE Transactions on Communications in that year.
7. S. Benedetto, P. Poggiolini Theory of polarization spreading techniques:
part II, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 6, pp. 2291-
2304, June 1994.
8. S. Benedetto, G. Olmo, P. Poggiolini, Trellis coded polarization shift
keying modulation for coherent optical communications, IEEE
Transactions on Communications, vol. 43, n. 2/3/4, pp. 1591-1602, Feb.
/Mar./Apr. 1995.

13 Modulator Drivers
Six Electrical Drivers are available:

NRZ rectangular, implements the non-return-to-zero rectangular driver;
NRZ raised cosine, implements the non-return-to-zero raised cosine
driver;
RZ rectangular, implements the return-to-zero rectangular driver;
RZ raised cosine, implements the return-to-zero raised cosine driver;
RZ supergaussian, implements the return-to-zero supergaussian driver;
RZ soliton, implements the return-to-zero soliton driver.
PolSK Driver (pol2dr), implements the driver for binary PolSK (Polarization
Shift Keying) system based on SOP (State Of Polarization) modulation of the
optical signal.
Modulator Drivers
13.1 Driver
This component simulates an electrical driver. It converts the logical input
signal, a binary sequence of zeros and ones into an electrical signal. Several
mapping laws are available, ranging from simple ones, such as NRZ and RZ
rectangular shaped, to NRZ raised cosine, RZ raised cosine, RZ
supergaussian and RZ soliton shaped pulses.
Parameters
Signal Type and Shape: it opens the related dialog windows for the
available models: NRZ Rectangular, NRZ Raised Cosine, RZ
Rectangular, RZ Raised Cosine, RZ SuperGaussian and RZ Soliton.
Low Level [-]: it is the value of the output signal when a logical zero is
transmitted. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
High Level [-]:it is the value of the output signal when a logical one is
transmitted. Allowed values: min -; max -; default +5.
13.1.1 NRZ Rectangular

This component simulates the NRZ rectangular driver. It has an electrical
output signal which can assume one of the two electrical levels depending on
the transmitted bit. When a "1" is fed into the driver, the output signal is at
the Low Level during the entire bit time. When a "0" is fed into the driver,
the output signal is at the High Level during the entire bit time. Switching
between the two levels may be instantaneous if the field Time Slope is set to
zero, or not otherwise, with the desired time slope.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical
Parameters
Time slope [-]: it is the value of the signal time slope, as a fraction of bit
duration, defined as time between 10% to 90% of the rise signal amplitude,
when a transition between “0” to “1” occurs. Allowed values: min 0; max
0.8; default 0.
13.1.2 NRZ Raised Cosine

This component simulates the NRZ raised cosine driver. As for the NRZ
rectangular driver the output signal has two levels: one for ones and the
other for zeros. Switching between the two levels is not instantaneous: it
follows a raised cosine shape with a given roll-off. The difference between this
driver and the RZ raised cosine pulse driver lies in the fact that in the RZ
modulation the signal is forced to return to the "0" level at the end of the
each bit, also if there are two consecutive bits at the "1" level.
The raised cosine waveform, when the driver is connected to a linear optical
modulator, can shape either the optical amplitude or the optical power.

Driver
Figure 13.1 NRZ raised cosine driver: the output signal waveform.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical
Parameters
Resulting Raised Cosine Shape through a linear modulator is in: it
allows to selects what the driver will shape if connected to an amplitude
optical modulator with a linear transfer function. Choice is between
Amplitude or Power, so that the raised cosine waveform will be applied to
the amplitude or the power of the optical field.
Time slope [-]: it is the value of the signal time slope, as a fraction of bit
duration, defined as time between 10% to 90% of the rise (fall) of signal
amplitude, when a transition between “0” to “1”occurs. It is related to roll-off
α through the formula:
α
Tslope = (arcsin(0.8) − arcsin(−0,8) )
π
Allowed values: min 0; max corresponding to α = 1; default: corresponding
to α =0.8
Roll-off [-]: it is the roll-off parameter of the raised cosine pulse and fixes
the raise (and fall) time during switching. It is defined as the ratio between
the complete 0%-100% raise (fall) time and the bit time. Allowed values: min
0.; max 1; default 0.8.
13.1.3 RZ Rectangular
This component simulates the RZ rectangular driver. It has an output signal
that can assume two electrical levels. When a "1" is transmitted, the output
signal is at the High Level for a time equal to the product of the duty cycle
by the bit time. Then it goes down to the Low Level for the remaining time.
When a "0" is transmitted, the output is constant at the low level for the
entire bit time. Switching between the two levels is instantaneous with
resulting square edges.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical

Modulator Drivers
Parameters
Duty Cycle [-]: it is the ratio between the time at High Level for the first
part of the bit, when a "1" is transmitted, and the bit time. Allowed values:
min 0; max 1; default 0.5.
13.1.4 RZ Raised Cosine

This component simulates the RZ raised cosine driver. As for the RZ
rectangular driver, it has an output signal with levels and the typical return to
zero of the waveform when one is transmitted after a time dependent from
the duty cycle parameter. The difference lies in the fact that switching
between the two levels is not instantaneous: it follows a raised cosine shape
with a given roll-off. The raised cosine waveform, when the driver is
connected to a linear optical modulator, can shape either the optical
amplitude or the optical power.
Considering a relative time origin in the middle of a bit (where the pulse peak
is centered) the electrical output when "1" is transmitted has the following
expression:
V (T ) = ( Ah − Al ) f (T ) + Al
if a raised cosine pulse in power is chosen and
V (T ) = ( Ah − Al ) f 2 (T ) + Al
if a raised cosine pulse in amplitude is chosen.
Ah is the high level, Al is the low level and f(t) is the standard raised cosine
function
 TL (1 + α )
 0 , T >
2

1   T − TL  TL (1 − α ) TL (1 + α )
f (T ) =  1 − sin  π  ,
 ≤ T ≤
 2   αTL  2 2
 T (1 − α )
 1 , T < L
 2
where
Tb
TL =
1+α
α is the roll-off parameter and Tb is the bit time.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical
Parameters
Resulting Raised Cosine Shape through a linear modulator is in: it
allows to selects what the driver will shape if connected to an amplitude
optical modulator with a linear transfer function. Choice is between
Amplitude or Power, so that the raised cosine waveform will be applied to
the amplitude or the power of the optical field.

Driver
Duty Cycle [-]: it is the ratio between the time at High Level for the first
part of the bit, when a "1" is transmitted, and the bit time. Allowed values:
min 0; max 1; default 0.5.
Roll-off [-]: it is the roll-off parameter of the pulse (see expression above).
Allowed values: min 0.; max 1; default 0.5.
13.1.5 RZ Supergaussian
This component simulates the RZ supergaussian driver. When “1” is
transmitted it generates a pulse with supergaussian shape. When a "0" is
transmitted, the output signal is set to the Low Level for the entire bit time.
Considering a relative time origin in the middle of the bit time (where the
pulse peak is centered), when a "1" is transmitted, the electrical output has
the following expression:
2m
1 t 
−  
V (t ) = ( Ah − Al )
2 T
e  0  + Al
where Ah is the High Level amplitude, Al is the Low Level amplitude and m
is the supergaussian order. T0 is related to the TFWHM (full width half
maximum time) through this function:
TFWHM
T0 = 2m
ln 2
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical
Parameters
FWHM resulting through linear modulator [ps]: it is the full width half
maximum time of the optical pulse obtained driving a linear optical amplitude
modulator. Points at half of the High Level power are separated by TFWHM.
Order [-]: it is the order of the supergaussian function. Allowed values:
13.1.6 RZ Soliton
This component simulates the RZ soliton driver. When a "1" is transmitted it
generates a pulse with soliton shape. When a "0" is transmitted the output
signal is set to the Low Level for the entire bit time. Considering a time
origin in the middle of the bit time (where the pulse peak is centered), when
a "1" is transmitted, the electrical output signal has the following expression:
 t 
V (t ) = ( Ah − Al )sech 2   + Al
 T0 
where Ah is the high level amplitude, Al is the low level amplitude. T0 is
related to the TFWHM (full width half maximum time) through this function:
TFWHM
T0 =
ln 3 + 2 2
Inputs Outputs

Modulator Drivers
Logical Electrical
Parameters
FWHM resulting through linear modulator [ps]: it is the full width half
maximum time of the optical pulse obtained driving a linear optical amplitude
modulator. Points at half of the peak power are separated by TFWHM. Allowed

Binary POLSK Driver
13.2 Binary POLSK Driver

Polarization modulation (or PolSK) is an innovative optical modulation format
based on the modulation of the State of Polarization of the optical signal. This
modulation format has been studied in detail by the Optical Communication
Group of Polytechnic University of Turin and has been awarded the
prestigious Italgas Prize for Scientific research (see the WEB page
www.italgas.it for more information).
Component name: pol2dr
Category: Polsk
This component simulates an electrical driver for binary POLSK modulation. It
should usually be used together with the components Data Source and
Polarization Modulator. Two output signals are used to codify information, as
needed by the polarization modulator. The first assumes the values:
V2π
±
4
while the second is null; see Polarization Modulator (section 8.5) for further
details. If default values for the polarization modulator are used, the resulting
output optical signals are switched at the bit rate speed between x and y
linear polarization.
PolSK modulation offers several potential advantages with respect to
standard intensity modulation (IM-DD), as shown in details in the papers
reported in “POLSK Project Bibliography” at the end of the chapter.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Electrical VS1

Electrical VS3
Parameters

Modulator Drivers
13.3 References
PolSK Project Bibliography
S.Benedetto and P.Poggiolini, Theory of polarization shift keying modulation,
IEEE Trans. on Comm., vol. 40, pp. 708-721, Apr. 1992.
S. Benedetto and P. Poggiolini, Multilevel polarization shift keying: optimum
receiver structure and performance evaluation, IEEE Trans. on Comm.,
vol. 42, pp. 1174-1186, Feb./Mar./Apr. 1994.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Performance of coherent optical
Trans. on Comm., vol. 43, no. 2/3/4, pp. 1603-1612, Feb./Mar./Apr. 1995.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Direct detection of optical digital
transmission based on polarization shift keying modulation, IEEE J. of Select.
Areas in Comm., special issue on “High speed point-to-point optical
communications systems”, vol. 13, no. 3, Apr.1995. This paper has received
a nomination for the “Leonard G. Abraham Prize”, 1995 edition, that is
awarded to the best paper published in the IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in
Communications in that year.
S. Benedetto, R. Gaudino, P. Poggiolini, Polarisation recovery in optical
pp. 1269-1279; Oct. 97.
P. Poggiolini, S. Benedetto, Theory of polarization spreading techniques: part
I, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 5, pp. 2105-2118, May
1994. This paper has received a nomination for the “S. O. Rice Prize Paper
Award”, 1994 edition, that is awarded to the best paper published in the IEEE
Transactions on Communications in that year.
S. Benedetto, P. Poggiolini Theory of polarization spreading techniques: part
II, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 6, pp. 2291-2304, June
1994.
S. Benedetto, G. Olmo, P. Poggiolini, Trellis coded polarization shift keying
modulation for coherent optical communications, IEEE Transactions on
Communications, vol. 43, n. 2/3/4, pp. 1591-1602, Feb. /Mar./Apr. 1995.

14 RF Mo-
Demodulators
RF Mo-Demodulators
Analog
This category contains several components implementing analog mo-
demodulator. An analog electrical signal is modulated over an electrical
carrier using amplitude, phase or frequency modulation.
Amplitude Modulator (AMPMO2), simulates an analog amplitude modulator.
Amplitude Demodulator (AMPDE2), simulates an analog demodulator for

amplitude modulated signals.
Frequency Modulator (FREMO2), simulates an analog frequency modulator.
Frequency Modulator (FREDE2), measures the instantaneous frequency of the

electrical signal.
Phase Modulator (PHAMO2), simulates an analog phase modulator.
Phase Demodulator (PHADE2), measures the instantaneous phase of the

electrical signal.
Phase Detector (PHADCT), measures the phase difference between two
electrical signals.
Electrical Envelope (ENVEL2), compute the envelope of an electrical signals.
Digital
This category contains several components implementing digital mo-
demodulators for ASK, PSK QAM and FSK digital modulation formats. The
typical structure of all digital modulators is the following.
RF Mo-Demodulators
Input Output
Logical Signal DIGITAL Modulated Signal
MODULATOR
Parameters
• Central frequency
• Bit rate
• Modulation format
• …
Figure 14.1 Digital modulator
The input logical signals is mapped by the modulator into a set of signals
giving rise to the output modulated electrical signals. Typical component
parameters are the output signal central frequency, the bit or baud rate and
other details required to specify the chosen modulation format. The typical
structure of all digital demodulators is the following.
Input
Carrier-recovery Signal
Input Output
Modulated Signal DIGITAL Demodulated Logical Signal
DEMODULATOR
Input
Clock Signal Parameters
• Central frequency
• Bit rate
• Modulation format
• …
Figure 14.2 Digital demodulator
Besides the input electrical signals, most demodulators require a carrier

signal, to perform coherent detection of the input signal, and a clock signal,
to sample the demodulated signal at the maximum eye-opening instant.
Carrier signals may be directly generated using the SIGGEN component, or
recovered from the input signal by using Carrier Recovery components. Clock
signals may be directly generated using the CLOCK component, or recovered
from the input signal by using Clock Recovery components.
PSK modulator (PSKMO2), simulates a digital phase modulator with PSK
format.
PSK modulator with residual carrier (PSKRC2), simulates a binary PSK
modulator with a residual carrier.
PSK coherent demodulator (PSKDE2), detects the quadrature base-band
signals and string of bits from a PSK modulated signal.
Offset-PSK modulator parallel input (OPSKP3), simulates a digital modulator
with Offset-PSK format.
Offset-PSK demodulator parallel input (OPSKP2), detects the string of bits
from an O-PSK modulated analytic signal.

RF Mo-Demodulators
Differential PSK modulator (DPSMO2), simulates a digital phase modulator

with differential PSK (DPSK) format.
Differential PSK demodulator (DPSDE2), simulates a demodulator for DPSK
signal.
M-QAM modulator (MQAMO2), simulates a digital modulator with the M-QAM
format (Gray code).
M-QAM demodulator (MQADE2), detects the two quadrature base-band
signals and string of bits from M-QAM modulated analytic signal.
Duobinary MSK modulator (DBMSK3), simulates a duobinary MSK modulator.
Duobinary MSK demodulator (DBMSK2), simulates a duobinary Minimum

Shift Keying (MSK) modulator.
FSK modulator with continuos phase (FSKGE2), simulates a FSK band-pass
modulator with continuos phase.
FSK demodulator with continuos phase (FSKDE2), simulates a FSK
demodulator.
Binary Pulse Amplitude Demodulator (BPADEM), simulates a binary Pulse
Amplitude Modulation (PAM) demodulator.
Differential MSK demodulator (DFMSK2).
Demodulator-Remodulator Coherent Tracking Receiver (DEMRE2).

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.1 Analog Amplitude Modulator

Component name: AMPMO2
Category: Analog Mo-Demodulators
This component simulates an analog amplitude modulator. The output signal
carrier has a fixed frequency set by the user. The input baseband signal is
multiplied by the sensibility parameter, then it amplitude modulates the
carrier. It is possible to add a fixed mean value to the modulating signal.
Let the input modulating signal, called E_signal in the following, be x(t) and
let the output signal, called E_modulated in the following, be y(t). This
components implements the following relation:
y(t) = Carrier_amplitude (Fixed_mean + modulator_sensibility x(t))
cos(2π Carrier_frequency t + Carrier_phase)
where all parameters are described in the following. Consequently, when the
fixed_mean parameter is set to zero, a carrier suppressed amplitude
modulation is performed.
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: base-band modulating E_modulated: amplitude modulated

electrical signal electrical signal
Parameters
Carrier_Frequency [THz]: carrier frequency. Allowed values: see section
1.4 for further information; default 0.002 THz.
Carrier_Amplitude: fixed amplitude of the carrier (zero-to-peak amplitude).
Allowed values: any positive real number; default 1.
Carrier_Phase [rad]: fixed initial phase of the carrier. Allowed values: any
real number; default 0 rad.
Modulator_Sensibility: sensibility of the modulator. It is a scale factor that
multiplies the input modulating signal. Allowed values: any positive real
number; default 1.
Fixed_Mean: fixed mean value to be added to the input signal. Allowed
values: any positive real number; default 1.

Coherent Amplitude Demodulator
14.2 Coherent Amplitude Demodulator

Component name: AMPDE2
This component implements an analog demodulator for amplitude modulated
signals. More specifically, it implements a coherent receiver and thus requires
a coherent reference signal at one of its two inputs.
Let the input signal, called E_signal in the following, be x(t) let the carrier
signal, called E_carrier in the following, be xcarrier(t). Finally, let the output
signal, called E_demod in the following, be y(t). This components
implements the following relation:
y (t ) = (Gain ⋅ x(t ) ⋅ xcarrier (t )) ∗ hLOW (t )

where hLOW(t) is an ideal low pass filter that selects the baseband component
of the product x(t) xcarrier(t) and the symbol "*" means convolution.
This component is typically used for the demodulation of SSB (single
sideband) and DSB (double sideband) modulated signals.
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: reference electrical signal E_demod: base-band demodulated

for the coherent demodulation electrical signal
E_carrier: electrical signal to be
demodulated
Parameters
Carrier_frequency [THz]: frequency of the input signal. Allowed values:
see section 1.4 for further information; default 0.002 THz.
Gain: demodulator signal gain. Allowed values: any positive real number;
default 1.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.3 Frequency Modulator

Component name: FREMO2
Simulates an analog frequency modulator.
y(t) = Carrier_amplitude cos(2π(carrier_frequency + frequency_offset) t
+ Mod_sensitivity x(t) + carrier_phase)
where all parameters are described in the following.
Inputs Outputs

Parameters
1.4; default 0.002 [THz].
Frequency_Offset [rad]: initial frequency offset of the carrier with respect
to the center frequency. Allowed values: any real number that allows the
resulting starting frequency, given by the sum of the signal frequency plus
the frequency offset, to be inside baseband, see section 1.4 for further
information; default 0 rad.
Mod_sensitivity [rad/(ps*amplitude units)]: sensitivity of the
modulator. It is a scale factor that multiplies the input modulating signal.

Frequency Demodulator
14.4 Frequency Demodulator

Component name: FREDE2
Measures the instantaneous frequency of the input electrical signal.
Let the input signal, called E_signal in the following, be x(t) and let the
output signal, called E_demod in the following, be y(t). This components
y(t) = istantaneous_frequency(x(t))
i.e. it generates a signal whose amplitude is proportional to the input signal
instantaneous frequency. In other words, if:
x(t ) = A cos(2π (signal _ frequency + f ist (t ))t + ϕ 0 )

then:
y (t ) = f ist (t )
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: electrical signal to be E_demod: real base-band electrical

demodulated signal containing the instantaneous
frequency of the input signal
Parameters
Signal_Frequency [THz]: carrier frequency. Allowed values: see section 1.4
for further information; default 0.002 THz.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.5 Analog Phase Modulator

Component name: PHAMO2
This component simulates an analog phase modulator
y (t ) = Carrier _ amplitude
⋅ cos(2π ⋅ carrier _ frequency ⋅ t + mod ulator _ sensitivity ⋅ x(t ) + carrier _ phase )
Inputs Outputs

Parameters
Mod_sensitivity: it is a scale factor that multiplies the input modulating
signal. Allowed values: any positive real number; default 1.

Phase Demodulator
14.6 Phase Demodulator

Component name: PHADE2
This component measures the instantaneous phase of the input signal.
y(t) = istantaneous_phase(x(t))
i.e. generates a signal whose amplitude is proportional to the input signal
instantaneous phase. In other words, if:
x(t ) = A cos(2π ⋅ signal _ frequency ⋅ t + ϕ (t ))

then y(t)=ϕ(t).
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: electrical signal whose E_demod: base-band electrical

phase must be detected signal containing the detected phase
Parameters
Signal_Frequency [THz]: carrier frequency. Allowed values: see section 1.4
for further information; default 0.002 THz.
14.7 Phase Detector

Component name: PHADCT
This component measures the phase difference between two electric signals.
Inputs Outputs
Ein1: first input electrical signal Eout: output electrical signal

containing the measured phase
Ein2: second input electrical signal
difference
Parameters
Fcentr [THz]: center frequency (section 1.4) of the signals.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.8 Electrical Envelope

Component name: ENVEL2
Category: Analog mo-demodulators
Evaluates the envelope of the electrical input signal.
y(t ) = x(t ) ∗ hLOW (t )

2
where hLOW(t) is an ideal low pass filter that selects the baseband component
of the signal |x(t)|2 and the symbol "*" means convolution.
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: input electrical signal E_demod: output demodulated

electrical signal
Parameters

PSK Digital Modulator
14.9 PSK Digital Modulator

Component name: PSKMO2
Category: Digital Mo-Demodulators
Generates a signal whose phase is digitally modulated in the PSK format The
number of levels of the modulation is determined by the Level of the input
logical signal.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal containing Eoutl: PSK modulated electrical

the information bits signal
Parameters
Frequency [THz]: carrier frequency of the generated signal. See section 1.4
for further information.
Output_Amplitude: amplitude of the carrier.
Signal Lin logical level: dimension of the input logical signal i.e. the
number of bits per symbol.
Note
The Level of the input logical signal determines the number of levels of the
modulation. It must be not greater than 6 and this constraint is checked.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.10 PSK Modulator with Residual

Carrier
Component name: PSKRC2
Simulates a binary PSK signal with a residual carrier whose amount is
controlled by the input parameter Modulation_index. No residual carrier
requires Modulation_index. = 1.5707963268
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal containing Eoutl: output binary PSK electrical
Parameters
Output_amplitude: carrier amplitude.
Frequency [THz]: carrier center frequency. See section 1.4 for further
information.
Modulation_index [rad]: modulation index - The normal value that
eliminates the carrier is 1.5707963268.
Baud_rate [Tb/s]: input signal baud rate.
Note
The PSK modulation is binary.

PSK Coherent Demodulator
14.11 PSK Coherent Demodulator

Component name: PSKDE2
Takes a PSK modulated signal and gets the two quadrature baseband signals
and the detected string of bits in an output logical signal.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal; it determines E_phase: analog electrical

the time instants at which sampling demodulated signal (in-phase
for decision is performed component)
E_carrier: reference electrical E_quad: analog electrical
carrier used in the demodulation demodulated signal (quadrature
component)
E_signal: electrical signal to be
demodulated L_out: logical signal that contains
the output bits
Parameters
Signal L_out logical level: dimension of the output logical signal i.e. the
Note
The number of phases of the PSK modulation of the input signal is implicitly
chosen by the user when he chooses the Level of the output logical signal.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.12 Offset-PSK Modulator Parallel Input

Component name: OPSKP3
Generates a signal digitally modulated according to the Offset-PSK format.
It is assumed that the digital input data are couple of bits arranged in a
logical signal of Level = 2.
The first bit of the input logical signal controls the in-phase component of the
output signal.
The second bit of the input logical signal is delayed by half the symbol
duration and controls the quadrature component of the output signal.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal of Level = 2 Eoutl: offset-PSK modulated

containing the information bits electrical signal
Parameters

Offset-PSK Demodulator Parallel Input
14.13 Offset-PSK Demodulator Parallel

Input
Component name: OPSKP2
Takes a O-PSK modulated analytic signal and gets the detected string of bits
in an output logical signal of Level 2.
It is designed to be used in conjunction with the module (parallel version of
the Offset-PSK modulator). The couple OPSKP2-OPSKP3 introduces a total
delay equal to one symbol duration
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal; the period is L_out: logical signal that contains
equal to the symbol period; the the output bits (Level = 2)
sampling instant is defined by XCLK
that is the sampling instant for the
in-phase component. See section
1.6 for further details
E_carrier: reference electrical
carrier used in the demodulation
demodulated
Parameters

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.14 Differential PSK Modulator

Component name: DPSMO2
Generates a signal whose phase is digitally modulated in the differential PSK
(DCPSK) format. The number of levels of the modulation is determined by the
Level of the input logical signal.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal containing E_outl: DCPSK modulated electrical

the information bits (its determines signal
the number of levels of the
modulation)
Parameters
Symbol_period [ps]: duration of the symbol (inverse of the bit rate).
CCITT_flag: integer flag:
if set to 0 the CCITT A scheme is used
if set to 1 the CCITT B scheme is used (an additional phase step is
introduced for each symbol)
Note
The Level of the input logical signal determines the number of levels of the
modulation. It must be not greater than 6.

Differential PSK Demodulator
14.15 Differential PSK Demodulator

Component name: DPSDE2
Demodulates a DPSK signal using a differential phase detector.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal used to E_phase: first analog base-band

determine the sampling instant. demodulated electrical signal before
See section 1.6 for further details sampling and decision; it actually
represents the in-phase component
of the complex envelope of the input
demodulated
signal
E_quad: second analog base-band
demodulated electrical signal before
sampling and decision; it actually
represents the quadrature
component of the complex envelope
of the input signal
L_out: logical signal that contains
the output bits
Parameters
information.
CCITT_type: flag for selecting the modulation scheme:
1: the CCITT scheme B is used
0: the CCITT scheme A is used

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.16 M-QAM Modulator

Component name: MQAMO2
Generates a signal digitally modulated in the M-QAM format (Gray code). The
number of levels of the modulation is determined by the dimension of the
input logical signal; for this reason, only logical signal having an even number
of bits is permitted. In particular:
4-bit logical signals give origin to 16-QAM,
6-bit logical signals produce 64-QAM
8-bit logical signals produce 256-QAM
If a 2-bit logical signal is passed as input, the output signal reduces to a
conventional 4-PSK.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal containing Eoutl: M-QAM modulated electrical

Parameters
Output_Amplitude: r.m.s. value of the envelope of the output signal.
Note
The dimension of the input logical signal determines the number of levels of
the modulation. It must be even and this constraint is checked.

M-QAM Demodulator
14.17 M-QAM Demodulator

Component name: MQADE2
Takes a M-QAM modulated analytic signal, gets the two quadrature baseband
signals and the detected string of bits in an output logical signal. No matched
filter is used.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal, used to E_phase: first analog base-band

sample the incoming signal for the demodulated electrical signal before
decision sampling and decision; it actually
represents the in-phase component
E_carrier: reference electrical
of the input signal
carrier used in the demodulation
E_quadrature: second analog base-
band demodulated electrical signal
demodulated
before sampling and decision; it
actually represents the quadrature
component of the input signal
the output bits
Parameters
Frequency [THz]: carrier frequency. See section 1.4 for further information.
Decision_threshold: is the demodulator decision threshold Th. It must be
equal to the distance between two adjacent signal of the constellation. In the
case of AWGN linear channel the Th value is given by the following formula:
2A
Th = (N )
2 2 −1
where A is the amplitude of the modulation and N is the dimension of the
output logical signal.
number of bits per symbol.sono valide solo le potenze di 4
Signal L_out logical level: it is the dimension of the output logical signal,
i.e. the number of bits per symbol. It MUST be even and greater than 2 (4, 6,
8, ...), it fixes the number of points of the M-QAM constellation (M = 2L_out).

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.18 Duobinary MSK Modulator

Component name: DBMSK3
Generates a Duobinary MSK modulated signal with the option of precoding
the binary digits.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal (Level = 1) Eoutl: generated duobinary MSK

electrical signal
Parameters
Carrier_Amplitude: amplitude of the generated carrier.
information).
Precoding_option: option to choose precoding of binary symbols:
0 - no precoding
1 - with precoding

Duobinary MSK Demodulator
14.19 Duobinary MSK Demodulator

Component name: DBMSK2
Simulates a duobinary Minimum Shift Keying (MSK) demodulator.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal for decision. E_out: electrical signal at the output
See section 1.6 for further details. of the product detector
E_signal: electrical signal to be L_out: output logical signal
demodulated containing the detected bit (Level =
1)
Parameters
Frequency [THz]: center frequency of the signal to be demodulated. See
section 1.4 for further information.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.20 FSK Modulator with Continuous

Phase
Component name: FSKGE2
Generates an FSK bandpass modulated signal with continuous phase. The
correspondence among the generated tones and the information bits of the
input logical signal is in natural order, with the first bit being the less
significant digit.
Example: input signal = 011; eight different tones are generated; 011 is the
tone number 6 and corresponds to the frequency (Frequency + 2*6 - 7) *
Tone_spacing/2
Inputs Outputs
Lin: input logical signal Eoutl: generated FSK electrical

signal
Parameters
Output_amplitude: carrier amplitude.
Tone_spacing [THz]: frequency spacing between adjacent tones.
Note
The dimension of the input logical signal determines the modulation levels
and cannot exceed 4. A check is performed to ensure this constraint.

FSK Demodulator with Continuous Phase
14.21 FSK Demodulator with Continuous

Phase
Component name: FSKDE2
Simulates an FSK demodulator formed by a bank of equal channels each one
composed by a bandpass filter, an envelope detector and an integrate and
dump filter.
Inputs Outputs
E_signal: input electrical signal to L_out: output logical signal

be demodulated containing the detected bits
Parameters
Tone_spacing [THz]: tone spacing between adjacent levels.
Filter_bandwidth [THz]: 3-dB bandwidth of the bandpass filters.
Filter_number_of_poles: number of poles of the bandpass filters.
Delay_sync [ps]: time instant at which the integrate and dump filter is
reset.
Note
The number of levels of the FSK is derived from the Level of the output
logical signal.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.22 Binary Pulse Amplitude

Demodulator
Component name: BPADEM
This subroutine performs a binary Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
demodulation, assigning to an output logical signal one of the two values
(0,1) depending on the value of the baseband input signal:
output = 0 if input < Threshold_level
output = 1 if input ≥ Threshold_level
The operation is memoryless, performing the above assignment at each
simulation step.
Inputs Outputs
E_in: input electrical signal L_out: output logical signal (Level =

1)
Parameters
Threshold_level: threshold level.

Differential MSK Demodulator
14.23 Differential MSK Demodulator

Component name: DFMSK2
Simulates a differential MSK demodulator with the option of error correction.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock signal for the E_detected: base-band electrical

sampling time signal for signal detection
E_signal: electrical signal to be E_error_corr: base-band electrical
demodulated signal for error correction
the output bit (Level = 1)
Parameters
information.
Correl_option: option to choose error correction - 0 means no correction, 1
means correction.

RF Mo-Demodulators
14.24 Demod-Remod Coherent Tracking

Receiver
Component name: DEMRE2
Category: Carrier and Clock Recovery Subsystems
This component simulates a Demodulator-remodulator Coherent Tracking
Receiver according to the following component diagram.
E_phase
x
FILBUT BBHLIM x
E_input E_VCO_output E_VCO_input
VCO FILOOP Sum
pi/2
FILBUT BBHLIM x
x
E_quad
The Loop filter FILOOP can have one of the following transfer functions (in
terms of Laplace Transforms) :
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
where A, B, D, and G are real constants.
The filters labeled FILBUT in the previous graph are lowpass Butterworth
filters with user specified order and bandwidth.

Demod-Remod Coherent Tracking Receiver
Inputs Outputs
E_input: input electrical signal E_phase: demodulated signal, in-

phase component
E_quad: demodulated signal,
quadrature component
E_VCO_input: VCO input signal
E_VCO_output: VCO output signal
Parameters
Integration_Order: order of integration (0, 1 or 2) for the loop filter,
integer variable. Allowed values: min 0; max 2; default 1.
Loop_Filter_Par_A: loop filter constant (A in the formulae). Allowed values:
any real number; default 1.
Loop_Filter_Par_B: loop filter constant (B in the formula (3), ignored in
other cases). Allowed values: any real number; default 1.
Loop_Filter_Par_D: loop filter constant (D in form. (1) and (2), ignored in
(3)). Allowed values: any positive real number; default 1.
Loop_Filter_Gain: loop filter gain (G in the formulae). Allowed values: any
positive real number; default 1.
VCO_Initial_frequency [THz]: center frequency of the VCO; it should be
equal (or as close as possible) to the input signal central frequency. Allowed
values: see section 1.4 for further information; default 0.002 THz.
Amp: amplitude of the VCO output signal. Allowed values: any real number;
default 1.
VCO_sens: VCO gain, real variable. Allowed values: any real number;
default 1.
Butterworth_Filter_Npoles: number of poles of the lowpass Butterworth
Arm Filters. Integer variable. Allowed values: integer number greater or equal
to 1; default 1.
Butterworth_Filter_Band: 3 dB bandwidth of the lowpass Butterworth Arm
Filters. Allowed values: any real number greater than zero, and giving a filter
bandwidth inside the simulation bandwidth, see section 1.4 for further
information; default -.

15 Electrical Amplifiers
Electrical Gain, simulates an ideal electrical amplifier or attenuator. No noise

is added to the amplified (attenuated) signal. No frequency dependent effects
are included.
Two Electrical Amplifier models are available to simulate a realistic noisy
amplifier:
50 ohm receiver electrical amplifier. No frequency dependent effects are
included.
User-defined amplifier for which transfer function and noise
characteristics are supplied from the user through a data file.
Electrical Amplifiers
15.1 Electrical Gain

This component simulates an ideal electrical amplifier or attenuator (negative
gain is allowed). This component does not introduce noise nor bandwidth
limitations, and these are the main differences with respect to the component
Electrical Amplifier (section 15.2). It should consequently be used in case of
an "ideal" change of level of an electrical signal (amplification or attenuation)
is required, without considering any particular physical model.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical Electrical
Parameters
Gain [dB] or [lin]: it is the ideal electrical gain. The linear gain has to be
interpreted as an amplitude gain. It means: GaindB = 20 log10 (Gainlin )
Allowed values: min 0 (lin); max -; default 1 (lin).
Note
If a loss has to be inserted, please, specify a negative value in dB or in the
range (0,+1) in the linear scale.

Electrical Amplifier
15.2 Electrical Amplifier

This component simulates a realistic electrical amplifier.
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog window for the two available models, 50-ohm
and User-defined.
15.2.1 50 Ohm
This component has been included in the OptSim library to allow the
simulation of a 50 Ω amplifier. Specifically, it has been thought as an optical
receiver front-end, directly connected to a photodetector.
The implementation of this component assumes that the input signal is a
current expressed in Ampere [A]. If the input signal has a different nature,
the noise is incorrectly generated. Therefore, in this case, the user must
apply the proper conversion by multiplying the input signal by a suitable unit
conversion constant.
The output of the OptSim photodiode component can be directly connected to
this component input without any normalization, since both the photodiode
output and amplifier input has to be intended as currents expressed in
Ampere [A].
The considered model of the 50 Ω amplifier does not consider frequency
dependence of the gain and of noise. Hence, gain and noise power spectral
density are considered flat over the whole simulation bandwidth.
The implemented model of this component is based on the assumption that
the 50 Ω matching is satisfied. It means that it must be possible to represent
the input signal through an equivalent Norton circuit (ideal current generator
plus a parallel resistor) with a 50 Ω resistor. Since the modeled device has a
50 Ω input resistance, the input signal propagates through two 50 Ω
resistances placed in parallel. Also the output of the device is supposed to be
50 Ω matched, therefore a final terminating 50 Ω resistance is assumed to be
present for the sake of calculating the output current Iout The described
schematic of the implemented model can be observed below. Iin is the input
current to the component. Iout is the output current.
G DC
I out = I in
50Ω 50Ω
2
Iin IN
50Ω 50Ω
Figure 15.1 The 50 Ω model schematic

Note
50 Ω amplifiers generally have worse noise performance than the specifically
designed transimpedance amplifiers. However, as the bit-rate grows and if an
optical preamplifier is also used, their poorer noise performance becomes less
important, and their use may be viable even in high-performance systems. In
other situations, the 50 Ω solution can be the one of choice due to the
extremely low cost of some of these devices.
The parameters to be furnished by the user are:

The 50 Ω amplifier gain, GDC, that is assumed to be flat over the whole
simulation bandwidth. Hence, it is equal to the device DC gain, the
nominal gain in data-sheets. It also coincides with the value of the
scattering parameter S21.
The amplifier noise figure F expressed in dB units and defined as in [2].
The reference operating temperature T expressed in Kelvin degrees [2].
Due to the presence of the input matching resistance, the actual amplitude
gain between the OptSim electrical input signal Iin and the OptSim output
electrical signal Iout is not G DC but it is:
GDC
I out = I in (1)
4
Noise is modeled as an equivalent current source IN . According to the
definition of noise figure F [2], all terminals are assumed 50 ohm matched, as
in the above schematic. Then the double-sided power spectral density (PSD)
of IN is:
2 K BTGDC
F
50
where T is the absolute temperature expressed in Kelvin and KB the
Boltzmann's constant.
Even if the component has been modeled to simulate a 50 Ω matched
amplifier, i.e., a layout including a 50 Ω resistance placed between the
current generator component and the amplifier input, it is nevertheless
possible to simulate a layout where the matching input resistance is missing.
To get this result the user has to consider the nominal DC gain and noise
figure of the 50 Ω device, and then she/he has to set the component
parameters in the following way.
6 dB have to be added to the nominal DC gain, therefore the gain value
to be introduced in the dialog window is Gblock=GDC+6, where GDC is the
50 Ω amplifier nominal gain and Gblock is the actual value, expressed in
dB, to be introduced in the window.
The actual noise figure to be introduced must to be derived from the
nominal value employing the following formula: Fblock=10log10[1+(F-
2)/4]. Where F is the nominal noise figure of the amplifier, expressed in
linear unit, and Fblock is the actual value, in dB, to be introduced in the
dialog window.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: the input current [A] Electrical: the output current [A]

Parameters
DC Gain [dB]: the gain of the amplifier. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 0.
Noise Figure F [dB]: the noise figure of the amplifier [2]. Allowed values:
Reference Temperature [K]: the reference temperature of the amplifier
[2]. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 300.
15.2.2 User-Defined
This model implements a noisy amplifier whose transfer function and noise
characteristics are described by the user through ASCII files. This component
has been introduced to be flexible and to allow modeling of any linear
receiver structure, independently of the underlying hardware implementation.
The noise added by the receiver is assumed to be a Gaussian random
process.
The user needs to supply an ASCII file containing the samples of the transfer
function vs. the frequency, and an ASCII file containing the samples of either
the output noise spectral density, or the amplifier noise figure as a function of
the frequency.
Several amplifiers can be cascaded in an OptSim project, but no reflections
are taken into account. It means that a perfect matching between the
cascaded components is always supposed.
The implementation of this component is largely based on the “User-defined
Electrical Filter” (see section 16.1.8).
Inputs Outputs
Modeling Principles
The user provides the amplifier transfer function HL(f). It is implemented
through a filter whose impulse response is hL(t)=IFT{HL(f)}, where IFT is the
Inverse Fourier Transform. At runtime, the input electrical signal sin(t) is
therefore filtered accordingly to:
s ' out (t ) = s in (t ) ∗ hL (t ) , (1)
where s'out(t) is the output signal before the noise addition, and ‘✳’ means
convolution.
The overall output electrical signal sout(t) is the sum of the filtered input
s'out(t) and the noise at the output nout(t):
sout (t ) = s 'out (t ) + nout (t ) (2)
The output noise nout(t) is a Gaussian and zero-mean random process. Its
power spectral density matches with the output noise bilateral power
spectral density Gn(f) defined through its shape or through the noise figure
dependency on frequency. This is done by synthesizing a linear filter that
shapes a white noise.
Note
The output noise power spectral density Gn(f) is always considered as a
bilateral distribution, i.e., positive and negative frequencies are considered.
It means that the output noise variance is equal to

+∞
−∞
∫ G ( f )df
n
Please, normalize noise data accordingly to this definition.
Since electrical signals in OptSim have no declared measure units, the user
has to take care of the consistency of the supplied data. In particular, the
measure unit of noise n(t) and signal s'out(t) must be the same. It means,
that if the output of the amplifier is assumed to be a current expressed in
Ampere [A], n(t) must be a current. Therefore, its power spectral density
Gn(f) must be defined as current squared per Hz [A2/Hz]. If the output of the
amplifier is assumed to be a voltage expressed in Volts [V], n(t) has to be a
voltage, and its power spectral density Gn(f) must be measured in Volts
squared per Hz [V2/Hz].
Alternative to providing the power spectral density Gn(f), the user can supply
samples of the noise figure [2] as a function of the frequency. If this option is
selected, the user is requested to furnish the value of the reference
resistance and of the reference temperature of the device. Moreover, the user
has to define if the noise generated by the reference resistance is a current or
a voltage. Such an explicit noise dimension declaration, is needed because of
the formula giving the noise power spectral density from the noise figure F(f):
Gn ( f ) = H L ( f ) ⋅ F ( f ) ⋅ 2 K t T ⋅ W
2
. (3)
Kt is the Boltzmann's constant, T is the reference temperature and W=R or

W=1/R. R is the reference resistance. If the user chooses to generate noise
as a current, then W is set to 1/R, conversely, it is set to R.
If the input signal is a current, the reference resistance generates a
current noise, otherwise, it generates a voltage noise. Note that there
is no way for OptSim to check the dimension of the input/output signal.
Cascading Amplifiers
Cascading two or more amplifier components poses no special problems. The
overall transfer function is the product of the individual transfer functions and
each amplifier introduces the defined amount of noise.
Note that the model does not take into account either impedance
mismatch or reflections. Therefore, if the user needs to model an amplifier
chain where inter-stage reflections occur, the user has to employ one
amplifier only whose transfer function is the overall chain transfer function
and the total output noise power spectral density is the equivalent power
spectral density of the chain. Note that when cascading components, with no
other components in between, the dimensions of the input and output must
obviously the same. Then noise power spectral density have to be supplied in
[A2/Hz] if the input signals are currents, or in [V2/Hz] if the input signals are
voltages.
If the noise figure is used, then you need to indicate explicitly whether the
noise generated by the reference resistance is a voltage or a current.
Dimensions must match those of the signals.
Note
A word of caution is necessary regarding the reference resistance supplied
with noise figure samples. Such a resistance is used only for the
generation of the correct amount of noise, as indicated in (3). It is not
used to compute impedance mismatch or reflections between cascaded.

Special Features
Transfer function and noise data can be smoothed, and the user can define a
smoothing factor to control the amount of smoothing to be applied. This
feature is useful in case data come from measurements affected by
uncertainty and instrument noise.
In addition, the frequency scale of the transfer function and noise data can be
stretched or shrank. This option can be used to reuse data. For instance, the
data of a 2.5 Gbit/s receiver can be stretched to support a 5 Gbit/s
simulation. Any amount of stretching/shrinking can be applied.
For more details please refer to “User-defined Electrical Filter” (section
16.1.8).
Parameters
Receiver Type: selects the model to be simulated between the predefined
Transimpedance 2.5 GHz or Transimpedance 10 GHz, or the completely
user-defined Custom.
Note
Two predefined amplifiers (Transimpedance 2.5 GHz, Transimpedance 10
GHz) are available. In both cases they have been generated from theoretical
models of transimpedance receivers. Both have a single pole, whose
frequency is 2.5 GHz and 10 GHz. The output noise power spectrum density
has been defined to experience the “f2” behavior at high frequency that is
typical of this kind of receivers. These predefined amplifiers are only meant to
serve as examples. They do not refer to specific components. The models for
the generation of these transfer functions have been taken from [1]. Note
that the input signal for these defaults must be a current expressed in
Ampere [A]. The output electrical signal is a voltage, expressed in Volts [V].
The transfer functions and output noise power spectral densities can be
viewed running a simulation with the option Transfer Function and Noise
Spectrum Plot set.
Transfer Function Data Filename: name of the ASCII file where the
transfer function vs. frequency is stored. The file is a three-column file. First
column defines the frequency to which the amplitude (second column) and
the phase/group-delay (third column) refer. The user can choose the file
from the file system clicking on the Browse button. The user can also edit
the file clicking on the Edit button: it opens an editor window loading the
data file. The editor tool is VI for Unix systems or Notepad for Windows NT
systems. The filename extension must be DAT in capital letters.
Transfer Function Data Format: specifies whether the transfer function is
given as a set of samples of the Amplitude Square and Phase or of the
Amplitude Square and Group Delay. See “User-Defined Filter File Format”
in section 16.1.8 for further details.
Amplitude Square: specifies whether the amplitude in the description file is
expressed in dB or in a linear scale.
Amplifier Noise Data Filename: name of the data file where samples of
the output noise bilateral power spectral density, or of the noise figure, vs.
frequency are stored. The user can choose the file from the file system
clicking on the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking on the Edit
button: it opens an editor window loading the data file. The editor is VI for
Unix or Notepad for Windows NT. The filename extension must be DAT in
capital letters.
The format of this file is the same as for the file describing the transfer
function, except that there is no phase or group delay data to be specified.

Therefore, it is a two-column file rather than a three-column file. See “User-

Defined Filter File Format” in section 16.1.8 for the details on file formatting.
Noise Data Format: specifies whether noise data is given as the output
noise spectral density (Output Noise Spectral Density [A2/Hz] or
[V2/Hz]) or the noise figure vs. frequency (Noise Figure vs. Frequency).
Data Format: specifies whether the output noise spectral density or the
noise figure in the noise data file are expressed in dB or on a linear scale.
Noise Generated by Reference Resistance as: specifies whether the noise
generated by the reference resistance is a Current or a Voltage. This option
is enabled only if Noise Figure vs. Frequency is set in the Noise Data
Format choice.
Reference Temperature [K]: the temperature of the reference resistance
for noise generation [2]. This field is enabled only if Noise Figure vs.
Frequency is set in the Noise Data Format choice. Allowed values: min >
0; max -; default 300.
Reference Resistance [Ω]: it is the reference resistance used to calculate
the noise power spectral density from the noise figure, according to (3). This
field is enabled only if Noise Figure vs. Frequency is set. Allowed values:
min > 0; max -; default 50.
Allow data files Smoothing: enables the factor specified in the following
field to smoothes the data points supplied with both the transfer function data
file and the amplifier noise data file. See “Transfer Function Smoothing” in
section 16.1.8 for further details.
Smoothing Factor [-]: the smoothing factor to be applied to both the
transfer function data and the amplifier noise data. This field is enabled only
if Allow data files Smoothing is set. See “Transfer Function Smoothing” in
section 16.1.8 for further details. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Data Scaling [-]: the real number that specifies the expansion/stretch factor
in the frequency scale of the transfer function data and the amplifier noise
data. This parameter has to be set to 1 in case scaling is not required. See
“Frequency Translation” in section 16.1.8 for further details. Allowed values:
min > 0; max -; default 1.
Transfer Function and Noise Spectrum Plot: enables the plotting of the
supplied transfer function and amplifier noise data, together with the transfer
function and noise spectrum currently implemented by the component.
Troubleshooting
Error messages can be issued by this component whenever the data supplied,
regarding either the transfer function, or the amplifier noise characteristics, is
ill conditioned and the linear filter synthesis on which the component
implementation is based fails.
For all troubleshooting and the explanation of all error messages, please refer
to “If something goes wrong” in section 16.1.8.
15.3 References
[1] G. Kazovsky, S. Benedetto, A. Willner, Optical Fiber Communication
Systems. Boston Artech House, 1996.
[2] L. W. Couch II, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Fifth Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1997.

16 Electrical Filters
The following eight typologies of Electrical Filter are available:

single pole lowpass filter
two poles lowpass filter
lowpass, highpass and band-pass Butterworth filters
lowpass, highpass and band-pass Bessel filters
lowpass, highpass and band-pass Chebychev filters
baseband matched filter for maximizing the output signal power
baseband raised cosine filter
generic user-defined electrical filter where you can provide the filter
modulus and group delay (or phase) as a function of frequency through a
data file
Electrical Filters
16.1 Electrical Filter

This component simulates an electrical filter. Several different filter models
are available, such as a single or double pole lowpass, Butterworth, Bessel,
Chebychev, raised cosine, matched and user-defined.
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the filter models, which can be
chosen among Single Pole Lowpass, Two Pole Lowpass, Butterworth,
Bessel, Chebychev, User Defined, Raised-Cosine and Matched Filter.
16.1.1 Single-Pole Lowpass

This model implements a baseband filter having the following transfer
function:
1 1
H(f )= H( f ) =
2
⇒ (1)
f  f 
2
1+ j 1 +  
f 3dB
 f 3dB 
where f3dB is the single pole frequency.
The filter is numerically implemented using an IIR (Infinite Impulse
Response) algorithm (see reference [3]) together with the bilinear
transformation method.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Pole Frequency [GHz]: the frequency f3dB of the pole. Allowed values: min
0; max BWVBS/2; default 10.
Note
The plot of this filter transfer function is not available in the current version.
Examples
An example of use of a single-pole lowpass filter is shown in the following
figures. The spectrum of the input signal (a white Gaussian noise with
spectral density 1 mW/GHz) and the corresponding filtered output signal (in a
large bandwidth and in a reduced bandwidth) were obtained by setting the
pole frequency to 10 GHz.

Electrical Filter
Figure 16.1 White noise and the filtered signal (large bandwidth)
Figure 16.2 White noise and the filtered signal (reduced bandwidth)
16.1.2 Two-Pole Lowpass

This model implements a baseband filter having the following transfer
function:
s1 ⋅ s2
H(f )= (1)
( j 2πf + s1 ) ⋅ ( j 2πf + s2 )
The two poles s1 and s2 are determined by the following two parameters:
The poles “natural frequency” f0

Electrical Filters
the poles “damping factor” ξ

Depending on the value of the damping factor the two poles can be real or
complex conjugate. In particular:
for ξ <1, the two poles are complex conjugate and are given by:
(
s1 = 2πf 0 1 + ξ + jξ ) (
s2 = 2πf 0 1 + ξ − jξ )
for ξ >1, the two poles are real and are given by:
(
s1 = 2πf 0 ξ + ξ 2 − 1 ) s2 =
(ξ +
2πf 0
ξ 2 −1 )
Moreover when ξ < 2 2 , the filter transfer function has an overshoot, i.e. a
resonance, which is usually characterized through the two following
parameters:
the frequency of the resonant peak f p = f 0 ⋅ 1 − 2ξ 2
 f 04 
the resonance overshoot, given by 10 log10   dB
 0 ( p )
 f 2 − f 2 2 + (2 f f ξ )2 
0 p 
These two values are evaluated after each entry of new parameters and
automatically shown in the lower part of the parameter dialog window in a
read-only box.
Some examples of the transfer functions of two-pole lowpass filters are
shown in the following figure. All graphs were obtained by setting the same
double-pole natural frequency (f0=1) and changing the damping factor ξ.
Figure 16.3 The two-pole lowpass transfer function for different damping
factor ξ and identical natural frequency f0
Inputs Outputs

Electrical Filter
Parameters
Double-Pole Natural Frequency [GHz]: the natural frequency f0 of the
double-pole. See previous page formulas for further information. Allowed
values: min 0; max BWVBS/2;default 10.
Damping factor [-]: Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.5.
Frequency of Resonant Peak [GHz]: (read-only field) the frequency of the
resonant peak fp.
Overshoot [dB]: (read-only field) the filter overshoot, whenever defined.
Note
The plot of the transfer function is not available in the current version.
Examples
The following figures show two examples of two-pole lowpass filters. The
spectrum of the input signal (a white Gaussian noise with spectral density
1 mW/GHz) and the corresponding filtered signal are shown. The double-pole
natural frequency is f0=10 GHz and the damping factor is respectively
ξ=0.04, ξ=0.4 and ξ=4.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a two-pole lowpass filter, with a damping
factor of ξ=0.04 is shown in the following figure (in a large bandwidth and in
a reduced bandwidth).
Figure 16.4 White noise and the filtered signal (large bandwidth, ξ=0.04)

Electrical Filters
Figure 16.5 White noise and the filtered signal (reduced bandwidth, ξ=0.04)

factor of ξ=0.4 is shown in the following figure (in a large bandwidth and in a
reduced bandwidth).
Figure 16.6 White noise and the filtered signal (reduced bandwidth, ξ=0.4)

Electrical Filter

factor of ξ=4 is shown in the following figure.
Figure 16.7 White noise and the filtered signal (reduced bandwidth, ξ=4)
16.1.3 Butterworth
This model implements lowpass, highpass and band-pass Butterworth filters.
This is a standard family of filters that are also sometimes called “Maximally
Flat Amplitude” filters. Their characteristics can be found in any book on
analog filters, such as [4].
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Lowpass, Band-pass, Highpass: selects the type of Butterworth filter.
Center Frequency [GHz]: the center frequency of the band-pass filter. This
field is enabled only if the Band-pass option is selected. Allowed values: min
0; max BWVBS/4; default -.
Number of Poles [-]: the number of current poles for lowpass and highpass
filters. For the band-pass filter, this parameter corresponds to the number of
poles of the lowpass equivalent filter, so that in this case the number of
current poles is twice this parameter. Note that the maximum number of
poles has been set to 10. Allowed values: min 1; max 10; default 1.
-3dB Bandwidth [GHz]: it is the –3dB cutoff frequency for lowpass and
highpass filters, or it is the range between the two cutoff frequencies for
band-pass filter. Allowed values: if lowpass or highpass: min 0;
max BWVBS/4;
Amplitude Plots: enables the plotting of the filter transfer function.

Electrical Filters
Examples
Two examples of use of Butterworth filters are shown in the following figures.
A lowpass filter and a band-pass filter with 3 poles and a –3 dB bandwidth of
10 GHz are considered. The spectrum of the input signal (a white Gaussian
noise with spectral density 1 mW/GHz) and the corresponding filtered signal
are shown.
The ideal and the currently implemented transfer functions of the lowpass
Butterworth filter are shown in the next figure. This kind of graph is
generated when the request of an amplitude plot is set in the parameter
dialog window.
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.8 The ideal and the currently implemented lowpass Butterworth
transfer functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Butterworth lowpass filter (in a large

bandwidth and in a reduced bandwidth) is shown in the next figures.

Electrical Filter
The ideal and the currently implemented transfer functions of the Butterworth
band-pass filter are shown in the following figure. The center frequency is
200 GHz.

Electrical Filters
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.11 The ideal and the currently implemented band-pass Butterworth
transfer functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Butterworth band-pass filter (in a large

bandwidth and in a reduced bandwidth) is shown in the next figures.

Electrical Filter
16.1.4 Bessel
This model implements lowpass, highpass and band-pass Bessel filters. This
is a standard family of filters that are also sometimes called “Maximally Flat
Delay” filters. Their characteristics can be found in any book on analog filters,
such as [4].
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Lowpass, Band-pass, Highpass: selects the type of Bessel filter.
-3dB Bandwidth [GHz]: it is the –3 dB cutoff frequency for lowpass and
highpass filters, while it is the range between the two cutoff frequencies for
band-pass filter. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb (if lowpass
or highpass) or 2·Rb (if band-pass).

Electrical Filters
Examples
Two examples of use of Bessel filters are shown in the following figures. A
lowpass filter and a band-pass filter with 3 poles and a –3 dB bandwidth of
10 GHz are considered. The spectrum of the input signal (a white Gaussian
noise with spectral density 1 mW/GHz) and the corresponding filtered signal
are shown.
Bessel filter are shown in the next figure. This kind of graph is generated
when the request of an amplitude plot is set in the parameter dialog window.
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.14 The ideal and the currently implemented lowpass Bessel transfer
functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Bessel lowpass filter (in a large

bandwidth and in a reduced bandwidth) is shown in the next figure.

Electrical Filter
The ideal and the currently implemented transfer functions of the Bessel
band-pass filter are shown in the following figure. The center frequency is
200 GHz.

Electrical Filters
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.17 The ideal and the currently implemented band-pass Bessel
transfer functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Bessel band-pass filter (in a large

bandwidth and in a reduced bandwidth) is shown in the following figure.

Electrical Filter
16.1.5 Chebychev
This model implements lowpass, highpass and band-pass Chebychev filters.
This is a standard family of filters whose characteristics can be found in any
book on analog filters, such as [4].
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Lowpass, Band-pass, Highpass: selects the type of Chebychev filter.
Bandwidth at Cutoff [GHz]: it is the –3 dB cutoff frequency for lowpass
and highpass filters, while it is the range between the two cutoff frequencies
for band-pass filter. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default Rb (if
lowpass or highpass) or 2·Rb (if band-pass).
Ripple [dB]: band-pass ripple. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.3.

Electrical Filters
Examples
Two examples of use of Chebychev filters are shown in the following figures.
A lowpass filter and a band-pass filter with 3 poles, a –3 dB bandwidth of
10 GHz and a ripple of 0.3 dB are considered. The spectrum of the input
signal (a white Gaussian noise with spectral density 1 mW/GHz) and the
corresponding filtered signal are shown.
Chebychev filter are shown in the next figure. This kind of graph is generated
when the request of an amplitude plot is set in the parameter dialog window.
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.20 The ideal and the currently implemented lowpass Chebychev
transfer functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Chebychev lowpass filter (in a large


Electrical Filter
The ideal and the currently implemented transfer functions of the band-pass
Chebychev filter are shown in the next figure. The center frequency is
200 GHz.

Electrical Filters
Ideal
Currently
implemented
Figure 16.23 The ideal and the currently implemented band-pass Chebychev
transfer functions.
A white Gaussian noise filtered by a Chebychev band-pass filter (in a large


Electrical Filter
16.1.6 Matched
This model implements a baseband matched electrical filter. Given a signal
s(t), its matched filter has an impulse response function given by h(t)=s*(t0-
t). It is known from the general theory of digital communications [1] that,
when the signal s(t) is received together with white Gaussian noise, the
matched filter gives at its output the maximum signal-to-noise ratio among
all possible filters. This corresponds to the minimum bit error rate at its
output.
OptSim implements a matched filter for rectangular and half-sinusoidal
signals. A half-sinusoidal signal in the time interval [0,T] is defined as:
 π 
s (t ) = sin t  for t ∈ [0, T ]
 T 
 s (t ) = 0 for t ∉ [0, T ]
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Filter type selector: allows selecting the waveform to be matched between
rectangular or half-sinusoidal.
Impulse response duration [ps]: the impulse response duration of the
matched filter. In a digital transmission environment it is usually given by the
inverse of the system bit rate. Allowed values: min >0; max -; default: 1/Rb.
Simulated impulse response duration [ps]: (read-only field) the actually
simulated impulse response duration of the matched filter. It may be slightly
different from the value inserted in the previous field due to the fact that an
integer number of time samples must fit into the impulse duration. Please see
the OptSim User manual for further information on this issue.

Electrical Filters
Examples
Two examples of matched filters are shown in the following figures. They
correspond to rectangular and half-sinusoidal waveforms with identical
impulse response duration of 100 ps. The spectrum of the input signal (a
white Gaussian noise with spectral density 1 mW/GHz) and the resulting
filtered signal are shown.
Figure 16.26 White noise and the signal filtered by a Matched rectangular
filter
Figure 16.27 White noise and the signal filtered by a Matched half-sin filter

Electrical Filter
16.1.7 Raised Cosine Electrical Filter

This model implements a baseband electrical filter having the following
transfer function:
H(f )= A
[C ( f , Ro )]
α
(1)
R( f )
where:
C(f,Ro) is a raised cosine function, characterized by its roll-off Ro,
described by the following expression (2)
A is an amplitude factor
α is the (real) exponent at which C(f,Ro) is raised
R(f) is a shaping function, that can be either the spectrum of a symmetric
rectangular pulse of duration equal to the inverse symbol rate, or a
constant equal to 1
 Bw
 1 , f ≤ (1 − Ro )
2

1   π  B  
C ( f ) =  1 − sin   f − w   , (1 − Ro ) Bw ≤ f ≤ (1 + Ro )
Bw
2   Ro B w  2   2 2
 Bw
 0 , f ≥ (1 + Ro )
 2
(2)
The parameter Bw is the filter bandwidth.
Raised cosine filters are often used in RF digital modulation (for format like
PSK, FSK and QAM) in order to satisfy the Nyquist criterion that allows
minimizing intersymbol interference. For further information, you can see any
book about digital modulation, such as Ref. [5].
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Shaping function: the shaping function that determines R(f). It could be the
inverse Fourier transform of a symmetric rectangular pulse of duration equal
to the inverse of the bandwidth Bw specified in (2) (Sinc option) or a constant
equal to 1 (Constant option).
Raised-cosine exponent α [-]: Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 1.
Raised-cosine roll-off [-]: roll-off parameter Ro. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1; default 0.5.
Bandwidth [GHz]: filter bandwidth Bw. Allowed values: min 0.; max
BWVBS/2; default 10.
Examples
Examples of Raised-Cosine filters are shown in the following figures. In
particular, Raised Cosine filter with Bw=10 GHz (–3 dB bandwidth) are shown
for different values of the roll-off Ro and with or without the Sinc shaping

Electrical Filters
factor. The exponent α is set to 1 in all cases, while the input signal is a white
Gaussian noise with power spectral density equal to 1 mW/GHz.
The output of a Raised-Cosine filter with a Sinc shaping factor is shown in the
next figure. The roll-off is set to 0, 0.5 and 1.
Roll-off factor
1.
0.5
0.
Figure 16.28 White noise and the signal filtered by a Raised-Cosine with the
Sinc shape option.
In the following figure the white Gaussian noise filtered by a Raised-Cosine

filter with a Constant shaping factor is shown. The roll-off is respectively 0,
0.5 and 1.
Roll-off factor
1.
0.5
0.
Figure 16.29 White noise and the signal filtered by a Raised-Cosine Constant
without the sinc shaping option

Electrical Filter
16.1.8 User-defined Electrical Filter

This model implements a generic user-defined electrical filter. The filter
transfer function (amplitude and group delay or phase) must be specified
through a standard ASCII data file, following the format specified in “User-
Defined Filter File Format” in this section.
The component can thus be used to simulate a wide range of electrical
filtering components, for example coming from experimentally measured data
set.
The numerical algorithm used to implement these components is very
accurate and advanced; see “User-defined filter synthesis” in this section for
further details.
The component is very flexible, and the parameters can be inserted in
different formats, namely:
amplitude on a linear scale or in dB
transfer function as a function of group delay or phase
Moreover, the transfer function may be shifted and/or scaled on the
frequency axis, so that you can define a filter shape and then use it in
different situations (see “Frequency Translation” in this section for further
details).
The component may generate an output chart where the following graphs are
shown:
transfer function as expressed in the description file
currently synthesized transfer function
This component is implemented using the same algorithm (Overlap and add
[3]) used for the linear operator of the fiber component. This algorithm allows
a very accurate implementation of any complex transfer functions. Anyway,
in some peculiar situations, the digital filter synthesis may not be possible.
These situations are usually due to:
1. Some of the input parameters do not match among themselves; for
example, the filter is specified on a frequency range, which is completely
outside the simulation bandwidth.
2. The filter is specified on a frequency range much smaller than the
3. The filter transfer function comes from an experimental measure where
function has a lot of noise superimposed.
4. The filter has a exceedingly long time-domain impulse response; for
example a band-pass filter whose bandwidth is several orders of
magnitude smaller than the simulation bandwidth.
In all these cases, the simulation is stopped and an error message is given.
Refer to “If something goes wrong” in this section for further details.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Filter Data Filename: name of the data file where the transfer function vs.
frequency is stored. You can choose the file from the file system clicking on

Electrical Filters
the Browse button. You can also edit the file clicking on the Edit button: it
opens an editor window loading the data file. The editor is VI for Unix or
Notepad for Windows NT. See “User-Defined Filter File Format” in this section
for further details.
File Format Ampl. Square and Phase, Ampl. Square and Group Delay or Ampl.
Square only: specifies if the transfer function in the description file is
expressed as a function of amplitude and phase, amplitude and group delay
or amplitude only (the amplitude should always be expressed as the square
of the modulus of the transfer function).
Amplitude Square: specifies whether the amplitude in the description file is
expressed in dB or in a linear scale.
Smoothing: enables to smoothen the data points supplied in the user data
file. See “Transfer Function Smoothing” in this section for further details.
Smoothing factor [-]: the smoothing factor to be applied when
synthesizing the filter. This field is enabled only if Smoothing is set. Allowed
Offset [GHz]: specifies a shift between the current simulated transfer
function and the transfer function stored on the filter description file. It
should be set to 0 (the default) when offset is not required. See “Frequency
Translation” in this section for further details. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 0.
Scaling [-]: the real number that specifies the expansion/stretch factor in
the frequency scale of the transfer function stored in the data file. This
parameter should be set to 1 (the default) when scaling is not required. See
“Frequency Translation” in this section for further details. Allowed values: min
>0; max -; default 1.
Actual Filter Amplitude and Group Delay Plots: enables the plotting on
screen of the supplied transfer function and group delay data, together with
the transfer function and group delay currently implemented by the
component.
User-Defined Filter File Format

All the supplied files for the description of the filter must have a filename
ending with the extension DAT (in capital letters).
The syntax to be used for these files follows the rules:
comment section.
line.
The data must be written in lines, separated by blank, each containing:
− the frequency in [GHz] as the first field
− the modulus of the transfer function (linear scale or dB)
− the phase in radians (or the group delay in ps)
Abscissas (either frequency or wavelength) should be given in ascending
order while abscissas are not required to be strictly equispaced. Two or more
points with the same frequency are not allowed: if this situation happens only

Electrical Filter
the first line containing the repeated value is considered and a warning
message is shown. The maximum number of allowed points is 2043; if in the
file there are more than this number only the first 2043 points are considered
and a warning message is shown.
Here is an example of input file:
#
# Electrical filter description file
# General comment on the filter:
# - abscissas in GHz
# - modulus in dB
# - phase in radians
##
0.0 0.0 0.0
1.01502502 -0.0445154086 0.10150251
2.02005029 -0.173698097 0.202005035
3.02507544 -0.380280584 0.302507538
4.03010035 -0.653619885 0.40301004
5.03512573 -0.98132962 0.503512573
6.04015064 -1.35079885 0.604015076
7.04517603 -1.75031734 0.704517578
8.05020142 -2.16972327 0.805020142
9.05522728 -2.60064578 0.905522705
10.0602522 -3.03646755 1.00602527
11.0652781 -3.4721365 1.10652783
12.0703039 -3.90391445 1.2070304
13.0753298 -4.32911968 1.30753296
14.0803547 -4.74589777 1.40803552
15.0853806 -5.1530242 1.50853809
...
Please note that, accordingly with the OptSim units for electrical signals, the
units to be used in the description file are:
frequency in [GHz]
phases in [radians]
group delay in [ps]
Frequency Translation
The transfer function specified on the filter description file can be shifted
and/or compressed/expanded on the frequency axis by the use of the two
parameters Offset and Scaling. This feature may prove very useful to define
a given filter on a description file, and then reuse it in a different position on
the frequency axis.
Please refer to the examples of “Frequency Translation” in section 10.1.5 for
further explanation.
An incorrect use of this two parameters may give errors, for example when
the resulting transfer function is defined on a range which does not overlap
with the current simulation bandwidth. See “If something goes wrong” in this
section for further details.
Transfer Function Smoothing

The transfer function resulting from an experimental measurement of a real
electrical device is always affected by noise. While in most situations this is
not a problem, some particular and very noisy transfer functions may be
troublesome since noise actually generates ripples on the frequency transfer
function. The corresponding time-domain impulse response may then have
extremely long tails and thus be difficult, if not impossible, to be synthesized
(see “User-defined filter synthesis” and “If something goes wrong” in this
section).

Electrical Filters
In such situations, the Smoothing parameter may prove useful. When the
feature is set with a Smoothing factor Nfact, the currently simulated transfer
function is obtained by averaging Nfact adjacent points of the original transfer
function.
Please refer to the examples of “Transfer Function Smoothing” in section
10.1.5 for further explanation.
User-defined filter synthesis

The synthesis of the user-defined electrical filter is based on the Overlap and
Add algorithm [3], the same used to simulate the linear operator (dispersion
effects) of the optical fiber module.
To obtain a transfer function suitable for this algorithm, the user-defined
transfer function is processed in an initialization phase as follows (in the
specified order):
1. If the user-defined filter data points (after offset and scaling, see
“Frequency Translation” in this section) are given on a frequency range
smaller than the simulation bandwidth, a set of points are added at the
border. These points are chosen so to have continuos (and smooth)
modulus and group delay, and by forcing the modulus to go to zero at the
extremes of the simulation bandwidth.
2. If selected, smoothing is applied (see “Transfer Function Smoothing” in
this section).
3. The user-defined filter data points are interpolated (using a cubic spline
algorithm [2]) so to obtain a continuos transfer functions Hfinal(f).
The standard Overlap and Add algorithm is then applied on Hfinal(f).
If something goes wrong

The algorithms developed to implement this component are very accurate
and the user-defined filter frequency response is synthesized as explained in
“If Something goes Wrong...” in this section. There are anyway situations in
which the filter cannot be synthesized, since it would require a exceedingly
large memory allocation to implement the Overlap and Add algorithm [3].
When these situations arise, an error message is displayed and the simulation
is stopped.
Here is a list of possible problems, together with hints on how to try to solve
them.
The format used for the filter description file does not match with the
flags specified in the filter dialog window. As an example, the filter file is
specified as a function of frequency, while the Wavelength option has
been selected in the parameter dialog window. Check the parameter
matching.
The filter is specified on a frequency range, which does not overlap with
the time-domain simulation bandwidth. The filter can not be synthesized
in this case, and you should either change the time domain simulation
frequency, or give the filter file on the correct frequency range.
The filter is specified on a frequency range much smaller than the time-
domain simulation bandwidth, so just a few points fall inside the
bandwidth. The algorithm should usually work in this situation, except on
some very peculiar transfer function. You should then try to give the
transfer function on a frequency range as close as possible to the

References
The filter transfer function comes from an experimental measure where

You may try to use the Smoothing features in this situation.
The filter has a exceedingly long time-domain impulse response, so that
the internal memory requirement to implement the Overlap and Add
algorithm is too large. This situation typically arises when simulating a
band-pass filter whose band-pass is several orders of magnitude smaller
than the simulation bandwidth. In these cases, you should consider
reducing the simulation bandwidth, if possible.
Some final remarks on user-defined electrical filters

The user-defined optical filter algorithm has been carefully tested and works
properly on virtually any “physically realizable” filter. On the other hand,
filters that correspond to totally “ideal” transfer may generate extreme
situations where the algorithm fails. A perfectly rectangular filter with square
edges in the amplitude response is example of ideal and clearly non-physical
filter. In this situation, the algorithm still try to synthesize the filter, but may
fail (when the resulting impulse response is exceedingly long) or may
implement a transfer function which is not completely matched to the ideal
one.
You should also remember that the input data file specifies the transfer
function over a discrete set of frequencies, and a cubic spline algorithm is
used to interpolate among adjacent points. Even if cubic spline is a very good
interpolation algorithm for most practical situations, it may give unexpected
results when the input data file discrete frequency set is too sparse. In these
situations, the transfer function variation from one points to the next is very
large (this condition is automatically checked and warnings are issued) and
the spline interpolation may differ from the actual filter transfer function.
As a general rule of thumb:
Two adjacent data points should not have amplitude difference much
greater than 1-2 dB
Two adjacent data points should not have phase difference much greater
than small fractions of 1 radian
16.2 References
[1] Leon W. Couch II, Digital and analog communication system, Third
Edition, 497-508, 1989.
[2] C. De Boor, A practical guide to Splines, Springer-Verlag, 1978
[3] M. C. Jeruchim, P. Balaban e K. S. Shanmugan, Simulation of
Communication Systems, Plenum Publishing Corporation, New York,
1992.
[4] A. B. Williams and F. J. Taylor, Electronic Filter Design Handbook,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1988.
[5] J. G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill, New York,
1989.

17 Mux / Demux
Optical
See the “Optical Network Components” (chapter 18).
Electrical
Two Inputs Multiplexer (MPX).
Clock-Driven Two Inputs Multiplexer (MPXX), multiplexer driven by an input

clock signal.
Two Outputs Demultiplexer (MPY).
Clock-Driven Two Outputs Demultiplexer (MPYY), demultiplexer driven by an

input clock signal.
Logical
Merge Of Two Logical Signals (RMUX1).
Two Inputs Mutiplexer (RMUXC), multiplexer driven by an input clock signal.

Mux / Demux
17.1 Two Input Multiplexer

Component name: MPX
This component selects as output, one of the two input signals on the basis of
an input parameter KSEL. If KSEL = 0 then Eout = EinA, if KSEL = 1 then
Eout = EinB.
Inputs Outputs
EinA: first electrical signal Eout: electrical signal

EinB: second electrical signal
Parameters
KSEL: the selection parameter. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default -.
17.2 Clock Driven two Input Multiplexer

Component name: MPXX
This component simulates a clock-driven two inputs multiplexer. It selects as
output, one of the two input signals on the basis of an input clock signal Eclk.
If Eclk >= 1 then Eout = EinB, if Eclk = 0 then Eout = EinA.
Inputs Outputs
Eclk: electrical clock (section 1.6) Eout: electrical signal

EinA: first electrical signal
EinB: second electrical signal

Two Output Demultiplexer
17.3 Two Output Demultiplexer

Component name: MPY
This component shares an input signal between two outputs, on the basis of
the input parameter KSEL. If KSEL= 1 then EoutB = Ein, if KSEL = 0 then
EoutA = Ein.
Inputs Outputs
Ein: electrical signal EoutA: first electrical signal

EoutB: second electrical signal
Parameters
KSEL: the selection parameter. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default -.
17.4 Clock Driven two Output

Demultiplexer
Component name: MPYY
This component shares an input signal between two outputs, on the basis of
the input clock signal Eclk. If Eclk>=1 then EoutB=Ein, if Eclk=0 then
EoutA=Ein.
Inputs Outputs
Eclk: electrical clock (section 1.6) EoutA: first electrical signal

Ein: electrical signal EoutB: second electrical signal

Mux / Demux
17.5 Multiplexer Between two Logical

Signals
Component name: RMUX1
Category: Digital Signal Processing Modules
This component multiplexes the two input logical signals in the output logical
signal, starting from L_input_1. The output sequence is therefore L_input_1-
L_input_2-L_input_1-...
Inputs Outputs
L_input_1: first logical signal L_output: logical signal

L_input_2: second logical signal
Parameters
Baud rate [Tbaud/s]: it is the baud rate for the output logical signal. Input
baud rate must be half of this.
Delay [ps]: the delay waited before the operation starts.
Note
An error condition will be issued if the levels of the three logical signals are
not equal. No test is performed whether the input baud rate is half of the
output one.

Multiplexer Between two Logical Signals Controlled by a Clock
17.6 Multiplexer Between two Logical

Signals Controlled by a Clock
Component name: RMUXC
This component multiplexes the two input logical signals into the output
logical signal. The operation is controlled by a clock signal: if Clock>0.5 then
the second logical input signal is placed in output; if Clock<0.5 then the first
logical input signal is placed in output.
The multiplexing is asynchronous, i.e. is controlled only by the clock signal,
no test is performed whether the logical signals have changed from the last
time they were placed in output or any other semantic upon the multiplexing
operation.
Inputs Outputs
L_input_1: first logical signal L_output: logical signal

L_input_2: second logical signal
Clock: electrical clock signal
Note
An error condition will be issued if the levels of the three logical signals are
not equal.

18 Optical Network
Components
Ideal Optical Switch
Realistic Optical Switch
Optical Cross Connectors (OXC)
Optical Circulator
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
Optical Demultiplexer
Optical Multiplexer
WC-XGM Wavelenght Converter
WC-XPM Wavelenght Converter

Optical Network Components
18.1 Ideal Optical Switch

This component simulates an ideal n×m optical switch, with n≥m, that directs
each optical input signal towards a specified output port.
The maximum value of the input/output port number is 64 and each port is
identified by an integer number.
Once the component is placed in the design area it is possible to connect up
to 64 signals as input specifying the port number for each of them. In a
similar way are specified the output connections. The number of external
connected signals (input and output) represents the switch dimension.
The switch behavior is identified through the specification of the connections
between input ports and output ports. Particularly, each connected input port
has associated the corresponding output port number.
SPT Behavior
The ideal optical switch is a linear component, therefore, its effects on the
optical spectra are fully simulated during SPT simulations. The used model is
the same employed for VBS simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Connection Vector: the connections between the input and output ports are
specified by a vector of integer values. The position of each vector element
corresponds to a specific connected input port. For instance the 4th element of
the vector corresponds to the 4th input port. The integer value of each vector
element identifies the connection with the output port. For instance if the 4th
element is equal to 6, then the 4th input port is connected to the 6th output
port. A particular case is represented by the 0 value. When the entry in the
Connection Vector is equal to zero, the correspondent input port is not
connected to any output port. Allowed values: min 0; max 64; default -.
INPUT PORT OUTPUT PORT
1 k 1 2
2 0
3 3
4 6
m n m
Figure 18.1 Scheme of the Connection Vector
The figure above shows a generic representation of the Connection Vector

and an example. In the example the 4th input port is connected with the 6th
output port and the 2nd input port is not connected to any output.

Ideal Optical Switch
The connection vector elements are specified in a unique parameter field

using as separator a special character that can be chosen among the
following ones: ‘;’ (semicolon) ‘:’ (colon) ‘|’ (pipe). The use of the character
‘|’ is recommended when the value is obtained from an expression.
Special cases The port numbers of the connected input signals are not sequential.
It is possible to connect the input signals using a set of non-sequential input
ports. For instance in a switch with 2 connected inputs that use the port
numbers [1|4], the Connection Vector is represented by a 4 elements array
where the 2nd and 3rd elements are equal to 0. E.g. Connection Vector:
[2|0|0|1] (see the example in Figure 18.4).
The port numbers of the connected output signals are not sequential.
It is possible to connect the output signals using a set of non-sequential
output ports. In this case in the Connection Vector has to be specified the
integers corresponding to the output port numbers that are really connected
to the external outputs (see the example in Figure 18.3).
Examples
4|3|2|1|8|7|6|5
Figure 18.2 Example of switch m×m with m = 8

12|0|10|9|0|0|8|5
Figure 18.3 Example of switch m×k with m = 8 and k = 5
2|0|0|1
Figure 18.4 Switch 2×2 example
Error cases The configurations of the switch component that can produce an error
message during the simulation are summarized in the following list:
Switch m×k with k>m (the number of connected outputs is higher than
the number of the connected inputs).
Not all the connected output ports are specified in the Connection Vector.
The Connection Vector length is not equal to the maximum input port
number among the connected ones.

Realistic Optical Switch
18.2 Realistic Optical Switch

This component simulates an n×n realistic optical switch which is
implemented as OptSim compound component.
The available configurations are: 2×2, 4×4, 8×8, 16×16. Other generic user-
defined m×k switch configurations can be defined creating a new compound
component modifying the existing ones.
The realistic optical switch takes into account the input loss for each input
signal and the cross-talk between the propagated signals.
These components are accessible through the compound component icon
selecting in the category Predefined one of the following:
Switch2x2_real.opm
Switch4x4_real.opm
Switch8x8_real.opm
Switch16x16_real.opm
The following explanation will consider the 4×4 configuration as an example.
Figure 18.5 The model schematic of the 4×4 optical switch
SPT Behavior
The optical switch is a linear component, therefore, its effects on the optical
spectra are fully simulated during SPT simulation. The used model is the
same employed for VBS simulation.

Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Insertion_loss [dB]: the insertion loss of the component. Allowed values:
min 0.; max -; default 0.5.
Crosstalk [dB]: the cross-talk on all signals. Allowed values: min 0.; max -;
default 90.
Out_in1, Out_in2, Out_in3, Out_in4: these parameters express the
connection between the input and the output ports. They are the elements of
the Connection Vector of the Ideal Optical Switch used within the
configuration. Allowed values: min 0.; max 4.

Optical Cross Connector
18.3 Optical Cross Connector

This compound component simulates an optical cross connector (OXC) with
the configuration schematically reported in the Figure 18.6.
This component’s configuration is composed of:
demultiplexer section, separates in frequency the optical channels of the
WDM transmitted signals
realistic optical switches section, directs each channel towards an output
port
multiplexer section, aggregates the channels at the output ports
The OXC model is characterized to the number k of the input/output ports
and to the number n of the WDM optical channels. Then the switch
dimensions are k×k and the mu-demultiplexer dimensions are 1×n / n×1. The
OXC components are identified with the conventional name OXC_K×K_Nch,
where K and N have the meanings explained before.
There are several available configurations. Other generic user-defined OXC
configurations can be defined creating a new compound component modifying
the existing ones.
OXC2x2_4ch.opm
OXC2x2_8ch.opm
OXC2x2_16ch.opm
OXC4x4_4ch.opm
OXC4x4_8ch.opm
OXC4x4_16ch.opm
OXC8x8_4ch.opm
OXC8x8_8ch.opm
OXC8x8_16ch.opm
The following explanation will consider the 4×4_4ch configuration as an
example (see the OXC_4×4_4ch schematic in Figure 18.6).

OXC_K×K_Nch
λ1 λ1
K×K
λ1, … λN Optical
λ1, … λN
1
Switch 1
λN λN
λ1 λ1
K×K
K Optical K
λN Switch λN
Figure 18.6 The logical model schematic
Figure 18.7 The OXC4×4_4ch compound component schematic
SPT Behavior
The OXC is a linear component, therefore, its effects on the optical spectra
are fully simulated during SPT simulations. Filtering function at demultiplexer
and multiplexer sections are applied to signal spectra.

Optical Cross Connector
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Center_Frequency [THz]: the center frequency of the WDM signal. It is the
frequency in the middle of the two central channels. Allowed values:
min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 193.
Filter_Bandwidth [GHz]: the 3dB bandwidth of the demultiplexing raised
cosine filter, refer to section 10.1.2 for better filter parameter definition.
Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 50.
Filter_Roloff: the raised cosine filter roll-off, refer to section 10.1.2 for
better filter parameter definition. Allowed values: min 0.; max 1.; default 0.2.
Insertion_loss [dB]: the insertion loss of the component. Allowed values:
min 0.; max -; default 3.
Insertion_loss_switch [dB]: the insertion loss of the internal switch
component. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 0.5.
Crosstalk [dB]: the cross-talk on all signals. Allowed values: min 0.; max -;
default 90.
Out_chij : this parameter expresses the path of a specific channel at an
input port towards an output port. The Out_chij value is the output port
number of the ith channel at the jth input port. The generic OXC_K×K_Nch
module has N×K Out_chij parameters. They are the elements of the
Connection Vectors of the ideal optical switches used within the configuration.
For instance the OXC_4×4_4ch has 16 Out_chij parameters. Allowed values:
min 0; max 16.

18.4 Optical Circulator

This compound component simulates an optical circulator where the input
signals are propagated in the clockwise direction towards the output ports.
The optical circulator takes into account the input and output insertion loss at
each port and the cross-talk between the propagated signals.
SPT Behavior
The optical circulator is a linear component, therefore, its effects on the
optical spectra are fully simulated during SPT simulations. The used model is
the same employed for VBS simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Input_Insertion_loss [dB]: the insertion loss at each input port. Allowed
values: min 0.; max -; default 0.5.
Output_Insertion_loss [dB]: the insertion loss at each output port.
Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 0.5.
Crosstalk [dB]: the cross-talk contribution along the counterclockwise
direction. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 90.
18.5 Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (OADM)

This compound component implements an optical add-drop multiplexer.
Given at the input port a WDM aggregate, the selected channel is dropped
and available at the drop port. Another channel at the same frequency may
be added using the add port. The drop operation is implemented using an
optical notch filter. The transfer function of the notch filter is the

Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
complementary of a Multiple-Stage Lorentzian bandpass filter and has the

same bandwidth.
SPT Behavior
Filtering function are applied to signal spectra. When adding channels, we
assume them as in-phase: resulting power spectrum is the sum of input
channels.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Add_Drop_Frequency [THz]: frequency of the channel to be dropped out
of the incoming WDM aggregate. A new signal at this frequency can be added
at the Add port. Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 193.
Filter_Bandwidth [GHz]: the 3 dB two-sides bandwidth of the add and
drop optical filters. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 20 GHz.
Insertion_Loss [dB]: the insertion loss of the device at each input port.
Crosstalk [dB]: the cross-talk contribution between the added and dropped
signals. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 90.

18.6 Optical Demultiplexer

This compound component implements an optical demultiplexer. Each
channel is demultiplexed by mean of a raised cosine shaped filter, with
selected roll-off and bandwidth. Channels spacing must be constant in
frequency. Lower is the channel number lower is the demultiplexed channel
frequency.
The available configurations are 1 to 2, 1 to 4, 1 to 8, 1 to 16. Other generic
user-defined 1 to k demultiplexer configurations can be defined creating a
new compound component modifying the existing ones.
demux1to2.opm
demux1to4.opm
demux1to8.opm
demux1to16.opm
The following explanation will consider the 1 to 4 configuration as an
example.
SPT Behavior
This optical demultiplexer is a linear component defined through transfer
functions of the filters that contain. It can be fully simulated in SPT
simulations that are based only on transfer function models of each
component. Therefore, the optical spectrum at each output is the one at the
input filtered using the raised cosine shaping. Since SPT simulations are
based on power spectra propagation, only the square modulus of the transfer
functions is considered.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters

Optical Demultiplexer
Demux_Center_Frequency [THz]: the center frequency of the WDM

aggregate to be demultiplexed. It is the frequency in the middle of the two
central channels. Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 193.
Filter_Bandwidth [GHz]: the 3dB bandwidth of the demultiplexing raised
Insertion_Loss [dB]: the insertion loss of the component. Allowed values:
min 0.; max -; default 3.

18.7 Optical Multiplexer

This compound component implements an optical multiplexer. Each input is
filtered with a raised cosine shaped filter, with selected roll-off and
bandwidth. Channels spacing must be constant in frequency. Lower is the
channel number lower is the multiplexed channel frequency.
The available configurations are: 2 to 1, 4 to 1, 8 to 1, 16 to 1. Other generic
user-defined k to 1 multiplexer configurations can be defined creating a new
compound component modifying the existing ones.
mux2to1.opm
mux4to1.opm
mux8to1.opm
mux16to1.opm
The following explanation will consider the 4 to 1 configuration as an
example.
SPT Behavior
The optical spectrum at the output is the sum of the input power spectra
filtered by the chosen raised cosine function.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Excess_Loss [dB]: the excess loss of the component. Allowed values: min
0.; max -; default 3.
Filter_Bandwidth [GHz]: the 3dB bandwidth of the multiplexing raised

Optical Multiplexer
Mux_Center_Frequency [THz]: the center frequency of the WDM

aggregate to be multiplexed. It is the frequency in the two middle of the two
central. Allowed values min flowSPT; max fupSPT ;default 193.

18.8 WC-XGM Wavelength Converter

This compound component simulates a wavelength converter based on Cross
Gain Modulation (XGM) in a Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (SOA). A CW
signal at the new wavelength and a modulated signal are injected together in
a SOA.
This component is accessible through the compound component icon selecting
in the category Predefined the WC-XGM.opm
The intensity modulation of one signal produces a gain modulation. Co-
injected CW signal acquires the intensity modulation: data transmitted has
been wavelength converted.
SPT Behavior
Due to the non-linear behavior of SOA, simulation as linear component
defined through a transfer function is not reliable. Anyway, SPT simulations
are allowed, after displaying a warning message saying that results may be
unreliable. Refer to SPT behavior of each block to "understand" the results.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Refer to Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (section 9.2) for a detailed
description and parameter range.
CW_linewidth [MHz]: the linewidth of the local CW laser, working at the
new wavelength. Allowed values: min 0.; max -; default 10.
CW_Power [dBm]: the power of the local CW laser, working at the new
wavelength.
Excess_Loss [dB]: the excess loss of the device. Allowed values: min 0.;
max -; default 10.
New_Wavelength [nm]: the new wavelength of the modulated optical
signal at the output of the WC. Allowed values: min c/fupSPT; max c/flowSPT;
default 1550.
SOA_Confinement_factor: the optical field confinement factor of SOA.
Allowed values: default 0.35.
SOA_Ibias [mA]: the bias current of SOA. Allowed values: default 100.
SOA_Input_loss [dB]: the input insertion loss of SOA. Allowed values:
default 3.
SOA_LW_enhancement_factor: the linewidth enhancement factor of SOA.
Allowed values: default 3.

WC-XGM Wavelength Converter
SOA_Length [µ
µm]: the amplifier length of SOA. Allowed values: default
500.
SOA_Material_gain_const [cm2]: the material gain constant of SOA.
Allowed values: default 3*10-16.
SOA_Material_loss [cm-1]: the material loss of the SOA. Allowed values:
default 10.5.
SOA_Output_loss [dB]: the output insertion loss of SOA. Allowed values:
default 3.
SOA_Spont_carrier_lifetime [ns]: the spontaneous carrier lifetime of
SOA. Allowed values: default 0.2.
SOA_Thickness [µ
µm]: the active layer width of SOA. Allowed values:
default 0.15.
SOA_Transp_carrier_density [cm-3]: the transparency carrier density (N0)
of SOA. Allowed values: default 1*10-18.
SOA_Width [µ
µm]: the active layer width of SOA. Allowed values: default
1.5.

18.9 WC-XPM Wavelength Converter

This compound component simulates a wavelength converter based on Cross
Phase Modulation (XPM) in a Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (SOA). The
simulated device has Mach-Zehnder Interferometric structure, with a SOA in
each arm.
This component is accessible through the compound component icon selecting
in the category Predefined the WC-XPM.opm
A CW signal at the new wavelength is injected in the two interferometer
arms. The modulated signal, to be wavelength converted, is coupled in only
one arm: the intensity modulation produces a gain modulation and therefore
a phase modulation of the co-injected CW signal.
Due to this phase change in the interferometer, the CW signal acquires the
intensity modulation: data transmitted has been wavelength converted. The
two SOAs have the same parameters and are driven by the same bias
current.
SPT Behavior
Due to the non-linear behavior of SOAs and interferometric structure,
simulation as linear component defined through a transfer function is not
reliable. Anyway, SPT simulations are allowed, after displaying a warning
message saying that results may be unreliable. Refer to SPT behavior of each
block to "understand" the results.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Refer to Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (section 9.2) for a detailed
description and parameter range.
CW_linewidth [MHz]: the linewidth of the local CW laser, working at the
new wavelength, contained inside the WC. Allowed values: min 0.; max -;
default 10.
CW_Power [dBm]: the power of the local CW laser, working at the new
wavelength, contained inside the WC.
Excess_Loss [dB]: the excess loss of the device. Allowed values: min 0.;
max -; default 10.
New_Wavelength [nm]: the new wavelength of the modulated optical
signal at the output of the WC. Allowed values: min c/fupSPT; max c/flowSPT;
default 1550.

WC-XPM Wavelength Converter
SOA_LW_enhancement_factor: the linewidth enhancement factor of

SOAs. Allowed values: default 5.
SOA_bias [mA]: the bias current of SOAs. Allowed values: default 110.
SOA_confinement_factor: the optical field confinement factor of SOAs.
Allowed values: default 0.2
SOA_input_loss [dB]: the input insertion loss of SOAs. Allowed values:
default 0.
SOA_length [µ
µm]: the amplifier length of SOAs. Allowed values: default
400.
SOA_material_gain_const [cm-2]: the material gain constant of SOAs.
Allowed values: default 3.2*10-16
SOA_material_loss [cm-1]: the material loss of the SOAs. Allowed values:
default 10.
SOA_output_loss [dB]: the output insertion loss of SOAs. Allowed values:
default 0.
SOA_spont_carrier_lifetime [ns]: the spontaneous carrier lifetime of
SOAs. Allowed values: default 0.32
SOA_thickness [µ
µm]: the active layer width of SOAs. Allowed values:
default 0.1
SOA_transp_carrier_density [cm-3]: the transparency carrier density (N0)
of SOAs. Allowed values: default 1*10-18
SOA_width [µ
µm]: the active layer width of SOAs. Allowed values: default 3.

19 Optical Components
Passive
Attenuator, simulates an ideal optical attenuator.
Coupler, simulates an optical coupler.
Splice, implements a connection point for fibers with different parameters

(different type of fiber).
Two Fiber Grating models are available:
an ideal device for dispersion compensation; it has a flat modulus
frequency response and group delay corresponding to a given total
dispersion and dispersion slope
a User-defined device for dispersion compensation, it simulates any kind
of experimentally measured fiber grating
All-Order PMD (AOPMD), simulates the PMD effect taking into account its
frequency dependence.
Non-Linear
Frequency Shifter, shifts the optical signal in the spectral domain.
Phase Conjugator, changes the optical signal phase in its opposite.
Polarization Rotator, changes the State of Polarization (SOP) of an optical

signal specifying the angles of rotation (in the Stokes space).
Polarization Scrambler, changes the State of Polarization (SOP) of the optical
signal following a specified time varying (sinusoidal or square law).
Polarizer, selects a specific polarization of the optical field blocking the
orthogonal one.
Deterministic Differential Group Delay (DDGD).
Ideal dual-arm Mach-Zehnder interferometer, with two optical outputs.

Optical Components
19.1 Optical Attenuator

This component simulates an ideal optical attenuator.
SPT Behavior
The attenuator introduces the requested loss to the input optical spectrum.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Attenuation [dB] or [lin]: the input/output optical attenuation. Note that
the linear scale refers to the amplitude attenuation, not to the power
attenuation. For instance a 3 dB attenuation corresponds to a square root of
2 linear attenuation. Allowed values: min 0 (dB); max - (dB); default 0 (dB).

Optical Coupler
19.2 Optical Coupler

This component simulates an optical coupler. Its schematic representation is
showed below.
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
SPT Behavior
The optical coupler is a linear component therefore its effects on the optical
spectra are fully simulated during SPT simulations. The used model is the
same employed for VBS simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical In1 Optical Out1

Optical In2 Optical Out2
Parameters
Output port ratio [-]: represents the power ratio, on a percentage basis,
between each of the inputs and the corresponding cross output, (Pout2/Pin1 or
Pout1/Pin2). Allowed values: min 0; max 100; default 50.
Complementary output port ratio [-]: the complementary power ratio,
between each of the inputs and the corresponding direct output (Pout1/Pin1 or
Pout2/Pin2).

Optical Components
19.3 Splice
This component has a graphical utility only; it has no functions except
allowing optical lines to be connected in arbitrary shapes, by putting a splice
on each vertex. It is used also in the iterated components (see the OptSim
User Manual) because this is a fictitious optical component with one optical
output, useful to draw a period of optical link.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical

Fiber Grating
19.4 Fiber Grating

This component simulates a fiber grating device used to compensate, over a
fiber span L km long, the accumulated dispersion DL or β2L and its slope
(∂D/∂λ)L or (∂β2/∂ω)L. Two models have been implemented to simulate either
an ideal device or a more realistic dispersion compensator.
SPT Behavior
An ideal fiber grating introduces a certain amount of dispersion, without
influencing the optical power spectrum if the bandwidth of the channels is
neglected, like in SPT simulations. Therefore, in SPT simulations, the ideal
fiber gratings do not influence the optical power spectrum. For the behavior
of the user-defined fiber grating, please refer to the optical filter description
(section 10.1).
Parameters
Type: opens the related dialog windows for the two models, Ideal Fiber
Grating and User-Defined Fiber Grating.
19.4.1 Ideal
This component implements an ideal fiber grating, i.e. a passive device with a
flat modulus frequency response and a group delay corresponding to a given
total dispersion and dispersion slope.
These parameters represent the dispersion value of the fiber at the reference
wavelength (frequency). The dispersion value can be given as a function of
Dtot or β2,tot, so it can be directly related to the standard fiber dispersion
parameter.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
frequency for the following dispersion parameters. Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default f0,VBS.
Total Dispersion to compensate at the Reference
Frequency/Wavelength [ps/nm] or [ps2]: the dispersion value to
compensate. It can be either inserted as Dtot = - DL [ps/nm] or as β2,tot = -
β2L [ps2], where L is the length of the fiber span and D (or β2) is the
dispersion coefficient of the fiber span. If a different degree of compensation
has to be tested, then the following criteria must be followed: L = 1/100
comp% Lactual, where comp% is the percentage of compensation needed, and
Lactual, is the actual length of the span. Allowed values: min -; max -; default
0.
Total Dispersion Slope to compensate at the Reference
Frequency/Wavelength [ps/nm2] or [ps3]: the dispersion derivative to
compensate. It is related to the third order dispersion, i.e. the variation of the
dispersion with respect to the wavelength, ∂D/∂λ coefficient (or with respect
to the angular frequency, ∂β2/∂ω coefficient). Its value can be introduced
using either the derivative of the Dtot coefficient with respect to the
wavelength (∂Dtot/∂λ = -(∂D/∂λ)L [ps/nm2]), or the derivative of β2,tot

Optical Components
coefficient with respect to the angular frequency (∂β2,tot/∂ω = -(∂β2/∂ω)L

[ps3]), where L is the length of the fiber span and ∂D/∂λ (∂β2/∂ω) is the
dispersion slope coefficient of the fiber span. To obtain a partial compensation
(under or over compensation), the same criteria indicated for the dispersion
compensation must be followed. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
19.4.2 User-defined
To simulate any kind of experimentally measured fiber grating, a user-defined
optical filter component should be employed. Therefore, the transfer function
of the component can be defined in terms of amplitude and phase (or group
delay) through the definition in an ASCII file. Please read the section 10.1.5
to obtain detailed information on the parameters setting.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical

All-order PMD
19.5 All-order PMD

Component name: AOPMD
This component simulates the effect of Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)
taking into account its frequency dependence. It reproduces the statistical
PMD behavior of a fiber without any loss, dispersion or non-linearity. The PMD
effect is simulated through the well-known waveplates model [4]. The fiber is
modeled by a set of concatenated equal length (Lp) fiber segments
(waveplates). The Principal State of Polarization (PSP) orientation of each
waveplate is a random variable. Instead, the differential group delay ∆τp,
introduced by each waveplate, is the same for all the waveplates and it is
proportional to the PMD coefficient (δPMD in ps Km ) of the simulated fiber
and to the waveplate length Lp through the following formula [4]:
3π
∆τ p = δ PMD L p
8
Moreover, the waveplates length Lp is related to the fiber beat length LB and
the fiber correlation length LC by the following relation [5]:
Lp
Lc = −
 L 
ln cos π p 
 LB 
The resulting DGD ∆τ at the and of the fiber span is a random variable with a
Maxwellian distribution and the Probability Density Function takes the
following form [6]:
2 ∆τ 2  ∆τ 2 
P (∆τ , z ) = exp − 2  with 0 < ∆τ < +∞
π q3  2q 
π
where q2 = δ PMD
2
L fiber .
8
The average DGD is ∆τ = δ PMD L fiber , and its variance is
 3π 
σ ∆τ =  − 1 ⋅ δ PMD L fiber .
 8 
The DGD value is also reported as output using the popup menu command
View Data on the component icon, and it can be also correlated using the
popup menu command View Chart.
SPT Behavior
simulation technique. This component works on the polarization, thus it can
not be simulated with the SPT simulation technique. SPT simulation does not
work with projects containing this component.
Inputs Outputs

Optical Components
Optical Optical
Parameters
Instance [-]: the instance is an integer number that identifies the block.
This number is used by OptSim to generate a data file that contains the block
output signal. Allowed values: min: 1; max: -; default 1.
This value must be used with care. In particular, if the same model includes
several instances of the AOPMD component, this parameter value has to be
different for each AOPMD block. Moreover, when you make a multiple
(parametric) run you need to use a variable also in this parameter field.
For example in multiple runs on "power" parameter: 0-2-4, you have to
define the following table (that appears choosing the menu command
Simulate > Define Runs):
run1: power=0, instance=1
Where the AOPMD block has the variable "instance" as this parameter value.
Take care when using the following particular configurations:
Project with several AOPMD blocks: in this case the instance value has to
be different for each AOPMD block.
Project with a multiple (parametric) run:
− systems with one AOPMD block and with parametric runs that use one
or more AOPMD parameters as variables. In this case the instance
has to be different for each run so you need to use a variable also in
this parameter field
− systems with one or more AOPMD blocks and with parametric runs
that use one or more AOPMD parameters as variables. In this
configuration the AOPMD blocks involved in the parametric run need
different instance values for each run. So you have to add the
corresponding instance as a variable
− systems with parametric runs that do not involve any AOPMD blocks.
In this case the instance value can maintain the same value
independently to the runs
Inclusion of AOPMD in an iterate block:
− if you need to include in an iterate structure an AOPMD that maintains
always the same behavior, it is sufficient to insert an arbitrary value
for the instance
− if you want to reproduce a more realistic simulation in which the PMD
effect induced by AOPMD is not exactly the same at each span, it is
not possible to use the current iteration structure present in OptSim.
The workaround is to unroll the configuration where each different
AOPMD block has different instance value
Length [Km]: specifies the length of the PMD fiber. Allowed values: min: 0;
max: -; default 0.
PMD_coefficient [ps/km1/2]: the PMD coefficient δPMD that is usually
specified in data sheets to quantify the amount of PMD introduced by the
fiber. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 0.1.
Correlation_length [Km]: the fiber correlation length Lc expressed in
kilometers. It indicates the distance over which the State of Polarization of a

All-order PMD
signal loses memory of the input State of Polarization due to PMD and
birefringence. Allowed values: min: >0; max: -; default 0.2.
Beat_length [m]: the fiber beat length LB expressed in meters. It is defined
as the distance after which the polarization of the propagating optical signal
recovers its initial state. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 5.
Seed [-]: an integer number that defines the seed for the statistical process
used in the PMD model. Allowed values: min: 0; max: -; default 1.
Note
The AOPMD component allows the simulation of the PMD phenomenon and its
repeatability. In fact it is characterized by this own seed parameter that
ensures its reproducibility in different projects.

Optical Components
19.6 Optical Frequency Shifter

This component simulates an ideal frequency shifter, i.e. a components that
shifts the input optical signal in the spectral domain. Since it simulates an
ideal component, no side-effects are considered.
SPT Behavior
During SPT simulations the optical frequency shifter shifts the input spectrum
of the spectral amount specified. Note that a circular shift is made: for large
frequency shift the results may not agree with optical power spectra obtained
in VBS simulations.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Frequency Shift [GHz] or [nm]: the value of the applied spectral shift.
Allowed values: min - BWSPT/2; max + BWSPT/2; default 0.

Optical Phase Conjugator
19.7 Optical Phase Conjugator

This component simulates an ideal phase conjugator, i.e. a device that ideally
generates an optical output signal whose phase is opposite with respect to
the one of the input signal. An efficiency parameter η and a constant phase-
shift φSHIFT are taken into account. The usual frequency-shift introduced by
real phase-conjugator device is not taken into account.
EIN = A(t )e jΦ (t )
Eout (t ) = ηA(t )e − jΦ (t )e jΦ SHIFT
SPT Behavior
The phase conjungator is a non-linear device and therefore cannot be reliably
simulated using the SPT technique. During SPT simulations, this component is
considered taking into account its attenuation only, i.e. the efficiency. No
other spectral modifications are considered.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Efficiency: the efficiency η of the device referred to the signal amplitude.
Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 1.
Phase Shift [rad]: the extra constant phase shift φSHIFT applied to the output
optical signal. Allowed values: min 0; max 2π; default π/2.

Optical Components
19.8 Polarization Rotator

This component simulates a polarization rotator, i.e. a component that
changes the state of polarization (SOP) of the input optical signal. The
parameters to be specified for this component are related to the Stokes
representation of polarization, and correspond to the angles of rotation
around the three axes in the Stokes space. You can set the number and the
order of rotations.
The components can be used only when the dual polarization option is chosen
in the Simulation Parameter dialog window (see the OptSim User Manual).
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Poincare' Sphere Rotation Angle about Axis S1 [degrees]: the rotation
in degrees around the S1 axis. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.
Number of Rotations: the number of actually generated rotations, None,
One, Two or Three.
Rotation Set of graphical buttons that select the rotation order.
Order
First Rotation: sets the first rotation; these buttons are enabled only if the
selected number of rotation is one, two or three.
Second Rotation: sets the second rotation; these buttons are enabled only
if the selected number of rotation is two or three.
Third Rotation: sets the third rotation; these buttons are enabled only if the
selected number of rotation is three.

Polarization Scrambler
19.9 Polarization Scrambler

This component simulates a polarization scrambler, i.e. a component that
changes the state of polarization (SOP) of the input optical signal following a
time-varying sinusoidal or square law at a specified rate.
The model implements a devices that changes the polarization of the input
signal in a way that, in the Stokes parameter representation, corresponds to
a time-varying and periodic rotation around the S3 axis. For information about
the Stokes representation of an optical beam SOP see [1,2,3].
When the input signal is on a linear polarization, the aforementioned rotation
in the Stokes space maps the output signal over linear polarization at
different angles, while if the input is circular, the output remains unchanged.
A detailed introduction and analysis to the principles and theory of
polarization spreading can be found in [1,2,3].
This component may be used in several different applications, like for
example in long-haul high capacity transmission links, where a polarization
scrambler is often placed after the transmitter optical intensity modulator.
Two different scrambling laws are implemented:
Square, a 180 degree rotation following a square law is generated over
the S3 axis. Consequently, if the input polarization is linear, the output
polarization varies between the input polarization and the orthogonal one.
Sinusoidal, a rotation following a sinusoidal law is generated over the S3
axis with an amplitude chosen in such a way that the signal power is
equally spread over any arbitrarily chosen reference pair of orthogonal
polarization vectors (see [2] and [3]). The amplitude of the rotation is
approximately 275 degrees, corresponding to twice the first zero of the
Bessel function J0(x).
The periodic variation follows an internal clock whose frequency and phase
delay can be set.
The components can be used only when the dual polarization option is chosen
in the Simulation Parameters dialog window (see the OptSim User Manual).
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
Electrical Optical
Parameters
Scrambling Law: selects the scrambling law, Square or Sine.
Internal Clock Rate [GHz]: the frequency of the periodic variation. Allowed values: min 0;
Synchronizati max BWSPT/4; default 10.
on
Phase Delay [ns]: the delay of the internal clock. Allowed values: min 0;
max 1/(Rate); default 0.

Optical Components
19.10 Polarizer
This component simulates a polarizer, i.e. a component that allows to select a
specific polarization of the input optical field, blocking the orthogonal one.
You can select the axis of the polarizer, i.e. the polarization that is allowed to
pass through the polarizer, by specifying this polarization in the Stokes space
representation. More specifically, you should specify the two angles 2α and
2φ required to determine this polarization in the Stokes space using a
spherical coordinate system (azimuthal and zenithal angles).
If you are familiar with the elliptical representation of the state of
polarization, we remind that the angle α corresponds to the Angle of Major
Ellipse Axis respect to the x Geometrical Axis and the angle φ corresponds to
the arc tan of the ratio of Minor over Major Ellipse Axis, with a positive sign
for Clockwise Polarization (clockwise polarization is such that the corkscrew-
rule would generate a vector parallel to the direction of propagation).
SPT Behavior
Since SPT simulation is based on the power spectrum of the optical signal,
the information about polarization is not managed with the SPT simulation
technique. Although, this component works on signal polarization, which is
not considered during SPT, the user can take into account the peak and
average power reduction by using the parameters reported in the Spectral
Estimation section.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical

Poincare’ Azimuthal Angle of Polarizer Axis with Respect to Axis S1 (2 alpha)
Sphere [degrees]: the value of the azimuthal angle of polarizer axis over the
Representatio Poincaré sphere. Allowed values: min -360; max +360; default 0.
n
Zenithal Angle of Polarizer Axis with Respect to the Equator (2 psi)
[degrees]: the value of the zenithal angle of polarizer axis over the Poincaré
sphere. Allowed values: min -90; max +90; default 0.
Polarization Let-Through Polarization: Ratio of Minor over Major Ellipse Axis:
Ellipse corresponds to the angle φ. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0.
Representatio
Let-Through Polarization: Angle of Major Ellipse Axis with respect to
n
the Geometrical Axis: corresponds to the angle α . Allowed values: min -
180; max 180; default 0.
Let-Through Polarization: Rotation: the rotation (clockwise, counter-
clockwise) corresponding to the angle values typed in the two field above.

Power ration These parameters allow to better control the peak power and the average
between power estimations of the output signal, which is performed during the
output and spectral-domain simulation (SPT technique and VBS pre-run phase).
input
In the default conditions the polarizer fixes the average and peak powers of
the output considering the case when the input signal pass through the
device and remains unchanged. Using the power ratio between output and
input parameters it is possible taken into account the power reduction due to

Polarizer
the polarizer filtering function.

Peak power [dB] or [lin]: ratio of the peak power values between the
output and input signals. Allowed values: min 0 (dB); max - (dB); default 0
(dB).
Average power [dB] or [lin]: ratio of the average power values between
the output and input signal’s. Allowed values: min 0 (dB); max - (dB);
default 0 (dB).

Optical Components
19.11 Deterministic Differential Group

Delay
Component name: DDGD
This component simulates the effect of a deterministic differential group delay
(DDGD). Specifying the Principal State of Polarization (PSP) it applies a
deterministic delay between the optical signal components with respect to the
PSPs.
The component behavior is represented in the following figure.
POL1
DELAY τ
Input Output
POL2
Figure 19.2 The deterministic differential group delay behavior
The input optical signal is split into two branches and sent to the two
polarizers POL1 and POL2. The two polarizers are complementary: you can
set the POL1 polarization in the Stokes space representation, POL2 is
automatically set to the orthogonal polarization. See the polarizer description
for more details (section 19.10).
More specifically, for the polarizer POL1 you should specify the two angles 2α
and 2φ required to determine this polarization in the Stokes space (on the
Poincarè sphere) using a spherical coordinate system (azimuth and zenith
angles).
After the POL1 polarizer, an optical delayer is inserted, whose delay τ is set
by the rdelay parameter. The signal exiting from POL2 is not delayed. Finally
the two signals are added. As a result the two components experience a
differential delay.
Through the parameter rdelay, you can set the optical relative group delay τ
between the two branches. Notice that the optical delay actually applied in
the simulation is an integer multiple of the simulation time sampling step, so
the delay effectively used τ’ is related with the simulation bandwidth through
the relationship:
 τ ⋅ BWVBS  0.8
τ ' = Nearest _ Integer 
 0.8  BWVBS
where BWVBS is the VBS simulation bandwidth.
SPT Behavior
simulation technique. In SPT simulation this component leaves the input
signal unchanged.

Deterministic Differential Group Delay
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
rdelay [ps]: the value of requested differential group delay τ. Allowed
values: min 0; max: Tsim (Total Simulated Time Span simulation
parameter); default 0.
2alpha [degrees]: the value of the azimuth angle of polarizer POL1 axis
with respect to axis S1 on the Poincaré sphere. Allowed values: min -360;
max +360; default 0.
2psi [degrees]: the value of the zenith angle of polarizer POL1 axis with
respect to the equator on the Poincaré sphere. Allowed values: min -90; max
+90; default 0.

Optical Components
19.12 Ideal Dual-arm Mach-Zehnder

Interferometer
This block implements an ideal dual-arm Mach-Zehnder interferometer with
two optical outputs.
The component block scheme is represented in the following figure.
Coupler opt_out1
opt_in
opt_out2
τ
Figure 19.3 Ideal dual-arm Mach-Zehnder interferometer block scheme
In the interferometer, optical paths differ by a delay τ. The component can be

customized either through the delay τ or the bandwidth BW being:
1
τ=
BW
The interferometer input-outputs transfer functions can be tuned using the
Tuning Frequency parameter.
Note
The actual value of the optical delay used in the time domain simulation must
be an integer multiple of the sampling time, so the delay effectively used τ' is
related with the user required delay τ through the relationship:
 τ ⋅ BWVBS  0.8
τ ′ = Nearest _ Integer  
 0.8  BWVBS
where BWVBS is the VBS simulation bandwidth.
The required delay τ can be automatically forced to be equal to the actual

used value τ' by clicking on the Force Bit Rate button in the Time Domain
section of the Simulation Parameters dialog window. This uses as reference
bit-rate the bandwith BW (equal to 1/ τ) of the Mach-Zehnder.
SPT Behavior
In SPT simulations the input Power Spectrum is multiplied by the following
transfer functions:
1
2
H1 ( f ) = {1 + cos[2π ( f − f tune )τ ]} = cos 2 [π ( f − f tune )τ ]
2
1
H2( f ) =
2
{1 − cos[2π ( f − f tune )τ ]} = sin 2 [π ( f − f tune )τ ]
2
Inputs
Optical

Ideal Dual-arm Mach-Zehnder Interferometer
Outputs
Optical
Parameters
Delay [ps]: the value of the requested delay τ. Allowed values: min
[0.8/VBSBW]; max: [(1/20)·Tsim]; default 25.
Corresponding Simulated Delay [ps]: it shows the actual simulated delay
τ according to the current VBS bandwidth set in the Simulated Parameters
dialog windows.
Bandwidth [GHz]: it sets the bandwidth of the passbands in the two
transfer functions. It represents another way to characterize the value of the
optical delay τ. Due to the intrinsic structure of the interferometer, this value
corresponds also to the frequency spacing between passband peak or notches
in both output port transfer functions (see Figure 19.4). Allowed values: min:
[20·(1/Tsim)]; max: [1.25·VBSBW]; default: 40.
Tuning Frequency [THz] or [nm]: it sets the center frequency of a
passband in |H1(f)|2 , the transfer function of output port 1. At the same time
there will be a notch at this frequency on output port 2. Allowed values: min
flowSPT; max fupSPT; default: f0,SPT.
Example
As an example, we report in the following picture the magnitude square of
the interferometer transfer functions having τ = 25 ps and ftun = 194 THz.
BW
|H1(f)|2 |H2(f)|2
BW
ftun
Figure 19.4 Mach-Zehnder interf. transfer functions, τ = 25 ps, ftun=194 THz

Optical Components
19.13 References
[1] M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of optics, pp. 554-556. Oxford, England:
Pergamon Press, 1975.
[2] P. Poggiolini and S. Benedetto Theory of polarization spreading
techniques - Part I, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 5,
May 1994.
[3] P. Poggiolini and S. Benedetto Theory of polarization spreading
techniques - Part II, IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 42, n. 5,
May 1994.
[4] C.D. Poole et al., "Polarization-Mode Dispersion Measurement Based on
transmission Spectra Through a Polarizer" IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave
Technology, vol. 12, N0. 6, pp. 917–929, June 1994.
[5] F. Corsi et al., "Polarization Mode Dispersion Characterization of Single-
Mode Optical Fiber Using Backscattering Technique," IEEE/OSA Journal of
Lightwave Technology, vol. 16, N0. 10, pp. 1832–1843, October 1998.
[6] F. Curti et al., "Statistical treatment of the evolution of the principal
states of polarization in single-mode fibers," IEEE/OSA Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 8, N0. 8, pp. 1162–1165, August 1990

20 Links
Optical link, implements an ideal optical fiber where no effects on the optical
field are taken into account.
Electrical link, implements an electrical connection with no loss.
Ideal logical link, implements a logical connection.

Links
20.1 Optical Link

This tool draws an ideal optical link. No parameters are required.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
20.2 Electrical Link

This tool draws an ideal electrical link, i.e. a connection with no loss between
two electrical components. No parameters are required.
Inputs Outputs
20.3 Logical Link

This tool draws an ideal logical link. No parameters are required.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Logical

21 Split&Combine
Optical
Combiner, simulates an optical combiner.
Splitter, simulates an optical splitter.
Electrical
Combiner, simulates an electrical combiner.
Splitter, simulates an electrical splitter.
Logical
Splitter, simulates a logical splitter.
Split&Combine
21.1 Optical Combiner

This component simulates an "ideal" optical combiner.
Inputs Outputs
Optical (no limitation of number) Optical

Attenuation on each input [dB] or [lin]: it is the amplitude attenuation.
Allowed values: min 0 (dB); max -; default 0 (dB).
Note
This component implements a balanced combiner with the same attenuation
on each input. If an unbalanced combiner is required, simply precede the
combiner with the proper attenuators on each input.
If the attenuation is set to the default value of 0 dB, the component

implements an ideal combiner without any insertion loss, i.e. a component
that perfectly adds the input signals.

Sum These parameters allow to better control the peak power and the average
Correction power estimations of the output signal, which is performed during the
Factor spectral-domain simulation (SPT technique and VBS pre-run phase).
In the default conditions the combiner computes the average and peak power
of the output considering the worst case, i.e. adding the corresponding
values of the inputs. This pessimistic estimation can be modified using the
correction factor parameters, which are defined as reduction of the values
computed in the worst case.
Peak power [dB] or [lin]: peak power correction factor. Allowed values:
min 0 (dB); max - (dB); default 0 (dB).
Average power [dB] or [lin]: average power correction factor. Allowed
values: min 0 (dB); max - (dB); default 0 (dB).

Optical Splitter
21.2 Optical Splitter

This component simulates an "Ideal" optical splitter.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical (no limitation of number)
Parameters
Attenuation on each output [dB] or [lin]: it is the amplitude attenuation.
Note
This component implements a balanced splitter with the same attenuation on
each output. If an unbalanced splitter is required, simply follow the splitter
with the proper attenuators on each output.
If the attenuation is set to a default value of 0 dB, this component

implements an ideal splitter without any insertion loss, i.e. a component that
perfectly splits the input signals.
21.3 Electrical Combiner

This component simulates an "ideal" electrical combiner.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical (no limitation of number) Electrical
Parameters
Note
This component implements a balanced combiner with the same attenuation
on each input. If an unbalanced combiner is required, simply put an
attenuator before the combiner.

implements an ideal combiner without any insertion loss, i.e. a component
that perfectly adds the input signals.

Split&Combine
21.4 Electrical Splitter

This component simulates an "ideal" electrical splitter.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical Electrical (no limitation of number)
Parameters
Note
This component implements a balanced splitter with the same attenuation on
each output. If an unbalanced splitter is required, simply follow the splitter
with the proper attenuators on each output.

implements an ideal splitter without any insertion loss, i.e. a component that
perfectly splits the input signals.
21.5 Logical Splitter

This component splits a logical signal to several outputs, by simply replicating
it. This component has no parameters.
Inputs Outputs
Logical Logical (no limitation of number)

22 Measurement
Components
Optical
Power Meter, measures the power (mean square value) of an optical signal.
OSA, simulates an optical spectrum analyzer.
Probe, simulates a generic probe for optical signals. It collects data for
diagrams such as power, phase, instantaneous frequency, power spectrum
and Stokes parameters.
Electrical
Power Meter, measures the power (mean square value) of an electrical
signal.
Q Estimator, measures the Q value: a pattern length for system affected by
ISI can be specified. Besides the Q value, the following information are
provided: optimal threshold, eye closure, average eye opening, eye opening,
tolerance to sampling instant variation, jitter measurement for RZ signal,
diagram of Q value versus sampling instant, diagram of eye closure versus
sampling instant.
BER Estimator, measures the Bit Error Rate for a binary modulation starting
from statistical moments of the received signal. Gaussian and χ2 statistical
distribution approximation are available.
Scope, simulates an oscilloscope for electrical signals. It collects data for
diagrams such as amplitude, eye diagram, histogram at the optimum
sampling instant and power spectrum.
ESA, simulates an electrical spectrum analyzer.
Scattering Diagram, shows the scattering diagram for an amplitude and/or

phase digital modulated.
Measurement Components
Scattering Diagram P/Q (SCATD3), shows the scattering diagram of a

demodulated signal: already separated in-phase and quadrature components
are needed at the input.
Logical
Logical Signal Probe, prints the logical signal on a chart.

Optical Power Meter
22.1 Optical Power Meter

This component simulates an optical power meter: it evaluates the power,
defined as the mean square value, of an optical signal. The evaluation can be
performed over the whole time domain simulation bandwidth or in a selected
sub-range of frequencies (Limited Bandwidth Optical Power Meter).
If Whole is chosen as Measure Bandwidth parameter, the output data is
the power, in mW and in dBm, of the input signal over the whole BWVBS
bandwidth (time domain simulation bandwidth). If Limited is chosen as
Measure Bandwidth parameter, the output data is the power, in mW and in
dBm, of the input signal evaluated only over the selected bandwidth. This
sub-range of frequencies can be specified using the two fields Center
frequency and Bandwidth. This feature is particularly useful, for instance,
to measure the power of a single channel in a multiple channel simulations.
SPT Behavior
Measurement components, even if measuring optical signals, are not taken
into account in SPT simulations. The only outputs of SPT simulations are
optical spectra, power and OSNR measurements over each optical link.
Inputs Outputs
Optical -
Parameters
Measure Bandwidth: it selects how the optical power meter will perform the
evaluation. With the Whole option the whole BWVBS will be considered for the
power evaluation. With the Limited option only the bandwidth set with the
following parameters will be considered.
Center frequency [THz] or [nm]: it is the center frequency of the
bandwidth where the power of the input optical signal will be evaluated. This
field is enabled only if the Limited option is selected in Measure
Bandwidth. Allowed values: min: flowVBS; max: fupVBS; default: f0,VBS.
Bandwidth [GHz] or [nm]: it is the bandwidth over which the power
evaluation will be performed. This field is enabled only if the Limited option
is selected in Measure Bandwidth. Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS;
default 50 GHz.

22.2 Optical Spectrum Analyzer

This component simulates an optical spectrum analyzer.
The spectrum is estimated using the method of the modified periodograms,

i.e. sectioning the entire data sequence into a number of parts each
containing NP samples, where NP is computed in order to guarantee the
number of points requested by the Number of Spectrum Points over the
Simulation Bandwidth parameter. The amplitudes squared of the Fourier
transforms of each part are then summed up and averaged.
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
Optical -
Parameters
Number of Spectrum Points over the Simulation Bandwidth: it is the
number of frequency samples to be displayed over the time domain
Simulation Bandwidth. Starting from this parameter, will be evaluated the
number of points to be used in the FFT with the modified periodogram
method. It implies the minimum spectral frequency resolution. Allowed
values: min: 2; max: 500000; default 1000.

Optical Probe
22.3 Optical Probe

This component simulates a probe for optical signals. It collects data that will
be available for the following diagrams:
amplitude or power of the optical signal
phase of the optical signal
instantaneous frequency of the optical signal
Stokes parameters of the optical signal
power spectrum of the optical signal
Please refer to the data post-processing and display operations description in
the OptSim user manual.
SPT Behavior
Inputs Outputs
Optical -
Parameters
will be considered.
Measure Start Time [ns]: it is the starting time of the measurement
window. The available time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated
Time Span (Tsim). Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
Measure End Time [ns]: it is the ending time of the measurement window.
The available time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time
Span (Tsim). It must be greater than Measure Start Time. Allowed values:
min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
one sample out of n is displayed. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Note
Please note that changing the sampling factor, the displayed spectrum may
differ from the actual spectrum of the signal propagated along the link. This is
due to the reduction of the considered bandwidth caused by the subsampling
that may create aliasing effects in the Discrete Fourier Transform computed
by the block.

22.4 Electrical Scope

This component simulates an oscilloscope for electrical signals. It collects
data that will be available for the following diagrams:
amplitude of the electrical signal
eye diagram
histogram at the optimum sampling instant
power spectrum of the electrical signal
Please refer to the data post-processing and display operations description in
the OptSim user manual.
Measurement period can be reduced with respect to the Total Simulated Time
Span simulation parameter Tsim. Measure Start Time and Measure End
Time parameters can be specified to select a sub-window.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Bit Rate Nominal [Gbit/s]: it is the bit-rate of the input signal. Allowed values:
min -; max -; default Rb.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it shows the actual simulated bit-rate with the current
VBS bandwidth set in the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
Samples per bit: it shows the number of sample per bit at the Simulated
bit-rate.
Time Resolution: it specifies the time resolution. With Automatic the
number of visualized points per bit is automatically set to the minimum value
between the Samples per bit value and 64, in order to avoid the generation
of huge output files in simulation involving large bandwidth or large simulated
time window. With Custom the number of visualized points per bit is set in
the following field. This option is useful to reduce the output file dimension,
setting a value less than the Samples per bit value.
Number of visualized points per bit: it is the number of visualized points
per bit. This field is enabled only if the Custom option is selected in the Time
Resolution list. Allowed values: min 1; max Samples per bit;
default Samples per bit.
Note
Please note that changing the number of visualized points per bit, the
displayed electrical spectrum may differ from the actual spectrum of the
simulated signal. This is due to the reduction of the considered bandwidth
caused by the subsampling that may create aliasing effects in the Discrete
Fourier Transform computed by the block.

Electrical Scope

will be considered.
Measure End Time [ns]: it is the ending time of the measurement window.
min 0; max Tsim; default Tsim.

22.5 Electrical Power Meter

This component simulates an electrical power meter: it evaluates the power,
defined as the mean square value, of an electrical signal. The evaluation can
be performed over the whole time domain simulation bandwidth or in a
selected subrange of frequencies (Limited Bandwidth Electrical Power Meter).
If Whole is chosen as Measure Bandwidth parameter, the output data is
the power, in mW and in dBm, of the input signal over the BWVBS bandwidth
(time domain simulation bandwidth). If Limited is chosen as Measure
Bandwidth parameter, the output data is the power, in mW and in dBm, of
the input signal evaluated only over the selected bandwidth. This subrange
of frequencies can be specified using the two fields Center frequency and
Bandwidth.
The outputs are the power in squared amplitude units and in logarithmic unit
[10*log10 (squared amplitude unit)] of the input signal averaged over the
whole Tsim.
The current units of the result depend on the units of the electrical input
signal and are not explicitly taken into account. For example, if the input is a
voltage, the power is expressed in V2 and in dB [V2]. For further information
on signal units and conventions, see the OptSim User Manual.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Measure Bandwidth: it selects how the electrical power meter will perform
the evaluation. With the Whole option the whole BWVBS will be considered for
the power evaluation. With the Limited option only the bandwidth set with
the following parameters will be considered.
Center frequency [GHz]: it is the center frequency of the bandwidth where
the power of the input electrical signal will be evaluated. This field is enabled
only if the Limited option is selected in Measure Bandwidth. Allowed
values: min 0; max BWSIM/2; default BWSIM/4.
Bandwidth [GHz]: it is the bandwidth over which the power evaluation will
be performed. This field is enabled only if the Limited option is selected in
Measure Bandwidth. Allowed values: min 0; max BWSIM/2; default BWSIM/2.

Q Estimator
22.6 Q Estimator
This component estimates the Q factor of the received signal. Following its
standard definition, the Q factor is calculated using mean and standard
deviation of the signal samples taken at the optimum sampling instant and
considering the optimum decision threshold, i.e., using the following
expression:
m1 − m0
Q= (1)
σ1 + σ 0
where m1, m0, σ1, σ0 are the mean and standard deviation of the signal
samples when a "1" or a "0" is received. We remind that under the Gaussian
approximation, the bit error probability (BER) is given by:
1  Q 
P(e ) = erfc  (2)
2  2
Moreover, we remind here that the Q factor is meaningless for any kind of
multilevel digital modulation or for an analog modulation. It only makes sense
for binary digital modulation.
The Q factor standard definition does not consider any pattern dependence,
i.e. any effect related to the intersymbol interference (ISI). Consequently,
this component introduces an alternative evaluation of the Q factor that takes
into account the pattern dependence. If it can be assumed that the decision
variable relative to a given bit interval depends only on the interval itself and
on the previous n and the next n bits, the error probability can be estimated
as:
 1 22 n +1  m − Vth 
P(e ) = min Vth  2 n+1 ∑ erfc i 
 (3)
 2 i =1  2σ i 
where the error probability is averaged on the 22n+1 possible patterns of 2n+1
bits, then optimized in term of the decision threshold Vth.
Finally the global Q factor is estimated by inverting the formula (2). The
resulting Q factor corresponds to the traditional one when n=0, i.e. if no
pattern dependence is considered.
The pattern length should be specified by the Npattern parameter, which
assumes the value Npattern=2n+1. Thus, it must be an odd number. If the
total number of transmitted bits is too small to ensure a reasonable accuracy,
the pattern length is automatically changed to Npattern=1 and a warning is
issued. Reasonable values for the Npattern parameter are 1, 3 and 5.
Moreover the bit-time in OptSim, i.e. the time-duration of the bit, must be an
integer number of time-samples NS (Samples per bit value). The sample-
period depends on the VBS bandwidth, therefore introducing separately the
VBS bandwidth and the reference bit-rate, in general, the requested bit-rate

Note
To obtain significant results, at least 100 bits for each of the considered
patterns should be simulated. Consequently, when simulating less that
approximately 200 bit, it is advisable to set Pattern Length=1. In general, if
Pattern Length=L, the number of simulated bits should be at least 2*M*L,
where M should be in the range [50-100] or greater. If these conditions are
not met, the Q-factor estimation may be inaccurate due to Monte-Carlo
fluctuation of the results. See the white paper dedicated to this issue in the
OptSim User Manual or [1] for further details.
Span simulation parameter Tsim. Measure Start Time and Measure End
Time parameters can be specified to select a sub-window.
Numerical The numerical results displayed by this component are:
Results
Optimal threshold: the decision threshold that maximize the Q value,
at the optimum sampling instant
Q value: it is the evaluated Q value, obtained using the optimum
decision threshold at the optimum sampling time, displayed on a linear
scale
Q value [dB]: it is the evaluated Q value, obtained using the optimum
decision threshold at the optimum sampling time, displayed on a
logarithmic scale (20*log(Qlin))
Note
The maximum value evaluated is 40 dB. When greater values are obtained
they are truncated to 40 dB and a warning message is given.
Eye opening: considering only samples at the optimum sampling instant,

it is the difference between the minimum value of the samples decided as
logical “1” and the maximum value of the samples decided as logical “0”.
The unit of this measurement is equal to the unit of the electrical input
signal.
Average eye opening: considering only samples at the optimum
sampling instant, it is the difference between the average value of the
samples decided as logical “1” and the average value of samples decided
as logical “0”. The unit of this measurement is equal to the unit of the
electrical input signal.
Eye closure [dB]: defined as
10*log[(Average eye opening)/(Eye opening)]
The following measurements can be enabled or disabled in the Additional
Outputs section:
Jitter value [ps]: it is an estimate of the input signal jitter when it has
an RZ format. This output data does not mean anything when dealing
with NRZ signal. The jitter value is evaluated as the standard deviation of
the position of the maximum of the received signal referred to the bit
frame.
In formula, let suppose that the bit duration is T and that bits are
synchronized to the following time frame:
t j = t 0 + jT .
For each bit, the maximum is found at the instant tjmax, being
max
t 0 + jT < t j < t 0 + ( j + 1)T .

Q Estimator
Then the Jitter is estimated as the standard deviation of the random

variable:
∆t j = t j − t max
j .
∆t0 T ∆t2 ∆t3
t
t0+T t1+T t2+T t3+T t4+T
max max max
t0 t2 t3
Consequently, this definition is suitable for RZ signal with a clearly

defined maximum, as for soliton or Gaussian pulses, while it is not
significant for NRZ modulation.
Tolerance to Sampling Instant variation [ps]: it is the tolerance to
sampling instant variation that gives a maximum Q-factor degradation.
For example, if the maximum Q-factor degradation is set to 1 dB, and the
Q-factor at the optimum sampling instant is 17 dB, the tolerance is equal
to the sampling instant window where the Q is greater that 16 dB. This
output gives an important estimate of the aperture of the eye for both
NRZ and RZ signaling.

Graphical The following graphical results can be enabled or disabled in the Additional
Results Outputs section:
Q-factor vs. sampling instant: it shows a plot reporting the Q factor in
dB vs. the sampling instant inside the bit duration. This measurement is
very useful to study the tolerance to variation of the sampling instant
with respect to the optimum sampling instant and on the horizontal
opening of the received eye diagram.
Eye closure vs. sampling instant: it is about the same as the previous
plot, except that the eye closure parameter is reported on the y axis.
Use of the The Q-estimator component implemented in OptSim is based on an algorithm
component that automatically looks for the optimum sampling instant and the optimum
decision threshold. As you can see from the list of the input parameters, it
does not require any knowledge about the digital data stream that is in input
to the block or, in other words, it does not require any form of
synchronization with the transmitter. The result is a flexible and easy to use
component.
The automatic algorithm performing these features works properly in nearly
all cases of interest, except the following:
when the received eye is totally closed or exceedingly distorted
when the transmitted data stream has a strongly unbalance between the
number of logical “1” and “0”
Whenever these two conditions are not met, warning or error messages are
issued. In general, in these cases, you must be aware that the numerical
results could be unreliable.
Warning and This component generates several kind of warning or error messages
Errors signaling anomalous situations. Here is a brief summary of them.
The Q factor is very large. The received eye diagram is extremely open
and the resulting Q-factor is truncated to a conventional maximum value
of 40 dB.
The Q factor is very low. The received eye diagram is nearly closed or
strongly distorted, so that numerical results may be unreliable.
The number of occurrences of one of the received pattern is low. This
situation can be generated by two different situations:
− the eye diagram is strongly distorted and the automatic algorithm
that optimize the sampling instant and the decision threshold cannot
find a proper value (see the following section)
− the transmitted data stream shows an unbalance between the
number of “1” and “0”. In this case, we advice to choose a proper
pseudo-random sequence degree in the Datasource component
and/or increase the number of simulated bits
The different patterns have a strongly unbalanced number of occurrences.
Similar to the previous error.
The number of occurrences of a given pattern is null. In this case, it is
impossible to evaluate the mean and variance related to that pattern.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -

BER Estimator

min >0.; max -; default Rb.
bit-rate.
Resolved Bit Pattern Length [-]: the length Npattern of the sequence of bit
used to estimate mean and standard deviation of the received bit when
taking into account pattern dependence. It can only be an odd number.
Allowed values: min 1; max 5; default 1.
will be considered.
Measure End Time [ns]: the stop time of the measurement window. The
available time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span
(Tsim). It must be greater than Measure Start Time. Allowed values: min 0;
max Tsim; default Tsim.
Parameters of Additional Outputs Section

Q vs. Sampling Instant [-]: it enables or disables the graphical plot
reporting the Q value in dB versus the Sampling Instant.
Eye Closure vs. Sampling Instant [-]: it enables or disables the graphical
plot reporting the Eye Closure versus the Sampling Instant.
Jitter Measurement for RZ Signal [-]: it enables or disables the evaluation
of the Jitter Measurement for RZ Signal. When used with NRZ signal the
output data is meaningless.
Tolerance to Sampling Instant Variation [-]: it enables or disables the
evaluation of the tolerance to sampling instant variation with the chosen Q-
Factor Degradation Tolerance.
Q-Factor Degradation Tolerance [dB]: it is used to evaluate the
Tolerance to Sampling Instant Variation. Allowed values: min. >0.; max.
- ; default: 1 dB.
22.7 BER Estimator

This component estimates the Bit Error Rate (BER) of an electrical signal, for
a binary modulation (like the standard On-Off intensity modulation). The
estimation starts from the statistical moments of the variable itself, evaluated
at the optimum sampling instants. This BER estimation does not work for
multilevel modulation, such as PSK, QAM, etc.
The evaluation of the BER in optical system simulation is in general a
nontrivial task. Error counting is usually impractical, since target BER values
are typically of the order of 10-9 or less.

The solution implemented by this measurement component is based on the

following principle:
the first two moments of the received signals are estimated at the
optimum sampling instant
the evaluated moments are used to fit the parameters of a given
probability density function (pdf) fψ(x), chosen among Gaussian or χ2
the resulting pdf are used to estimate the error probability by integrating
the following expression:
1  +∞ 
Vth
1
P(e ) = [P(e 0 ) + P(e 1)] =  ∫ fψ (x 0)dx + ∫ fψ (x 1)dx 
2 2  Vth −∞ 
where fψ(x|0), fψ(x|1) are the pdf of the decision signal when a “0” or “1”
are received, respectively. Vth is the decision threshold, which is
automatically optimized to minimize the BER.
Please refer to section 22.7.1 for further information on BER estimation
technical details.
When a χ2 distribution is chosen, you should also give the distribution degree
of freedom. In the assumption that the prevailing noise comes from the
optical components (typically ASE in EDFA) and that standard Direct
Detection is used, the degree of freedom Nχ should be set approximately to:
2NpolBopt/Bel. Bopt is the bandwidth of the optical filter, Bel is the bandwidth of
the receiver postdetection electrical filter and Npol=2 if the simulation is based
on a two polarization model, while Npol=1 for single polarization.
This component can also take into account pattern dependence. In this case,
it is assumed that the decision variable relative to a given bit interval
depends only on the interval itself and the previous n and the next n bits. The
moments are then evaluated over the 22n+1 possible patterns and then again
fitted to the chosen pdf. Finally, BER is evaluated using an extension of the
previous equation. Evaluating BER taking into account pattern dependence is
fundamental when the received eye-diagram is significantly distorted due to
fiber dispersion, non-linearities or improper receiver filters. In these cases,
neglecting pattern dependence usually gives strongly overestimated BER.
The component requires the Resolved Bit Pattern Length, which is defined
as (2n+1) and should thus be an odd-number. If the total number of
transmitted bits is too small, the pattern length is automatically fixed to 1.
Moreover the bit-time in OptSim, i.e. the time-duration of the bit, must be an
integer number of time-samples NS (Samples per bit value). The sample-
period depends on the VBS bandwidth, therefore introducing separately the
VBS bandwidth and the reference bit-rate, in general, the requested bit-rate

BER Estimator
Note
To obtain significant results, at least 100 bits for each of the considered
patterns should be simulated. Consequently, when simulating less that
approximately 200 bit, it is advisable to set Pattern Length=1. In general, if
Pattern Length=L , the number of simulated bits should be at least 2*M*L,
where M should be in the range [50-100] or greater. If these conditions are
not met, the Q-factor estimation may be inaccurate due to Monte-Carlo
fluctuation of the result. See the white paper dedicated to this issue in the
OptSim User Manual, or [1] for further details.
The fitting of the evaluated moments to a χ2 distribution sometimes requires

to reduce the selected degree of freedom to smaller values (see section
22.7.1 for more information on this topic). In these cases, a warning is issued
in the output window, and the degree of freedom is automatically reduced to
its maximum allowable value.
The fitting of the evaluated moments to a χ2 distribution is sometimes

impossible (see section 22.7.1 for more information on this topic). In these
cases, a warning is issued in the output window, and the BER is evaluated
using the Gaussian approximation.
Span simulation parameter Tsim. By the Measure Start Time and Measure
End Time parameters a sub-window may be selected.
Numerical The numerical results displayed by this component are:
Results
BER at optimal decision threshold: estimated BER at optimal
threshold
Equivalent Q at optimal decision threshold: Q related to estimated
BER at optimal threshold, obtained inverting the formula:
1  Q 
BER = erfc 
2  2
BER at mean decision threshold: estimated BER at mean threshold,
defined as the mean value of signal time samples.
Equivalent Q at mean decision threshold: Q related to estimated BER
at optimal threshold, obtained inverting previous the formula
Note
The minimum value estimated is 10-40. When smaller values are obtained
they are truncated to 10-40 and a warning message is given.
The following measurements can be enabled or disabled in the Additional

Outputs section:
BER Evaluation at Relative Decision Threshold: BER evaluation at
the chosen relative threshold. This decision threshold is expressed as
percentage of the difference between maximum and minimum value of
the input signal. The actual decision threshold used for BER estimation
will be:
Thr = RelThr * ( Max − Min) + Min

where RelThr is the Relative Decision Threshold, Min and Max represent
minimum and maximum values of the received signal.
BER Evaluation at Fixed Decision Threshold: BER evaluation at the
chosen fixed threshold

Graphical The following graphical results can be enabled or disabled in the Additional
Results Outputs section:
BER vs. sampling instant: it shoes a plot reporting the BER versus the
sampling instant inside the bit duration
BER vs. decision threshold: a plot reporting the BER versus the
decision threshold
Warning and The warning and errors generated by this component are similar to those
Errors generated by the Q-estimator component. Please see the Q-estimator
Warning and Errors section for further details (section 22.6).
Specific warnings are also given in relation to the use of the χ2
approximation, whenever it is not possible to fit the estimated moments of
the received signals with the moment of a χ2 distribution.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters of the Basic Attributes Section

min >0.; max -; default Rb.
bit-rate.
Resolved Bit Pattern Length: it is the length of the sequence of bits used
to estimate mean and standard deviation of the received bit; it must be an
odd number, 2n+1, where n is the number of bits which are taken into
account before and after the current bit. Allowed values: min 1; max 5;
default 1.
Statistical Model: it selects the approximating statistical model between
Gaussian or χ2 pdf.
Degree of freedom [-]: it is the degree of freedom for the χ2 pdf (see
section 22.7.1 for more information). This field is disabled if the Gaussian
statistical model has been chosen. Allowed values: min 2; max 200; default
10.
will be considered.
Measure Start Time [ps]: it is the starting time of the measurement
Measure End Time [ps]: it is the ending time of the measurement window.
Parameters of Additional Outputs Section

BER vs. Sampling Instant [-]: it enables or disables the graphical plot
reporting the BER versus the Sampling Instant.

BER Estimator
BER vs. Decision Threshold [-]: it enables or disables the graphical plot
reporting the BER versus the Decision Threshold.
BER Evaluation at Relative Decision Threshold [-]: it enables or disables
the evaluation of the BER at the relative decision threshold set in Relative
Threshold Value.
Relative Threshold Value [-]: it sets the threshold as percentage of input
signal maximum excursion (i.e. the range between the absolute minimum
and maximum of the received signal) and it is used to evaluate the BER at
the Relative Decision Threshold. The actual decision threshold used for BER
estimation will be:
Thr = RelThr * ( Max − Min) + Min

where RelThr is the Relative Decision Threshold, Min and Max represent
minimum and maximum values of the received signal. Allowed values: min
>0; max <1.; default: 0.5.
BER Evaluation at Fixed Decision Threshold [-]: it enables or disables
the evaluation of the BER at the Fixed Decision Threshold.
Fixed Threshold Value [-]: it is the decision threshold value used to
evaluate the BER in the Fixed Decision Threshold condition.
22.7.1 BER evaluation technical details

The BER evaluation performed by this component is based on the fitting of a
given distribution parameters starting from the first two moments of the
received signal. The basic idea underlying this method is the fact that you
should already know which kind of probability density function is likely to fit
the received signal statistic.
As a rule of thumb, in a standard optical system based on binary On-Off
modulation and direct detection (IM-DD), the received signal pdf tends to:
a Gaussian distribution when the noise mainly comes from the electrical
part of the receiver, after the photodetection process
a χ2 distribution when the noise mainly comes from the optical part of the
system, typically from the ASE noise of optical amplifiers; anyway, the
Gaussian approximation is very often used in this case, too
Good references on these topics can be found in [2] where a detailed review
of BER evaluation in optical systems is given; [3] where a detailed theory on
χ2 is given; [4] a fundamental paper presenting the theory of BER estimation
in optical systems limited by ASE noise.
Gaussian Approximation
If you choose the Gaussian approximation, the BER is evaluated, starting
from the received signal averages m1, m0 and standard deviation σ1, σ0 as:
1  m1 − Vth   V − m0 
P(e ) = erfc  + erfc th
  2σ 

4   2σ 1   0  
The threshold level Vth is then optimized so to give the minimum P(e).

χ2 Approximation
We remind here that in general a χ2 non-central random variable is the sum
of Nχ Gaussian variables having the same variance and generic average, i.e.
can be put in the form:
Nχ
χ = ∑ψ i2
i =1
where ψi are Gaussian random variables with a given variance σι2 and
average mi. The parameter Nχ is called the χ2 "degree of freedom", while the
parameter:
Nχ
s 2 = ∑ mi
i =1
is defined as the "non-centrality parameter".

This distribution is important in quadratic detection theory, and is thus used
when analyzing for standard direct detection optical systems, as clearly
outlined in the paper [4].
The pdf of a received signal, after optical amplification and quadratic
detection, is a χ2 distribution when the following assumptions are met:
negligible signal distortion
"integrate and dump" optical and electrical filter
prevailing ASE noise and negligible receiver electrical noise
Under these assumptions, the degree of freedom is:
2 N pol Bopt
Nχ =
Bel
where Bopt is the bandwidth of the optical filter, Bel is the bandwidth of the
receiver postdetection filter and Npol=1 or 2 depending on whether single or
dual polarization is considered.
Even if these assumptions are rarely met in practice, nevertheless the model
can be used in general, provided that the prevailing noise comes from EDFA
ASE.
If you choose the χ2 approximation, the distribution parameters are evaluated
starting from the received signal averages m1, m0, variances σ1, σ0 and the
specified χ2 degree of freedom Nχ, by solving a set of nonlinear equation.
Afterwards, the χ2 pdf are integrated according to:
1  +∞ 
Vth
P(e ) =  ∫ fψ (x 0)dx + ∫ fψ (x 1)dx  .

2  Vth −∞ 
The threshold level Vth is then optimized so to give the minimum P(e).

Electrical Spectrum Analyzer
22.8 Electrical Spectrum Analyzer

This component simulates an electrical spectrum analyzer.
The spectrum is estimated using the method of modified periodograms, i.e.

sectioning the entire data sequence into a number of parts each containing NP
samples, where NP is computed in order to obtain the number of points
requested by the Number of Spectrum Points over the displayed
Bandwidth parameter. The amplitudes squared of the Fourier transforms of
each part are then summed up and averaged.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Displayed Start [GHz]: it is the lower frequency of the displayed section of spectrum.
Frequency Allowed values: min 0; max: BWVBS/2; default: 0.
Range
Stop [GHz]: it is the upper frequency of the displayed section of spectrum.
Allowed values: min: 0; max BWVBS/2; default: BWVBS/2.
Number of Spectrum Points over the displayed Bandwidth: the number
of frequency samples to be displayed over the chosen bandwidth. Starting
from this parameter, will be evaluated the number of points to be used in the
FFT with the modified periodogram method. Allowed values: min: 2; max:
500000; default: 500.

22.9 Scattering Diagram Generation

It generates the scattering diagram of an amplitude and/or phase modulated
digital signal.
Measurement period can be reduced respect the Total Simulated Time
Span simulation parameter Tsim. By the Measure Start Time and Measure
End Time parameters a sub-window may be selected.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Bit Rate Baud_rate [Gbaud/s]: it is the baud-rate of the input signal.
Simulated [Gbit/s]: it shows the actual simulated baud-rate with the
Samples per bit: it shows the number of sample per symbol at the
Simulated baud-rate.
will be considered.
Subcarrier Frequency [GHz]: it is the signal subcarrier frequency. Allowed
values: min 0; max BWSIM/2; default BWSIM/2.

Scattering Diagram Generation (2 inputs)
22.10 Scattering Diagram Generation (2

inputs)
Component name: SCATD3
Category: Measurement Components
This component generates a scattering diagram of a demodulated signal:
already separated in-phase and quadrature components are needed at the
input.
It generates the scattering diagram starting from the input in-phase and
quadrature signals. Two diagrams may be displayed: one containing the input
signal points on the X-Y plane; the other containing only the samples at the
sampling time.
Measurement period can be reduced respect the Total Simulated Time Span”
simulation parameters Tsim. By the TSTART and TSTOP parameters a sub-
window may be selected.
Inputs Outputs
E_fase: input baseband signal (in- -

phase component)
E_quad: input baseband signal
(quadrature component)
Parameters
TSTART [ps]: it is the starting time of the measurement window. The
available time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span
(Tsim). Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim; default 0.
TSTOP [ps]: it is the ending time of the measurement window. The available
time window is given by the chosen Total Simulated Time Span (Tsim). It
must be greater than Measure Start Time. Allowed values: min 0; max Tsim;
default Tsim.
Baud_rate [Tb/s]: it is the baud-rate of the input signal.
Delay_sync [ps]: it selects the sampling instant.
KOPT: it defines the plot option:
1: the continuous scattering diagram is plotted
2: the sampled scattering diagram is plotted
Frequency [THz]: the subcarrier signal central frequency. Allowed values:

min 0; max BWSIM/2; default BWSIM/2.
22.11 Logical Signals Displayer

This component plots the logical signal on a chart. Also multilevel digital
signals can be plotted.
Measurement period can be reduced respect the Total Simulated Time Span”
simulation parameter Tsim. By the Measure Start Time and Measure End
Time parameters a sub-window may be selected.
Inputs Outputs

Logical -
Parameters
will be considered.
Logical Level: it is the number of bit per symbol of the input signal. Allowed
22.12 References
[1] M. C. Jeruchim, Techniques for Estimating the Bit Error Rate in the
Simulation of Digital Communication Systems, IEEE Journal of Selected
Areas in Communications, Vol. SAC-2, no.1, January 1984.
[2] W.Willner, S.Benedetto and L.G. Kazovsky, Optical Communication
Systems.
[3] J.G.Proakis, Digital Communications, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1983 (a
detailed theory on χ2 is given in this book).
[4] A.Humblet and M. Azizoglu “On the bit error rate of lightwave systems
with optical amplifiers”, Journal Lightwave Technol., vol. 9, no. 11, pp.
1576-1582, Nov. 1991.

Electrical Components
23 Electrical
Components
Mathematical
Multiplier of electrical signals.
Subtractor (SUB), simulates an electrical signals subtractor.
Constant Multiplier (CMULT), evaluates the product of an electrical signal by a

constant real value.
Cosine (COSX), evaluates the cosine of an electrical signal.
Sine (SINX), evaluates the sine of an electrical signal.
Tangent (TANX), evaluates the tangent of an electrical signal.
Derivative Evaluator (DER), evaluates the time derivative of an electrical

signal.
Exponential (EXPEX), evaluates the exponential of an electrical signal.
Input Signal To The Power of An Integer (EXPXI), evaluates the integer

power of an electrical signal.

Input Signal To The Power of 2 (ELTQUA), evaluates the square of an

electrical signal.
Input Signal To The Power of A Real (EXPXR), evaluates the real power of an
electrical signal.
An Input Signal to The Power of The Other (EXPXY).
Base-10 Logarithm (LOGDX), evaluates the base-10 logarithm of an electrical

signal.
Base-E Logarithm (LOGNX), evaluates the natural logarithm of an electrical
signal.
Advanced
Delay (DELAY), simulates an electrical delay.
Phase Shifter (PHASH2), simulates a phase shifter of the electrical signal.
Frequency Converter (CONV2).
Rectifier (RECTIF), simulates an electrical rectifier (half and full-wave).
Interpolator (INTERP), simulates a timing interpolator with linear, quadratic

or cubic law.
Hilbert Tranformer (HILBER), simulates an Hilbert transform evaluator of an
electrical signal.
Monostable Multivibrator (MONOST), simulates a multivibrator triggered by a
timing pulse input signal.
Monostable Multivibrator (MONOSZ), simulates a multivibrator triggered by
the zero crossing of the input signal.
Sampler (SAMPLE), samples the electrical signal at time instants specified by
a control clock signal.
Sampler&Holder (SHOLD), samples the electrical signal at time instants
specified by a control clock signal and hold the value till the next sampling
instant.
Frequency Divider (NTHDI2), simulates an ideal analog frequency division
device.
Frequency N-th Power (NTHPO2), simulates an ideal analog N-th power
device.
Electrical Jitter (EJITTERS).

Electrical (ELESAT) Saturation Block simulates nonlinear behavior due to

saturation
Clock Recovery
This category contains several components implementing carrier and clock
recovery subsystems, together with some basic building components such as
Phase Locked Loops (PLL).
Early-Late-Gate symbol synchronizer (ELGSY1).
Early-Late-Gate symbol synchronizer (2 dimensions) (ELGSY2).
In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (1 dimension) (IMPSY1).
In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (2 dimensions) (IMPSY2).
N-th order power loop for carrier synchronization (NPLOO2).
N-th order Costas Loop: carrier recovery in N-PSK (COSTA2).
N-phase Decision Feedback Loop: Carrier rec. in N-PSK (DECFE2).
Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (1 dimension) (OPTSY1).
Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (2 dimensions) (OPTSY2).
First Order Base-band Phase-Locked loop (PLL1BB).
Second Order Base-band Phase-Locked loop (PLL2BB).
Base-band Phase locked loop (PLLBB).
Derivative-product Clock Recovery subsystem (SYNCD2).
Base-band rectifier Clock Recovery subsystem (SYNCR1).
I-F rectifier Clock Recovery subsystem (SYNCR2).
Zero-crossing Clock Recovery subsystem (SYNCZ1).
A/D D/A Converter

A/D converter (RADC), simulates an A/D converter for an electrical signal.
The logical output signal is in absolute value plus sign representation.

A/D converter (RADC2), simulates an A/D converter for an electrical signal.

The logical output signal is in two’s complement representation.
D/A converter (RDAC), simulates a D/A converter for a logical signal. The
logical input signal is assumed to be in absolute value plus sign
representation.
D/A converter (RDAC2), simulates a D/A converter for a logical signal. The
logical input signal is assumed to be in two’s complement representation.
Co-Decoder
PCM decoder (RPCMDE), simulates a PCM decoder of the logical signal. The
logical input signal is in absolute value plus sign representation.
PCM encoder (RPCMEN), simulates a PCM encoder of an electrical signal. The
logical output signal is in absolute value plus sign representation.

Electrical Multiplier
23.1 Electrical Multiplier

Component name: MULTBB
This component multiplies two electrical signals.
Inputs Outputs
Ein1: first electrical input signal Eout: resulting electrical output

signal
Ein2: second electrical input signal
23.2 Electrical Subtractor

Component name: SUB
Subtractor of two signals: Eout1 = Ein1-Ein2
Inputs Outputs
Ein1: first electrical input signal Eout1: resulting electrical output

signal
Ein2: second electrical input signal
23.3 Electrical Constant Multiplier

Component name: CMULT
This component multiplies the input signal by the real value A.
Inputs Outputs
Ein: electrical input signal Eout: resulting electrical output

signal
Parameters
A: multiplier value, it's a real number.

23.4 Electrical Cosine

Component name: COSX
This component evaluates the cosine of the input electrical signal.
Inputs Outputs

signal
23.5 Electrical Sine

Component name: SINX
This component evaluates the sine of the input electrical signal.
Inputs Outputs

signal
23.6 Electrical Tangent

Component name: TANX
This component evaluates the tangent of the input electrical signal and puts
the result in the output electrical signal.
Inputs Outputs

signal

Electrical Time derivative
23.7 Electrical Time derivative

Component name: DER
This component takes the time derivative of an electrical signal; if required
(by means of the flag KFLAG set to 1). The output signal is equal to the time
derivative of the input, multiplied by the sign of the input.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
KFLAG: operational flag.
0 = the output is the time derivative of the input
1 = the output is the time derivative of the input multiplied by the sign of
the input.
23.8 Electrical Exponential

Component name: EXPEX
The output signal generated by this component is equal eEin
Inputs Outputs

signal

23.9 Electrical Integer Power

Component name: EXPXI
The output signal generated by this component is equal EinN with the
constraint the parameter N must be an integer.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
N: power to which the input signal is raised (integer).
23.10 Electrical Signal Square

Component name: ELTQUA
This component computes the square of the input signal.
Inputs Outputs
X: electrical input signal Y: resulting electrical output signal
23.11 Electrical Real Power

Component name: EXPXR
The output signal generated by this component is equal to EinA with the
constraint: the input signal must be positive.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
A: power to which the input signal is raised.

Electrical EinB Power of EinA
23.12 Electrical EinB Power of EinA

Component name: EXPXY
EinB power of the signal EinA The output signal generated by this component
is equal to EinAEinB with the constraints the input signals must be positive.
Inputs Outputs
EinA: base (electrical signal) Eout: resulting electrical output

signal
EinB: exponent (electrical signal)
23.13 Electrical Base-10 Logarithm

Component name: LOGDX
The output signal produced by this component is the base-10 logarithm of the
input signal. Both the input and the output signals are electrical ones.
Moreover the input signal must be positive. The output signal is forced to the
value -30 when the input signal is smaller than 10-30.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Note
The input signal must be positive.
If 0 < Ein <= 10-30 then Eout = -30

23.14 Electrical Natural Logarithm

Component name: LOGNX
The output signal produced by this component is the natural logarithm of the
input signal. Both the input and the output signals are electrical ones.
Moreover the input signal must be positive. The output signal is forced to the
value -50 when the input signal is smaller than 2·10-22.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Note
The input signal must be positive
If 0 < Ein <= 2·10-22 then Eout = -50
23.15 Electrical Delay Line

Component name: DELAY
This component simulates an electrical delay line.
Inputs Outputs
input: electrical input signal output: delayed electrical output

signal
Parameters
T_delay [ps]: delay. Allowed values: min 0 ps; max -; default -.

Phase Shifter
23.16 Phase Shifter

Component name: PHASH2
This component shifts the phase of the electrical input signal
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
Fcentr [THz]; signal central frequency. See section 1.4 for further
information.
Theta [rad]: required phase shift.
23.17 Frequency Converter

Component name: CONV2
This component simulates a frequency converter inside the simulation
bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
Fold [THz]: center frequency (section 1.4) of the input signal.
Fnew [THz]: center frequency (section 1.4) of the output signal. Allowed
values: min 0 THz; max 0.4*Simulation Bandwidth; default -.

23.18 Electrical Rectifier

Component name: RECTIF
This component simulates an electrical rectifier. Both half- and full-wave
rectifiers can be simulated, the choice depending on the input parameter
NTYPE. NTYPE=2 Full-Wave positive output rectifier; NTYPE=1 Half-Wave
positive output rectifier; NTYPE=-2 Full-Wave negative output rectifier;
NTYPE=-1 Half-Wave Negative Output Rectifier
Inputs Outputs
X: electrical input signal Y: resulting electrical output signal
Parameters
NTYPE: chooses the type of the rectifier. Allowed values: min -2; max +2;
default -; zero is excluded.
23.19 Timing Interpolator

Component name: INTERP
Timing interpolator with linear, quadratic or cubic law.
NTYP = 1 linear interpolation, NTYP = 2 quadratic interpolation (parabolic),
NTYP = 3 interpolation with spline function (3rd order)
Inputs Outputs
Eclk: input Electric clock (section Eout: interpolated electrical output

1.6) signal
Ein: electrical input signal to be
interpolated
Parameters
NTYP: order of the interpolation.

Hilbert Transformer
23.20 Hilbert Transformer

Component name: HILBER
This component evaluates the Hilbert transform of an electrical signal with a
narrowband spectrum using a FIR filter with 2*N+1 taps. In order to obtain
a good behavior of the Hilbert transformer, the minimum frequency contained
in the input signal must be larger or equal to f_min= (1.25*BW)/2*N,
where BW is the simulation bandwidth. The Hilbert transformer is
approximated by sampling and truncating the ideal Hilbert impulse response.
The Hamming window is used as truncation window. The algorithm
introduces a delay equal to N samples.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
N: introduced delay (the filter length is 2*N+1). Allowed values: min 2; max
-; default -.
23.21 Monostable Multivibrator Triggered

by the Electrical Clock
Component name: MONOST
It simulates a Monostable Multivibrator triggered by the timing input signal
Ein. A rectangular pulse of amplitude AMP and duration TSAMis generated
every time the input timing signal X contains a timing pulse. If a new timing
pulse occurs during the output pulse (i.e. before TSAM picoseconds following
the previous timing pulse), it has no effects.
Inputs Outputs
Ein: Electric clock (section 1.6) Eout: resulting electrical output

input signal signal
Parameters
TSAM [ps]: duration of the output pulse. Allowed values: min 3 ·
0.8/Simulation Bandwith; max -; default -.
AMP: amplitude of the output pulse.

23.22 Monostable Multivibrator Triggered

by a Generic Electrical Signal
Component name: MONOSZ
Monostable Multivibrator triggered by an electrical signal simulates a
Monostable Multivibtator triggered by the zero crossing of the input signal
Ein. A rectangular pulse of amplitude AMP and duration TSAM [ps] is
generated every time the input signal Ein crosses the zero axis. Both positive-
slope and negative-slope crossings trigger the output pulse. If a zero crossing
occurs during the pulse (i.e. before TSAM [ps] following the previous zero
crossing), it has no effects.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Parameters
TSAM [ps]: duration of the output pulse. Allowed values: min
3·0.8/Simulation Bandwidth; max -; default -.
AMP: amplitude of the output pulse.
23.23 Sampler
Component name: SAMPLE
This component samples an input electrical signal at time instants specified
by a control clock signal. The output signal is set to zero between sampling
instants.
Inputs Outputs
Eclk: Electric clock (section 1.6) Eout: resulting electrical output

input signal signal
Ein: electrical input signal

Sample & Hold
23.24 Sample & Hold

Component name: SHOLD
This component samples an input electrical signal at time instants specified
by a control clock signal and hold the value till the next sampling instant
Inputs Outputs
Clock_in: Electric clock (section Eout: resulting electrical output

1.6) input signal signal
Ein: electrical input signal
23.25 Frequency Divider

Component name: NTHDI2
This component simulates an ideal analog frequency division device
If the input signal x(t) is of the form (analytic signal format):
x(t ) = m(t ) ⋅ exp[ j (wt + f (t ))]

then the output signal y(t) will be:
y (t ) = a(t ) ⋅ exp[ j (wt n + g (t ))]

where a(t) may be either m(t)1/n or a constant value A, on the basis of a
user-defined parameter. The value of g(t) is chosen in such a way that exp[j
g(t)] is, among the n possible n-th roots of the complex number exp[j f(t)],
the nearest to the value that exp[j g(t)] assumed during the previous
sampling instant.
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical input signal E_output: resulting electrical output

signal
Parameters
Carrier_frequency: see section 1.4 for further information.
N_output_option: switch controlling the output envelope:
0 = the output envelope is raised to the power 1/N
1 = the output is set to the constant value AMP
Output_envelope_amplitude: value of limited output envelope.

N_division_factor: it corresponds to the parameter n in the previous

formulae.
23.26 Electrical N-th Power

Component name: NTHPO2
This component emulates an ideal analog N-th power device.
If the input signal x(t) is of the form (analytic signal format):
x(t ) = m(t ) ⋅ exp[ j (wt + f (t ))]

then the output analytic signal y(t) will be:
y (t ) = a(t ) ⋅ exp[n ⋅ j (wt + f (t ))]
m(t )
n
where a(t) may be either or a constant value A.
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical input signal E_output: resulting electrical output

signal
Parameters
N_output_option: switch controlling the output envelope
0 = the output envelope is raised to N-th power
1 = the output is set to the constant value AMP
Output_envelope_amplitude: value of limited output envelope.
N_power_factor: power of the device.

Electrical Saturation Block
23.27 Electrical Saturation Block

Component name: ELESAT
Category: Library - Miscellaneous
This block allows the user to simulate nonlinear behavior due to saturation in
electrical component such as amplifiers. Used in combination with a
photodiode it will also accurately simulate photodiode saturation.
Output level
(a.u.)
Linear
response
curve
Saturation level
Saturated
response curve
Linear level
Input level (a.u.)
The transfer function is linear below the lin_level level and it saturates
exponentially above it:
in ≤ lin _ level : out = in
in − lin _ level
in > lin _ level : out = sat _ level − delta ⋅ e delta
where:
delta = sat _ level − lin _ level
Both positive or negative values can be used for lin_level and sat_level.

Inputs Outputs
Electrical: Signal Electrical: Saturated_signal
Parameters
lin_level [a.u.]: Output level up until which the response is linear. Allowed
sat_level [a.u]: Output saturation level. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 5.

23.28 Early-Late-Gate Symbol
Synchronizer
Component name: ELGSY1
Simulates an Early-Late-Gate symbol synchronizer, according to the following
Component Diagram:
E_input
SHOLD NON-LIN DELAY
FILMAT
SHOLD NON-LIN SUM
E_timing_transition E_VCO_input
TIMGEN FILOOP
E_error
E_timing_mid_symbol
The Matched filter FILMAT in the component Diagram can be selected

between the rectangular and the half-sinusoidal impulse response, or may be
suppressed.
The non-linear transformation NON-LIN can be selected between the
absolute-value and square-law.
The loop filter FILOOP may have one of the following transfer functions:
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
where A, B, D and G are real constants.
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical base-band input E_error: error signal

signal
E_VCO_input: signal controlling the
VCO
E_timing_transition: timing signal
(transition). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_timing_mid_symbol: timing signal
(mid-symbol). See section 1.6 for
further details
Parameters
Baud_rate [Tbaud/s]: input signal baud rate. Allowed values: any positive
real number; default 10-3 Tbaud/s.
Filter_Option: switch selecting the Matched Filter. Allowed values: min 0;
max 2; default 1.
0 = no filter 1 = rectangular impulse response
2 = sinusoidal impulse response
Nonlinear_Trans_Option: type of non linear transformation. Allowed
1 = absolute value
2 = squaring law
default 1.
Offset: time offset of the Delay component shown in the diagram at the top
of the page. Allowed values: any real number greater than zero and smaller
than one half of the input signal Baud period; default 0.

Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizer
23.29 Early-Late-Gate Symbol

Synchronizer
Component name: ELGSY2
Simulates an Early-Late-Gate symbol synchronizer (2 dimensions), according
to the following component Diagram:
FILMAT B
E_in_phase TIMGEN FILOOP SUM
E_VCO_input E_error
E_in_quad
DELAY DELAY
FILMAT B
The component labeled as B has the following structure:
SHOLD NON-LIN DELAY
SHOLD NON-LIN SUM
Timing signals
Figure 23.3 The B block schematic
The Matched filter FILMAT can be selected between the rectangular and the
half-sinusoidal impulse response, or may be suppressed.
The non-linear transformation NON-LIN can be selected between the
absolute-value and square-law.
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
Inputs Outputs

E_in_phase: electrical in-phase E_error: error signal

input signal
E_in_quad: electrical quadrature VCO
input signal
E_timing_transition_ch1: timing
signal (transition) on channel 1 (in-
phase). See section 1.6 for further
details
E_timing_mid_symbol_ch1: timing
signal (mid-symbol) on channel 1
(in-phase). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_timing_transition_ch2: timing
signal (transition) on channel 2
(quadrature). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_timing_mid_symbol_ch2: timing
further details
Parameters
Filter_Option: switch selecting the Matched Filter. Allowed values: min 0;
max 2; default 1.
0 = no filter
1 = rectangular impulse response
Nonlinear_Trans_Option: type of non linear transformation. Allowed
1 = absolute value
2 = squaring law
default 1.
Offset: time offset of the Delay component shown in the second diagram at
the top of the page. Allowed values: any real number greater than zero and
smaller than one half of the input signal Baud period; default 0.

Early-Late-Gate Symbol Synchronizer
Offset_between_channels: time offset of the Delay component between

the two channels shown in the first diagram at the top of the page. Allowed
values: any real number greater than zero; default 0.

23.30 In-phase Mid-phase Symbol

Synchronizer (1 dimension)
Component name: IMPSY1
Simulates the In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (one dimensional
case) according to the following component diagram:
E_hard_limited
In-phase arm
FILMAT SHOLD H-LIM DELAY Logic

E_input
FILMAT SHOLD DELAY x
Mid-phase arm
E_timing_transition
E_VCO_input E_error
TIMGEN FILOOP
E_timing_mid_symbol
The in-phase arm Matched Filter has a rectangular impulse response of

duration equal to the symbol duration; the mid-phase arm matched filter acts
as finite-time integrator and its impulse response (rectangular) duration
depends on a user-defined parameter.
The delay in the in-phase arm is one-symbol delay; the logic in the in-phase
arm operates according to the following rule:
if (a<0 and b>0) then VTD=-1
if (a>0 and b<0) then VTD=+1
all other cases VTD= 0
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical base-band input E_error: error signal

signal
VCO

In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (1 dimension)
E_timing_transition: timing signal

(transition). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_timing_mid_symbol: timing signal
(mid-symbol). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_hard_limited: signal at the output
of the hard limiter
Parameters
default 1.
Mid_phase_integration_time: half the Mid-Phase of the integration time.
Allowed values: any real number greater than zero and smaller than one half
of the input signal Baud period; default 0.

23.31 In-phase Mid-phase Symbol

Synchronizer (2 Dimensions)
Component name: IMPSY2
Simulates the In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (two dimensional
case) according to the following component diagram:
E_in_1
B
TIMGEN FILOOP SUM
DELAY DELAY
E_VCO_input E_error
E_in_2
B
The component labeled as B has the following structure:
E_hard_limited_1 (2)
In-phase arm
FILMAT SHOLD H-LIM DELAY Logic

E_in_1 (2)
FILMAT SHOLD DELAY x
Mid-phase arm
Timing signals
Figure 23.6 The B block schematic
The in-phase arm Matched Filter has a rectangular impulse response of

duration equal to the symbol duration; the mid-phase arm matched filter
acts as finite-time integrator and its impulse response (rectangular) duration
depends on a user-selectable external parameter.
The delay in the in-phase arm is a one-symbol delay; the logic in the in-
phase arm operates according to the following rule:
if (a<0 and b>0) then VTD=-1
if (a>0 and b<0) then VTD=+1
all other cases VTD= 0
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds

In-phase Mid-phase Symbol Synchronizer (2 Dimensions)
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
Inputs Outputs
E_in_1: electrical in-phase input E_error: error signal

signal
E_in_2: electrical quadrature input VCO
signal
E_timing_transition_1: timing signal
(transition) on channel 1 (in-phase).
See section 1.6 for further details
E_timing_mid_symbol_1: timing
(in-phase). See section 1.6 for
further details
E_timing_transition_2: timing signal
(transition) on channel 2
further details
E_timing_mid_symbol_2: timing
further details
E_hard_limited_1: signal at the
output of the hard limiter (in-phase
channel)
E_hard_limited_2: signal at the
output of the hard limiter
(quadrature channel)
Parameters
Baud_rate: input signal baud rate
Integration_order: switch selecting the Matched Filter:
0 = no filter
Loop_Filter_Par_A: loop filter constant (A in the formulae), real variable
other cases), real variable
(3)), real variable
Loop_Filter_Gain: loop filter gain (G in the formulae), real variable
VCO_sens: VCO sensitivity

Mid_phase_integration_time: half the Mid-Phase of the integration time

Offset_between_channels: time offset between the two channels

N-th Order Power Loop for Carrier Synchronization
23.32 N-th Order Power Loop for Carrier

Synchronization
Component name: NPLOO2
This component simulates a N-th order power loop for carrier
synchronization, according to the following component diagram.
E_input E_output
NTHPOW PLL2 PHASHF NTHDIV
The output recovered carrier has a peak amplitude equal to 1.

Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical input signal E_output: recovered carrier
Parameters
Loop_order: order of the loop.
PLL_natural_frequency: natural frequency of the Second order PLL.
PLL_damping_factor: damping factor of the PLL.

23.33 N-th Order Costas Loop

Component name: COSTA2
N-th order Costas Loop is a carrier recovery for N-PSK modulation formats.
Simulates a N-th order Costas Loop for carrier recovery in N-PSK
demodulators, according to the following component diagram:
E_phase
x
E_input ZD
pi/2 VCO Filter Combin.
E_VCO
x
E_quad
The combiner generates the control signal ZD according to the following

algorithm:
Assuming that the outputs p and q of the in-phase and quadrature multipliers
can be expressed in the form:
p = A cos(f) and q = A sin(f)
where f represents the phase error, the ideal control signal ZD produced by
the combiner is given by:
ZD = 0.25 4 sin (4 f )
The loop filter is a single-pole low pass filter, whose 3 dB bandwidth is set by
the user.
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical input signal E_VCO: signal produced by the VCO

E_phase: base-band demodulated
signal (in-phase component)
E_quad: base-band demodulated
signals (quadrature component)
Parameters
N_PSK: number of phases in the CPSK modulation. Allowed values: any
integer value greater or equal to 2; default 4, corresponding to a 4-PSK
carrier recovery.
Filter_Bandwidth: 3-dB bandwidth of the loop filter. Allowed values: any
real number greater than zero, and giving a filter bandwidth inside the
simulation bandwidth, see section 1.4 for further information; default -.
Amp: amplitude of the signal produced by the VCO (zero-to-peak amplitude).
VCO_sens: sensitivity of the VCO. Allowed values: any positive real number;
default 1.

N-th Order Costas Loop
VCO_Frequency: center frequency of the VCO; it should be equal (or as

close as possible) to the input signal central frequency. Allowed values: see
section 1.4 for further information; default 0.002 THz.

23.34 N-Phase Decision Feedback Loop

Component name: DECFE2
This component simulates a N-phase Decision Feedback Loop for Carrier
recovery in N-PSK receivers, according to the following component Diagram:
E_phase
x
DELAY x
E_input E_clock
VCO Filter Sum Decis.
E_VCO
pi/2 DELAY x
E_quad
x
The Decision algorithm divides the (-π, π) interval in N parts, searches the
interval to which the actual received phase belongs to and produces, as
output, cos(φ) and sin(φ), where φ is the center value of the selected interval.
The Decision process takes place only when a timing pulse is fed to the
component; after each timing pulse, the estimated values of cos(φ) and sin(φ)
are hold until the next timing pulse occurs.
Each arm includes a delay of half the symbol duration, in order to align the
demodulated baseband signal and the phase estimate produced by the
decision algorithm.
The loop filter is a single-pole low pass filter, whose 3 dB bandwidth is set by
the user.
Inputs Outputs
E_clock: clock input signal. See E_VCO: signal produced by the VCO
section 1.6 for further details.
E_phase: base-band demodulated
E_input: electrical input signal signal (in-phase component)
E_quad: base-band demodulated
signals (quadrature component)
Parameters
N_PSK: number of phases in the PSK Modulation. Allowed values: any
integer value greater or equal to 2; default 4, corresponding to a 4-PSK
carrier recovery.
Filter_Bandwidth: 3-dB bandwidth of Loop Filter. Allowed values: any real
number greater than zero, and giving a filter bandwidth inside the simulation
bandwidth, see section 1.4 for further information; default -.
Amp: amplitude of the VCO output signal (zero-to-peak amplitude). Allowed
values: any positive real number; default 1.

N-Phase Decision Feedback Loop
VCO_sens: sensitivity of the VCO. Allowed values: any positive real number;
default 1.
VCO_Initial_Frequency [THz]: center frequency of the VCO; it should be
equal (or as close as possible) to the input signal central frequency. Allowed
values: see section 1.4 for further information; default 0.002 THz.
VCO_Initial_Phase [rad]: initial phase of the VCO. Allowed values: any real
number; default 0. rad.

23.35 Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer

(1 Dimension)
Component name: OPTSY1
This component simulates an (ML) Optimum Symbol Synchronizer (one
dimensional case)
The internal matched filter can be selected between the rectangular and the
half-sinusoidal impulse response, or may be suppressed.
For each sampling instant i within the symbol duration, the following quantity
is accumulated:
si = ln (ch(ai ))
where:
ETA
ai = 2 ⋅ c ⋅ xi
B T
and:
ETA is the estimated signal-to-noise ratio
B is the nominal signal level
T is the symbol duration
c is a constant depending on the type of Matched Filter
xi is the sample of the signal at the output of the Matched Filter
The optimum sampling instant within the symbol duration is then determined
as the instant corresponding to the maximum among the accumulated
quantities.
The estimate of the optimum sampling instant is based on a number of
observations (No. of symbols) given as a parameter. Before the first
observation period has expired, no timing signal is produced.
Inputs Outputs
E_input: electrical base-band input E_filtered: signal at the output of

signal the Matched Filter
E_timing: output timing signal, it is
non zero only after the end of the
first observation period. See section
1.6 for further details.
Parameters
Baud_rate: input signal baud rate.
Observation_time: duration of the observation time.
SNR_expected [dB]: expected Signal-to-noise ratio (corresponding to ETA
in the previous formula).
Nominal_input_signal_level: nominal signal input level.
Filter_type: type of Matched Filter:

Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (1 Dimension)
0 = no matched filter
2 = half-sinusoidal impulse response.

23.36 Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer

(2 Dimensions)
Component name: OPTSY2
This component simulates the (ML) Optimum Symbol Synchronizer (two
dimensional case)
The Matched filter can be selected between the rectangular and the half-
sinusoidal impulse response, or may be suppressed.
For each sampling instant i within the symbol duration, the following quantity
is accumulated:
si = ln(ch(a ⋅ xi )) + ln (ch(a ⋅ y i ))
where:
ETA
ai = 2 ⋅ c ⋅ xi
B T
and:
ETA is the estimated signal-to-noise ratio
B is the nominal signal level
T is the symbol duration
c is a constant depending on the type of Matched Filter
xi, yi are the sample of the signals at the output of the Matched Filter for
the in-phase and quadrature components.
The optimum sampling instant within the symbol duration is then determined
as the instant corresponding to the maximum among the accumulated
quantities.
The estimate of the optimum sampling instant is based on a number of
observations (No. of symbols) given as a parameter. Before the first
observation period has expired, no timing signal is produced.
A delay, specified as a parameter, can be introduced between the two
channels, if necessary.

Optimum Symbol (ML) Synchronizer (2 Dimensions)
Inputs Outputs
E_in_phase: electrical in-phase E_filtered_ch1: signal at the output

base-band input signal of the Matched Filter (channel 1)
E_in_quad: electrical quadrature E_filtered_ch2: signal at the output
base-band input signal of the Matched Filter (channel 2)
E_timing: output timing signal: it is
non zero only after the end of the
first observation period
Parameters
Observation_time: duration of the observation time.
SNR_expected [dB]: expected Signal-to-noise ratio (corresponding to ETA
in the previous formula).
Nominal_input_signal_level: nominal signal input level.
Filter_type: type of Matched Filter:
0 = no matched filter
2 = half-sinusoidal impulse response
Offset_between_channels: the delay introduced on Channel 2.

23.37 First Order Baseband Phase-Locked

Loop
Component name: PLL1BB
Simulates a First Order Phase-Locked loop, according to the following
component diagram:
GAIN
E_input E_multiplier
Multipl. x
E_VCO
VCO
The signal produced by the VCO has a peak amplitude equal to SQRT(2.); the
constant GAIN must be specified as a natural number.
Inputs Outputs
E_in: input base-band signal E_VCO: signal produced by the VCO

E_multiplier: output from the low-
pass multiplier
Parameters
Hilbert_delay: delay introduced to perform the Hilbert transform of the
input signal.
Loop_Gain: loop gain.
VCO_frequency: center frequency of the VCO. See section 1.4 for further
informations.

Second Order Baseband Phase-Locked Loop
23.38 Second Order Baseband Phase-

Locked Loop
Component name: PLL2BB
Simulates a Second Order Phase-Locked loop, according to the following
component diagram:
E_input E_multiplier
Multipl. Filter x
E_VCO
VCO
The signal produced by the VCO has a peak amplitude equal to SQRT(2.).
The Filter is a single pole low-pass filter with a user-defined 3-dB bandwidth.
The constants G and B are related to the parameters OMN and DAMP in the
argument list by the following relations:
OMN
G=
2 ⋅ DAMP
OMN ⋅ DAMP
B=
PI
The multiplier operates on the analytic signal associated to the input signal X.
For this purpose the Hilbert transform of the input signal is evaluated using
the component HILBER. The parameter N is the delay (expressed in number
of samples) used by the Hilbert transformer. The lowest frequency
component of the input signal must be larger than I (2 ⋅ DELT ⋅ N ) , thus
the choice of N is based on the spectral properties of the input signal. For
more details see the component HILBER (section 23.20).
Inputs Outputs
E_in: input base-band signal E_VCO: signal produced by the VCO

E_multiplier: output from the low-
pass multiplier
Parameters
Hilbert_delay: delay introduced to perform the Hilbert transform of the
input signal.
Loop_bandwidth [rad/ps]: natural frequency of the loop.
Loop_damping_factor: damping factor.
VCO_Frequency [rad/ps]: center frequency of the VCO. See section 1.4 for
further information.

23.39 Base-band Phase Locked Loop

Component name: PLLBB
This component simulates a Baseband Phase Locked Loop of order 1, 2, and
3.
The loop filter can have one of the following transfer functions:
1 + As
H (s ) = G (1)
1 + Ds
1 + As
H (s ) = G (2)
s ⋅ (1 + Ds )
1 + As + Bs 2
H (s ) = G (3)
s2
where A, B, D, and G are real constants.
The PLL order can only take the values 1, 2, and 3.
No check is made on the consistency between the PLL order and the chosen
loop filter transfer function when the PLL order is either 2 or 3.
The VCO rest frequency and the input signal center frequency must be inside
baseband.
The multiplier operates on the analytic signal associated to the input signal X.
For this purpose the Hilbert transform of the input signal is evaluated using
the component HILBER. The parameter N is the delay (expressed in number
of samples) used by the Hilbert transformer. The lowest frequency
component of the input signal must be larger than 1 (2 ⋅ DEL ⋅ N ) , thus the
choice of N is based on the spectral properties of the input signal. For more
details see the component HILBER (section 23.20).
Inputs Outputs
E_in: input base-band signal whose E_filter_output: loop filter output

phase must be recovered base-band signal
E_VCO: VCO output base-band
signal
E_filter_input; loop filter input signal
Parameters
Hilbert_Delay: delay introduced to perform the Hilbert transform of the
input signal.
N_PLL_order: order of the PLL (can be 1, 2, or 3), integer variable.
VCO_Frequency: VCO rest frequency (must be outside baseband), real
variable.
VCO_output_amplitude: amplitude. of the VCO out. signal, real var.
VCO_gain: VCO gain, real variable.
N_order_of_integration: order of integration (can be 0, 1, or 2). It gives
the number of poles for s=0 in the loop filter. Integer variable.

Base-band Phase Locked Loop
Loop_Filter_Par_A: filter constant. (A in formulae), real var.

Loop_Filter_Par_B: filter constant (B in formula (3), ignored in other
cases), real variable.
Loop_Filter_Par_D: filter constant (D in formulas (1) and (2) ignored in
(3)), real variable.
Loop_Filter_Gain: filter gain (G in the formulae), real var.

23.40 Derivative-Product Clock Recovery

Subsystem
Component name: SYNCD2
This component simulates a derivative-product Clock Recovery subsystem,
according to the following component diagram:
Non-lin. E_recovered_clock
E_in_phase
SUM RESON ZCGEN
E_in_quad
E_recovered_sinusoid
Non-lin.
The non-linear transformation in each arm provides, as output, the product of

the derivative of the input signal and the sign of the same signal.
The signal at the output of the adder (component SUM) contains a periodic
component, which is filtered by the tuned resonator RESON.
Timing pulses are generated in correspondence of the zero crossings of the
nearly sinusoidal signal Z with a given slope, and delayed by an amount
depending on the parameter OFFSET
Inputs Outputs
E_in_phase: in-phase demodulated E_recovered_clock: recovered

input signal timing signal. See section 1.6 for
further details.
E_in_quad: quadrature
demodulated input signal E_recovered_sinusoid: nearly
sinusoidal filtered waveform
Parameters
Q_factor: resonator Q-factor.
N_slope_option: if set to +1, the timing pulse is generated when the signal
Z crosses the zero axis with positive slope; if set to -1, the timing pulse is
generated when the signal Z crosses the zero axis with negative slope.
Delay: delay between the effective zero crossing and the generated output
timing pulse.
23.41 Baseband Rectifier Clock Recovery

Subsystem
Component name: SYNCR1

Baseband Rectifier Clock Recovery Subsystem
This component simulates a baseband rectifier Clock Recovery subsystem,

according to the following component diagram.
RECTIF E_recovered_clock
E_in_phase
SUM RESON ZCGEN
E_in_quad
RECTIF
The component RECTIF (rectifier) allows to select different types of rectifiers

(half- or full-wave; positive or negative).
component which is filtered by the tuned resonator RESON.
nearly sinusoidal signal Z with given slope, and delayed by an amount
depending on the parameter OFFSET.
Inputs Outputs

further details.

Parameters
N_rectifier_type: chooses the type of the rectifier
2 for Full Wave positive output rectifier
1 for Half Wave positive output rectifier
-2 for Full Wave negative output rectifier
-1 for Half Wave negative output rectifier
N_slope: if set to +1, the timing pulse is generated when the signal Z
crosses the zero axis with positive slope; if set to -1, the timing pulse is
Time_offset: delay between the effective zero crossing and the generated
output timing pulse.

I-F Rectifier Clock Recovery Subsystem
23.42 I-F Rectifier Clock Recovery

Subsystem
Component name: SYNCR2
This component simulates a I-F rectifier Clock Recovery subsystem, according
to the following component diagram.
E_recovered_clock
E_in ENVELO RESON ZCGEN
The signal at the output of the envelope detector (component ENVELO)

contains a periodic component which is filtered by the tuned resonator
RESON.
depending on the parameter OFFSET
Inputs Outputs
E_in: electrical input signal E_recovered_clock: recovered

timing signal. See section 1.6 for
further details.
E_recovered_sinusoid: nearly
Parameters
output timing pulse; it is expressed in number of sampling intervals and may
be fractional.

23.43 Zero-Crossing Clock Recovery

Subsystem
Component name: SYNCZ1
This component simulates a Zero-crossing Clock Recovery subsystem,
according to the following component diagram.
MONOSZ E_recovered_clock
E_in_phase
SUM RESON ZCGEN
E_in_quad
MONOSZ
The component MONOSZ (monostable multivibrator) produces a rectangular

pulse of duration equal to half the symbol duration every time the input
baseband signal crosses the zero-axis
component, which is filtered by the tuned resonator RESON.
depending on the parameter OFFSET.
Inputs Outputs

further details.
Parameters
Carrier_frequency: see section 1.4 for further information
Baud_rate: input signal baud rate
Q_factor: resonator Q-factor
generated when the signal Z crosses the zero axis with negative slope
output timing pulse; it is expressed in number of sampling intervals and may
be fractional.
23.44 Electrical Jitter

Component name: EJITTERS

Electrical Jitter
This component adds jitter on the electrical signal. This is very useful, for
instance, for simulating the clock jitter, which moves the instant when the
signal is sampled. For analysis purposes this effect can be modeled skewing
the electrical signal before the measurement component and considering an
ideal clock not jittered.
This component changes the position of the electrical signal samples as if
were sampled by a jittered clock.
Input Electrical Signal
Output Jittered
Electrical Signal
Ideal Clock (not jittered)
1 / bit-rate
Jittered Clock
On each period the input electrical signal is twisted according to the value of
the jitter signal amplitude multiplied by the jitter factor k_jitter.
Inputs Outputs
Input electrical signal Output electrical jittered signal

Electrical jitter
Parameters
bit_rate [Gbit/s]: the input signal bit-rate Allowed values: min >0; max -;
default 10.
k_jitter [ps/a.u.]: the jitter factor that is multiplied by the input jitter signal
amplitude to obtain the shifting value. Allowed values: min -; max -; default
1.
sampling_time [ps]: the delay added to the sampling time period (equal to
1/bit-rate). This parameter allows to obtain an higher precision on the applied
jitter. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.

23.45 A/D Conversion (Absolute Value +

Sign)
Component name: RADC
This component performs the A/D conversion of the input electric signal into a
logical signal. The output logical signal is in absolute value plus sign
representation (sign is stored in the most significant bit). The number of bits
upon which the quantization is performed is determined by the level of the
logical output signal.
Inputs Outputs
Signal_to_be_converted: electrical L_output: logical signal containing

input signal to be converted the digital representation of the
sampled input
Clock: signal used to manage the
sampling. When it is equal to 0 the
conversion is not performed. If it is
equal to 1 the actual sample is
converted. See clock generators:
CLOCK and CCLOCK. For further
information on clock signal
properties see section 1.6
Parameters
Overload_threshold [-]: maximum allowable absolute value for the input
signal. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Signal L_output logical level [-]: logical level of output data. Allowed
Note
When the absolute value of the input electric signal becomes greater than the
overload threshold an overflow occur. No error is assumed and the converter
behaves as if saturated.

A/D Conversion (Two's Complement)
23.46 A/D Conversion (Two's

Complement)
Component name: RADC2
This component performs the A/D conversion of the input electric signal into a
logical signal. The output logical signal is in two's complement representation.
The number of bits upon which the quantization is performed is determined
by the level of the logical output signal.
Inputs Outputs

input signal to be converted the digital representation of the
sampled input
Parameters
signal to be converted. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Signal L_output logical level [-]: logical level of output data. Allowed
Note
When the absolute value of the input electric signal becomes greater than the
overload threshold an overflow occur. No error is assumed and the converter
behaves as if saturated.

23.47 D/A Conversion (Absolute Value +

Sign)
Component name: RDAC
This component performs the D/A conversion of the input logical signal into
an electric signal. The input logical signal is assumed to be in absolute value
plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: logical input signal to be Output_signal: reconstructed analog

converted electrical signal
Parameters
Maximum_output_value: maximum absolute value that will assume the
electrical output signal. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Signal L_input logical level [-]: logical level of input data. Allowed values:
23.48 D/A Conversion (Two's

Complement)
Component name: RDAC2
This subroutine performs the D/A conversion of the input logical signal into an
electric signal. The input logical signal is assumed to be in two's complement
representation.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: logical input signal to be Output_signal: reconstructed analog

converted electrical signal
Parameters
Maximum_output_value [-]: maximum absolute value that will assume
the electrical output signal. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.
Signal L_input logical level [-]: logical level of input data. Allowed values:

PCM Decoding
23.49 PCM Decoding

Component name: RPCMDE
This component simulates the PCM decoding of the logical input signal and
places it in an electric signal. The logical output signal is supposed to be in
absolute value plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: logical input containing the Decoded_signal: converted analog

PCM-encoded signal electrical signal
Parameters
Maximum_output_value: it is the maximum output value that the electric
output signal will assume. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.
Compressing_law: it is a compressing law selector. Choosing 0 the A-law
will be applied. Choosing 1 the Mu-law will be applied. Allowed values: min
Companding_advantage [dB]: it is the companding advantage factor.
Allowed values: min 0 dB; max -; default 0.
For the A law C = 20*ALOG10(A/(1+ALOG(A))) , for the Mu-law C =
20*ALOG10(Mu/ALOG(1+Mu)).
Note
The conversion is performed by first converting the signal as if quantized
uniformly and then decompressing it with the selected law. The compressing
law parameters A or Mu are evaluated from C with an iterative procedure.

23.50 PCM Encoding

Component name: RPCMEN
This component simulates the PCM encoding of an electric input signal and
places it in a logical signal. The logical output signal is in absolute value plus
sign representation. The number of bits upon which the quantization is
performed is determined by the level of the logical signal.
The encoding can be performed using the two standard compressing laws: A
and Mu. The compounding advantage can be selected by the user.
The input signal is first sampled, then compressed and finally quantized with
an uniform quantizer. If the absolute value of the input signal is greater than
the overload threshold the quantizer saturates.
Inputs Outputs

input signal to be converted the converted signal sample
Parameters
signal. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default -.
Compressing_law [-]: it is a compressing law selector. Choosing 0 the A-
law will be applied. Choosing 1 the Mu-law will be applied. Allowed values:
Companding_advantage [dB]: it is the companding advantage factor.
Allowed values: min 0 dB; max -; default -.
For the A law C = 20*ALOG10(A/(1+ALOG(A))) , for the Mu-law C =
20*ALOG10(Mu/ALOG(1+Mu)).
Note
The compressing law parameters A or Mu are evaluated from C with an
iterative procedure, whose convergence is guaranteed to be monotone and is
stopped when the absolute error is smaller than 10-2.

24 Logical Components
Basic
AND
NOT
OR
Exclusive OR (RXOR).
Adder (RSUM), sums of two logical signals. It considers the absolute value
plus signal representation.
Adder (RSUM2), sums of two logical signals. It considers the two’s
complement representation.
Modulo-2 Adder (BYADD), sums modulo-2.
Delay (LDELAY), simulates a delay line for a logical signal.
Flip-Flop D, simulates a Flip-Flop D type positive edge.
Flip-Flop T (TFLIPFLOP), simulates a Flip-Flop T type positive edge.
Advanced
Parallel to Serial Conversion (PARSEV), converts parallel logical signals into
serial logical signal.
Parallel to Serial Conversion + Line Encoding (PSCLE2), converts parallel
logical signals with user-defined encoding into serial logical signal.
Serial To Parallel Conversion (SEPAR), converts a serial logical signal into
parallel logical signals.
Serial To Parallel Conversion + Line Encoding (SPCON2), converts a serial
logical signal with user-defined encoding into parallel logical signals.
Logical Components
Sign Changer (RCNG), changes the sign of a logical signal. The logical input
signal is assumed to be in absolute value plus sign representation.
Sign Changer (RCNG2), changes the sign of a logical signal. The logical input
signal is assumed to be in two’s complement representation.
Signal Copy (RCHOM4), copies four logical signals into one logical signal.
Signal Copy (RCOPY), copies a component of bits from a logical signal to the
output.
Integer To Logical Converters (RIRC – RIRCX), converts using the binary
representation of the integer value. The logical signal is assumed to be in
absolute value plus sign representation.
Integer to Logical Converters (RIRC2 - RIRC2X), converts using the binary

representation of the integer value. The logical signal is assumed to be in
two’s complement representation.
Multiplier (RMUL), multiplies two logical signals. The logical signals are
supposed to be in absolute value plus sign representation.
Multiplier (RMUL2), multiplies two logical signals. The logical signals are
supposed to be in two’s complement representation.
Shifter (RSHF), shifts a logical signal by N positions.
Circular Shifter (RSHFC), shifts circularly a logical signal by N positions.
2- Output Advanced Splitter (RSPLI2), splits a logical signal in two logical

signals.
3- Output Advanced Splitter (RSPLI3), splits a logical signal in three logical
signals.
4- Output Advanced Splitter (RSPLI4), splits a logical signal in four logical
signals.
Retiming (DDELAY) of a logical signal.

AND, NOT, OR and Exclusive-OR
24.1 AND, NOT, OR and Exclusive-OR

24.1.1 AND
Component name: AND
This component places the bitwise logical AND between the two logical input
signals.
Inputs Outputs
L_input_1: first logical input signal L_output: resulting logical output

signal
L_input_2: second logical input
signal
Note
An error condition will be issued if the levels of the three logical signal are not equal.
24.1.2 NOT
Component name: NOT
This component does the bitwise logical NOT operation on the logical input
signal.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: Logical input signal L_output: resulting logical output

signal
24.1.3 OR
Component name: OR
This component places the bitwise logical OR between the two logical input
signals.
Inputs Outputs

signal
signal
Note
24.1.4 Exclusive-OR
Component name: RXOR
This component places the bitwise logical EXCLUSIVE-OR between the two
logical input signals.
Inputs Outputs

Logical Components
L_input_2: second logical input signal

signal
Note
24.2 Logical Adder (Absolute Value +

Sign)
Component name: RSUM
This componet computes the sum of two logical input signals and place it in
the logical output signal. It considers the absolute value plus sign
representation.
Inputs Outputs

signal
signal
Note
An error condition will be assumed if the levels of the three logical signals is not the
same. An error will be assumed only if overflow occur: the logical output signal level is
too small to represent the result.

Logical Adder (Two's Complement)
24.3 Logical Adder (Two's Complement)

Component name: RSUM2
This component computes the sum of two logical input signals and place it in
the logical output signal.
It consider the two's complement representation.
Inputs Outputs

signal
signal
Note
An error condition will be assumed if the levels of the three logical signals is
not the same. An error will be assumed only if overflow occur: the logical
output signal level is too small to represent the result.
24.4 Modulo 2 Adder

Component name: BYADD
This component sums modulo-2 the logical signals LinA and LinB and puts the
result in Lout.
Inputs Outputs
LinA: first logical input signal Lout: resulting logical output signal
LinB: second logical input signal
Parameters
Rb [Tb/s]: Baud rate. Allowed values: min 0 Tb/s; max -; default -.
TSHIFT [ps]: instant within the symbol interval at which the sum is
executed. Allowed values: min 0 ps; max 1/Rb; default -.

Logical Components
24.5 Logical Delay Line

Component name: LDELAY
This component simulates a delay line for logical signal. The output signal is a
replica of the input one delayed of T_delay picoseconds.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: logical input signal Lout: logical output signal
Parameters
Level: logical level of the input logical signal. Allowed values: min 1; max -;
default 1.
T_delay [ps]: Delay applied to the input logical signal. Allowed values: min
0; max -; default 0.
24.6 Logical Flip-flop D Type

This component implements a flip-flop D type positive edge. Outputs values
according the following truth table:
CLOCK DATA Q Q
↑ 0 0 1
↑ 1 1 0
↓ X Q Q
X X Q Q
X = don’t care
↑ = level changes from 0 to 1
↓ = level changes from 1 to 0
Inputs Outputs
Logical clock Logical output signal Q

Logical data Logical output signal Q
Parameters
Logical level [-]: logical level of input data. Allowed values: min 1; max -; default 1.

Logical Flip-flop T Type
24.7 Logical Flip-flop T Type

Component name: TFLIPFLOP
This component implements a flip-flop T type positive edge. Outputs values
according the following truth table:
CLOCK DATA Qt Qt
↑ 0 Qt-1 Qt-1
↑ 1 Qt-1 Qt-1
↓ X Qt-1 Qt-1
X X Qt-1 Qt-1
X = don’t care
↑ = level changes from 0 to 1
↓ = level changes from 1 to 0
Inputs Outputs
Logical clock Logical output signal Q

Logical data Logical output signal Q
Parameters
Signal Clock Logical level [-]: logical level of the clock input data. Its value
must be kept 1.
Signal T Logical level [-]: logical level of the T input data. Its value must
be equal to the other Q and Q\ logical level. Allowed values: min 1; max -;
default 1.
Signal Q Logical level [-]: logical level of the Q output data. Its value must
be equal to the other T and Q\ logical level. Allowed values: min 1; max -;
default 1.
Signal Q_ Logical level [-]: logical level of the Q\ output data. Its value
must be equal to the other T and Q logical level. Allowed values: min 1;
max -; default 1.

Logical Components
24.8 Parallel to Serial Conversion

Component name: PARSEV
This component performs the parallel to serial conversion of the input
sequence. A true parallel to serial conversion is performed when the level of
the output logical signal is 1; otherwise a high-parallel to low-parallel
conversion occurs (the level of the output logical signal must be smaller than
the level of the input logical signal).
The input logical signal is sampled once every input symbol interval, i.e.
every (KI KO ) ⋅ NS samples. (KI is the level of the input signal and KO is
the level of the output signal). The value of L_input should not change
between a reading and the next, anyway such changes will not be detected
by the program and will lead to unpredictable results in simulation.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: high-level logical input L_output: low-level logical output

signal signal
Parameters
Baud_rate: baud rate referred to the output logical signal. Allowed values:
min 0; max Simulation Bandwidth; default -.
Delay: transmission delay between the source of information bits and the
component. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.
Note
The baud rate of the input logical signal MUST be (KI KO ) ⋅ NS , where KI
and KO are the size of input and output logical signals respectively.
The operation performed is complementary to the one performed by

component SEPAR.

Parallel to Serial Conversion + Line Encoding
24.9 Parallel to Serial Conversion + Line

Encoding
Component name: PSCLE2
This subroutine performs a parallel to serial conversion of the input logical
signal, then encodes the output sequence according to a user chosen line
code. The line code can be selected from the following set according to the
parameter Coding_selector:
Coding_selector = 0 : NRZ-Level. The level "one" is represented as 1
and "zero" as 0; clearly this is like not encoding.
Coding_selector = 1 : NRZ-Mark. "one" is represented by a change in
level and "zero" by no change.
Coding_selector = 2 : NRZ-Space. "zero" is represented by a change in
level, "one" by no change.
Coding_selector = 3 : Bi-phase Mark. A transition occurs at the
beginning of every bit period. "One" is represented by a second transition
half bit period later, "zero" by no second transition.
Coding_selector = 4 : Bi-phase Space. A transition occurs at the
beginning of every bit period. "Zero" is represented by a second transition
half bit period later, "one" by no second transition.
Coding_selector = 5 : Delay modulation (Miller code). "one" is
represented by a transition at the midpoint of the bit period; "zero" is
represented by no transition if it is followed by a "one", and by a
transition at the end of the first bit period, which is to say the beginning
of the second one, if it is followed by another "zero".
Coding_selector = 6 : RZ. "One" is represented by a half-bit wide
pulse; "zero" by no pulse (i.e. 0).
Coding_selector = 7 : Bi-phase Level (Manchester code). "one" is
represented by a half-bit wide pulse of one polarity, "zero" by a half- bit
wide pulse of the other polarity. The initial state of the encoder is "zero",
i.e. it behaves as if a "zero" has been transmitted before sending the first
bit of the input sequence.
Inputs Outputs
L_input: logical input signal L_output: logical output signal

Clock: electrical clock signal
Parameters
Input_baud_rate: it is the baud rate referred to the input logical signal.
Allowed values: min 0; max Simulation bandwidth; default 0.
Output_bit_rate: it is the baud rate referred to the output logical signal.
Allowed values: min Input_baud_rate* Input_level; max Input_baud_rate*
Input_level; default -.
Coding_selector: it is a flag to selector the coding law. Allowed values: min

Logical Components
Note
An error condition will be assumed and an error message issued if the output
baud rate is not the input baud rate multiplied by KI, where KI is the level of
the input logical signal.

Serial to Parallel Conversion
24.10 Serial to Parallel Conversion

Component name: SEPAR
This component performs the serial to parallel conversion of the input
sequence. The oldest bit is placed in the first place, the most recent in the
last. Since the level of the input logical signal can be greater than 1, a true
serial-to-parallel conversion occurs only when the input logical signal contains
1 bit; otherwise a low-parallel to high parallel conversion is performed (the
level of the output logical must be greater than the level of the input logical
signal).
This component introduces a delay equal to (KO/KI-1)/Baud_rate samples,
where KO is the level of the output logical signal register and KI is the level of
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Baud_rate: it is the baud rate referred to the input logical signal. Allowed
values: min 0; max Simulation bandwidth; default -.
Delay: transmission delay between the source of information bits and the
component. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.
Note
The baud rate of the output register is (KI/KO)*input_baud_rate, where KI
and KO are the size of input and output logical signal respectively.
The operation performed is complementary to the one performed by

component PARSEV.

Logical Components
24.11 Serial to Parallel Conversion with

Line Decoding
Component name: SPCON2
This subroutine performs the line decoding and then the serial to parallel
conversion of the input sequence. The line code of the input sequence can be
selected from the following set with the parameter Coding_selector:
Coding_selector = 0 : NRZ-Level. The level "one" is represented as 1
and "zero" as 0; clearly this is a "not encoded" sequence.
Coding_selector = 1 : NRZ-Mark. "one" is represented by a change in
level and "zero" by no change.
Coding_selector = 2 : NRZ-Space. "zero" is represented by a change in
level, "one" by no change.
Coding_selector = 3 : Bi-phase Mark. A transition occurs at the
beginning of every bit period. "One" is represented by a second transition
half bit period later, "zero" by no second transition.
Coding_selector = 4 : Bi-phase Space. A transition occurs at the
beginning of every bit period. "Zero" is represented by a second transition
half bit period later, "one" by no second transition.
Coding_selector = 5 : Delay modulation (Miller code). "One" is
represented by a transition at the midpoint of the bit period; "zero" is
represented by no transition if it is followed by a "one" or by a transition
at the end of the first bit period, which is to say the beginning of the
second one, if it is followed by another "zero".
Coding_selector = 6 : RZ. "One" is represented by a half-bit wide
pulse; "zero" by no pulse (i.e. 0).
Coding_selector = 7 : Bi-phase Level (Manchester code). "One" is
represented by a half-bit wide pulse of one polarity, "zero" by a half- bit
wide pulse of the other polarity. The initial state of the encoder is "zero",
i.e. it behaves as if a "zero" has been transmitted before sending the first
bit of the input sequence
Inputs Outputs
L_input: serial logical input signal to L_output: logical decoded output

be decoded signal
Clock: clock signal
Parameters
Input_bit_rate: it is the baud rate referred to the input logical signal.
Allowed values: min Output_baud_rate*Output_level; max
Output_baud_rate*Output_level; default -.
Output_baud_rate: it is the baud rate referred to the output logical signal.
Allowed values: min 0; max Simulation Bandwidth; default -.
Coding_selector: it is a flag to selector the coding law. Allowed values: min

Serial to Parallel Conversion with Line Decoding
Note
An error condition will be assumed and an error message issued if the input
baud rate is not the output baud rate multiplied by KO, where KO is the level
of the output signal.

Logical Components
24.12 Change Sign (Absolute Value +

Sign)
Component name: RCNG
This component changes the sign of the input logical signal. It is supposed to
be in absolute value plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs
Note
An error condition will be assumed if the logical signal levels are different.
24.13 Change Sign (Two's Complement)

Component name: RCNG2
This component changes the sign of the input logical signal. It is supposed to
be in two's complement representation.
Inputs Outputs
Note
An error condition will be assumed if the logical signal levels are different.

Logical Copy (4 to -1)
24.14 Logical Copy (4 to -1)

Component name: RCHOM4
It copies four input logical signals into the output one.
The output logical signal is filled according to the following figure.
NA = Level of L_input_1 NY = Level of L_output

NB = Level of L_input_2
NC = Level of L_input_3
ND = Level of L_input_4
If FLAG = 1
ND+1 ND+NC ND+NC+NB ND+NC+NB+NA

1 ND NY
1 2 ND 1 2 NC 1 2 NB 1 2 NA 0 …... 0
L_input_4 L_input_3 L_input_2 L_input_1
If FLAG = -1 NN = NY-ND-NC-NB-NA
NN+1 NN+ND NN+ND+NC NN+ND+NC+NB
1 ND NY
0 …. 0 1 2 ND 1 2 NC 1 2 NB 1 2 NA
L_input_4 L_input_3 L_input_2 L_input_1
Figure 24.1 Input/output signals decoding
Inputs Outputs
L_input_1: first logical input signal L_output: logical output signal

signal
L_input_3: third logical input signal
L_input_4: fourth logical input
signal

Logical Components
Parameters
Flag: flag to choose upper or lower part of output logical signal. Allowed
values: min -1; max +1; default +1.
Note
An error condition will be assumed when the sum of the logic input signal
levels is greater than the logic output signal level.

Logical Copy
24.15 Logical Copy

Component name: RCOPY
It copies a component of bits from the logical input signal to the logical
output signal. This component copies a component of bits from the input
logical signal to the output logical signal. The parameter "Start in input"
identifies the position of the first bit of the component inside the input logical
signal, while parameter "Start in output" identifies the starting destination
position inside the output logical signal. The weight of bits is unchanged or is
reversed depending on the value of parameter Flag. Thus the copy is
performed according to the following figure.
NX = Level of L_input
NY = Level of L_output
If FLAG = 1 NI+NBIT-1
L_input 1 NI NX
L_output 1 NO NY
NO+NBIT-1
If FLAG = -1
NI+NBIT-1
L_input 1 NI NX
L_output NY NO 1
NO+NBIT-1
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Start in input: starting position of the component of bits inside the logical
input signal.
NBIT: number of bits to be copied.
Start in output: starting position inside the logical output signal.
Flag: direct or inverse copy. Allowed values: min -1; max +1; default +1.

Logical Components
24.16 Integer to Logical Signal Conversion

(Absolute Value + Sign)
Component name: RIRC
This component performs an integer to logical signal conversion: it outputs
the binary representation of the integer parameter. The logical signal is
considered in absolute value plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs
- L_output: logical output signal
Parameters
Number: Integer number to be converted in binary representation.
Note
An error condition will be assumed if the integer parameter can not be
represented within the logical output signal: the signal level is too small.

(Two's Complement)
Component name: RIRC2
considered in two's complement representation.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Number: integer number to be converted in binary representation.
Note
represented within the logical output signal: the signal level is too small.

Integer to Logical Signal Conversion with Chosen Operating Levels (Two's Complement)

with Chosen Operating Levels (Two's
Complement)
Component name: RIRC2X
This function performs an integer to logical signal conversion: it outputs the
binary representation of the integer parameter. The logical signal is
considered in two's complement representation.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Operating levels: effective number of level to be used in the output logical
signal.
Note
represented within the logical output signal: the number of operating levels is
too small.

Logical Components

with Chosen Operating Levels (Absolute
Value + Sign)
Component name: RIRCX
considered in absolute value plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Operating levels: effective number of level to be used in the output logical
signal.
Note
represented within the logical output signal: the number of operating levels is
too small.

Logical Signal Multiplier (Absolute Value + Sign)
24.20 Logical Signal Multiplier (Absolute

Value + Sign)
Component name: RMUL
this component computes the product of the logical input signals and puts it
into the logical output signal. Input and output logical signal are supposed to
be in absolute value plus sign representation.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Note
The levels of logical signals can be different. An error will be assumed only if
overflow occur. Let NA, NB be the logical input signals levels and NO the
logical output signal level. OVERFLOW CAN NOT occur if NO >= NA+NB-1.
The user is advised to use levels so that NO >= NA+NA-1 as far as it is
possible.
24.21 Logical Signal Multiplier (Two's

Complement)
Component name: RMUL2
This component computes the product of the logical input signals and puts it
into the logical output signal. Input and output logical signal are supposed to
be in two's complement representation.
Inputs Outputs

signal
Note
The levels of the logical signals can be different. An error will be assumed
only if overflow occur. Let NA, NB be the logical input signals levels and NO
the logical output signal level. OVERFLOW CAN NOT occur if NO >= NA+NB-
1. The user is advised to use levels so that NO >= NA+NA-1 as far as it is
possible.

Logical Components
24.22 Logical Shifter

Component name: RSHF
This component places in the logical output signal the content of the input
logical signal shifted by Nshift positions. Nshift may be either positive or
negative:
Nshift POSITIVE ---> RIGHT SHIFT
Nshift NEGATIVE ---> LEFT SHIFT.
Outbound bits are lost.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Nshift: the absolute value represents the number of shift to be applied, the
sign the direction. Plus is for a right shift, minus for a left shift. Allowed
values: -NA,-NA+1,...,0, ...,NA-1,NA; default +1. Where NA are the levels of
Note
An error condition will be issued if the levels of the two logical signal are not
equal.

Circular Shifter
24.23 Circular Shifter

Component name: RSHFC
This component places in the logical output signal the content of the input
logical signal circularly shifted by Nshift positions. Nshift may be either
positive or negative:
Nshift POSITIVE ---> RIGHT SHIFT
Nshift NEGATIVE ---> LEFT SHIFT.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Nshift: the absolute value represents the number of shift to be applied, the
sign the direction. Plus is for a right shift, minus for a left shift. Allowed
values: -NA,-NA+1,...,0, ...,NA-1,NA; default +1. Where NA are the levels of
Note
An error condition will be issued if the levels of the two logical signal are not
equal.

Logical Components
24.24 Logical Splitter (1-to-2)

Component name: RSPLI2
It splits the logical input signal in 2 logical output signals.
Bits of the logical input signal are copied into the logical output signals
according to the following scheme.
L_input
1 1 NX = Level of L_input
NA = Level of L_output_1
2 2 NB = Level of L_output_2
NX = NA+NB
L_output_2
NB+1 NB NB
1
L_output_1
NX NA
Inputs Outputs
L_input: logical input signal to be L_output_1: logical output signal

split containing the upper part of the
input signal
L_output_2: logical output signal
containing the lower part of the
input signal
Note
The level of the logical input signal NX must be the sum of logical output
signal levels (NA and NB), i.e. NX = NA+NB.

Logical Splitter (1-to-3)

L_input
NB = Level of L_output_2
NC = Level of L_output_3
L_output_3
NX = NA+NB+NC
NC+1 NC NC
1
L_output_2
NC+NB
NB
NC+NB+1
1
L_output_1
NX NA
Inputs Outputs

input signal
L_output_2: second logical output
signal
input signal
Note
signal levels (NA, NB and NC), i.e. NX = NA+NB+NC.

Logical Components

L_input
NB = Level of L_output_2
NC = Level of L_output_3
L_output_4 ND = Level of L_output_4
NX = NA+NB+NC+ND
ND+1 ND ND
L_output_3
ND+NC
NC
ND+NC+1
1
ND+NC+NB L_output_2
ND+NC+NB+1 NB
L_output_1
NX NA

Logical Retiming with Delay Line
Inputs Outputs

input signal
L_output_2: second logical output
signal
L_output_3: third logical output
signal
input signal
Note
signal levels (NA, NB, NC and ND), i.e. NX = NA+NB+NC+ND.
24.27 Logical Retiming with Delay Line

Component name: DDELAY
This component performs a retiming of the input logical signal. Input signal is
sampled with a rate equal to the Baud Rate Rb at the time instant indicated by
the TSYNC parameters. Samples are hold for a symbol period and outputted
after NDEL symbols.
Inputs Outputs
Lin: logical input signal Lout: logical output signal
Parameters
Rb [Tb/s]: Baud rate. Allowed values: min 0 Tb/s; max 0.6*Simulation
Bandwith; default -.
TSYNC [ps]: Time instant within the symbol period in which the bits are
sampled. Allowed values: min 0 ps; max 1/Rb; default -.
NDEL [ps]: Delay expressed in number of symbols. Allowed values: min 0
ps; max -; default -.

25 Older Version
Components
This category groups several blocks which have been maintained only for
compatibility with older OptSim version, in order to allow projects developed
with previous version to be loaded also in the current version. Anyway, we
strongly encourage avoiding the use of these components in new projects,
and using the new LIB components instead.
Ideal clock generator (CLOCK2).
Electrical impulse generator (GENDE2).
Electrical triangle waveform generator (ISOTR2).
Electrical sawtooth generator (SAWTO2).
Electrical square wave generator (SQWAV2).
Electrical Gaussian noise generator (GAUSRN).
Pseudorandom logical source (RANBI2).

Older Version Components
25.1 Clock Generator

Component name: CLOCK2
Category: Older Version Components
This component simulates an ideal clock generator, whose period and offset
can be chosen by the user. In OptSim, Clock signals are a particular class of
electrical signals which are used for timing/synchronization purposes. See for
example the LIB component implementing a Sample & Hold (section 23.24).
This component is maintained for compatibility reasons only; when possible,
please use the component CLOCK.
Inputs Outputs
- Eoutl: electrical output
Parameters
Clock_Relative_delay [ps]: clock offset.
25.2 Electrical Impulse Generator

Component name: GENDE2
This component implements an electrical impulse generator, i.e. a component
that generates a train of electrical pulses spaced by the specified time period.
The duration of each pulses is exactly one simulation sample, thus depending
from the Simulation Bandwidth. See the Simulation Parameters description in
the User Manual.
please use the component GENDEL.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Interval_between_Pulses [ps]:period of the Delta train.
Amplitude [V]: peak amplitude of the generates pulse.
First_Pulse_Delay [ps]: pulses time offset.

Electrical Waveform Generator - Symmetric Sawtooth
25.3 Electrical Waveform Generator -

Symmetric Sawtooth
Component name: ISOTR2
This component generates an electrical waveform shaped as an Isosceles
triangle and periodically repeated.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Period [ps]: waveform period.
Initial_Time_Offset [ps]: initial waveform offset.
Amplitude_High [V]: waveform amplitude maximum value.
Amplitude_Low [V]: waveform amplitude minimum value.
25.4 Electrical Waveform Generator -

Asymmetric Sawtooth
Component name: SAWTO2
This component generates a sawtooth electrical waveform.
please use the component SAWTOO.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Slope [V/s]: slope of the sawtooth shape.

Older Version Components
25.5 Electrical Square Wave Generator

Component name: SQWAV2
This component generates an electrical square wave.
please use the component SQWAV.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Duty_cycle: square wave duty cycle.
Amplitude_High [V]: waveform amplitude maximum value.
Amplitude_Low [V]: waveform amplitude minimum value.
25.6 Electrical Gaussian Noise Generator

Component name: GAUSRN
This component implements a Gaussian noise generator.
please use the component GAUSRR.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Random_Generator_Seed: Integer number used as a seed to start random
number generation.
Mean [V]: mean value of the generated Gaussian distribution.
Standard_Deviation [V]: standard deviation value of the generated
Gaussian distribution.

Non Uniform Pseudorandom Source
25.7 Non Uniform Pseudorandom Source

Component name: RANBI2
This component implements a pseudorandom logical source where the "1"
and "0" bit probability can be set to any value in the range [0:1]. By setting
the logical level to N , the component generates a logical signals made up of
N statistically independent parallel bits.
This component is maintained for compatibility reasons only.
Inputs Outputs
- Lout: logical output
Parameters
Random_Generator_Seed: integer number used as a seed to start
pseudorandom bit generation.
Period [ps]: bit period.
Probability_1: any value between 0 and 1.

Compound Components
26 Compound
Components
This category groups several compound components.
Differential Phase-shift-Keying (DPSK) Transmitter (advanced)
RZ-DPSK Transmitter (advanced)
DQPSK Transmitter
RZ-DQPSK Transmitter
DQPSK Receiver (Gaussian)
DQPSK Receiver (Raised Cosine)

Differential Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced
26.1 Differential Phase-Shift-Keying

Transmitter - Advanced
Component name: DPSK_TX_adv
Category: Compound Components - Transmitters
This compound component model implements a detailed Differential Phase-
Shift-Keying (DPSK) transmitter which takes as input a differentially encoded
binary signal and produces a DPSK optical output signal. Figure 1 depicts the
model’s schematic.
Figure 1 DPSK_TX_adv compound component schematic
The model is composed of the following components:

• NRZ_driver
This component converts the input binary signal into an electrical
waveform. It is configured via the parameters Vdrive_lo – the signal
value for binary zeroes; and Vdrive_hi – the signal value for binary
ones.
• LPF_TX
This component implements a low-pass Bessel filter for modeling the
non-ideal characteristics of the binary-to-electrical conversion. It is
configured via the parameters filter_poles – the order of the Bessel
filter; and filter_BW_GHz – the filter bandwidth.
• Laser_source
This component models the transmitter’s cw laser source. It is
configured via the parameters wavelength_nm – the laser’s center
wavelength; and power_dBm – the cw laser power.

Compound Components
• MZM_phase
This component models a Mach-Zehnder modulator used to create the
transmitter’s phase-modulated output signal. It is configured via the
parameters MZM_Vpi – Vπ of the modulator; MZM_Von – the
modulator’s offset voltage; MZM_excess_loss_dB – the modulator’s
insertion loss; MZM_extinction_ratio_dB – the modulator’s extinction
ratio; and MZM_chirp_factor – the modulator’s chirp factor.
Inputs Outputs
input-data: input logical signal output-tx: output optical signal
Parameters
Vdrive_lo [Volts]: Minimum value of the driver electrical signal (binary zero
value). Allowed values: min -; max -; default 5.0.
Vdrive_hi [Volts]: Maximum value of the driver electrical signal (binary one
value). Allowed values: min -; max -; default –5.0.
filter_poles: Order of the low-pass Bessel filter. Allowed values: min 1; max
10; default 1.
filter_BW_GHz [GHz]: Bandwidth of the low-pass Bessel filter. Allowed
values: min 0; max BWVBS/4; default 10.0.
wavelength_nm [nm]: Wavelength of the cw optical source. Allowed
values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default 1550.0.
power_dBm [dBm]: Output power of the cw optical source. Allowed values:
MZM_Vpi [Volts]: Vπ of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed values: min
0; max -; default 5.0.
MZM_Von [Volts]: Offset voltage of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed
MZM_excess_loss_dB [dB]: Insertion loss of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator.
MZM_extinction_ratio_dB [dB]: Extinction ratio of the Mach-Zehnder
Modulator. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1000.0.
MZM_chirp_factor: Chirp factor of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed

Return-To-Zero Differential Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced
26.2 Return-To-Zero Differential Phase-

Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced
Component name: RZ_DPSK_TX_adv
This compound component model implements a detailed Return-to-Zero (RZ)
Differential Phase-Shift-Keying (DPSK) transmitter which takes as input a
differentially encoded binary signal and produces an RZ-DPSK optical output
signal. The RZ carving signal should be provided via the model’s electrical
input. Figure 1 depicts the model’s schematic.
Figure 1 RZ_DPSK_TX_adv compound component schematic
The model is composed of the following components:

• NRZ_driver
This component converts the input binary signal into an electrical
waveform. It is configured via the parameters Vdrive_lo – the signal
value for binary zeroes; and Vdrive_hi – the signal value for binary
ones.
• LPF_TX
This component implements a low-pass Bessel filter for modeling the
non-ideal characteristics of the binary-to-electrical conversion. It is
configured via the parameters filter_poles – the order of the Bessel
filter; and filter_BW_GHz – the filter bandwidth.
• Laser_source

Compound Components

• MZM_phase
transmitter’s phase-modulated output. It is configured via the
parameters MZM_Vpi – Vπ of the modulator; MZM_Von – the
modulator’s offset voltage; MZM_excess_loss_dB – the modulator’s
insertion loss; MZM_extinction_ratio_dB – the modulator’s extinction
ratio; and MZM_chirp_factor – the modulator’s chirp factor.
• MZM_carver
transmitter’s pulsed output (i.e., it generates the RZ output pulses). It
is configured via the parameters MZMcarver_Vpi – Vπ of the
modulator; MZMcarver_Von – the modulator’s offset voltage;
MZMcarver_excess_loss_dB – the modulator’s insertion loss;
MZMcarver_extinction_ratio_dB – the modulator’s extinction ratio; and
MZMcarver_chirp_factor – the modulator’s chirp factor.
Inputs Outputs
input-data: input logical signal output-tx: output optical signal

input-carver: input electrical signal
for RZ carving
Parameters
10; default 1.

Return-To-Zero Differential Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter - Advanced
MZM_Von [Volts]: Offset voltage of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed

MZM_chirp_factor: Chirp factor of the Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed
MZMcarver_Vpi [Volts]: Vπ of the carving Mach-Zehnder Modulator.
MZMcarver_Von [Volts]: Offset voltage of the carving Mach-Zehnder
Modulator. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 5.0.
MZMcarver_excess_loss_dB [dB]: Insertion loss of the carving Mach-
Zehnder Modulator. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 0.0.
MZMcarver_extinction_ratio_dB [dB]: Extinction ratio of the carving
Mach-Zehnder Modulator. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 1000.0.
MZMcarver_chirp_factor: Chirp factor of the carving Mach-Zehnder
Modulator. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 0.0.

Compound Components
26.3 Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-

Keying Transmitter
Component name: DQPSK_TX
Category: Compound Components – Transmitters
This compound component model implements a detailed Differential
Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying (DQPSK) transmitter which takes as input
encoded in-phase (P) and quadrature (Q) binary signals and produces a
DQPSK optical output signal. Figure 1 depicts the model’s schematic.
Figure 1 DQPSK_TX compound component schematic
The model is primarily composed of the following components:

• NRZ_driver_P and NRZ_driver_Q
These components convert the input binary signals into electrical
waveforms. They are configured via the parameters Vdrive_lo – the

Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter
signal value for binary zeroes; and Vdrive_hi – the signal value for
binary ones.
• LPF_TX_P and LPF_TX_Q
These components implement low-pass Bessel filters for modeling the
non-ideal characteristics of the binary-to-electrical conversion. They
are configured via the parameters filter_poles – the order of the Bessel
filters; and filter_BW_GHz – the filter bandwidths.
• Laser_source
• DQPSK_mod
This component implements the DQPSK modulation portion of the
transmitter. It is configured via the parameters MZM_Vpi – Vπ of the
various Mach-Zehnder modulators (MZMs) inside this component;
MZM_excess_loss_dB – the MZMs’ insertion losses;
MZM_extinction_ratio_dB – the MZMs’ extinction ratios; PM_Vpi – Vπ of
the phase modulator used to generate the additional phase shift
required for the quadrature signal; and PM_excess_loss – insertion
loss of the phase modulator. The component Phase_shift_bias provides
the Vπ/2 input required by the phase modulator.
Inputs Outputs
input-data-P: input in-phase logical output-tx: output optical signal

signal
input-data-Q: input quadrature
logical signal
Parameters
10; default 1.

Compound Components

PM_Vpi [Volts]: Vπ of the Phase Modulator. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 5.0.
PM_excess_loss [dB]: Insertion loss of the Phase Modulator. Allowed

Return-To-Zero Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter
26.4 Return-To-Zero Differential

Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying
Transmitter
Component name: RZ_DQPSK_TX
This compound component model implements a detailed Return-to-Zero (RZ)
Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying (DQPSK) transmitter which takes
as input encoded in-phase (P) and quadrature (Q) binary signals and
produces an RZ-DQPSK optical output signal. The RZ carving signal should be
provided via the model’s electrical input. Figure 1 depicts the model’s
schematic.
Figure 1 RZ_DQPSK_TX compound component schematic
The model is primarily composed of the following components:

Compound Components
• NRZ_driver_P and NRZ_driver_Q

These components convert the input binary signals into electrical
waveforms. They are configured via the parameters Vdrive_lo – the
signal value for binary zeroes; and Vdrive_hi – the signal value for
binary ones.
• LPF_TX_P and LPF_TX_Q
These components implement low-pass Bessel filters for modeling the
non-ideal characteristics of the binary-to-electrical conversion. They
are configured via the parameters filter_poles – the order of the Bessel
filters; and filter_BW_GHz – the filter bandwidths.
• Laser_source
• RZ_DQPSK_mod
This component implements the RZ-DQPSK modulation portion of the
transmitter. It is configured via the parameters MZM_Vpi – Vπ of the
various Mach-Zehnder modulators (MZMs) inside this component;
MZM_excess_loss_dB – the MZMs’ insertion losses;
MZM_extinction_ratio_dB – the MZMs’ extinction ratios; PM_Vpi – Vπ of
the phase modulator used to generate the additional phase shift
required for the quadrature signal; and PM_excess_loss – insertion
loss of the phase modulator. Note that the component
Phase_shift_bias provides the Vπ/2 input required by the phase
modulator.
Inputs Outputs
input-data-P: input in-phase logical output-tx: output optical signal

signal
input-data-Q: input quadrature
logical signal
input-carver: input electrical signal
for RZ carving
Parameters

Return-To-Zero Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Transmitter
10; default 1.
PM_Vpi [Volts]: Vπ of the Phase Modulator. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 5.0.
PM_excess_loss [dB]: Insertion loss of the Phase Modulator. Allowed

Compound Components

Keying Receiver - Gaussian
Component name: DQPSK_RX_gauss
Category: Compound Components - Receivers
Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying (DQPSK) receiver which takes as input a
DQPSK or RZ-DQPSK optical signal and produces decoded in-phase (P) and
quadrature (Q) electrical output signals. A Gaussian optical filter is used in
the receiver. Figure 1 depicts the model’s schematic.
Figure 1 DQPSK_RX_gauss compound component schematic
The model is composed primarily of the following components:

• OpFilt_gauss
This component implements a Gaussian optical filter. It is configured
via the parameters ofilter_order – the order of the filter; and
ofilter_BW_GHz – the filter’s bandwidth. The output of the filter is split
via the component OpSplit.
• DPSK_REC_P and DPSK_REC_Q
These components implement the Ideal Balanced DPSK receivers for
the in-phase and quadrature signals. They are configured via the
parameters channel_frequency_THz – the frequency of the optical
channel being detected; and MZI_bitrate_Gbps – the bit-rate of the
optical channel being detected.
Inputs Outputs

Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Receiver - Gaussian
input-signal: input optical signal output-rx-P: output in-phase

electrical signal
output-rx-Q: output quadrature
electrical signal
Parameters
ofilter_order: Order of the Super-Gaussian optical filter. Allowed values:
ofilter_BW_GHz [GHz]: Bandwidth of the Super-Gaussian optical filter.
Allowed values: min 0; max BWVBS; default: 50.0.
channel_frequency_THz [THz]: Frequency of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default: 194.0.
MZI_bitrate_Gbps [Gbps]: Bit-rate of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min -; max -; default: 10.0.

Compound Components

Keying Receiver – Raised Cosine
Component name: DQPSK_RX_rcos
Category: Compound Components - Receivers
Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying (DQPSK) receiver which takes as input a
DQPSK or RZ-DQPSK optical signal and produces decoded in-phase (P) and
quadrature (Q) electrical output signals. A Raised-Cosine optical filter is used
in the receiver. Figure 1 depicts the model’s schematic.
Figure 1 DQPSK_RX_rcos compound component schematic
The model is composed primarily of the following components:

• OpFilt_rcos
This component implements a Raised-Cosine optical filter. It is
configured via the parameters ofilter_rolloff – the rolloff parameter of
the filter; ofilter_alpha – the alpha parameter of the filter; and
ofilter_BW_GHz – the filter’s bandwidth. The output of the filter is split
via the component OpSplit.
• DPSK_REC_P and DPSK_REC_Q
These components implement the Ideal Balanced DPSK receivers for
the in-phase and quadrature signals. They are configured via the
parameters channel_frequency_THz – the frequency of the optical
channel being detected; and MZI_bitrate_Gbps – the bit-rate of the
optical channel being detected.

Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Receiver – Raised Cosine
Inputs Outputs
input-signal: input optical signal output-rx-P: output in-phase

electrical signal
output-rx-Q: output quadrature
electrical signal
Parameters
ofilter_rolloff: Rolloff parameter of the Raised-Cosine optical filter. Allowed
ofilter_alpha: Alpha parameter of the Raised-Cosine optical filter. Allowed
ofilter_BW_GHz [GHz]: Bandwidth of the Raised-Cosine optical filter.
Allowed values: min 0; max -; default: 50.0.
channel_frequency_THz [THz]: Frequency of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min flowSPT; max fupSPT; default: 194.0.
MZI_bitrate_Gbps [Gbps]: Bit-rate of the optical channel to detect.
Allowed values: min -; max -; default: 10.0.

Additional Components
27 Additional
Components
This category groups several models and features that have been added later
on to the standard components and compound components.
Linear Multimode Fiber (LINMMF).
BeamPROP Interface (GENDE2).
Karhunen-Loeve BER Estimation
Optical Matched Filter
Error Counter Block
Q, BER Sync Block
SPICE Interface for Rate Equation Laser (ISOTR2).

Extended Library of Predefined Components

Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift-Keying Receiver – Raised Cosine
Iteration Loop
Ideal Electronic Dispersion Compensator (EDC)
M-QAM Modulator
M-QAM Demodulator
Quadrature Mix
Single-ended 90-degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator (LO)
Single-ended 90-degree Hybrid with 4+4 Outputs
Single-ended 90-degree Hybrid without LO
Single-ended 90-degree Hybrid with 4+4 Outputs without LO
FFT OFDM
IFFT OFDM
Blind Receiver for Coherent Polarization-Multiplexed QPSK
PM-QPSK LMS Receiver with Training Sequence
PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver with Training Sequence
Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) Processor
Unbalanced Amplitude Mach-Zehnder Modulator
Delay 2 Signals

27.1 LINMMF Multimode Fiber Model

Component name: LINMMF
Category: Library - Miscellanea
27.1.1 Linear Multimode Fiber
The linear multimode fiber model is implemented as a standard lowpass filter

at baseband in input and output optical power with a Gaussian exponential
decay transfer function [1,2,3]. This model assumes the fiber has sufficient
mode mixing as Personick described. In the model, the wavelength-
dependent loss, connector efficiency, coupling loss and pulse broadening are
taken into account. For parallel fiber ribbons, the additional skew in the fiber
ribbon due to the different laser wavelengths in each of the channels is also
taken into account through the inclusion of chromatic dispersion in the
analysis.
In the model implementation, a constant is used to represent the fiber loss.
The user can set this constant according to experimental measurements or
specifications, or alternatively compute this constant for a particular fiber and
operational wavelength by:
L(λ ) = aλ−4 + b + c(λ )

where L is the loss, a is the Rayleigh loss coefficient, b is a factor which
accounts for the microbending loss, and c is a factor which account for OH-
absorption in the fiber.
The transfer function for the fiber model is given by
ln  2  
− 

σf  2
H( f ) = e 2
where σ is the rms impulse response width and σ = 0.1874/Bw where Bw
is the 3 dB optical bandwidth. The total rms impulse response width s is given
by
σ 2 = σ 2 mat + σ 2 mod
where the pulse broadening σ mat due to material dispersion and the pulse
broadening σ mod due to the modal dispersion are given by

LINMMF Multimode Fiber Model
σ mod = σ src LD
1
σ mat = γ cutback
1
Bim  
 L
where D is the fiber dispersion, L is the fiber length, σ src is the linewidth of
the source, Bim is the intermodal bandwidth of the fiber, and γ cutback is the
cutback factor that takes into account the mode coupling and mixing effects.
In addition to modeling the fiber itself, the linear multimode fiber model block
also models the connector and coupling losses at each end of the fiber ribbon
in the optical bus. These losses are specified explicitly as the connector loss
parameter.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
length [km]: length of fiber [Km]. Allowed values: min 0+; max -;
default 0.1.
atten [dB/km]: attenuation of fiber. Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 14.4.
disp [ps/nm/Km]: dispersion of fiber. Allowed values: min -; max -;
default 120.
linewidth [MHz]: source linewidth. Allowed values: min 0+; max -;
default 10.
band_im [MHz*km]: intermodal bandwidth of fiber. Allowed values:
min 0+; max -; default 160.
gamma_cutback [-]: cutback gamma parameter. Allowed values: min 0+;
connector_loss [dB]: optical loss at connectors. Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default 0.
References
[1] S. D. Personick, "Baseband linearity and equalization in fiber optic digital
communication systems," Bell Syst. Tech. J., vol. 52, pp. 1175-1195,
Sep. 1973.
[2] D. G. Duff, "Computer-aided design of digital lightwave systems," IEEE
Journal on Selected Areas in Communications, vol. SAC-2, no. 1, pp. 171-
185, January 1984.

[3] B. K. Whitlock, et al., "Computer modeling and simulation of the

Optoelectronic Technology Consortium (OETC) optical bus," IEEE Journal
on Selected Areas in Communications, vol. 15, no. 4, pp. 717-730, May
1997.

BeamPROP - OptSim interface
27.2 BeamPROP - OptSim interface

Component name: BEAMPROP
Category: Library - RSoft
Now RSoft Design Group’s most prominent tools in the system and device
levels, OptSim and BeamPROP, can be run together in a powerful co-
simulation.
Users may incorporate optoelectronic components modeled in BeamPROP or
another device-level tool in an OptSim simulation. This unique multi-level
simulation capability provides the best accuracy and efficiency in system
performance analysis involving complex designs.
The BEAMPROP optical device library block is used to represent any optical
WDM component designed and modeled at the device level in BeamPROP.
When the OptSim simulation reaches the BEAMPROP library block, the
specified BeamPROP simulation is launched. When a BeamPROP script is
called from OptSim, device-level simulations are performed over the specified
wavelength range to compute the transfer functions for each of the
input/output port pairs. A data file is then generated to provide OptSim with
these results for its system-level simulation of the link.
If the BeamPROP simulation results have already been computed, OptSim
uses the results from BeamPROP’s output file directly. In essence, this file
specifies a set of wavelength-dependent transfer functions for each of the
input/output port pairs.
At this stage, each input/output port pair must be represented by an
individual BEAMPROP block in OptSim.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
BeamPROP_dat_File_Name: Name of BeamPROP output file to be used for
the simulation.
In_port: Designated input port for components with multiple (n) input ports.
Allowed values: min 1; max n; default 1.
Out_port: Designated output port for components with multiple (m) output
ports. Allowed values: min 1; max m; default 1.
BeamPROP_scr_File_Name: Name of BeamPROP script to be used for the
co-simulation.

Example of BeamPROP output file read by OptSim, for a 1x4 optical

demultiplexer:
TransferMatrixFormat1 POWER
1 4 17 1.5468e-6 1.5532e-6
1.5468 3.179800E-002 2.820983E-003 1.860338E-003 2.845257E-002
1.5472 2.849191E-003 2.836565E-004 5.865859E-003 2.291091E-001
1.5476 2.496564E-003 4.385745E-004 3.564974E-003 4.496498E-001
1.5480 6.525730E-003 9.421748E-004 4.835790E-004 2.350315E-001
1.5484 1.004077E-003 3.557525E-003 4.539328E-002 3.154690E-002
1.5488 6.208908E-004 3.758255E-003 3.474639E-001 4.691162E-004
1.5492 1.575791E-003 5.184775E-003 6.926730E-001 2.592190E-003
1.5496 1.152947E-003 5.769285E-004 3.663816E-001 4.004664E-003
1.5500 1.540417E-003 4.313215E-002 5.186737E-002 1.194154E-003
1.5504 3.601556E-003 3.524147E-001 2.192575E-003 9.143347E-006
1.5508 1.508667E-003 6.835571E-001 3.178212E-003 1.652406E-004
1.5512 1.891655E-003 3.695162E-001 7.102588E-003 7.425158E-007
1.5516 3.530331E-002 5.308923E-002 1.628833E-003 1.554268E-003
1.5520 2.170363E-001 3.562837E-003 1.140417E-004 3.762664E-003
1.5524 4.346658E-001 5.135706E-003 5.922043E-004 2.776839E-003
1.5528 2.532988E-001 5.624058E-003 1.368737E-004 2.023842E-003
1.5532 3.315501E-002 2.872849E-003 1.811976E-003 2.750410E-002
The first row contains the number of input ports (n), followed by the number
of output ports (m), the number of wavelengths specified in the left column,
and the lowest and highest specified wavelength. This file is the output
created by a BeamPROP simulation based on the structure of the waveguide
simulated.
If the BeamPROP output file is not available, the OptSim simulation will pause
while launching the simulation of the specified BeamPROP script. When the
simulation is finished, the results will be passed to OptSim and the OptSim
simulation will continue. If the output results from BeamPROP are already
there, OptSim will use the results directly without launching BeamPROP.

27.3 Karhunen-Loeve BER Estimation

Component name: BER_KL
Category: Measurement Blocks
The purpose of this model is to implement an efficient semi-analytical technique, based on the
results described in [1]-[3], for the estimation of the Bit-Error Rate (BER) performance of
direct-detection receivers (see Fig. 1) or differential receivers based on the used of an
Asymmetric Mach-Zehnder Filter (AMZ) (see Fig. 2).
The model can for instance be used for performance evaluation of the following modulation
formats:
- Intensity-Modulation Direct-Detection (IMDD)
- Duobinary
- Differential Phase-Shift Keying (DPSK)
- Differential Polarization-Shift Keying (DPolSK)
- Differential Quadrature Phase-Shift Keying (DQPSK).
27.3.1 Model of the Direct-Detection Optical Receiver

The block models a complete direct-detecion optical receiver, including a pre-detection optical
filter, one photodetector of type PIN or APD, an electrical amplifier and a post-detection
electrical filter. The electric filter may be followed by a FIR filter equalizer with the following
transfer function:
N
∑c e
− j 2πfnTeq
H eq ( f ) = n (1)
n=− N
where 2N+1 is the total number of taps and Teq is the time delay between the taps.
Fig. 1: Direct-Detection receiver.
The noise sources taken into account are the following:

• ASE noise nASE(t), introduced by the optical amplifiers (EDFAs). It is modeled as additive
white Gaussian noise, characterized by its one-sided power spectral density N0.
• Thermal noise nsh(t) introduced by the electrical amplifier. It is modeled as additive white
Gaussian noise. The variance of noise [mV2] on the decision variable is equal to:
N0+∞
σ th2 = Rt2 ∫
2
H L ( f ) df (2)
−∞ 2
where HL(f) is the transfer function of the post-detection filter, N0/2 is the “input-referred”
bilateral power spectral density [(pA)2/Hz] and Rt is the overall RX transfer function, which
is generally a transimpedance [Ohm] that transforms the input current [mA] in an output
voltage [mV] 1.
• Shot noise nsh(t) introduced by photodetectors, modeled as a non stationary additive
white Gaussian random process with zero mean and signal-dependent variance. The
variance of shot noise on the decision variable is equal to [4]:
σ sh2 (t ) = G 2+ x qRRt2 ∫ he (τ ) PR (t − τ )dτ

2
(3)
where q is the electron charge, R is the responsivity of the photodetector, G is the

avalanche gain of the APD, hL(t) is the impulse response of the overall electrical filtering
(post-detection filter and equalizer) and PR(t) is the power of the filtered optical signal at
the input of the photodetector.
27.3.2 Model of Optical Binary Differential Receiver

The schematic of the receiver is shown in Fig. 2. The optical filter is followed by an AMZ filter,
with the following optical field transfer function:
±
H AMZ (f)=
1
2
[
1 ± γ e j (2πfTAMZ +δϕ ) ] (4)
where TAMZ is the optical (macroscopic) path difference within the interferometer (ideally equal
to the inverse of the symbol rate), δϕ is a phase-mismatch due to an additional microscopic
path difference inside the interferometer and γ <1 represents a finite extinction ratio. The ±
sign reflects the two interferometer output ports. The AMZ is then followed by a balanced
photo-detector (BPD) device.
1
Since the overall RX performance does not depend on the value of Rt, in the
simulation program it is assumed to be equal to 1 and neglected.

Fig. 2: Binary differential receiver.
The implemented algorithm considers the following possible imperfections of the receiver
components (see [3-5]):
• AMZ frequency offset ∆f, corresponding to the detuning between the laser frequency and
the Asymmetric Mach-Zehnder central frequency. It is related to the phase mismatch δϕ
through the relationship:
δϕ
∆f = RS (5)
2π
where Rs is the symbol rate (equal to the bit-rate in case of binary modulation).
• AMZ extinction ratio, related to the parameter γ through the following relationship:
 (1 + γ )2 
ε dB = 10 ⋅ log10  2
(6)
 (1 − γ ) 
• AMZ delay error, defined as the difference between the actual AMZ delay TAMZ and the
symbol time T=1/RS.
• BPD phase imbalance, defined as the propagation delay difference ∆τ between the two
arms of the BPD.
• BPD amplitude imbalance β, due to the difference between the responsivity values of the
two photodetectors:
R1G1 − R2G2
β= (7)
R1G1 + R2G2
The considered noise sources are the same as for the direct-detection receiver.

27.3.3 Model of DQPSK Receiver

The schematic of the receiver is shown in Fig. 3. It is composed by two differential receivers
(like the one shown in Fig. 2), with a differential optical phase between the AMZs arms equal
to ±π/4.
When DQPSK modulation is used, a differential pre-coder [5] must be inserted at the
transmitter in order to properly use the synchronization feature of the BER estimating block.
Fig. 3: DQPSK receiver.
27.3.4 Brief Description of the Semi-Analytical

Technique
The semi-analytical technique used to evaluate the BER performance of the system is based
on the following main steps:
1. The noiseless optical signal at the input of the receiver is generated through simulation;
2. The probability density functions (PDFs) associated with each detected bits of a PRBS of
length N=2n-1 is determined using the KLT technique described in the following (since
beat noise between signal and ASE is inherently non-stationary, the PDFs are different for
each bit);

3. The overall BER at a given decision threshold sth and sampling instant ts is evaluated as:
N
1
BER( sth , t s ) =
N
∑ P (s
k =1
0 ,1
e ,k th , t s + kT ) (8)
where T is the inverse of symbol rate and Pe ,k

0 ,1
(sth , t s + kT ) denotes the error probability
associated with the decision of the k-th bit (either a 0 or a 1):
∞ sth
Pe0,k ( s th , t ) = ∫ PDFk (s, t ) ds ,

sth
Pe1,k ( s th , t ) = ∫ PDF (s, t ) ds (9)
−∞
k
4. Joint minimization of (8) over the couple (sth,ts) is performed to obtain the BER at
optimum threshold and sampling instant.
27.3.5 Karhunen-Loeve Technique (KLT)

Neglecting thermal and shot noise, the noisy electrical signal at the output of the receiver can
be written as:
2
v (t ) = R1G1 e(t ) * ho (t ) * hL (t ) (10)
for the direct detection receiver, and as:
v (t ) =  R1G1 e(t ) * ho (t ) * h AMZ ( t )  * hL ( t )

+ 2 − 2
(t ) − R2G2 e(t ) * ho (t ) * h AMZ (11)
 
for the differential receiver, where e(t)=s(t)+nASE(t).
The exact PDFs of the random variable v(t) can be efficiently evaluated by using the method
described in [2], based on the Karhunen-Loève decomposition of signal and noise in frequency
domain. In the frame of this method, the signals in (10) and (11) are written as inverse
Fourier transform [3]:
v (t ) [
= F −1 {R1G1 E ( f ) H o ( f ) * E * ( − f ) H o* ( − f ) H L ( f )} = ]
(12)
= ∫∫ E ( f 1 ) K DD ( f 1 , f 2 )E * ( f 2 ) exp[ j 2π ( f 1 − f 2 )t ]df 1 df 2
for the direct detection receiver, and as:
v (t ) [
= F −1 {R1G1 E ( f ) H o ( f ) H AMZ
+ +*
( f ) * E * ( − f ) H o* ( − f ) H AMZ (− f ) H L ( f ) ]
[ −
− R2G2 E ( f ) H o ( f ) H AMZ −*
( f ) * E * ( − f ) H o* ( − f ) H AMZ ( − f ) H L ( f )}= ] (13)
= ∫∫ E ( f1 ) K diff ( f1 , f 2 )E * ( f 2 ) exp[ j 2π ( f1 − f 2 )t ]df1df 2

for the differential receiver, where:

K DD ( f 1 , f 2 ) = R1G1 H o ( f 1 ) H L ( f1 − f 2 ) H o* ( − f 2 ) (14)
K diff ( f1 , f 2 ) = R1G1 H o ( f 1 ) H AMZ

+ +*
( f 1 ) H L ( f1 − f 2 ) H o* ( − f 2 ) H AMZ (− f 2 )
(15)
− −*
− R2G2 H o ( f 1 ) H AMZ ( f 1 ) H L ( f1 − f 2 ) H o* ( − f 2 ) H AMZ (− f 2 )
E(f) is the Fourier transform of the unfiltered optical field corrupted by ASE noise.
It can be shown (see [2]-[3]) that the signals (12) and (13) can be written in the form:
v (t ) = ∑ bi (t ) + n i (t ) τ i
2
(16)
i
where bi(t) and vi(t) are the coefficients of the series expansion of the Fourier transform S(f)
and NASE(f) of the noiseless received signal s(t) and of the ASE noise random process nASE(t),
respectively :
bn (t ) = ∫ S ( f ) exp[ j 2πft ]φn* ( f )df

(17)
v n (t ) = ∫ N ASE ( f ) exp[ j 2πft ]φn* ( f )df
{φm(t)} is a set of orthornormal functions satisfying the following eigenvalue integral equation:
∫φ m ( f 2 ) K ( f1 , f 2 )df 2 = τ mφm ( f 1 ) (18)
where K(f1,f2) is as in (14) and (15) for direct detection and differential receivers respectively.
Using numerical integration algorithms (see [8], Chapter 4), the solution of equation (18) can
be reduced to the eigenvalue and eigenvector problem for an Hermitian matrix:
f MAX 2k
∫ φm ( f 2 ) K ( f 1 , f 2 )df 2 ≈ ∫ φm ( f 2 ) K ( f 1 , f 2 )df 2 ≈ ∑ φm ( x i ) K ( f 1 , x i ) (19)

− f MAX i =0
i−k
where x i = f MAX . The integration interval [-fMAX, fMAX] must be chosen in a way that the
k
integrand evaluated in f >fMAX is sufficiently small and does not affect the result anymore2. The
2
The criterion used in the simulation program consists in choosing fMAX such that both following
conditions are satisfied: |Ho(±fMAX)|<max{|Ho(f)}/100 (i.e. the extreme values in the matrix K are
sufficiently small) and fMAX < 0.25 k/TAMZ (i.e. one period of the AMZ transfer function is represented by
at least 5 frequency points).

choice of the number of integration points (2k+1) is a compromise between accuracy and
computation complexity3.
Equation (18) can thus be rewritten as:
2k
∑φ
i =0
m ( x i ) K ( x n , x i ) = τ mφ m ( x n ) n, m = 0,...,2k (20)
i.e., in matrix form:

K ⋅φ = τ ⋅φ (21)
with Ki,j=K(xi,xj), ϕij=ϕj(xi), τij=τiδi,j. Since K is Hermitian, the problem (22) is straightforward
to solve using the Jacobi routines in [8], Chapter 11.
Since nASE(t) is a white random process, it can be shown that the noise expansion coefficients
ni(t) are statistical independent Gaussian random variables with zero mean and variance N0τi.
Thus (16) represents a weighted sum of nonzero-mean squared Gaussian random variables,
whose moment generating function (MGF) is equal to [5]:
 z bi 2 τ i 
exp − 
n val −1
 1 + zτ i N 0 
h(t, z ) = ∏ (22)
i =0 (1 + zτ i N 0 )M
with M=1 or 2 for single or double polarization representation, respectively. Ideally, the
product in (22) should span from 0 to ∞ . In practice, only a finite number nval of eigenvalues
give a non-negligible contribution to the MGF evaluation4.
If also additive electrical noise sources are present (like shot or thermal noise), which are
statistically independent from the optical ASE noise, the overall moment generating function of
the decision variable can be evaluated by multiplying (22) by the MGF of a Gaussian random
process with zero mean and variance σ2(t)=(σsh(t))2+(σth)2, i.e.:
 1 
hel (t , z ) = exp  − σ 2 (t ) z 2  (23)
 2 
Using the steepest descent approximation method [7], the probability of error can be
evaluated as:
3
In the simulation program, a value of k equal to 50 has been adopted. It has been verified that, choosing
k as high as 100, would yield almost coincident results in most practical cases.
4
It has been verified that choosing nval as high as 30 is more than sufficient in all practical cases, thus we
adopted it in the simulation program.

exp[θ (t , z 0 )]
∞
Pe0,k ( sth , t ) = ∫ PDF (s, t ) ds ≈
sth
k
2πθ " (t , z 0 )
(24)
exp[θ (t , z1 )]
sth
Pei,k ( sth , t ) = ∫ PDFk (s, t ) ds ≈

−∞ 2πθ " (t , z1 )
with θ (t,z) defined as:
  1 2 2 
 exp[− zs th ]h(t ,− z ) exp  − 2 σ (t ) z  
θ (t , z ) = ln    (25)
 z 
 
θ ” is the second derivative of θ with respect to z and z0 and z1 are respectively the positive
and negative roots of the equation:
∂θ (t , z )
ϑ ' (t , z ) = =0 (26)
∂z
Equation (26) can be efficiently solved using the bisection method described in [8], Chapter 9.
Input signal
Noiseless optical signal s(t) at the input of the receiver, obtained through a VBS noiseless
simulation (single or double polarization).
Parameters
Modulation format (integer, range [1,4], default 1)
1: IMDD or Duobinary (the receiver is as in Fig. 1)
2: DPSK or other binary differential modulation format (the receiver is as in Fig. 2)
3: DQPSK, upper arm (the receiver is as in Fig. 3)
4: DQPSK, lower arm (the receiver is as in Fig. 3)
Samples per bit Ns (integer, range [1,Inf), default 40)
Number of samples per bit of the input optical signal. In general, it should be as high as 30 for
reliable estimation. If it is greater than 60, than sub-sampling is applied.
Number of bits Nb (integer, range [1,Inf), default 128)
Number of bits used for the BER evaluation (usually between 64 and 512, typically 128). The
total number of simulated bits has to be equal to at least Nb+10.
Bit rate RB (real, range (0,Inf), default 10., unit Gbit/s)
Bit rate [Gbit/s] used in the simulation.

Synchronization flag sync (integer, range [0,1], default 0)

If this flag is set to 1, the received signal is aligned with the (deterministic) transmitted PRSB
bit sequence defined by PRBS polynomial degree and number parameters as below.
PRBS polynomial degree (only if sync=1) (integer, range [5,28], default 7)
Degree of the PRBS generating polynomial (same as in “Data Source” block).
PRBS polynomial number (only if sync=1) (integer, range [1,18], default 1)
Number of the PRBS generating polynomial (same as in “Data Source” block).
Sampling instant shift (integer, range [-Ns/2,Ns/2], default 0)
Difference (in number of samples) between the actual sampling instant used for the BER
evaluation and its optimum estimated value. If sync=1, the optimum sampling instant is
evaluated through the alignment of the received signal with the known transmitted PRBS,
otherwise it is estimated by maximizing the eye opening.
ASE noise power spectral density N0 (real, range (-Inf,Inf), default 0., unit dB[mW/GHz])
One-sided ASE noise power spectral density in dB[mW/GHz].
Polarizer on X Axis Polarizer_Flag (Enum Type, [No, Yes], default No]
When this flag is set to Yes, the model takes into account only the X-polarization for signal and
ASE noise. This parameter is useful for POLMUX systems where the channels are separated
with a polarizer and at the same time the ASE noise is filtered out.
Thermal noise flag th_flag (integer, range [0,2], default 0)
This flag can assume three different values:
0: thermal noise is neglected
1: thermal noise is defines through its power spectral density
2: thermal noise is defines through its variance after the electrical filter
Thermal noise power spectral density N0/2 (only if th_flag=1) (real, range [0.,Inf),
default 0., unit pA2/Hz)
“Input-referred” thermal noise bilateral power spectral density in pA2/Hz (as usually found in
datasheets). The variance of noise on the decision variable is then equal to:
N0+∞
σ th2 = ∫
2
H L ( f ) df
−∞ 2
where HL(f) is the overall transfer function of electrical filtering.

Thermal noise variance (only if th_flag=2) (real, range [0.,Inf), default 0., unit mA2)
Variance of thermal noise on the decision variable.
Shot noise flag shot_flag (integer, range [0,1], default 0)
It is used to turn shot noise on (shot_flag=1) or off (shot_flag=0).
Photodiode 1 responsivity R1 (real, range (0.,Inf), default 1., unit A/W)
It is the responsivity of either the only photodiode for IMDD or the upper arm photodiode for
differential receivers.

Photodiode 1 avalanche gain G1 (real, range [1.,Inf), default 1., unit linear)
Avalanche gain of APD (linear). If a PIN is used, it must be set to 1.
Photodiode 1 excess noise factor x1 (only for APD) (real, range [0.,Inf), default 0. )
Excess noise factor of APD.
Photodiode 2 responsivity R2 (only for differential receivers) (real, range (0.,Inf),
default 1., unit A/W)
Responsivity of the lower arm photodiode.
Photodiode 2 avalanche gain G2 (only for differential receivers) (real, range [1.,Inf),
default 1., unit linear)
Avalanche gain of APD (linear) in the lower arm. If a PIN is used, it must be set to 1.
Photodiode 2 excess noise factor x2 (only for lower arm APD in differential receivers)
(real, range [0.,Inf), default 0. )
Excess noise factor of APD.
Optical filter type (kopt) (integer, range [-2,10], default 2)
-2: From file ‘optfil.DAT’ (baseband frequency in THz – double sided, square amplitude
in linear scale, phase in radians, at the beginning there can be comment lines starting
with #, and the data file has to be placed in the same folder as the project file or in
the result directory xv_sim_<project name>)
-1: Matched (rectangular in time)
0: No filter
1≤n≤8 : Supergaussian of order n
9: Lorentzian
n=10: Raised cosine
Optical filter bandwidth (real, range (0.,Inf), default 30., unit GHz)
If kopt≥0: -3dB optical filter bandwidth in GHz
If kopt=-1: inverse of the time duration of the rectangular pulse (in GHz)
If kopt=-2: scaling factor, i.e. the real number that specifies the expansion/stretch
factor in the frequency scale of the transfer function stored in the data file. This
parameter should be set to 1. when scaling is not required.
Optical filter roll-off (ony for kopt =10) (real, range [0.,1.], default 0.5)
Roll-off factor of the raised-cosine optical filter.
Electrical filter type (kel) (integer, range [-2,6], default 5)
-2: from file ‘elfil.DAT’ (frequency in GHz - only positive, square amplitude in linear
scale, phase in radians) that resides in the same folder as the project file or in the
result directory xv_sim_<project name>)
-1: Matched (rectangular in time)
0: No filter

1: Lorentzian
2≤n≤6 : Bessel of order n
Electrical filter bandwidth (real, range (0.,Inf), default 10., unit GHz)
If kel≥1: -3dB optical filter bandwidth in GHz
If kel=-1: inverse of the time duration of the rectangular pulse (in GHz)
If kel=-2: scaling factor, i.e. the real number that specifies the expansion/stretch
factor in the frequency scale of the transfer function stored in the data file. This
parameter should be set to 1. when scaling is not required.
AMZ frequency offset (real, range [-50,.50.], default 0.)
Detuning ∆f between the laser frequency and the Asymmetric Mach-Zehnder central frequency
(expressed in %RB).
AMZ extinction ratio (real, range (0.,Inf), default 1000., unit dB)
Extinction ratio ε in dB of AMZ.
BPD phase imbalance (real, range (-Inf,Inf.), default 0.)
Propagation delay difference ∆τ between the two arms of the BPD (expressed in %T, with
T=1/RS).
AMZ delay mismatch (real, range (-Inf,Inf.), default 0.)
AMZ delay error, defined as:
δT TAMZ − T
⋅ 100 = ⋅ 100
T T
where TAMZ is the delay introduced by the AMZ and T is the inverse of the symbol rate.
Equalizer flag (equal) (integer, range [0,1], default 0)

If it is set to 1, an FIR filter equalizer is inserted after the post-detection filter. The transfer
function of the filter is equal to:
N
∑c
− j 2πfnTeq
H( f ) = N e
n=− N
Taps delay (only if equal=1) (real, range (0.,Inf.), default 100.)

Time delay Teq between the equalizer taps (expressed in percentage of symbol time T).
Equalizer taps coefficients (real, range (0.,Inf), default
0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,1.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.)
If equal=1, the last 15 parameters represent the 15 taps coefficients of the FIR filter (N=7),
ranging from c-7 to c7.

References
[1] G. Bosco and R. Gaudino, “Towards new semi-analytical techniques for BER estimation in
optical system simulation”, National Fiber Optics Engineers Conference NFOEC 2000,
Denver (CO), Tuesday Sess. E1, USA, Aug. 2000.
[2] J.S. Lee and C.S. Shim, “Bit error rate analysis of optically preamplified receivers using an
eigenfunction expansion method in optical frequency domain”, IEEE Journal of Lightwave
Technology, vol. 12, pp. 1224-1229, 1994.
[3] A.H. Gnauck, P.J. Winzer, “Optical Phase-Shift-Keyed Transmission,” IEEE Journal of
Lightwave Technology, vol. 23, n. 1, pp. 115-130, Jan. 2005.
[4] L. Kazovsky, S. Benedetto and A. Willner, Optical Fiber Communication Systems, Artech
House, 1996.
[5] G. Bosco and P. Poggiolini, “On the Joint Effect of Receiver Impairments on Direct-
Detection DQPSK systems”, to be published in IEEE Journal of Lightwave Technology in
2006.
[6] A.M. Mathai, S.B. Prevost, Quadratic forms in random variables, New York, Marcel
Dekker, 1992, Chapter 3.
[7] C. W. Helstrom, “Distribution of the Filtered Output of a Quadratic Rectifier Computed by
Numerical Contour Integration”, IEEE Trans. on Inform. Theory, vol.IT-32, no. 4, Jul.
1986, pp. 450-463
[8] W.H. Press, S.A. Teukolsky, W.T. Vetterling, Numerical recipes in C, Cambridge University
Press, 1992.

Optical Matched Filter
27.4 Optical Matched Filter

Component name: OPT_MAT_FIL
Category: Filters
This model implements an optical matched filter. Given a signal s(t), its matched filter has an
impulse response function given by h(t)=s*(t0-t). It is known from the general theory of digital
communications that, when the signal s(t) is received together with white Gaussian noise, the
matched filter gives at its output the maximum signal-to-noise ratio among all possible filters.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
Center Frequency or Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the center frequency f0
of the filter transfer function. Allowed values: min (fsim_THz-BWsim_THz)/2;
max (fsim_THz+BWsim_THz)/2; default fsym_THz.
Squared Pulse Duration [ps]: the squared pulse duration of the matched
filter. In a digital transmission environment it is usually given by the inverse
of the system bit rate. Allowed values: min >0; max -; default: 100.
Amplitude Plot: Toggle to plot or not to plot. Allowed values: yes or no;
default: no

27.5 The Error Counter Block

Component name: BERCOUNT
Category: Measurement Blocks
This model implements an error counter. Given the incoming signal s(t), the
model counts the errors in the time window defined by start and end time.
The signal is compared with the PRBS having the polynomial degree and
number specified by the user.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Start Time [ps]: the start time for measurement. Allowed values: min 0;
max simulation time; default 0.
End Time [ps]: the stop time for measurement. Allowed values: min 0; max
simulation time; default simulation time.
Samples per Bit: Number of samples per bit.
PRBS Polynomial Degree: the degree of PRBS polynomial. Allowed values:
PRBS Polynomial Number: the number of PRBS polynomial. Allowed

The Q, BER Sync Block
27.6 The Q, BER Sync Block

Component name: QBERSYNC
Category: Measurement Block
This block synchronizes the incoming signal s(t) with the PRBS having
polynomial degree and number specified by the user, than calculates its
performance in terms of optimum Q.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical -
Parameters
Start Time [ps]: the start time for measurement. Allowed values: min 0;
max simulation time; default 0.
End Time [ps]: the stop time for measurement. Allowed values: min 0; max
simulation time; default simulation time.
Samples per Bit: Number of samples per bit.
Pattern Length: the length of PRBS polynomial. Allowed values: min 1; max
5; default 3.
PRBS Polynomial Degree: the degree of PRBS polynomial. Allowed values:
PRBS Polynomial Number: the number of PRBS polynomial. Allowed
Window of Q Evaluation [% of Bit Rate]: the window for evaluation of
the Q-factor. Allowed values: min 0; max 100; default 0.2.

27.7 SPICE interface for Rate equation

laser
From a laser data sheet, the user can find the best mathematical model (rate
equation) using the Best-Fit Laser Toolkit. From the rate equation model the
user can translate the model into an equivalent circuit (SPICE format) that
can be simulated in the electrical domain.
• Unique laser model shared between electrical and optical simulation
• Accurate laser opto-electrical model (Rate Equation based)
• Effective aid to laser driver design
• Simulation of the TRUE driving conditions of the laser
• Predict how different driver settings affect performance of the entire
system
• Driver settings directly influence the pulse distortion due to chromatic
dispersion in the fiber
• Include investigation of SI and EMI phenomena
27.7.1 Laser modeling
The OptSim SPICE interface is based on the laser mathematical modeling

through coupled rate equations. Both the OptSim rate equation laser block
and the electrical circuit generated by the SPICE interface share the same
rate equations, allowing to simulate the laser behavior in the optical domain
through OptSim and in the electrical domain through SPICE 3 or any other
EDA tool compatible with such a format.
27.7.2 OptSim rate equation laser
The OptSim rate equation laser block, in order to simulate the optical
behavior of the laser, solves the following rate equations:

SPICE interface for Rate equation laser
dN I
= − GS − γ e N
dt q
dS
= (G − γ ph )S + Rsp
dt
S
Pl =
θ
 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
Pout = Coupl  Pl + Cnl 2 Pl + Cnl 3 Pl + Cnl 4 Pl + Cnl 5 Pl 
 2 6 24 120 
with:
Γvgr a
G= (N − N 0 ) − G p S
Vact
2
1 N  N  −12
γe = = A+ B + C   10
τe Vact  VVact 
1
γ ph =
τ ph
1
τ out =
rate
Bβ sp
Rsp = N2
Vact
c
v gr =
µ gr
τ out
θ=
hf 0
where:

Vact is the waveguide volume [m3]
τ ph is the photon lifetime in the cavity [s]
rate is the output face photon output rate [s-1]
N0 is the carrier density at transparency [m-3]
a is the gain constant [m2]
Gp is the optical gain vs. photon number slope [s-1]
C is the Auger carrier recombination factor [m6s-1]
B is the spontaneous carrier recombination factor [m3s-1]
A is the nonradiative carrier recombination factor [s-1]
β sp is the spontaneous emission factor
βc is the linewidth enhancement factor
Γ is the field confinement factor
µg is the group index
C nl 2 is the order 2 non-linear coefficient [W-1]
Coupl is the fiber coupling efficiency
For a more detailed description of the rate equation parameters see the
corresponding section on the Rate Equation Laser help.
27.7.3 Laser rate equation electrical circuit
To avoid non-real solutions for the laser rate equations, the following
transformations are applied:

V
nϕ T
N = Nee
Pl = (m + δ )
2
where:
kT
ϕT =
q
N e : charge density
δ : small constant greater than zero
Substituting the above transformations into the laser rate equation:
N e nϕT dV I N e  nϕT  N
V V
2  Γv gr a 
e = − e − 1 − e − Rw 2 (ΘI 1 ) − θ (m + δ )  [(ΘI1 ) − N 0 ] − G P 
nϕ T dT q τ n   τ n  Vact 
2(m + δ )
dm
=−
(m + δ )2 + 1 Bβ sp N 2 + (m + δ )2  Γv gr a [(ΘI ) − N ] − G 
 1 0 P
dt τp θ Vact  Vact 
Pl = (m + δ )
2
where:
1
τn =
A
2
N  N  −12
Rw 2 ( N ) = B + C   10
Vact V
 act 
N = ΘI1

τn
Θ=2
q
Mapping the above equations on the electrical circuit of Figure 1.1 //ET, they
can be solved with SPICE (or any other EDA tool compatible with such a
grammar) without introducing any approximation.
Figure 1.1 Electrical circuit mapping the laser rate equations
The SPICE diode model level 1 is described by the following equations:
 V  dV
I D = I S e nϕ T − 1 + (Cd + C j )
  dt
where:

V
I
Cd = tt s e nϕ T
nϕT
C j0
Cj = m
 V 
1 − 
 ϕ0 
The electrical circuit equations are the following:
I = I T 1 + I D 2 + I C 2 + Br1 + Bs1
I T 1 = I D1 + I C1
dm m
C ph + = Br 2 + B s 2
dt R ph
C ph = 2τ p
R ph = 1Ω
Ne  nVϕ 
I D1 = e T − 1
Θ  
Ne  nVϕ 1 nϕ T dV 
V
ID2 =  e T
− 1 + 2τ n e 
Θ  nϕT dT 
1
τn =
A
2τ n
Θ=
q
tt = 2τ n
Ne
I C1 = I C 2 =
Θ

Br1 = q Rw 2 ( N ) = q Rw 2 (ΘIT 1 )
2  Γv a 
Bs1 = q θ (m + δ )  gr [(ΘI1 ) − N 0 ] − GP 
 Vact 
τ p 1 Bβ sp 2 τ p 1 Bβ sp
Br 2 = N = (ΘIT 1 )2
θ (m + δ ) Vact θ (m + δ ) Vact
 Γv a 
Bs 2 = τ p (m + δ ) gr [(ΘI1 ) − N 0 ] − GP  − δ
 Vact 
Moreover δ is assumed equal to zero and Ne is determined in order to

obtain the laser junction forward voltage specified by the user:
δ =0
N
Ne = th
V forward
nϕT
e
where:
Vact
N th = N 0 +
c
τ ph Γ a
µg
Finally, B pf allows viewing the laser output power in form of a voltage at the
node pf.
The above electrical circuit is the model of the laser junction. The packaging
effects are modeled through the bonding inductance Lb , the parasitic
capacitance C p and the series resistance Rs

Figure 1.2 Electrical circuit modeling the laser package
27.7.4 Using the Laser SPICE Interface
The Laser SPICE Interface is a new capability of the OptSim Best Fit Laser
Toolkit, accessible under the tab named Laser Spice Circuit.
Using the Best Fit Laser Toolkit it is possible to get the rate equations
parameters starting from the laser datasheet. Then the Laser SPICE interface
allows generating the circuit to simulate the fitted laser in the electrical
domain. This circuit can be used with any EDA tool compatible with the SPICE
3 grammar.
To generate the laser circuit file, click the button on the toolbar with a blue
laser on it (the color blue indicating the electrical domain) or select the menu
Spice – Generate. On the File Selection window choose the laser name.
A file with the chosen name followed by the extension .cir is generated. It
contains two distinct electrical sub-circuits, the first one modeling the laser
junction only (designated by the chosen file name followed by the extension
j), and the second one modeling the laser junction and the packaging
(designated by the chosen file name).
Laser SPICE circuit Example:

************************************************************************
*
* Laser Advanced Nonlinear Spice Circuit: laser
*
* Automatically generated by the OptSim Best Fit Laser Toolkit
*
************************************************************************
.subckt laserj pj nj pf
************************************************************************
D1 pj nt1 d1mod

Ic1 pj nt1 3.978449e-017

Vt1 nt1 nj 0
D2 pj nj d2mod
Ic2 pj nj 3.978449e-017
Br1 pj nj i = i(Vt1)*i(Vt1) * (9.986410e+001 + 7.479629e+003 *i(Vt1))
Bs1 pj nj i = v(m) * v(m) *
+ (1.040378e+003 * i(Vt1) - 4.167176e+000 +
+ -1.166294e+001 * v(m) * v(m))
Rph m 0 1
Cph m 0 4.000000e-012
Br2 0 m i = 5.388272e-004 * i(Vt1) * i(Vt1) / v(m)
Bs2 0 m i = v(m) *
+ (2.806735e+002 * i(Vt1) - 1.124222e+000 +
+ -3.146431e+000 * v(m) * v(m))
Bpl pl 0 v = v(m) * v(m)
Bpf pf 0 v = ((((0.000000e+000
+ * v(pl) + 0.000000e+000)
+ * v(pl) + 0.000000e+000)
+ * v(pl) + 0.000000e+000)
+ * v(pl) + 3.000000e-001)
+ * v(pl)
.ends laserj
.model d1mod D Is = 3.978449e-017 n = 2
.model d2mod D Is = 3.978449e-017 n = 2 tt = 4.000000e-009
************************************************************************
.subckt laser p n pf
************************************************************************
Lb p pc 3.000000e+000 n
Cp pc n 1.800000e+000 p
Rs pc pt1 2.500000e+001
Vt1 pt1 pj 0
Xlaserj pj n pf laserj
BOS os 0 v = i(Vt1)
.ends laser
************************************************************************
In the laser junction sub-circuit, the nodes pj and nj represent the electrical
connections, while the voltage at the node pf represents the output power.
In the packaged laser sub-circuit, the nodes pj and nj represent the electrical
connections, the voltage at the node pf represents the output power and the
voltage at the node os indicates the current flowing through the laser
junction. This is important when using the results from an EDA tool simulation
of the packaged laser: To reproduce the exact driving conditions of the rate
equation laser in an OptSim simulation, this current must be used for driving
the laser diode.

Fig 1.3 The user interface for generating a SPICE circuit
Parameters
Laser Forward Voltage [V]: Allowed values: min 0+; max -; default 1.7 V.
Lb Bonding Inductance [nH]: Allowed values: min 0+; max -; default 3
nH.
Cp Parasitic Capacitance [pF]: Allowed values: min 0+; max -; default 1.8
pF.
Rs Series Resistance [Ohm]: Allowed values: min 0+; max -; default 25
Ohm.
Generate test circuit file: This option allows the user to generate a test file
named Test followed by the name chosen for the laser, to test the laser on
DC operation with a current ranging from 0 to 100 mA.

References
[1] Pablo V. Mena et al, “Rate-Equation-Based Laser Models with a
Single Solution Regime”, JOURNAL OF LIGHTWAVE TECHNOLOGY,
VOL. 15, NO. 4, APRIL 1997 717

Extended library of predefined components
27.8 Extended library of predefined

components
OptSim includes a wide selection of predefined components ready to select
for users who do not want to customize or go deeply into the design of
certain components. The enhanced library includes predefined laser diodes for
direct modulation (Fabry-Perot lasers, DBR lasers and VCSELs), EDFA models
(980 nm pump, 1480 nm pump, L-band) with typical gain and noise behavior
and a selection of predefined SOAs (with various typical gain and speed). All
these components are accompanied by OptSim examples.
27.8.1 Predefined VCSEL Models:

All the predefined VCSEL models are directly available in the list of “Available
lasers”.
yy_Thin_oxide_AlGaAs_VCSEL: VCSEL model based on a thin-oxide-

apertured AlGaAs structure presented by Thibeault et al. in [6]. This 3.1-µm
diameter thin-oxide-apertured device is composed of an Al0.9Ga0.1As-GaAs p-
type DBR, three In0.17Ga0.83As-GaAs quantum wells, an Al0.3Ga0.7As cavity and
an AlAs-GaAs n-type DBR.

yy_Sel_oxide_AlGaInP_VCSEL: VCSEL model based on a selectively

oxidized AlGaInP-based 683-nm structure with a 3 µm x 3 µm presented by
Crawford et al. in [3]-[4]. This device consists of compressively-strained
InGaP quantum wells, AlGaInP barrier and cladding layers, and AlGaAs
graded DBR’s.
yy_Predefined_VCSEL: VCSEL model based on the physical parameter set
presented by P. Mena and J. Morikuni in [1] and suitable for a typical VCSEL
laser.
yy_Bottom_emitting_AlGaAs_VCSEL: VCSEL model of a 863-nm bottom-
emitting AlGaAs structure presented by Ohiso et al. in [5]. This 16-µm
diameter device was grown on an Al0.1Ga0.9As substrate and consists of a Si-
doped Al0.15Ga0.85As-AlAs, GaAs-Al0.2Ga0.8As n-type DBR, six quantum wells,
and a C-doped Al0.15Ga0.85As-Al0.5Ga0.5As-AlAs p-type DBR.
yy_Index_guided_InGaAs_VCSEL: VCSEL model based on an index-
guided, vertically contacted InGaAs structure presented by Scott et al. in [2].
The device has a 100-µm2 area and is composed of GaAs-AlAs DBR mirrors,
three In0.2Ga0.8As quantum wells and Al0.2Ga0.8As confinement layers. Lateral
carrier confinement is provided through an etched-mesa design.

27.8.2 New Predefined Rate Equation Laser Models
yy_Fabry_Perot_2_5G: Model based on data sheet of NEC mini-DIL 2.5

Gb/s 1310 nm Fabry Perot laser.
yy_Fabry_Perot_10G: Model based on preliminary data sheet of Archcom’s
10 Gb/s 1310 nm FP laser
yy_Agere_D1861C: Model based on data sheet of Agere’s 10 Gb/s 1310 nm
DFB laser
yy_Fujitsu_5F10NP_std: Model based on data sheet of Fujitsu’s 10 Gb/s
1550 nm DFB laser

27.8.3 Saturable Electrical Amplifier

Component name: Saturation_El_Amp
Category: Compound component
This component reproduces the behavior of an electrical amplifier with a
nonlinear response due to saturation.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Gain [dB]: Small-signal amplifier gain Allowed values: min 0; max -;
default 20.
Linear_level_AU [a.u.]: Electrical signal output level up until which the
response is linear. Allowed values: min -; max -; default 10.
Saturation_level_AU [a.u.]: Electrical output signal saturation level.
27.8.4 Saturable PIN Photodiode

Component name: Saturation_PIN_diode
Category: Compound component
This component reproduces the behavior of an electrical amplifier with a
nonlinear response due to saturation.
Inputs Outputs
Optical Electrical
Parameters
Dark_current_nA [nA]: Dark current of the PIN photodiode Allowed values:
min 0; max -; default 0.1.
Photodiode_bandwidth_GHz [GHz]: Electrical bandwidth of the
photodiode Allowed values: min -; max -; default 20.
Responsivity [-]: Responsivity of the photodiode Allowed values: min 0;
max -; default 0.8.
Linear_level_mW [mW]: Optical input power up until which the photodiode
response is linear. Allowed values: min 0; max -; default 10.
Saturation_level_mW [mW]: Optical input saturation level. Allowed
values: min Linear_level_mW; max -; default 20.

27.8.5 Predefined Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers

Component name: EDFA_Wavelength_Gain_Type
Category: Compound components
These predefined EDFAs enables the user to choose from a set of typical
erbium-doped fiber amplifiers with a realistic gain and noise spectrum in the
specified bandwidth. Both 980 nm-pumped and 1480 nm-pumped amplifiers
are available.
EDFA_980_10dBFixedGain: based on OFS HE980 EDF with 10 dB average
gain in 1538-1562 nm bandwidth
EDFA_980_10dBsaturableGain: based on OFS HE980 EDF with 25 dB
unsaturated gain and 10 dB average gain at input power of 3 dBm in 1538-
1562 nm bandwidth.
EDFA_980_20dBFixedGain: based on OFS MP980 EDF with 20 dB average
EDFA_980_20dBsaturableGain: based on OFS MP980 EDF with 30 dB
unsaturated gain and 20 dB average gain at input power of 0 dBm in 1542-
1558 nm bandwidth
EDFA_1480_10dBFixedGain: based on OFS 1480 EDF with 10 dB average
EDFA_LBand_10dBGain: based on OFS LSL EDF (L-Band EDFA) with 10 dB
average gain in 1575-1600 nm bandwidth
27.8.6 Predefined Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers

Component name: SOA_ type
Category: Compound components
These two predefined SOAs enables the user to choose from a two typical
semiconductor optical amplifiers with realistic gain and saturation behavior.
SOA_17dB: This SOA provides a gain of 17 dB for a bias current of 100 mA.
SOA_26dB: This SOA provides a gain of 26 dB for a bias current of 150 mA.
Note that the gain is very sensitive to the parameter "spontaneous carrier
lifetime (ns)"

27.9 Iteration Loop

The iteration loops are used to indicate a section of the topology which is to be repeated
during the simulation the specified number of times as if it were actually that many sets of
component models connected together.
To use this model, select it from the GUI Toolbox and drop it in the design area. Right clicking
this model icon shows an option to look inside where the user lays out the desired section of
the main project that needs to be repeated. The type of input and output signals is the same.
Parameters
NumReps: number of repetitions.
References
[1] P. V. Mena, J. J. Morikuni, S.-M. Kang, A. V. Harton, and K. W.
Wyatt, “A comprehensive circuit-level model of vertical-cavity surface-
emitting lasers,” Journal of Lightwave Technology, 17, 2612 (1999).
[2] J.W. Scott, R.S. Geels, S.W. Corzine and L.A. Coldren, “Modeling
temperature effects and spatial hole burning to optimize vertical-cavity
surface-emitting laser performance”, IEEE J. Quantum Electron., vol. 29,
pp. 1295-1308, May 1993.
[3] M. H. Crawford, K. D. Choquette, H. Q. Hou, R. J. Hickman, K. M. Geib
and B.E. Hammons, “Visible VCSELs: Recent advances and applications”
in Proc. 1997 Dig. LEOS Summer Topical Meetings-Vertical_Cavity Lasers,
1997, pp.17-18
[4] M. H. Crawford, K. D. Choquette, R. J. Hickman and K. M. Geib, “InAlGaP
vertical cavity surface emitting lasers (VCSEL’s): Processing and
performance”, in Proc. Int. Conf. InP Related Mater., 1997, pp. 32-35
[5] Y. Ohiso, K. Tateno, Y. Kohama, A. Wakatsuki, H. Tsunetsugu and T.
Kurokawa, “Flip-chip bonded 0.85-µm bottom-emitting vertical-cavity
laser array on AlGaAs substrate”, IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett., vol. 8, pp.
1115-1117, Sept. 1996
[6] B. J. Thibeault, K. Bertilsson, E.R. Hegblom, E. Strzelecka, P.D. Floyd, R.
Naone and L. A. Coldren, “High-speed characteristics of low-optical loss
oxide-apertured vertical-cavity lasers”, IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett., vol.
9, pp. 11-13, Jan. 1997

DQPSK Precoder
27.10 DQPSK Precoder

Component name: dqpsk_precoder
This model is meant to be placed between the PRBS data sources and the
DQPSK modulator. It encodes the PRBS logical signal so that the signal at the
receiver will match the transmitted one.
Inputs Outputs
L_in1 : input logical signal L_out1: output logical signal pre-

containing the information bits from coded for DQPSK modulation
the first PRBS
L_out2: output logical signal pre-
L_in2 : input logical signal coded for DQPSK modulation
containing the information bits from
the second PRBS
Parameters
Number of samples: Number of samples per bit

27.11 Ideal Electronic Dispersion

Compensator (EDC)
Component name: EDC
Category:
27.11.1 Ideal electronic dispersion compensator

This component implements an ideal electronic dispersion compensator
with 4 electrical input signals and 4 electrical output signals. The input
signals must derive from a coherent homodyne receiver and are in-
phase and quadrature components on the two polarizations of the
incoming received optical field. The implemented EDC applies the
same amount of compensation on signals deriving from both
polarization components.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Compensating dispersion [ps/nm]: total amount of chromatic dispersion
to compensate expressed in ps/nm: min 0.0; max -; default 0.0
Compensating dispersion slope [ps/nm2]: total amount of chromatic

dispersion slope to compensate expressed in ps/nm2: min 0.0; max -;
default 0.0

Trans-Impedance Amplifier
27.12 Trans-Impedance Amplifier

Component name: TIA
Category: Electrical Amplifiers
27.12.1 Trans-Impedance Amplifier

Models the trans-impedance amplifier (TIA) as white Gaussian noise
added at the input signal – on the data sheet usually is given as Input
Referred Noise Density (IRND) – followed by an ideal gain defined
through the transimpedance Rt.
Bandwidth limitation is not included in the model, since a post-
detection filter is always needed that will limit the bandwidth.
The parameters Transimpedance (Rt) and Gain are related by the
following equation:
2
Gain = 10 ⋅ log10(R t )
The parameters Standard deviation (sigma) and and Input Referred
Noise Density (IRND) are related by the following equation:
(IRND ⋅ 1e -12 ) (BWVBS ⋅ 1e12 )

sigma = ⋅
2 0.8
where BWVBS is the simulation bandwidth.
Inputs Outputs
Parameters
Transimpedance (Rt) [Ohm]: min (0.0; max -; default 5.0e5
Gain: TIA gain that can be calculated from Rt: min -; max -; default
113.9794
Input Referred Noise density (IRND) [pA/sqrt(Hz)]: min 0.0; max -;
default 20.0
Standard deviation (sigma): TIA noise standard deviation that can be
calculated from IRND: min 0.0; max -; default 1.13137e-05

27.13 M-QAM Modulator

Component name: MQAMODIQ
Category: RF Mo-Demodulators
27.13.1 M-QAM Modulator Inphase-InQuadrature

Generates the in-phase and in-quadrature components of the input
logical signal modulated in the M-QAM format (Gray code). The
dimension of the input logical signal determines the modulation
number of levels. Logical signals having an odd number of bits are
permitted resulting in rectangular QAM modulation.
In particular:
• 2-bit logical signals produce QPSK
• 3-bit logical signals produce rectangular 8-QAM
• 4-bit logical signals produce 16-QAM
The output signal amplitude can be defined with the following criteria:
• RMS amplitude: root mean square amplitude calculated on
all the output symbols
• Average amplitude: linear average amplitude calculated on all
the output symbols
• Maximum amplitude: output symbols maximum amplitude
• Minimum distance: minimum amplitude difference between
output symbols
Inputs Outputs
Bit_in: input logical signal QAM_symbol_I: in-phase

containing the data bits: min level component of the M-QAM modulated
2; max level 10; default 4 electrical signal

M-QAM Modulator
QAM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature
component of the M-QAM modulated
electrical signal
Parameters
baud_rate [Gbaud/s]: M-QAM symbols rate expressed in Giga baud per
second: min (0.0; max -; default 2.5
amplitude_criterion: sets the amplitude criterion adopted for the
amplitude: rms_amplitude, average_amplitude, maximum_amplitude,
and minimum_distance
amplitude [Arbitrary Unit]: value of the envelope of the output signal: min
(0.0; max -; default 1.0
delay [ps]: delay in ps before sampling logical input signal: min 0.0; max -;
default 0.0

27.14 M-QAM Demodulator

Component name: MQADEMIQ
27.14.1 M-QAM Demodulator Inphase-inQuadrature

Takes the in-phase and in-quadrature components of a M-QAM
modulated signal at baseband, detects the string of bits (Gray code)
and returns an output logical signal. The dimension of the output
logical signal determines the modulation number of levels. Logical
signals having an odd number of bits are permitted resulting in
rectangular QAM modulation.
In particular:
• 2-bit logical signals produce QPSK
The input signal amplitude can be defined with the following criteria:
• RMS amplitude: root mean square amplitude calculated on
all the input symbols
• Average amplitude: linear average amplitude calculated on all
the input symbols
• Maximum amplitude: input symbols maximum amplitude
• Minimum distance: minimum amplitude difference between
input symbols
Inputs Outputs
QAM_symbol_I: in-phase Bit_out: output logical signal

component of the M-QAM containing the data bits: min level

M-QAM Demodulator
modulated electrical signal 2; max level 10; default 4

QAM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature
component of the M-QAM
modulated electrical signal
Parameters
baud_rate [Gbaud/s]: M-QAM symbols rate expressed in Giga baud per
second: min (0.0; max -; default 2.5
amplitude_criterion: sets the amplitude criterion adopted for the
amplitude: rms_amplitude, average_amplitude, maximum_amplitude,
and minimum_distance
amplitude [Arbitrary Unit]: value of the envelope of the input signal: min
(0.0; max -; default 1.0
delay [ps]: delay in ps before sampling logical input signal: min 0.0; max -;
default 0.0

27.15 Quadrature Mix

Component name: QUADMIXIQ
27.15.1 Quadrature Mix Inphase-InQuadrature

The Quadrature Mix model multiplies the in-phase input by a local
oscillator cos(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f c ⋅ t + ϕ ) and the in-quadrature input by the
quadrature oscillator (90 degrees shifted) − sin( 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f c ⋅ t + ϕ ) to

obtain in-phase and in-quadrature output signals.
The in-phase and in-quadrature signals are conveniently kept
separated. Given an input in-phase and in-quadrature baseband
signal, the user can RF modulate it at the carrier frequency combining
together the output signals using an electrical combiner. Moreover,
given an input RF modulated signal, the user can quadrature mix it
down at baseband using an electrical splitter to connect it to the input
signals, obtaining on output the in-phase and in-quadrature
components of the signal at baseband and their replica at 2 ⋅ f c that
can be filtered out using a low-pass filter centered at fc .
ein_I eout_quadmix_I
cos(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f c ⋅ t + ϕ )
90°
ein_Q eout_quadmix_Q
Inputs Outputs
ein_I: in-phase component of the eout_quadmix_I: in-phase

electrical signal component of the electrical signal
ein_Q: in-quadrature component of eout_quadmix_Q: in-quadrature
the electrical signal component of the electrical signal

Quadrature Mix
Parameters
frequency [GHz]: local oscillator (carrier) frequency: min -; max -; default
10.0
phase [Degrees]: local oscillator (carrier) phase: min -; max -; default 0.0

27.16 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid

including Local Oscillator
Component name: sc4by4rin_fil
Category: Optical Components
27.16.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid including local

oscillator
input
PBS output1
90 deg
hybrid output2
x pol
output3
90 deg
output4
hybrid
E LO (t ) = PLO ⋅ e j 2πf 0t ⋅ e jΦ LO ( t ) + nRIN (t ) y pol
Splitter
Laser 1->2
Fig. 1 Component layout
Fig. 1 pictorially describes layout of component. The input optical signal is

split into the two polarization components by a polarization beam splitter
(PBS). The two resulting signal components are sent to two 90 degree hybrid
that allows “beating” between local oscillator and incoming signals. Hence, on
the 4 output signals we obtain three terms:
1. One CW term (bias) proportional to the LO power
2. One term proportional to the power of incoming signal (interference)

Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator
3. One term proportional to the amplitude of incoming signal times the

amplitude of the LO: the useful part of the signal
Provided that the LO power is large with respect to the power of the
received signal, the interference terms are small, and, except for bias
terms, the output are proportional to the in-phase and quadrature
components of x and y component of received optical signals.
Inserting photo-detectors at the four output ports we can obtain four
electric current signals proportional to the mentioned four components of
received optical signal, allowing coherent detection.
• Local oscillator
It is an ideal laser affected by relative intensity noise (RIN) with
constant given phase. RIN is bandwidth limited white Gaussian noise
whose bandwidth limitation is emulated by a Bessel LPF with given -3
dB bandwidth and number of poles.
• Single ended 90 degree hybrid
The considered 90 degree hybrids are ideal components except for the
possible insertion of an angle inaccuracy that alters the component
behavior as described in Fig. 2
E RX (t ) E p (t )
90 degree
hybrid
E LO (t ) E q (t )
 E p (t ) 1 jε  1 e jϕc   E RX (t )
  = e  jϕ c ⋅ 
 E q (t ) 2 e 1   E LO (t )
3
ϕc = π −ε ε: angle inaccuracy
4
Fig. 2 Single ended 90 degree hybrid
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical

Parameters
Ex [deg]: inaccuracy angle of 90 degree hybrid on the x polarization. Ideal
hybrid correspond to Ex=0. min 0; max 90; default 0.
Ey [deg]: inaccuracy angle of 90 degree hybrid on the y polarization. Ideal
plo [dBm]: local oscillator power. min -; max -; default 0.
philo [rad]: local oscillator phase. min 0; max 3.14; default 0.
RIN [dB/Hz]: relative intensity noise of local oscillator. min -; max -;
default -150
NPOLES: number of poles of Bessel LPF used to emulate bandwith limitation
of LO RIN min 1; max -; default 5
BW_RIN [GHz]: -3 dB bandwidth of Bessel LPF used to emulate bandwith
limitation of LO RIN min 0.; max -; default 40

Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator with 4+4 Outputs

including Local Oscillator with 4+4
Outputs
Component name: sc4by8rin_fil
27.17.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid including local

oscillator with 4+4 outputs for balanced photodiode
configuration
input
PBS Output1,2
90 deg
hybrid Output3,4
x pol
Output5,6
90 deg
hybrid Output7,8
E LO (t ) = PLO ⋅ e j 2πf 0t ⋅ e jΦ LO ( t ) + n RIN (t ) y pol
Splitter
Laser 1->2

the 4+4 output signals we obtain three terms:


amplituted of the LO: the useful part of the signal
Inserting photodetectors at the four output ports 1,3,5,7 or 2,4,6,8 we
can obtain four electric current signals proportional to the mentioned four
components of received optical signal, allowing coherent detection. The
output ports 1-2,3-4,5-6,7-8 can be used in a balanced photodetector
configuration.
• Local oscillator
It is an ideal laser affected by relative intensity noise (RIN) with
constant given phase. RIN is bandwidth limited white Gaussian noise
whose bandwith limitation is emulated by a Bessel LPF with given -3
dB bandwith and number of poles.
E RX (t ) E p (t )
90 degree
hybrid
E LO (t ) E q (t )
 E p (t ) 1 jε  1 e jϕc   E RX (t )
  = e  jϕ c ⋅ 
(
Eq t  2) e 1   E LO (t )
3
4

Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local Oscillator with 4+4 Outputs
Inputs Outputs
Optical Optical
Parameters
plo [dBm]: local oscillator power. min -; max -; default 0.
philo [rad]: local oscillator phase. min 0; max 3.14; default 0.
RIN [dB/Hz]: relative intensity noise of local oscillator. min -; max -;
default -150
NPOLES: number of poles of Bessel LPF used to emulate bandwith limitation
of LO RIN min 1; max -; default 5
BW_RIN [GHz]: -3 dB bandwidth of Bessel LPF used to emulate bandwith
limitation of LO RIN min 0.; max -; default 40


with Local Oscillator Input
Component name: sc4by4_loin
27.18.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid with local

oscillator input
Signal Input
PBS Output1
90 deg
hybrid Output2
x pol
Output3
90 deg
hybrid Output4
y pol
Local Oscillator Input

Splitter
1->2

the 4 output signals we obtain three terms:
amplitude of the LO: the useful part of the signal

Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid with Local Oscillator Input

Inserting photo-detectors at the four output ports we can obtain four
electric current signals proportional to the mentioned four components of
received optical signal, allowing coherent detection.
E RX (t ) E p (t )
90 degree
hybrid
E LO (t ) E q (t )
 E p (t ) 1 jε  1 e jϕc   E RX (t )
  = e  jϕ c ⋅ 
 E q (t ) 2 e 1   E LO (t )
3
4
Inputs Outputs
Optical Signal Optical

Optical Local Oscillator
Parameters


with Local Oscillator Input and 4+4
Outputs
Component name: sc4by8_loin
27.19.1 Single ended 90 degree hybrid with local

oscillator input and 4+4 outputs for balanced
photodiode configuration
Signal Input
PBS Output1,2
90 deg
hybrid Output3,4
x pol
Output5,6
90 deg
Output7,8
hybrid
y pol
Local Oscillator Input

Splitter
1->2

splitted into the two polarization components by a polarization beam splitter
(PBS). The two resulting signal components are sent to two 90-degree hybrid
the 4+4 output signals we obtain three terms:
2. One term proportional to the power of incoming signal
(interference)
3. One term proportional to the amplitude of incoming signal times
the amplituted of the LO: the useful part of the signal

Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid with Local Oscillator Input and 4+4 Outputs
Inserting photodetectors at the four output ports 1,3,5,7 or 2,4,6,8 we
can obtain four electric current signals proportional to the mentioned four
components of received optical signal, allowing coherent detection. The
output ports 1-2,3-4,5-6,7-8 can be used in a balanced photodetector
configuration.
E RX (t ) E p (t )
90 degree
hybrid
E LO (t ) E q (t )
 E p (t ) 1 jε  1 e jϕ c   E RX (t )
  = e  jϕ c ⋅ 
 E q (t ) 2 e 1   E LO (t )
3
4
Inputs Outputs
Optical Signal Optical

Optical Local Oscillator
Parameters

27.20 FFT OFDM

Component name: FFTOFDM
27.20.1 FFT OFDM

The FFT OFDM model is the core of an OFDM receiver. It performs the
calculation of the FFT on the input baseband in-phase and in-
quadrature OFDM symbol, returning on output the corresponding
baseband in-phase and in-quadrature QAM signal.
QAM
time
QAM_baud_period
OFDM
time
OFDM_period = Subcarriers_number * QAM_baud_period
The parameters baud_rate, subcarriers_number and cyclic_prefix have

to match the corresponding parameters of the IFFTOFDM block in the
OFDM transmitter.
In case a training sequence has been transmitted, the model can
automatically synchronize the sampling instant on the OFDM symbol.
Also if a training sequence is received, the model can automatically
compensate for any loss and phase rotation (like phase mismatch
between transmitter and receiver RF carrier).

FFT OFDM
If the corresponding options are selected, the model reports on output

information on the optimal sampling instant, gain and phase rotation,
accessible from the menu View Data.
Inputs Outputs
OFDM_symbol_I: in-phase QAM_symbol_I: in-phase

component of the OFDM symbol component of the QAM symbol
OFDM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature QAM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature
component of the OFDM symbol component of the QAM symbol
Parameters
baud_rate [Gbaud/s]: QAM symbol rate: min (0.0; max -; default 2.5
subcarriers_number: number of subcarriers used for the OFDM modulation,
corresponding also to the number of input QAM symbols used to encode one
output OFDM symbol: min -; max -; default 0.0
cyclic_prefix [Fraction_baud_period]: length of the OFDM cyclic prefix
obtained copying circularly the portion of the OFDM symbol at its beginning:
min 0.0; max 1.0); default 0.25
auto_sync_training_sequence: controls the automatic synchronization of
the sampling instant at the beginning of the OFDM symbol using the
transmitted tranining sequence: No, Yes; default: Yes
training_sequence_amplitude: amplitude of the transmitted training
sequence: min (0.0; max -; default 1.0
restore_QAM_amplitude_and_phase: controls the automatic restoration
of the OFDM symbol amplitude and phase if auto_sync_training_sequence is
selected: No, Yes; default: Yes

27.21 IFFT OFDM

Component name: IFFTOFDM
27.21.1 IFFT OFDM

The IFFT OFDM model is the core of an OFDM transmitter. It performs
the calculation of the inverse FFT on the input baseband in-phase and
in-quadrature QAM signal, returning on output the corresponding
baseband in-phase and in-quadrature OFDM symbols.
QAM
time
QAM_baud_period
OFDM
time
OFDM_period = Subcarriers_number * QAM_baud_period
The user can specify the number of subcarriers used for the OFDM
modulation, and a cyclic prefix to mitigate the effect of the channel
dispersion
A training sequence can also be transmitted before the first OFDM
symbol, useful to automatically synchronize the receiver sampling
instant with the beginning of the OFDM symbols.

IFFT OFDM
Inputs Outputs
QAM_symbol_I: in-phase OFDM_symbol_I: in-phase

component of the QAM symbol component of the OFDM symbol
QAM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature OFDM_symbol_Q: in-quadrature
component of the QAM symbol component of the OFDM symbol
Parameters
baud_rate [Gbaud/s]: QAM symbol rate: min (0.0; max -; default 2.5
subcarriers_number: number of subcarriers used for the OFDM modulation,
corresponding also to the number of input QAM symbols used to encode one
output OFDM symbol: min -; max -; default 0.0
cyclic_prefix [Fraction_baud_period]: length of the OFDM cyclic prefix
obtained copying circularly the portion of the OFDM symbol at its beginning:
min 0.0; max 1.0); default 0.25
transmit_training_sequence: controls the transmission of the training
sequence before the first OFDM symbol: No, Yes; default: Yes
training_sequence_amplitude: amplitude of the training sequence, if
transmitted: min (0.0; max -; default 1.0

27.22 Memoryless Blind Receiver for

Coherent Polarization Multiplexed
QPSK Modulation
Component name: cma_phi4_Jdet
Category: Receivers
27.22.1 Memoryless blind receiver for coherent

polarization multiplexed QPSK modulation
This component recovers the Jones matrix of the channel and applies its
inverse in order to separate data flows transmitted on orthogonal
polarizations. Then it estimates the average local-oscillator-to-signal phase in
order to allow separation between in-phase and quadrature signals. After
application of these steps error counting is applied on the resulting 4 signals.
Resulting estimated BER is displayed for each data flow as well as averaged
and related to the aggregate flow.
In order to properly estimate a certain BER level we suggest to simulate a
proper amount of bits allowing to count some tens of error. For example, if
you expect to operate around BER=10-3 we suggest to simulate 215 or 216
symbols.
This is a memoryless receiver, therefore it recovers only polarization and
phase rotations.
• Constant Modulus Algorithm
The algorithm used to estimate the channel Jones matrix is the well
known Constant Modulus Algorithm (CMA) first described in [1]. This
component is based on the optical implementation described in [2]. As
this is a memoryless implementation each FIR filter has a single tap,
i.e., it is a scalar.
• Viterbi & Viterbi algorithm
After the application of the CMA, the local-oscillator-to-signal phase is
recovered using the well know algorithm proposed in [3], typically
called Viterbi & Viterbi algorithm (VVA). The resulting phase is
obtained through the average on the entire simulated time window.
Inputs Outputs
Optical

Memoryless Blind Receiver for Coherent Polarization Multiplexed QPSK Modulation
Parameters
NS: Samples per symbol: min 2; max -; default samples.
NDEG: Degree of the 4 PRBS: min 1; max 11; default 11.
NPOL1: Polynomial number of the PRBS transmitted on the first data
sequence default 1.
NPOL2: Polynomial number of the PRBS transmitted on the second data
sequence default 2.
NPOL3: Polynomial number of the PRBS transmitted on the third data
sequence default 3.
NPOL4: Polynomial number of the PRBS transmitted on the fourth data
sequence default 4.
NOTE: the 4 PRBS must be different one to the other one, i.e., NPOL1
≠ NPOL2 ≠ NPOL3 ≠ NPOL4
References
[1] D. N. Godard, "Self recovering equalization and carrier tracking in two-
dimensional data communication systems," IEEE Transactions on
Communications, vol. COM-28, No. 11, Nov. 1980, pp. 1867-1875.
[2] S. J. Savory et al., “Electronic compensation of chromatic dispersion using
a digital coherent receiver,” Optics Express, Vol. 15, No. 5, 5 March
2007.
[3] A. J. Viterbi and A. M. Viterbi, “Nonlinear estimation of PSK modulated
carrier phase with application to burst digital transmission,” IEEE
Transactions on Information Theory, vol. IT-29, No. 4, Jul. 1983, pp. 543-
551.

27.23 PM-QPSK LMS Receiver Based on

Training Sequence
Component name: rx_pmqpsk_ts

Category: Receivers
27.23.1 Receiver for Coherent Polarization Multiplexed

QPSK Modulation Based on Training Sequence and
LMS Algorithm.
This component recovers the Jones matrix of the entire channel, including the
phase mismatch with respect to the receiver local oscillator, and applies its
inverse in order to separate data flows transmitted on orthogonal
polarizations. Each element of the recovered matrix is actually a FIR filter,
therefore this component, beside recovering polarization and phase rotations,
compensates also for pattern dependent phenomena such as residual
chromatic dispersion and PMD.
After the application of the inverse Jones matrix, threshold decision is
performed on the 4 resulting signals and error counting is applied. Resulting
estimated BER is displayed for each data flow as well as averaged and related
to the aggregate flow.
The inverse Jones matrix is estimated during the training sequence whose
duration is defined by the parameter N_training_PRBS as an integer number
of PRBS. For instance, if PRBS_degree=11 and N_training_PRBS=5 the
training sequence corresponds to (211-1)⋅5=10235 symbols. Estimate of Jones
matrix is done using the Least Mean Squared (LMS) algorithm [1..4] and the
convergence parameter is specified by the variable LMS_factor.
After the training sequence, the Jones matrix is kept and BER is evaluated.
Therefore, in order to calculate the number of symbols used for the BER
estimation, the user must subtract to the number of simulated symbols the
duration of the training sequence. For instance, if we set the simulation to
75771 symbols, PRBS_degree=11 and N_training_PRBS=5, the number of
symbols used for the BER evaluation is 75771-10235=65536.
symbols on addition to the training sequence.

PM-QPSK LMS Receiver Based on Training Sequence
Inputs Outputs
Optical
Parameters
Samples_per_Symbol: it is an integer number corresponding to the number
of SpS use for the simlation; min 2; max -; default 10.
PRBS_degree: degree of the four PRBS used at the transmitter; min 1;
max 28; default 11.
N_training_PRBS: number of PRBS used as training sequence. For instance,
if PRBS_degree=11 and N_training_PRBS=5 the duration of training
sequance is (2^11-1)*5
Filtering_SpS: number of samples per symbol used for the FIR filters. This
number can be 1 or 2. If Filtering_SpS=2 Samples_per_Symbol must be an
even number. min 1; max 2; default 2.
Num_taps_filter: number of taps used for FIR filters; min 1; max -;
default 11.
LMS_factor: it is the convergence factor of the LMS algorithm. It is a
positive real number smaller than 1; min >0; max 1.; Default 0.001
N_PRBS_px: PRBS identifier for px data flow
N_PRBS_qx: PRBS identifier por qx data flow
N_PRBS_py: PRBS identifier por py data flow
N_PRBS_qy: PRBS identifier por qy data flow
NOTE: the 4 PRBS must be different one to the other one, i.e.,
N_PRBS_px ≠ N_PRBS_qx ≠ N_PRBS_py ≠ N_PRBS_qy
References
[1] Monson H. Hayes Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, Wiley,
1996
[2] Simon Haykin Adaptive Filter Theory, Prentice Hall, 2002
[3] Simon S. Haykin, Bernard Widrow (Editor) Least-Mean-Square Adaptive
Filters, Wiley, 2003
[4] Bernard Widrow, Samuel D. Stearns Adaptive Signal Processing, Prentice
Hall, 1985

27.24 PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver

Training Sequence and Tracking Based
Component name: rx_pmqpsk_ts_dyn

Category: Receivers
27.24.1 Dynamic Receiver for Coherent Polarization

Multiplexed QPSK Modulation Training Sequence and
Tracking Based using LMS Algorithm
This receiver model is dynamic being capable of adjusting the equalization
coefficients repeatedly at runtime.
The signal is decomposed in data frames of length Nsym,frame (figure 1). At the
beginning of each frame a Nsym,ts number of symbols is used as training
sequence to calculate the initial equalization coefficients. During the following
decision driven phase the received symbols are considered error free and
used to adjust the equalization coefficients. The resulting scheme is capable
of following the dynamic variations of the channel.
In this model the LMS algorithm is used to both calculate the initial
equalization coefficients during the training sequence and to update their
value during the decision driven phase (figure 2).
The higher the value of the tracking mu factor, the faster the algorithm and
the larger the step considered to optimize the channel variation. On the other
hand, the smaller the value of the mu factor and the smaller the step. With
the value mu equal to zero the tracking is turned off.
The optimal mu factor depends on the system characteristics (channel,
transmitter, phase noise etc.) and it can be optimized running a parametric
scan. Typically its value falls in the range [1e-4, 1e-2].
The equalization is calculated recovering the Jones matrix of the entire
channel, including the phase mismatch with respect to the receiver local
oscillator, and applying its inverse in order to separate data flows transmitted
on orthogonal polarizations. Each element of the recovered matrix is actually
a FIR filter, therefore this component, beside recovering polarization and
phase rotations, compensates also for pattern dependent phenomena such as
residual chromatic dispersion and PMD.
After the application of the equalization, threshold decision is performed on
the 4 resulting signals and error counting is applied. Resulting estimated BER
is displayed for each data flow as well as averaged and related to the
aggregate flow.

PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver Training Sequence and Tracking Based
Received data frame

Frame Frame Frame
clock clock clock
TS TS TS
update DD update update DD update update
Nsym,TS
TS overhead Payload
Nsym,frame
Fig. 1 Received data frame structure
Dynamic receiver based on TS and DD LMS
Ntaps
taps Decision
matrix
M M
TS DD
LMS LMS
Nsym,TS µTS µDD
TS: Training Sequence
DD: Decision Driven
LMS: Least Mean Square
Fig. 2 Dynamic receiver equalization scheme based on training sequence and

decision driven


symbols on addition to the training sequence.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical
Parameters
Samples_per_Symbol: number of samples per symbol used for the
simulation; min 2; max -; default samples.
PRBS_degree: must match the transmitter four PRBS degree; min 5;
max 128; default 11.
PRBS_poly_num: must match the transmitter PRBS polynomial number;
num_sym_frame: Duration of the frame expressed as number of symbols.
If this number is equivalent to a time duration larger than the overall
simulation the frame is truncated; min 1; max totbit; default totbit/5.
num_sym_ts: number of symbols used as training sequence within every
frame; min 1; max num_sym_frame; default num_sym_frame /10.
tracking_DD: flag enabling the decision-driven post-training tracking; option
on, off; default off.
samples_per_symbol_LMS: number of samples per symbols used by the
LMS algorithm; min 1; max 2; default 1.
samples_per_symbol_filter: number of samples per symbols used to apply
the equalization implemented through FIR filters; min 1; max 2; default 1.
clock_shift: clock shift in number of samples with respect to the
automatically recovered clock; min 0; max Samples_per_Symbol-1; default
0.
num_taps_filter: number of taps used for the implementation of the FIR
filters; min 1; max -; default 15.
LMS_factor_training: LMS convergence factor used during the training
phase; min (0; max 1; default 1e-3.
LMS_factor_tracking: LMS convergence factor used during the tracking
phase; min (0; max 1; default 1e-3.
num_sym_IQ_delay: must match the transmitter delay between the PRBS
of the in-phase and quadrature signals in terms of number of symbols;
min 1; max -; default 100 .

PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver Training Sequence and Tracking Based
num_sym_XY_delay: must match the transmitter delay between the PRBS

of the x-polarized and y-polarized signals in terms of number of symbols;
min 1; max -; default 1000 .
num_frame_transient: number of frames considered transient and not
used for the BER calculation; min 0; max -; default 0 .
References
[1] Monson H. Hayes Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, Wiley,
1996
[2] Simon Haykin Adaptive Filter Theory, Prentice Hall, 2002
[3] Simon S. Haykin, Bernard Widrow (Editor) Least-Mean-Square Adaptive
Filters, Wiley, 2003
[4] Bernard Widrow, Samuel D. Stearns Adaptive Signal Processing, Prentice
Hall, 1985

27.25 MLSE Processor

Component name: mlseproc
Category: Receivers
27.25.1 Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation

Processor
The purpose of this block is to implement an efficient MLSE (Maximum-
Likelihood Sequence Estimation) processor to be used in direct-detection
optical receivers.
The MLSE processor consists of an A/D converter (with eventually a finite
number of resolution bits), whose samples are sent to a parallel bank of 2n+1
branch metric computation stages. The extracted metric is sent to a 2n state
Viterbi processor, which uses a reduced-state algorithm as in [1,2].
The metric used by the processor is the SQRT metric proposed in [2], whose
analytical expression is:
( )
K
=∑
2
M (n)
SQRT y k − µ ' n, k
k =1
µ 'n ,k
where is the mean value of the square-root of the k-th signal sample
yk for the n-th trellis branch and K is the number of samples per bit used by
the processor.
Inputs Outputs
Electrical signal (after detection and

electrical filtering)
Parameters
Starting sample (integer, range [0,Inf), default 0)
First sample of the input electrical signal considered by the algorithm.
Previous samples are discarded.
PRBS degree (integer, range [5,28], default 15)
Degree of the pseudo-random bit sequence used at the transmitter.
Polynomial number (integer, range [1,13], default 1)
Number of polynomial used to generate the PRBS.
Number of samples per bit of the input signal (integer, range [1,total
number of simulated samples], default 20)

MLSE Processor
Number of samples per bit of the input signal, like set in the simulation
parameters.
Number of samples per bit used in the MLSE processor (integer, range
[1, number of samples per bit of the input signal], default 4)
Number of samples per bit used in the MLSE processor.
Trellis memory (integer, range [1,14], default 4)
Logarithm in base 2 of the number of trellis states.
Number of resolution bits of the A/D converter (integer, range [0,Inf),
default 0)
Number of resolution bits of the A/D converter (“0” means infinite resolution).
Number of training bits (integer, range [1,(total simulated samples-
starting sample)/(number of samples per bit)], default 32767)
Number of bits used for trellis training (i.e. used for the evaluation of
the µ 'n ,k mean values used for the evaluation of the branch metrics).
Number of MLSE bits (integer, range [1,(total simulated samples-starting
sample)/(number of samples per bit)], default 32767)
Number of bits processed by the MLSE processor.
Length of decision window (integer, range [1,Inf), default 3)
Length of decision window of the Viterbi algorithm (expressed in multiples of
the trellis memory n, where 2n is the number of trellis states).
Delay offset (integer, range (-Inf,Inf), default 0)
Additional offset (in number of samples) between PRBS sequence and
electrical signal after the automatic synchronization procedure.
Output Data
Bit error rate, evaluated through direct error counting after MLSE processing.
References
[1] D.E. Crivelli, H.S. Carrer, M.R. Hueda, “On the performance of reduced-
state Viterbi receivers in IM/DD optical transmission systems,” Proc. of
ECOC 2004, paper We.4.P.083.
[2] P. Poggiolini et al.,“1,040 km Uncompensated IMDD Transmission over
G.652 Fiber at 10 Gbit/s using a Reduced-State SQRT-Metric MLSE
Receiver”, Proc. of ECOC 2006, Paper Th4.4.6.

27.26 Unbalanced MZM
Component name: ouamod

Category: Optical Modulators
27.26.1 Unbalanced Amplitude Mach-Zehnder

Modulator
This component simulates an Unbalanced Amplitude Mach-Zehnder
Modulator, which is a Dual-arm Mach-Zehnder Amplitude Modulator,
with an additional phase-shift induced by the different length between
the two arms.
The output field Eout as a function of the frequency f , the input field
Ein , the input voltage Vin , and the modulator parameters is:
r r EL
− dB  π (Vin − Von ) ( f − fT )  ⋅ e jϑ
Eout ( f ) = Ein ( f ) ⋅ 10 20 ⋅ cos +π (1)
2 Vπ BW 
with:
1
ϑ = α log(Pout ) (2)
2
where:
ELdB is the excess loss
Von is the maximum transmissivity voltage
Vπ is the voltage swing
fT is the tuning frequency
BW is the modulator bandwidth
α is the chirp factor
The output field expression can be rewritten as a function of the

wavelength λ :
r r EL
− dB  π (Vin − Von ) (λ − λT )  ⋅ e jϑ
Eout (λ ) = Ein (λ ) ⋅ 10 20 ⋅ cos +π (3)
2 Vπ n ⋅ ∆L 
where:
λT is the tuning wavelength

Unbalanced MZM
n is the refractive index of the modulator material
∆L is the intentional length difference between the two arms
The structure of the UMZM modulator is shown below:
The schematic of the UMZM device simulated by this model
The unbalanced lengths of the arms of the modulator give rise to a

phase-shift term that depends on the wavelength of the optical beam
traveling in the modulator, thus resulting in the wavelength
dependence of the output power. This wavelength dependence,
combined with the modulating voltage makes this model useful in
various applications like creating a high-speed Analog-to-Digital
converter using photonic components [3]. The parameter
Bandwidth_GHz specifies the extent of this wavelength dependence of
the output.
The parameter TuningFreq_THz, specifies the central frequency, in
THz, for the modulator corresponding to a zero shift. Accordingly, the
output power will genuinely follow the modulating input voltage only
when the input optical frequency to the modulator model equals the
TuningFreq_THz parameter specified by the user. On the other hand,
when the input optical frequency exceeds TuningFreq_THz by half the
value of Bandwidth_GHz parameter, the output power gets inverted.
The Transfer function of the UMZM model for different wavelengths is
shown below:

Figure 8.6.2 Transfer function of the UMZM model for different

wavelengths
SPT Behavior
In SPT simulations the input Power Spectrum is multiplied by the following
transfer function:
−
ELdB
−
PR dB
1  ( f − fT )  
H ( f ) = 10
2 10
⋅ 10 10
⋅ 1 + cos 2π 
2  BW  
( ELdB + PRdB )
−  ( f − fT ) 
= 10 10
⋅ cos 2  π 
 BW 
where:
PRdB is the power reduction due to the modulation
Inputs Outputs
Electrical: Electrical input signal Vin Optical: the modulated optical signal
required to modulate the input Eout at the output of the modulator
Optical signal Ein
Optical: Optical input signal Ein,
injected into the model, to be
modulated

Tuning frequency/Tuning Wavelength [THz] or [nm]: the value of the
central frequency, in THz or in nm, for the modulator corresponding to a zero

Unbalanced MZM
shift. Allowed values: min fspelo_thz or fspelo_nm; max fspehi_thz or

fspehi_nm; default fsym_thz.
Bandwidth/Delay [GHz] or [ps]: The output signal amplitude depends on
the input signal frequency with a function that has a period equal to
Bandwidth, specified in GHz or ps,. Allowed values: min 20/fintim or
0.8/bwsym_thz; max 1.25 * bwsym_thz * 1.0e3 or fintim * 1.0e3 / 20 ;
default 40GHz.
Corresponding Simulated Bandwidth [GHz]: it shows the actual
simulated value of the Bandwidth, in GHz, of the modulator adjusted to the
Corresponding Simulated Delay [ps]: it shows the actual simulated value
of the Delay, in ps, of the modulator adjusted to the current VBS bandwidth
set in the Simulation Parameters dialog window.
Maximum Transmissivity Voltage: Von [V]: the value of the electrical
input corresponding to the maximum transmission state. Ideally, this value is
0 V, but often modulators are slightly unbalanced in the absence of any
applied electric field, thus a biasing voltage must be applied to compensate
the offset. This parameter is shown in Figure 8.1. Allowed values: min -; max
-; default 5.
Vπ
π [V]: the voltage swing needed to switch between the minimum and
Chirp Factor [-]: the chirp factor as it is defined in [1]. Allowed values: min -;
max -; default 0.
performance is also different.

the external modulation. Allowed values: min 0; max 1; default 0.5.
References
San Diego, 1995

[3] Chris Sarantos and Nadir Dagli, Fellow, IEEE, “A Photonic Analog-
to-Digital Converter Based on an Unbalanced Mach-Zehnder
Quantizer”, IEEE, 2007

Delay 2 Signals
27.27 Delay 2 Signals
Component name: delay2by2

27.27.1 Delay 2 Signals

This component applies two given delays to two incoming optical signals. The
signal temporal alignment and coherency is preserved thus making the model
suitable to create interferometry.
Inputs Outputs
Optical: input signal Input1 Optical: output signal Output1

Optical: input signal Input2 Optical: output signal Output2

delay1 [ns]: the delay to be applied to the 1st input signal Input1. Allowed
values: min -fintim; max fintim; default 0.
delay2 [ns]: the delay to be applied to the 2nd input signal Input2. Allowed
values: min -fintim; max fintim; default 0.

Index
1 B
16-channel 2DPSK receiver, 202 baseband phase locked loop, 390
16-channel 2DPSK transmitter, 92 baseband rectifier clock recovery, 392
2 BeamPROP-OptSim interface, 457
2DPSK receiver, 201 beat length, 108
2DPSK transmitter, 91 BER estimator, 341
2dpsk_rx, 201 BER techniques, 193
2dpsk_tx, 91 Best Fit Laser Toolkit, 16
A bias, 57
A/D converter (absolute value + sign), 398 binary differential receiver, 460
A/D converter (two's complement), 399 binary pulse amplitude demodulator, 236
adder birefringence, 98
logical (absolute value + sign), 406 Blind Receiver for Coherent Polarization
logical (two's complement), 407 Multiplexed QPSK, 514, 522
modulo 2, 407 BPADEM, 236
all-order PMD, 309 BYADD, 407
AMPDE2, 217
C
amplifier
carrier and clock recovery subsystems
50 ohm, 243
baseband phase locked loop, 390
electrical, 243
baseband rectifier clock recovery subsystem,
optical, 148
392
semiconductor optical, 159
derivative-product clock recovery subsystem,
user-defined, 245
392
amplitude modulator, 130 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer, 369
AMPMO2, 216 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer (2
dimensions), 371
analog amplitude modulator, 216
electrical N-th power device, 366
analog mo-demodulators first order baseband phase-locked loop, 388
analog amplitude modulator, 216 frequency divider, 365
coherent amplitude demodulator, 217 I-F rectifier clock recovery, 395
electrical envelope, 222 in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (1
frequency demodulator, 219 dimension), 374
frequency modulator, 218 in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (2
phase demodulator, 221 dimensions), 376
phase modulator, 220 N-phase decision feedback loop, 382
AND, 405 N-th order Costas loop, 380
AOPMD, 309 N-th order power loop for carrier
synchronization, 379
APD photodiode, 183 optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (1
attenuator dimension), 384
optical, 304
Index
optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (2 cosine, 356

dimensions), 386 COSTA2, 380
second order baseband phase-locked loop,
389 Costas loop
zero-crossing clock recovery, 396 n-th order, 380
CCLOCK, 62 COSX, 356
change sign (absolute value + sign), 416 coupler

optical, 305
change sign (two's complement), 416
cross connector
circular shifter, 425 optical, 289
circulator custom MQW laser, 21
optical, 292
CW lorentzian laser, 12
clock generator, 60, 76
D
clock recovery
zero-crossing, 396 D/A converter (absolute value + sign), 400
clock signal voltage-controlled generator, 64 D/A converter (two's complement), 400
CLOCK2, 432 data source, 72
clock-driven two input multiplexer, 278 data sources
logical clock generator, 76
clock-driven two output demultiplexer, 279
DBMSK2, 233
CMULT, 355
DBMSK3, 232
coherent amplitude demodulator, 217
DDELAY, 429
combiner
electrical, 327 DDGD, 318
optical, 326 DECFE2, 382
compound components decision feedback loop
16-channel 2DPSK receiver, 202 n-phase, 382
16-channel 2DPSK transmitter, 92 delay
2DPSK receiver, 201 electrical, 360
2DPSK transmitter, 91
four channel NRZ standard transmitter, 89 DELAY, 360
four channel WDM optical receiver, 200 Delay 2 Signals, 529
NRZ standard transmitter, 88 delay line
optical add-drop multiplexer, 292 logical, 408
optical circulator, 292
optical cross connector, 289 demod-remod coherent tracking receiver, 238
optical demultiplexer, 294 demodulator
optical multiplexer, 296 binary pulse amplitude, 236
optical receiver, 199 coherent amplitude, 217
optical switch (realistic), 287 differential MSK, 237
WC-XGM wavelength converter, 298 differential PSK, 229
WC-XPM wavelength converter, 300 duobinary MSK, 233
CONV2, 361 frequency, 219
FSK with continuous phase, 235
converter M-QAM, 231
frequency, 361 offset-PSK parallel input, 227
integer to logical signal (absolute value + phase, 221
sign), 420 PSK, 225
integer to logical signal (two's complement),
420 DEMRE2, 238
integer to logical signal with levels (absolute demultiplexer
value + sign), 422 clock-driven two output, 279
integer to logical signal with levels (two's optical, 294
complement), 421 two output, 279
parallel to serial, 410 DER, 357
parallel to serial + line encoding, 411
derivative evaluator, 357
serial to parallel, 413
serial to parallel with line decoding, 414 derivative-product clock recovery subsystem,
WC-XGM wavelength, 298 392
WC-XPM wavelength, 300 deterministic differential group delay, 318
copy DFMSK2, 237
logical, 419
differential MSK demodulator, 237
logical (4 to -1), 417
Differential PSK demodulator, 229

Index
differential PSK modulator, 228 DPSMO2, 228

digital mo-demodulators DQPSK Precoder, 491
binary pulse amplitude demodulator, 236 DQPSK receiver, 462
demod-remod coherent tracking receiver, 238
differential MSK demodulator, 237 DQPSK Receiver - Gaussian, 448
Differential PSK demodulator, 229 DQPSK Receiver - Raised Cosine, 450
differential PSK modulator, 228 DQPSK Transmitter, 442
duobinary MSK demodulator, 233
driver, 206
duobinary MSK modulator, 232
NRZ raised cosine, 206
FSK demodulator with continuous phase, 235
NRZ rectangular, 206
FSK modulator with continuous phase, 234
POLSK, 211
M-QAM demodulator, 231
RZ raised cosine, 208
M-QAM modulator, 230
RZ rectangular, 207
offset-PSK demodulator parallel input, 227
RZ soliton, 209
offset-PSK parallel, 226
RZ supergaussian, 209
PSK coherent demodulator, 225
PSK digital modulator, 223 duobinary MSK demodulator, 233
PSK modulator with residual carrier, 224 duobinary MSK modulator, 232
digital signal processing modules E
A/D converter (absolute value + sign), 398
A/D converter (two's complement), 399 EAM, 136
AND, 405 custom, 139
change sign (absolute value + sign), 416 linear, 137
change sign (two's complement), 416 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer, 369
circular shifter, 425 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer (2
copy, 419 dimensions), 371
copy (4 to -1), 417
EDFA, 148
D/A converter (absolute value + sign), 400
fixed gain, 149
D/A converter (two's complement), 400
fixed output power, 153
exclusive-OR, 405
physical model, 154
integer to logical signal conversion (absolute
saturable gain, 150
value + sign), 420
integer to logical signal conversion (two's EJITTERS, 396
complement), 420 electrical amplifier, 243
integer to logical signal conversion with levels
electrical amplifiers
(absolute value + sign), 422
electrical gain, 242
integer to logical signal conversion with levels
(two's complement), 421 electrical base-10 logarithm, 359
logical adder (absolute value + sign), 406 electrical combiner, 327
logical adder (two's complement), 407 electrical components
logical signal multiplier (absolute value + A/D converter (absolute value + sign), 398
sign), 423 A/D converter (two's complement), 399
logical signal multiplier (two's complement), base-10 logarithm, 359
423 baseband phase locked loop, 390
multiplexer between two logical signals, 280 baseband rectifier clock recovery, 392
multiplexer two logical signals (clock), 281 constant multiplier, 355
NOT, 405 cosine, 356
OR, 405 D/A converter (absolute value + sign), 400
parallel to serial conversion, 410 D/A converter (two's complement), 400
parallel to serial conversion + line encoding, derivative-product clock recovery subsystem,
411 392
PCM decoding, 401 driver, 206
PCM encoding, 402 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer, 369
serial to parallel conversion, 413 early-late-gate symbol synchronizer (2
serial to parallel conversion with line dimensions), 371
decoding, 414 EinB power of EinA, 359
shifter, 424 electrical amplifier, 243
splitter (1-to-2), 426 electrical combiner, 327
splitter (1-to-3), 427 electrical delay line, 360
splitter (1-to-4), 428 electrical filter, 250
direct detection receiver, 459 electrical gain, 242
DPSDE2, 229 electrical jitter, 396
electrical link, 324
DPSK Transmitter (Advanced), 437
electrical playback, 81
DPSK_REC, 198 electrical recorder, 82

Index
electrical splitter, 328 electrical integer power, 358

electrical tangent, 356 electrical jitter, 396
exponential, 357
first order baseband phase-locked loop, 388 electrical link, 324
frequency converter, 361 electrical measurements tools
frequency divider, 365 BER estimator, 341
Hilbert transformer, 363 electrical power meter, 336
I-F rectifier clock recovery, 395 electrical spectrum analyzer, 347
in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (1 Q estimator, 337
dimension), 374 scope, 334
in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (2 electrical multiplier, 355
dimensions), 376
electrical natural logarithm, 360
integer power, 358
logical delay line, 408 electrical N-th power device, 366
monostable multivibrator (clock), 363 electrical playback, 81
monostable multivibrator (electrical signal),
electrical power meter, 336
364
multiplier, 355 electrical real power, 358
natural logarithm, 360 electrical recorder, 82
N-phase decision feedback loop, 382 electrical rectifier, 362
N-th order Costas loop, 380
N-th order power loop for carrier electrical scope, 334
synchronization, 379 electrical signal square, 358
N-th power device, 366 electrical sine, 356
optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (1
dimension), 384 electrical sources
optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (2 clock generator, 60
dimensions), 386 clock signal voltage-controlled generator, 64
PCM decoding, 401 gaussian-distributed noise signal generator,
PCM encoding, 402 68
phase shifter, 361 generator of DC level, 57
PolSK driver, 211 ideal clock generator, 62
POLSK receiver, 196 impulse generator, 63
real power, 358 noise random generator, 68
rectifier, 362 rayleigh-distributed noise signal generator, 69
sample & hold, 365 sawtooth wave generator, 59
sampler, 364 sinusoidal generator, 58
second order baseband phase-locked loop, square wave generator, 59
389 timing pulse generation on zero crossing, 67
signal square, 358 uniform-distributed noise signal generator, 69
sine, 356 video-like noise signal generator, 69
subtractor, 355 voltage controlled oscillator, 66
time derivative, 357 waveform generator, 57
timing interpolator, 362 electrical spectrum analyzer, 347
zero-crossing clock recovery, 396 electrical splitter, 328
electrical constant multiplier, 355 electrical subtractor, 355
electrical cosine, 356 electrical tangent, 356
electrical delay line, 360 electrical time derivative, 357
electrical EinB power of EinA, 359 electro absorption modulator, 136
electrical envelope, 222 Electronic Dispersion Compensator, 492
electrical exponential, 357 ELGSY1, 369
electrical filter, 250 ELGSY2, 371
electrical gain, 242 ELTQUA, 358
electrical generators ENVEL2, 222
clock generator, 60
envelope
gaussian-distributed noise signal generator,
electrical, 222
68
generator of DC level, 57 exclusive-OR, 405
rayleigh-distributed noise signal generator, 69 EXPEX, 357
sawtooth wave generator, 59
exponential, 357
sinusoidal generator, 58
uniform-distributed noise signal generator, 69 EXPXI, 358
video-like noise signal generator, 69 EXPXR, 358

Index
EXPXY, 359 H
F HILBER, 363
FFT OFDM, 510 Hilbert transformer, 363
fiber grating, 307 I
ideal, 307
ideal balanced 2DPSK receiver, 198
user-defined, 308
ideal clock generator, 62
fiber link, 96
ideal dual-arm Mach-Zehnder interferometer,
fibers
320
fiber link, 96
I-F rectifier clock recovery, 395
filter
Bessel, 259 IFFT OFDM, 512
butterworth, 255 IMPSY1, 374
Chebychev, 263 IMPSY2, 376
electrical, 250
matched, 267, 471 impulse generator, 63
optical, 166 in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (1
raised cosine, 269 dimension), 374
single-pole low-pass, 250 in-phase mid-phase symbol synchronizer (2
two-pole low-pass, 251 dimensions), 376
user-defined, 271
integer to logical signal conversion (absolute
filter (optical) value + sign), 420
Bessel, 170
multiple-stage Lorentzian, 166 integer to logical signal conversion (two's
raised cosine, 168 complement), 420
supergaussia, 169 integer to logical signal conversion with levels
user defined, 170 (absolute value + sign), 422
first order baseband phase-locked loop, 388 integer to logical signal conversion with levels
flip-flop D type, 408 (two's complement), 421
flip-flop T type, 409 interferometer, 320
four channel NRZ standard transmitter, 89 INTERP, 362
four channels WDM optical receiver, 200 interpolator, 362
FREDE2, 219 ISOTR2, 433
FREMO2, 218 iteration loop, 490

frequency converter, 361 J
frequency demodulator, 219 jitter, 396
frequency divider device, 365 K
frequency modulator, 218 Karhunen-Loeve BER estimation, 459
FSK demodulator with continuous phase, 235 Karhunen-Loeve technique (KLT), 463
FSK modulator with continuous phase, 234 L
FSKDE2, 235 laser
FSKGE2, 234 custom MQW laser, 21
CW lorentzian laser, 12
G rate equations laser, 13
gain LDELAY, 408
electrical, 242
linear multimode fiber model, 454
GAUSRN, 434
link
gaussian-distributed noise signal generator, 68 electrical, 324
GENDE2, 432 logical, 324
GENDEL, 63 optical, 324
generator of DC level, 57 links
electrical link, 324
grammar
logical link, 324
data source, 74
optical link, 324
EDFA, 156
fiber link, 103 logarithm base-10, 359
filter, 272 logarithm natural, 360
filter (optical), 172 LOGDX, 359
MQW laser, 31
logical adder (absolute value + sign), 406

Index
logical adder (two's complement), 407 logical signals displayer, 349

logical clock generator, 76 logical sources
logical components data source, 72
AND, 405 logical splitter, 328
change sign (absolute value + sign), 416 logical splitter (1-to-2), 426
change sign (two's complement), 416
circular shifter, 425 logical splitter (1-to-3), 427
copy, 419 logical splitter (1-to-4), 428
copy (4 to -1), 417 LOGNX, 360
data source, 72
Lorentzian Laser, 12
exclusive-OR, 405
integer to logical signal conversion (absolute M
value + sign), 420 Mach-Zehnder dual-arm modulator, 126
integer to logical signal conversion (two's
complement), 420 Mach-Zehnder single-arm (sin2), 131
integer to logical signal conversion with levels measurement components
(absolute value + sign), 422 BER estimator, 341
integer to logical signal conversion with levels electrical power meter, 336
(two's complement), 421 electrical scope, 334
logical adder (absolute value + sign), 406 electrical spectrum analyzer, 347
logical adder (two's complement), 407 logical signals displayer, 349
logical clock generator, 76 optical power meter, 331
logical flip-flop D type, 408 optical probe, 333
logical flip-flop T type, 409 optical spectrum analyzer, 332
logical link, 324 Q estimator, 337
logical playback, 83 scattering diagrams, 348
logical recorder, 85 scattering diagrams (2 inputs), 349
logical signal multiplier (absolute value + merge of two logical signals, 280
sign), 423
miscellanea
logical signal multiplier (two's complement),
all-order PMD, 309
423
clock-driven two input multiplexer, 278
logical splitter, 328
clock-driven two output demultiplexer, 279
modulo 2 adder, 407
constant multiplier, 355
NOT, 405
deterministic differential group delay, 318
OR, 405
electrical base-10 logarithm, 359
parallel to serial conversion, 410
electrical cosine, 356
parallel to serial conversion + line encoding,
electrical delay line, 360
411
electrical EinB power of EinA, 359
retiming with delay line, 429
electrical exponential, 357
serial to parallel conversion, 413
electrical integer power, 358
serial to parallel conversion with line
electrical jitter, 396
decoding, 414
electrical natural logarithm, 360
shifter, 424
electrical real power, 358
splitter (1-to-2), 426
electrical rectifier, 362
electrical signal square, 358
electrical sine, 356
logical copy, 419 electrical tangent, 356
logical copy (4 to -1), 417 electrical time derivative, 357
logical delay line, 408 frequency converter, 361
Hilbert transformer, 363
logical flip-flop D type, 408 ideal balanced 2DPSK receiver, 198
logical flip-flop T type, 409 logical delay line, 408
logical link, 324 logical retiming with delay line, 429
modulo 2 adder, 407
logical measurement monostable multivibrator (clock), 363
scattering diagrams, 348 monostable multivibrator (electrical signal),
logical playback, 83 364
logical recorder, 85 phase detector, 221
phase shifter, 361
logical retiming with delay line, 429
sample & hold, 365
logical shifter, 424 sampler, 364
logical signal multiplier (absolute value + sign), subtractor, 355
423 timing interpolator, 362
two input multiplexer, 278
logical signal multiplier (two's complement), 423
two output demultiplexer, 279

Index
MLSE Processor, 522 N

modulator noise
amplitude, 216 electrical generator, 68
differential PSK, 228 Gaussian, 68
duobinary MSK, 232 Rayleigh, 69
electro absorption, 136 uniform, 69
frequency, 218 video-like, 69
FSK with continuous phase, 234
noise random generator, 68
linear amplitude, 134
Mach-Zehnder dual-arm, 126 NOT, 405
Mach-Zehnder single-arm, 130 NPLOO2, 379
Mach-Zehnder single-arm (sin2), 131 NRZ raised cosine, 206
M-QAM, 230
offset-PSK parallel, 226 NRZ rectangular, 206
phase, 141, 220 NRZ standard transmitter, 88
polarization, 143 NRZ_TX_1ch, 88
PSK, 223
PSK with residual carrier, 224 N-th order Costas loop, 380
modulator drivers N-th order power loop for carrier

driver, 206 synchronization, 379
PolSK driver, 211 NTHDI2, 365
modulo 2 adder, 407 NTHPO2, 366
MONOST, 363 O
monostable multivibrator (clock), 363 OADM, 292
monostable multivibrator (electrical signal), 364 offset-PSK demodulator parallel input, 227
MONOSZ, 364 offset-PSK parallel, 226
MPX, 278 older version components
MPXX, 278 clock generator, 432
electrical gaussian noise generator, 434
MPY, 279 electrical impulse generator, 432
MPYY, 279 electrical square wave generator, 434
MQADE2, 231 electrical waveform generator asymmetric
sawtooth, 433
M-QAM demodulator, 231
electrical waveform generator symmetric
M-QAM Demodulator, 496 sawtooth, 433
M-QAM modulator, 230 non uniform pseudorandom source, 435
M-QAM Modulator, 494 OPSKP2, 227
MQAMO2, 230 OPSKP3, 226
MQW laser, 21 optical add-drop multiplexer, 292
mu-demultiplexer optical amplifier, 148
clock-driven two input multiplexer, 278 optical amplifiers
clock-driven two output demultiplexer, 279 optical amplifier, 148
multiplexer between two logical signals, 280 semiconductor optical amplifier, 159
multiplexer two logical signals (clock), 281
optical attenuator, 304
two output demultiplexer, 279 optical circulator, 292
multiplexer optical combiner, 326
clock-driven two input, 278 optical component
optical, 296 all-order PMD, 309
optical add-drop, 292 optical components
two input, 278 amplitude modulator, 130
two inputs, 281 deterministic differential group delay, 318
multiplexer between two logical signals, 280 electro absorption modulator, 136
multiplexer two logical signals (clock), 281 fiber grating, 307
ideal dual-arm Mach-Zehnder interferometer,
multiplier, 355
320
constant, 355
Mach-Zehnder dual-arm modulator, 126
logical signal (absolute value + sign), 423
optical amplifier, 148
logical signal (two's complement), 423
optical attenuator, 304
multivibrator optical combiner, 326
monostable (clock), 363 optical coupler, 305
monostable (electrical signal), 364 optical fiber link, 96

Index
optical filter, 166 soliton, 48

optical frequency shifter, 312 supergaussian, 50
optical phase conjugator, 313 optical receiver, 199
optical phase modulator, 141
optical playback, 78 optical receivers
optical pulse generator, 47 four channel WDM optical receiver, 200
optical recorder, 80 optical receiver, 199
optical splitter, 327 optical recorder, 80
optical white noise generator, 52 optical sources
photodiode, 182 optical pulse generator, 47
polarization modulator, 143 optical white noise generator, 52
polarization rotator, 314
optical spectrum analyzer, 332
polarization scrambler, 315
polarizer, 316 optical splitter, 327
semiconductor optical amplifier, 159 optical switch
sensitivity optical receiver, 188 ideal, 284
splice, 306 realistic, 287
optical coupler, 305 optical transmitters
optical cross connector, 289 16-channel 2DPSK transmitter, 92
2DPSK transmitter, 91
optical demultiplexer, 294
four channel NRZ standard transmitter, 89
optical fiber link, 96 NRZ standard transmitter, 88
optical filter, 166 optical white noise generator, 52
Bessel, 170
optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (1
multiple-stage Lorentzian, 166
dimension), 384
raised cosine, 168
supergaussian, 169 optimum symbol (ML) synchronizer (2
user-defined, 170 dimensions), 386
optical filters OPTSY1, 384
optical filter, 166 OPTSY2, 386
optical frequency shifter, 312 OR, 405
optical link, 324 oscillator
optical matched filter, 471 voltage controlled, 66
optical measurements tools P
optical power meter, 331 parallel to serial conversion, 410
optical spectrum analyzer, 332
probe, 333 parallel to serial conversion + line encoding, 411
optical modulators PARSEV, 410

amplitude modulator, 130 PCM decoding, 401
electro absorption modulator, 136 PCM encoding, 402
Mach-Zehnder dual-arm modulator, 126
PHADCT, 221
optical phase modulator, 141
polarization modulator, 143 PHADE2, 221
optical multiplexer, 296 PHAMO2, 220
optical network phase conjugator, 313
optical add-drop multiplexer, 292 phase demodulator, 221
optical circulator, 292
phase detector, 221
optical cross connector, 289
optical demultiplexer, 294 phase locked loop
optical multiplexer, 296 baseband, 390
optical switch (ideal), 284 phase modulator, 220
optical switch (realistic), 287 phase shifter, 361
WC-XGM wavelength converter, 298
WC-XPM wavelength converter, 300 phase-locked loop
first order baseband, 388
optical phase conjugator, 313 second order baseband, 389
optical phase modulator, 141 PHASH2, 361
optical playback, 78 photodetectors
optical power meter, 331 photodiode, 182
optical probe, 333 photodiode, 182
optical pulse generator, 47 PIN photodiode, 182
raised cosine, 49 playback

Index
electrical, 81 sinusoidal generator, 58

logical, 83 soliton, 48
optical, 78 square, 59
PLL1BB, 388 supergaussian, 50
PLL2BB, 389 Q
PLLBB, 390 Q estimator, 337
PMD Quadrature Mix, 498
all-order, 309 R
PM-QPSK LMS Dynamic Receiver Training RADC, 398
Sequence and Tracking Based, 518
RADC2, 399
PM-QPSK LMS Receiver with Training Sequence,
raised cosine pulse, 49
516
raman, 98
pol2dr, 211
Raman Amplification, 110
pol2rx, 196
Raman Cross-Talk, 110
polarization modulator, 143
RANBI2, 435
polarization rotator, 314
rate equations laser, 13
polarization scrambler, 315
rayleigh-distributed noise signal generator, 69
polarizer, 316
RCHOM4, 417
polmod, 143
RCNG, 416
PolSK driver, 211
RCNG2, 416
PolSK modulation, 211
RCOPY, 419
POLSK modulation, 196
RDAC, 400
POLSK project, 145, 203, 212
RDAC2, 400
POLSK receiver, 196
receiver
power meter
16-channel 2DPSK, 202
electrical, 336
2DPSK, 201
optical, 331
four channels WDM, 200
power n-th ideal balanced 2DPSK, 198
frequency, 366 optical, 199
power of 2, 358 POLSK, 196
power of a real, 358 sensitivity (optical), 188
power of an integer, 358 receivers

16-channel 2DPSK receiver, 202
power of two signals, 359 2DPSK receiver, 201
predefined EDFA, 489 ideal balanced 2DPSK receiver, 198
predefined rate equation lasers, 487 POLSK receiver, 196
sensitivity optical receiver, 188
predefined SOA, 489
recorder
predefined VCSEL models, 485 electrical, 82
probe, 333 logical, 85
probe (logical), 349 optical, 80
probe (optical), 333 recorder&playback
electrical playback, 81
PSCLE2, 411
electrical recorder, 82
PSK coherent demodulator, 225 logical playback, 83
PSK modulator with residual carrier, 224 logical recorder, 85
optical playback, 78
PSKDE2, 225
optical recorder, 80
PSKMO2, 223
RECTIF, 362
PSKRC2, 224
rectifier
pulse generator electrical, 362
(timing) on zero crossing, 67
rectifier clock recovery
bias, 57
baseband, 392
clock, 60
I-F, 395
electrical, 57
optical, 47 retiming
raised cosine, 49 logical with delay line, 429
sawtooth, 59 rf mo-demodulators

Index
analog amplitude modulator, 216 sawtooth wave generator, 59

binary pulse amplitude demodulator, 236 SCATD3, 349
coherent amplitude demodulator, 217
demod-remod coherent tracking receiver, 238 scattering diagrams, 348
differential MSK demodulator, 237 scattering diagrams (2 inputs), 349
Differential PSK demodulator, 229 scope, 334
differential PSK modulator, 228
scope (electrical), 334
duobinary MSK demodulator, 233
duobinary MSK modulator, 232 scrambler, 315
electrical envelope, 222 second order baseband phase-locked loop, 389
frequency demodulator, 219
semi-analytical technique, 462
frequency modulator, 218
FSK demodulator with continuous phase, 235 semiconductor optical amplifier, 159
FSK modulator with continuous phase, 234 sensitivity optical receiver, 188
M-QAM demodulator, 231 SEPAR, 413
M-QAM modulator, 230
offset-PSK demodulator parallel input, 227 serial to parallel conversion, 413
offset-PSK parallel, 226 serial to parallel conversion with line decoding,
phase demodulator, 221 414
phase detector, 221 shifter
phase modulator, 220 circular, 425
PSK coherent demodulator, 225 frequency, 312
PSK digital modulator, 223 logical, 424
PSK modulator with residual carrier, 224 phase, 361
RIRC, 420 SHOLD, 365
RIRC2, 420 sign changer
RIRC2X, 421 absolute value + sign, 416
RIRCX, 422 two's complement, 416
RMUL, 423 signal generators
clock signal voltage-controlled generator, 64
RMUL2, 423 ideal clock generator, 62
RMUX1, 280 impulse generator, 63
RMUXC, 281 square wave generator, 59
timing pulse generation on zero crossing, 67
RPCMDE, 401
voltage controlled oscillator, 66
RPCMEN, 402
sine, 356
RSHF, 424
Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid including Local
RSHFC, 425 Oscillator with 4+4 Outputs, 503
RSPLI2, 426 Single Ended 90-Degree Hybrid with Local
RSPLI3, 427 Oscillator Input and 4+4 Outputs, 508
RSPLI4, 428 Single-Ended 90-degree Hybrid including Local
Oscillator, 500
RSUM, 406
Single-Ended 90-degree Hybrid with Local
RSUM2, 407
Oscillator Input, 506
RXOR, 405
sinusoidal generator, 58
RZ raised cosine, 208
sinusoidal wave, 58
RZ rectangular, 207
SINX, 356
RZ soliton, 209
SOA, 159
RZ supergaussian, 209
soliton pulse, 48
RZ-DPSK Transmitter (Advanced), 439
SPCON2, 414
RZ-DQPSK Transmitter, 445
spectrum analyzer
S electrical, 347
SAMPLE, 364 optical, 332
sample & hold, 365 SPICE interface, 474
sampler, 364 splice, 306
saturable electrical amplifier, 488 split & combine
electrical combiner, 327
saturable PIN photodiode, 488
electrical splitter, 328
SAWTO2, 433 logical splitter, 328
sawtooth wave, 59 optical combiner, 326

Index
optical splitter, 327 TANX, 356

splitter TFLIPFLOP, 409
electrical, 328 TIMGEN, 64
logical, 328
logical (1-to-2), 426 timing interpolator, 362
logical (1-to-3), 427 timing pulse generation on zero crossing, 67
logical (1-to-4), 428 Trans-Impedance Amplifier (TIA), 493
optical, 327
transmitter
square wave, 59 16-channel 2DPSK, 92
square wave generator, 59 2DPSK, 91
SQWAV2, 434 four channel NRZ, 89
NRZ standard, 88
Stimulated Brillouin Scattering, 118
Stimulated Raman Scattering (SRS), 110
two output demultiplexer, 279
SUB, 355
U
subtractor, 355
Unbalanced Amplitude Mach-Zehnder Modulator,
supergaussian pulse, 50
524
switch
uniform-distributed noise signal generator, 69
optical ideal, 284
optical realistic, 287 V
SYNCD2, 392 VCO, 66
synchronization VCSEL, 35
N-th order power loop for carrier, 379 video-like noise signal generator, 69
synchronizer voltage controlled oscillator, 66
early-late-gate symbol, 369
early-late-gate symbol (2 dimensions), 371
W
in-phase mid-phase symbol (1 dimension), waveform generator, 57
374 WC-XGM wavelength converter, 298
in-phase mid-phase symbol (2 dimensions),
WC-XPM wavelength converter, 300
376
optimum symbol (ML, 1 dimension), 384 WDM_16ch_rx_2dpsk, 202
optimum symbol (ML, 2 dimensions), 386 WDM_16ch_tx_2dpsk, 92
SYNCR1, 392 WDM_TX_4ch, 89
SYNCR2, 395 white noise generator, 52
SYNCZ1, 396 Z
T ZCGEN, 67
tangent, 356 zero-crossing clock recovery, 396

OptSim Models Reference Volume I Sample PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptSim Models Reference Volume I Sample PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptSim

Volume I Sample Mode

RSoft Design Group, Inc.

Physical Layer Division

2 Optical Sources ..................................................................................................... 9

4 Logical Sources ................................................................................................... 71

6 Optical Transmitters ........................................................................................... 87

8 Optical Modulators ............................................................................................ 125

9 Optical Amplifiers.............................................................................................. 147

10 Optical Filters .......................................................................................... 165

ii • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

10.1.5 User-defined Optical Filter .................................................................................. 170

11 Photodetectors .......................................................................................... 181

12 Receivers .......................................................................................... 187

13 Modulator Drivers .......................................................................................... 205

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • iii

14.24 Demod-Remod Coherent Tracking Receiver.................................................................. 238

15 Electrical Amplifiers ......................................................................................... 241

16 Electrical Filters .......................................................................................... 249

17 Mux / Demux .......................................................................................... 277

18 Optical Network Components ........................................................................... 283

19 Optical Components ......................................................................................... 303

iv • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

20 Links .......................................................................................... 323

21 Split&Combine .......................................................................................... 325

22 Measurement Components ............................................................................... 329

23 Electrical Components...................................................................................... 351

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • v

23.26 Electrical N-th Power................................................................................................. 366

24 Logical Components ......................................................................................... 403

vi • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

24.21 Logical Signal Multiplier (Two's Complement) ............................................................... 423

25 Older Version Components ............................................................................... 431

26 Compound Components ................................................................................... 436

27 Additional Components .................................................................................... 452

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • vii

27.13 M-QAM Modulator ..................................................................................................... 494

viii • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

2 • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

1.1 How to Utilize the Components

Figure 1.1 Example of parameters dialog window

3. Fill in all the values to complete the description of the component.

To insert a LIB component in a design

Figure 1.2 The Library Block Selection dialog window

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • 3

Figure 1.3 Example of LIB component parameters dialog window

4. Select the parameter to be modified by clicking on the corresponding

4 • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

1.2 Multi Input-Output Components

1.3 Logical Signal Levels

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • 5

1.4 Center Frequency Requirements

Figure 1.4 Electrical signal representation

6 • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

1.5 Time Domain Samples

 Time[ps ] ⋅ BWVBS [THz ] 

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • 7

1.6 Electric Clock Signal Information

8 • OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode RSoft Design Group

Four Laser models are available:

Three Pulse Source models are available:

RSoft Design Group OptSim Models Reference: Sample Mode • 9

White Noise Generator, simulates an optical white noise generator.